PROJECT MANUAL INDIAN CREEK WWTP RELIABILITY AND ...

PROJECT MANUAL

VOL. II OF III

INDIAN CREEK WWTP

RELIABILITY AND SERVICE UPGRADES PROJECT

I.D. NO. 10210010 SANITARY SEWER NO. 6240

METROPOLITAN SEWER DISTRICT OF GREATER CINCINNATI

CINCINNATI, OHIO

SEPTEMBER 2013

THE METROPOLITAN SEWER DISTRICT OF GREATER CINCINNATI

Indian Creek WWTP Reliability and Service Upgrades

Project No. 10210010

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Number Description Number

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 Summary of Project ............................................... 01 11 00-1 01 12 16 Construction Sequence ......................................... 01 12 16-1 01 14 00 Control of Work ..................................................... 01 14 00-1 01 20 00 Measurement and Payment .................................. 01 20 00-1 01 25 00 Substitutions ......................................................... 01 25 00-1 01 26 00 Contract Considerations ........................................ 01 26 00-1 01 31 19 Project Meetings ................................................... 01 31 19-1 01 31 21 Site Safety Plan..................................................... 01 31 21-1 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule ........................... 01 32 16-1 01 33 00 Submittals ............................................................. 01 33 00-1 01 33 19 Reference Forms .................................................. 01 33 19-1 01 33 23 Installation and Erection Data ............................... 01 33 23-1 01 35 00 Special Provisions ................................................. 01 35 00-1 01 42 19 Applicable Codes .................................................. 01 42 19-1 01 45 16 Contractor Quality Control ..................................... 01 45 16-1 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services ................................. 01 45 29-1 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities .............................................. 01 50 00-1 01 51 43 Temporary Bypass Pumping ................................. 01 51 43-1 01 60 00 Delivery, Storage and Handling............................. 01 60 00-1 01 66 00 Material and Equipment ........................................ 01 66 00-1 01 71 23 Field Engineering .................................................. 01 71 23-1 01 71 33 Restoration of Improvements ................................ 01 71 33-1 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching ............................................. 01 73 29-1 01 74 00 Cleaning ................................................................ 01 74 00-1 01 75 00 Commissioning Requirements and Sequence ...... 01 75 00-1 01 75 01 Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing ................ 01 75 01-1 01 75 02 Equipment Startup and Checkout ......................... 01 75 02-1 01 75 03 System Functional Testing .................................... 01 75 03-1 01 75 04 Process Performance Testing ............................... 01 75 04-1 01 75 05 Operational Testing ............................................... 01 75 05-1 01 75 06 30-Day Commissioning Reliability Test ................. 01 75 06-1 01 77 00 Contract Closeout ................................................. 01 77 00-1 01 77 19 Substantial Completion ......................................... 01 77 19-1






01 78 23 Equipment Operating and Maintenance Manual Information .......................................................... 01 78 23-1 01 78 36 Manufacturer’s Product Warranties ....................... 01 78 36-1 01 78 39 Record Documents ............................................... 01 78 39-1 01 78 43 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials ............... 01 78 43-1 01 79 00 Training ................................................................. 01 79 00-1 DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 30 00 Subsurface Conditions .......................................... 02 30 00-1 02 41 00 Salvaged Equipment Turnover Form ....... Form No. 02 41 00 02 41 01 Demolition of Existing Facilities ............................. 02 41 01-1 02 41 13 Salvage ................................................................. 02 41 13-1 02 41 19.23 Electrical Demolition ......................................... 02 41 19.23-1 02 42 00 Removal of Existing Equipment and Piping .......... 02 42 00-1 02 42 01 Removal of Existing Concrete ............................... 02 42 01-1 DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 00 00 Concrete Work ...................................................... 03 00 00-1 03 01 30.71 Rehabilitation of Cast-In-Place Concrete ......... 03 01 30.71-1 03 15 00 Concrete Accessories ........................................... 03 15 00-1 03 15 19 Concrete Anchoring Systems ................................ 03 15 19-1 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement ....................................... 03 20 00-1 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete ......................................... 03 30 00-1 03 31 00 Concrete Formwork ............................................... 03 31 00-1 03 40 00 Precast Concrete .................................................. 03 40 00-1 DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metals ............................................ 05 50 00-1 05 52 13.10 Welded Aluminum Handrails ............................ 05 52 13.10-1 05 59 00 Aluminum Weir Plates ........................................... 05 59 00-1 DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 17 53 Fire-Retardant Treatment For Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses ...................................................... 06 17 53-1






06 75 13 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Fabrications......................................................... 06 75 13-1 DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation ................................................. 07 21 00-1 07 41 13.23 Insulated Metal Roof Panels ............................ 07 41 13.23-1 07 42 13.19 Insulated Metal Wall Panels ............................. 07 42 13.19-1 07 42 13.53 Metal Soffit Panels ........................................... 07 42 13.53-1 07 71 00 Roof Specialties .................................................... 07 71 00-1 07 90 00 Sealants ................................................................ 07 90 00-1 DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 11 16 Aluminum Flush Doors and Frames ...................... 08 11 16-1 08 12 16 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (RFP) Door and Aluminum Frames ........................................ 08 12 16-1 08 31 13 Floor Doors ........................................................... 08 31 13-1 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors ........................................ 08 33 23-1 08 39 19 Watertight Doors ................................................... 08 39 19-1 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows ............................................... 08 51 13-1 08 71 00 Door Hardware ...................................................... 08 71 00-1 08 80 00 Glazing .................................................................. 08 80 00-1 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 29 00 Gypsum Wallboard ................................................ 09 29 00-1 09 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceilings ......................................... 09 51 23-1 09 65 16 Resilient Sheet Flooring ........................................ 09 65 16-1 09 91 00 Protective Coatings ............................................... 09 91 00-1 09 91 00-1 Painting Schedule ............................................. 09 91 00-1-1 09 91 00-2 Painting Systems List ........................................ 09 91 00-2-1 09 91 00-3 Piping Colors ..................................................... 09 91 00-3-1 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 Signage ................................................................. 10 14 00-1 10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories .................................. 10 28 00-1






10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers ................................................. 10 44 16-1 DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 32 16 Manufactured Plastic-Laminate-Faced Casework ............................................................ 12 32 16-1 12 36 23.13 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops .................. 12 36 23.13-1 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 00 00 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods ............. 22 00 00-1 22 05 29 Pipe Hangers and Supports .................................. 22 05 29-1 22 05 53 Mechanical Identification ....................................... 22 05 53-1 22 07 00 Mechanical Insulation ............................................ 22 07 00-1 22 08 00 Testing of Piping Systems ..................................... 22 08 00-1 22 11 00 Water Supply System ............................................ 22 11 00-1 22 13 00 Sanitary Drainage System .................................... 22 13 00-1 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment ............................................. 22 30 00-1 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures ................................................. 22 40 00-1 DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing .......................... 23 05 93-1 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping and Pipe Specialties ................ 23 23 00-1 23 31 13 Ductwork ............................................................... 23 31 13-1 23 34 00 Fans ...................................................................... 23 34 00-1 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets ............................................. 23 37 00-1 23 81 26.19 Split System Air Conditioning Unit.................... 23 81 26.19-1 23 82 39.23B Electric Heaters ..................................................... 23 82 39-1 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 00 13B Electrical Power and Systems ............................... 26 00 13-1 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ................. 26 05 00-1 26 05 04 Classified Locations .............................................. 26 05 04-1 26 05 73 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study and Arc Flash Hazard Analysis ................. 26 05 73-1 26 05 86B Motors ................................................................... 26 05 86-1






26 08 13S Testing .................................................................. 26 08 13-1 26 24 16B Panelboards .......................................................... 26 24 16-1 26 24 19B Low Voltage Motor Control Centers ...................... 26 24 19-1 26 27 16B Cabinets and Enclosures ...................................... 26 27 16-1 26 27 26B Wiring Devices ...................................................... 26 27 26-1 26 29 23.13B Variable Speed Drives ..................................... 26 29 23.13-1 26 44 01 Self-Regulating Heat Tracing ................................ 26 44 01-1 26 50 00B Lighting Fixtures .................................................... 26 50 00-1 26 52 00B Emergency Lighting Equipment ............................ 26 52 00-1 DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing .......................................... 31 11 00-1 31 23 00 Trenching and Backfill ........................................... 31 23 00-1 31 23 19 Dewatering ............................................................ 31 23 19-1 31 25 00 Erosion and Sedimentation Control ....................... 31 25 00-1 DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 10 01 Removing and Replacing Pavement ..................... 32 10 01-1 DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 05 11 Site Piping ............................................................. 33 05 11-1 33 39 00 Sewer Manholes ................................................... 33 39 00-1 DIVISION 35 – WATERWAY AND MARINE 35 20 16 Hydraulic Gates ..................................................... 35 20 16-1 DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION 40 01 20.59 Piping and Equipment Cleaning and Testing ... 40 01 20.59-1 40 05 13 Stainless Steel Piping ........................................... 40 05 13-1 40 05 13.53 Ductile Iron Pipe …………………... .................. 40 05 13.53-1 40 05 13.73 Plastic Pipe ...................................................... 40 05 13.73-1 40 05 23 Valves ................................................................... 40 05 23-1 40 90 00 Process Controls – General Provisions ................. 40 90 00-1 40 91 00P Instrumentation Devices ..................................... 40 91 00P-1 40 92 43 Motorized Actuators .............................................. 40 92 43-1






40 94 43 Programmable Logic Process Controllers ............. 40 94 43-1 40 95 13 Control Panels....................................................... 40 95 13-1 40 95 73 Instrument Signal and Power Wiring ..................... 40 95 73-1 DIVISION 43 – PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT 43 21 14 Recessed Impeller Pumps .................................... 43 21 14-1 43 21 39.19P Submersible Grinder Sample Pumps ............ 43 21 39.19P-1 43 21 40 Submersible Pumps .............................................. 43 21 40-1 DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 21 00 Mechanical Screen and Compactor ...................... 46 21 00-1 46 23 00 Grit Removal Equipment ....................................... 46 23 00-1 46 33 00 Liquid Deicer Feed System ................................... 46 33 00-1 46 41 23 Submersible Mixers ......................................... …..46 41 23-1 46 43 21.19 Circular Clarifier ............................................... 46 43 21.19-1 46 51 21.13 Coarse Bubble Aeration Systems .................... 46 51 21.13-1 46 51 46 Membrane Diffused Aeration System .............. …..46 51 46-1 46 71 80 Floating Decanter Equipment .......................... …..46 71 80-1

SUMMARY OF PROJECT 01 11 00-1 OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF PROJECT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Project—Work covered by all Contract Documents

B. Part 1 – General Construction

C. Contract Milestones and other General Provisions

D. Where the words “HVAC CONTRACTOR”, “PLUMBING CONTRACTOR”, or

“ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR” appear in the Specifications, they shall all have the meaning

“GENERAL CONTRACTOR”.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

NOT USED

1.03 PROJECT – WORK COVERED BY ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Work of the Project includes construction of a new addition to the grit removal structure, new

operations building and improvements to several existing unit processes. The Work shall be

performed for the CITY in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Work includes, but is

not limited to, demolition, removal, replacement, installation of new equipment and/or

modifications to existing equipment in the following areas and unit processes:

1. Influent Pump Station—Replace pump No. 1 with two pumps with VFDs and discharge

piping (300 gpm each); add motor actuators to and modify existing sluice gate components;

enlarge pump access opening and install floor door.

2. Influent Screen Building—Demolish existing building enclosure, dumpster shed, and

screenings compactor; construct building addition and weatherproof enclosure; heat and

ventilate interior space; building addition includes the screenings and grit dumpster area with

roll-up door, and the grit classifier area; replace stop plates with motor-actuated slide gates;

install second mechanical screen in existing channel; refurbish existing screen; install

screenings washer compactor; add motor actuated valve on return activated sludge line; heat

trace and insulate non-potable waterline and various process piping.

3. Grit Removal Building—Demolish dumpster shed and scum collection station; replace stop

plates with manual crank-operated slide gates; replace grit slurry pump with flooded-suction

pump and suction and discharge piping; replace grit screen with mechanical grit classifier;

relocate and replace influent sampling pump; add motor actuators to aeration basin influent

telescoping valves; clean grit basin and inlet channel and install channel bottom fillets; in

lower level pump room construct a reinforced floor, sump pump station, water tight door,

lighting, heating, and ventialtion.

4. Aeration Basin No. 1—Add liquid deicer drip system to rotating bridge with electrical

connection; replace tank drain valve with motor actuated valve and new vault; add elevated

walkway; drain and clean tank; add floor grout and slope to drain; raise, sand blast, and paint


aeration panel support frames; and add instrumentation.

5. Aeration Basin No. 2—Convert unit process to plug-flow zoned aeration system; drain and

clean tank; demolish exising aeration equipment; demolish and replace portion of tank floor;

construct concrete baffle walls and channels; fine bubble diffused aeration system and piping;

influent channel with motor actuated slide weir gates; inter-zone channel; channel coarse

bubble aeration; return activated sludge feed pipe and motor actuated control valve; influent

pipe jet-cleaning and reroute to influent channel; instrumentation; and appurtenances.

6. Clarifier Nos 1 and 2—Demolish scrapper mechanisms and replace with center-column

scraper mechanisms and controls.

7. Clarifier Splitter Box—Demolish fixed weir plates and replace with flow proportional weir

plates; add motor actuators to existing sluice gates.

8. Post Aeration Tanks—Replace stop plates with hand-operated slide gates and provide

personnel access to gate operators; clean tanks, channels and inlet piping; cover tanks and

channels with solid plank grating.

9. Aerobic Digester Nos 1 and 2—Install submersible sludge pump in Digester No. 1 with

discharge line and valve vault; add floating decanters; install instrumentation; add elevated

platform to Digester No 1.

10. Drain Pump Station—Demolish pumps and discharge piping and replace pumps, piping and

valves; relocate force main discharge point to downstream of influent pumping station

including heat tracing and insulation.

11. Operations Building—Construct new free-standing elevated structure on grass area between

aeration basins.

12. Effluent Flow Meter Vault—Demolish a section of 30-inch pipe and construct an effluent

flow meter vault including two magnetic flow meters, sluice gates, piping, and appurtenances.

13. Construct associated site, electrical, mechanical, architectural, structural, instrumentation, and

system programming elements and appurtenances.

1.04 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION – BIDDING PART 1

A. The work to be performed under Bidding Part 1 of this section shall include all necessary

demolition, the furnishing of all materials, equipment and tools; and performing all necessary

labor and supervision, for the complete construction of the project and all other work appurtenant

thereto.

B. Test borings that were drilled for this project have been indicated on the plans.

C. General Description of Work Refer to 1.03A of this Section

1.05 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS/GENERAL

A. To the extent the technical specifications in the Contract Documents reference the State of Ohio,

Department of Transportation, Construction and Material Specifications (the "ODOT

Specifications"), the Work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the

applicable ODOT Specifications, unless the applicable ODOT Specifications are modified by the


City of Cincinnati, Supplement to the State of Ohio, Department of Transportation, Construction

and Material Specifications (the "City Supplement"). If the ODOT Specifications are modified by

the City Supplement, the Work shall be performed in accordance with the City Supplement.

Finally, to the extent that either the ODOT Specifications or the City Supplement is inconsistent

with the Contract Documents, the Work shall be performed in accordance with the Contract

Documents.

1.06 SEQUENCE OF WORK

A. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule the Work to conform to the general construction sequencing

requirements described in Section 01 12 16.

1.07 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF SITE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall locate field offices, store materials and equipment and confine his

construction activities to areas so indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the CITY.

1.08 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURE

A. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility during the construction of the Project to work

equipment around poles, trees, or other obstructions which permit the passage of the bucket and

boom but prevent passage of other portions of the equipment and, if necessary, to excavate from

both sides of the poles, trees, or other obstruction, and to remove materials by hand labor,

tunneling, or by other means, all at the CONTRACTOR’s own expense.

1.09 REQUESTS FOR SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION

A. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to make timely requests of the CITY for any

additional information not already in the CONTRACTOR’s possession and which should be

furnished by the CITY under the terms of the Contract Documents, and which will be required in

the planning and execution of the work. Such requests may be submitted from time to time as the

need approaches, but each shall be filed in ample time to permit appropriate action to be taken by

all parties involved so as to avoid delay.

B. Each request shall be in writing, and list the various items and the latest day by which each will be

required by the CONTRACTOR. The first list shall be submitted within two (2) weeks after

contract award and shall be as complete as possible at that time. The CONTRACTOR shall, if

required, furnish promptly any assistance and information the CITY may require in responding to

these requests of the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for any

delay in work, or to the work of others, arising from failure to comply with the provisions of this

section.

1.10 PERMITS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to obtain and incur the cost of all required permits

unless otherwise noted, including but not limited to Mechanical, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical,

Elevator and any permit required for local governments. The CITY has obtained the following

permits:

1. Ohio Enviormental Protection Agency Permit to Install

2. Hamilton County, Ohio Department of Building Inspections Permit (CONTRACTOR will be


required to obtain Electrical, Mechanical, and Plumbing Permits)

B. Although the CITY may obtain and incur the cost of a permit, the CONTRACTOR shall comply

with provisions of all permits and make any necessary submittals as detailed in Section 01 14 00.

C. All CONTRACTORS and Subcontractors of any tier, shall comply with all applicable standards,

orders, regulations and permits, including but not limited to the Clean Water Act of 1970 (42

U.S.C. 1857, et seq.), the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (33 U.S.C. 1251, et seq.) as

amended, Permits to Install, and NPDES 401 and 404 Permit requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION 01 11 00

CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE 01 12 16-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 12 16

CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Site Conditions.

B. Construction Constraints.

C. Suggested Construction Sequence.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Construction Progress Schedule, Section 01 32 16.

B. Submittals, Section 01 33 00.

C. Temporary Facilities, Section 01 50 00.

D. Delivery, Storage and Handling, Section 01 60 00.

E. Equipment Startup and Checkout, Section 01 75 02.

F. Commissioning Requirements and Sequence, Section 01 75 00.

G. Process Performance Testing, Section 01 75 04.

1.03 SITE CONDITIONS

A. At the discretion of the CITY, the CITY will videotape the construction limits along the

proposed alignment or work areas as detailed on the plans, within the Right-of-Way or

easements, as well as potentially impacted properties adjacent to the work zone. The

videotape will document pre-construction (existing) and/or post construction conditions. The

CONTRACTOR shall make himself available at the project site during the videotaping, when

requested by the CITY.

B. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Plant Operating Personnel, as designated by the

CITY, to accomplish a logical order to maintain the process flow through the plant and to

allow construction to be completed within the time allowed by Contract Documents.

Coordinate the activities with the other contractors, if any, to allow orderly and timely

completion of all the Work.

C. When access through construction areas must be disrupted, CONTRACTOR shall provide

alternate acceptable access for the plant operators or other contractors.

D. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all activities in the interface or common areas with other

contractors and the plant operators. Submit to the CITY a description and schedule as to how

the common areas will be utilized, recognizing the required coordination with other

contractors and the plant operators.

E. Various interconnections within the plant will depend on the closure of various valves and

gates. Many of these valves and gates are old and may not seal properly. CONTRACTOR

shall coordinate with the plant operation personnel prior to attempting any such closure

provide any corrective measure of temporary facilities necessary to attain the shut-off needed

to perform the work at no additional cost to the CITY and without interrupting the plant


operation.

F. Various interconnections within the plant may require temporary partial power shutdown.

Make every effort necessary to minimize the shutdown time and coordinate with the plant

operating personnel and/or utility authorities prior to attempting any such power shutdown.

Furthermore, provide any corrective measure or temporary facilities necessary to perform the

work at no additional cost to the CITY and without interrupting the plant operation.

G. When the Work requires an existing facility to be taken out of operation, temporarily or

permanently, notify the CITY in writing and plant operators at least one (1) week in advance.

H. The CONTRACTOR may be allowed to use, if available, non-potable plant water after

express approval from the CITY at no charge. The CITY reserves the right to restrict access

or charge for plant water service if CONTRACTOR abuses his right of use, including water

wastage or excessive use.

I. During Start-Up Testing, make available the manpower, equipment and manufacturer's

representatives required to make any necessary adjustments and training.

1.04 CONSTRUCTION CONSTRAINTS

A. To the extent possible, it will be up to the General CONTRACTOR to determine the means,

methods, and sequencing to be used during construction. The project documents will detail

any constraints that apply. CONTRACTOR shall follow the general guidelines below for

continued service of the WWTP:

1. Construct the improvements off-line and put them into service once they are completed.

2. Interrupt flow into or through the plant briefly and perform construction while the flow is

interrupted. Typically, an interruption in flow would be planned for a low-flow period,

such as during the night or in the early morning hours.

3. Construct bulkheads within the flow stream to isolate the construction area from the flow

that has to be maintained.

4. Divert the flow into basins that are out of service. While the basin is being filled,

construction work can occur on downstream process units.

5. Provide temporary by-pass pumping to convey the flow around the part of the plant under

construction. Typically, by-pass pumping entails using portable pumps and hoses or

temporary piping laid at grade. Normally, by-pass pumping is used when the construction

work will take too long to be accomplished by one of the other four methods of

continuing service.

B. The following is a list of constraints to consider in developing the overall plan of

construction. This list is not intended to release the CONTRACTOR from the responsibility

to coordinate the Work in any manner which will ensure Project completion within the time

allowed.

1. Offsite Storage: The Indian Creek WWTP is in the flood plain and hence prone to

flooding risks. The CONTRACTOR shall store equipment off-site prior to a flooding

event. CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing lay-down and storage areas outside

the flood zone.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully plan construction activities during wet weather

months (and high river stage months) to minimize flooding risks to personnel and

equipment. CONTRACTOR shall co-ordinate all construction activities with CITY to

ensure plant operations are not adversely affected.


3. Temporary By-pass pumping: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all by-pass pumping

work and related schedule with CITY and receive prior approval.

4. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the CITY de-energizing equipment for any

work. In some cases, de-energized work may not be feasible due to equipment design or

operational limitations.

5. The following is a possible general plan for continuing service while installing the

proposed improvements. This is provided as a suggestion only. Construction sequencing

and mean/methods will be determined by the CONTRACTOR.

Proposed Plant Operations During Construction


Structure Improvement Anticipated Plant Operations during Construction

Influent Pump

Station

Replace Pump No. 1 with two

smaller pumps

Isolate wet-well for small pump by closing existing sluice

gates then proceed with demolition and making

improvements.

Pump Nos. 2, 3, and 4 will be pumping influent flow

while the wet-well for the small pump is off-line.

Add motor operators to sluice gates Construct while normal operation continues.

Add control sequencing between

Cleves flow and influent pumps Construct while normal operation continues.

Influent

Screening

Structure

Remove building walls and install a

larger building that encloses the

screens, grit classifier, and dumpster

Construct while normal operation continues.

Install temporary screenings chute to a temporary

dumpster location during building foundation and lower

floor construction.

Replace gates with motor-operated

gates

Install temporary bulkheads with brief flow interruptions

for diverting flow from existing mechanical screen and

manual bar screen while installing new gates.

Divert flow through manual screen while replacing gates

for existing mechanical screen.

Install second mechanical screen Construct while normal operation continues.

Remove existing screenings

compactor and install new

compactor to service existing and

new screens

Divert flow through manual screen while swapping out

compactor. Install temporary screenings chute to a

temporary dumpster location during building foundation

and lower floor construction.

Grit Removal

Structure

Replace slide plates with hand-

operated gates

Install temporary bulkheads with brief flow interruptions

for diverting flow while installing new gates.

Take grit chamber off-line while replacing influent and

effluent gates.

Replace grit slurry pump with

flooded-suction pump Divert flow around grit tank. Dewater grit tank. Construct

while normal operation continues.

Coordinate with installation of grit classifier. Install concrete fillets in inlet

channel

Remove grit screen Coordinate with installation of grit slurry pump and grit

classifier.

Heat and mechanically ventilate grit

pump room Construct while normal operation continues.

Replace influent sample pump Coordinate with relocation of influent sampler to new

operations building and new sample line.

Add motor operators to telescoping

valves to aeration basins Construct while normal operation continues.



Aeration Basins

Add Select Liquid Deicer drip

system to Aeration Basin No. 1

Occasional brief interruptions of aeration bridge rotation

during installation.

Drain basin, clean out deposits,

power wash

Take Aeration Basin No. 1 off-line.

Replace drain valve on Aeration

Basin No. 1

Refurbish Schreiber equipment in

Aeration Basin No. 1, including

raising diffusers, and painting

supports

Install grout in bottom of Aeration

Basin No. 1, sloped to drain

Convert Aeration Basin No. 2 to

plug flow.

Drain basin, clean out deposits,

power wash.

Aeration Basin No. 2 will be off-line for several months

and all flow will be treated in Aeration Basin No. 1.

Refurbish Schreiber equipment in Aeration Basin No. 1

before diverting all flow to it.

All three clarifiers should be available for use. Operator

may waste excess sludge in advance of and during wet

weather events to reduce clarifier loading. Waste sludge

will be returned to aeration basin by new drain pipe to be

installed in Control Building Gravity Belt thickening

Room.

Add valves with motor operators to

RAS discharge piping Brief RAS flow interruption.

Clarifier Splitter

Box

Replace fixed weir plates

Drain an aeration basin in advance then divert flow into

drained aeration basin to store flow while existing weir

plates are removed and replaced with new. An

approximate working window of about 17 hours may be

achieved based on a plant flow of 1MGD and an Aeration

Basin holding volume of 0.73 MGal. A gap of about 24

hours is required during dry weather low flow to empty

the tank and treat the flow so the flow diversion cycle can

again be restarted.

Add motor operators to sluice gates Construct while normal operation continues.

Clarifiers

Replace Schreiber clarifier scraper

mechanisms on Clarifier Nos. 1 and

2 with center-column mechanisms.

Remove one clarifier from service at a time for

modifications. Work to be performed during low flow dry

weather period.



Effluent Meter

Vault

Install effluent meter vault with new

meters

Construct precast concrete structure off-site. Drain an

aeration basin in advance then divert flow to drained

aeration basin to store flow or by-pass pump while

removing section of existing pipe and installing new

meter structure (may require multiple times). An


achieved by storage based on a plant flow of 1MGD and

an aeration basin holding volume of 0.73 MGal. A gap of

about 24 hours is required during dry weather low flow to

empty the tank and treat the flow so the flow diversion

cycle can again be restarted.

Post Aeration

Tanks

Replace stop plates with hand-

operated slide gates

Install temporary bulkheads for diverting flow while

cleaning channel and installing most new gates. Installing

a few key gates requires diversion of flow to and storage

in an aeration basin or by-pass pumping. An approximate

working window of about 17 hours may be achieved by

storage based on a plant flow of 1MGD and an aeration

basin holding volume of 0.73 MGal. A gap of about 24

hours is required during dry weather low flow to empty

the tank and treat the flow so the flow diversion cycle can

again be restarted.

Power wash and clean channels

Cover UV wear and post aeration

basins

UV Weir Basin - Drain an aeration basin in advance then

divert flow to drained aeration basin to store flow while

installing support beams and covers in UV weir basin. An


achieved by storage based on a plant flow of 1MGD and

an Aeration Basin holding volume of 0.73 MGal. A gap

of about 24 hours is required during dry weather low flow

to empty the tank and treat the flow so the flow diversion

cycle can again be restarted. Route all flow through Post

Aeration Basin No. 2 while installing support beams and

covers in No. 1. Route all flow through Post Aeration

Basin No. 1 while installing support beams and covers in

No. 2; this requires a temporary bulkhead across an

existing opening to control water level for UV process.


C. Existing Facility Operations

1. The existing facilities must remain in operation at all times. The CONTRACTOR shall

ensure that his operations shall not interfere with the plant operations, public health and

safety, or plant security while the new construction is in progress.


Aerobic

Digesters

Install digested sludge pump for

Digester No. 1 Modify Aerobic Digester No. 1 (currently off-line) and

sludge piping in Control Building first. After Aerobic

Digester No. 1 improvements are operational then modify

Aerobic Digester No. 2. Add floating decanters to both

digesters

Install sludge piping and other

modifications in Control Building

Coordinate with digester and gravity belt thickener

operation. Coordinate with Aeration Basin work and

timing of wasted sludge return to Aeration Basins. Make

pipe tie-ins when digester has sufficient storage capacity

available and gravity belt thickener is not in use.

Drain Pump

Station

Replace pumps and discharge

piping and extend force main

discharge to upstream of fine

screens

Interrupt flow into drain pump station to make

modifications. Coordinate with plant drain uses including

but not limited to clarifier scum pumping, digester

decanting, sludge dewatering and new grit classifier

operation.

Coordinate extending discharge pipe with installation of

new pumps.

Trailer

Demolition

Relocate influent and effluent

samplers from trailer to Operations

building

Coordinate with replacement of sample pumps. The

demolition pertaining to the existing operations trailer can

be performed once the new Operations Building has been

constructed and the effluent sample pumps are relocated.

The trailer drain line can be plugged and abandoned only

after all equipment contributing to the drain has been

removed from the trailer.

Control

Building Drain line

A temporary by-pass pumping system will be needed to

pump the process drain flow from the control building to

the drain pump station while the new 6-inch drain line is

installed.

Influent and

Effluent Sample

Pumps

Replace influent and effluent

sample pumps

Coordinate with relocation of influent and effluent

samplers to new Operations Building and new sample

line.

Process Drains Process Drains

The proposed process drain for the Secondary Clarifier

No 2 ties into the operations trailer drain. Perform this

work only after the trailer drain line is plugged.

Electrical

Modifications

MCC-CB-2 – RAS/WAS Pumps Influent Pumps may be off for no more than four (4)

hours at a time during dry weather low flow periods. RAS

Pumps may be off for no more than four (4) hours at a

time during dry weather low flow periods. WAS pumps

may be off for up to four (4) hours at a time. Outages

beyond these times require by-pass pumping or temporary

power supply. Provide Influent Pumping Station by-pass

pumping and operate it when the wet well level of

influent pumping station reaches Elev. 464.0 or lower

Elevation as required by City.

MCC-CB-3 – Influent Pumps

Instrumentation

Modifications Instrumentation Modifications Coordinate with other work and plant operation


2. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the work with the CITY so that the construction

will not restrain or hinder the operation of the existing facilities. If, at any time, any

portion of the facilities are out of service, the CONTRACTOR must obtain approval from

the CITY as to the date, time and length of time that portion of the facilities are out of

service.

3. Connections to the existing facilities or alteration of existing facilities will be made at

times when the facility involved is not in use or at times, established by the CITY, when

the use of the facility can be conveniently interrupted for the period of time needed to

make the connection or alteration. No additional compensation will be provided to the

CONTRACTOR should these times extend beyond the normal 40-hour, 5-day work

week.

4. Before any roadway or facilities are blocked off, the CITY’s approval shall be obtained

to coordinate operations for the plant.

D. Ohio River Level

1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a Flood Action Plan to the CITY within 14 days of the

Notice to Proceed. The CONTRACTOR should plan on the access road to the Indian

Creek WWTP flooding at least twice per year. The Ohio River high water elevation may

influence the water table at the WWTP; therefore, the CONTRACTOR shall anticipate

ground water when working on underground piping and basin modifications. Further, the

CONTRACTOR must ensure that the tanks do not float when empty, due to high water

and buoyancy action. The current operating procedure is for the CITY to fill any empty

tanks when the river level reaches 37 feet as measured by the NOAA website

http://www.erh.noaa.gov/er/iln/afos/CVGSTAGE.HTM. For example, Clarifier No.3 and

Digester No.1 need to be completely full when the Ohio River Stage reaches 37-Feet. The

Indian Creel WWTP Flood Control Plan documents the protocols and procedures

associated with various Ohio River Stages. It will be the CONTRACTOR’s

responsibility to get a copy of this plan from the CITY and to remove any and all

equipment from the tanks prior to the CITY filling the tanks. Damage to any equipment

remaining in the tanks when the CITY fills the tanks shall be the sole responsibility of the

CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR is directed to investigate and study the river data,

and factor all time, cost, and contingency planning according to his planned sequence of

conducting the work.

2. Openings for new work shall be temporarily capped or otherwise prevented from

allowing ground or river water from entering structures.

1.05 SUGGESTED CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

A. Before starting any work, the CONTRACTOR shall attend a Pre-Construction Meeting with

the CITY, as detailed in Section 01 31 19. The CONTRACTOR will be notified of the date

and the time of the meeting, and shall submit a construction schedule meeting the

requirements of 01 32 16.

B. Sequence Submittal

1. Submit a proposed sequence in accordance with Section 01 33 00 with appropriate times

of starting and completion of tasks noted below. The submittal shall include the date,

time, duration and methods of each activity and have the approval of the CITY before

any work is undertaken on the following tasks:

Process piping tie-ins and/or outages and interruptions.

http://www.erh.noaa.gov/er/iln/afos/CVGSTAGE.HTM


Electrical power system tie-ins and/or outages and interruptions.

Instrumentation system tie-ins and/or outages and interruptions.

2. In addition to the submittals required above, the CITY shall be provided a list of

shutdowns and tie-ins seven calendar days prior to any process or system interruption.

C. The following areas are not necessarily listed in their required sequence of construction. A

suggested sequence within each area, where necessary, is included. This sequence is not

intended to release the CONTRACTOR from the responsibility to coordinate the Work in any

manner which will ensure Project completion within the time allowed or as shown on the

Project Documents. The CONTRACTOR is ultimately responsible for the sequence and

execution of Work.

1. Construct all necessary sediment and erosion control devices.

2. Clear and grub project site as necessary, limited to the work that will occur within the

next 3 months.

3. Uncover existing conduits to verify elevation and determine if any adjustments are

needed to the design.

4. Verify all dimensions. Determine if any adjustments are needed for proper fabrication,

design, and installation of equipment.

5. Transfer all necessary information to the equipment manufacturers for the development

of show drawings.

6. Obtain successful review of all equipment submittals in accordance with Section 01 33

00 – Submittals.

7. Install temporary facilities in accordance with Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities.

8. Establish temporary equipment storage areas in accordance with Section 01 60 00 –

Delivery, Storage and Handling.

9. Have equipment fabricated and delivered to the site.

10. Setup up by-pass pumping systems and or/ de-watering systems, as required.

11. Perform all necessary restoration.

12. Perform all site cleanup and cleaning.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED


CONTROL OF WORK 01 14 00-1 OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 01 14 00

CONTROL OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Use of Premises.

C. Right-of-Way.

D. Special Right-of-Way.

E. Pipe and Channel Locations.

F. Construction Layout.

G. Construction Layout – Supplement – Contingency Item Only.

H. Protection of Trees.

I. Open Excavations.

J. Maintenance of Traffic.

K. Care and Protection of Property.

L. Protection and Relocation of Existing Structures and Utilities.

M. Water for Construction Purposes.

N. Dust Control.

O. Pollution Control.

P. Cooperation within this Contract.

Q. Cleanup and Disposal of Excess Material.

R. Noise Control

S. Erosion Control Plan

1.02 SCOPE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish plant facilities and equipment which will be efficient,

appropriate and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of progress

which will ensure the completion of the work within the Time for Completion required by the

Contract Documents. If at any time such plant facilities and equipment appears to be

inefficient, inappropriate or insufficient for securing the quality of work required or for

producing the rate of progress aforesaid, the CITY may order the CONTRACTOR to increase

the efficiency, change the character or increase the plant facilities equipment and the

CONTRACTOR shall conform to such order at no cost to the CITY. Failure of the CITY to

give such order shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR of his obligations to secure the

quality of the work and rate of progress required by the Contract Documents.

1.03 USE OF PREMISES

A. The CONTRACTOR shall not trespass upon or in any way disturb property outside the street


right-of-way, or outside the limits of construction, without first obtaining written permission

from the property owner to do so. A copy of such written permission shall be furnished to the

CITY.

B. If the CONTRACTOR finds it necessary to obtain additional working area, it shall be the

CONTRACTOR’s responsibility for its acquisition. All requirements listed under the "Use

of Premises" shall apply if additional area is obtained.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall, at no additional cost to the CITY, restore such property to the full

satisfaction of the property owner, and shall obtain from the property owner a written release

stating that restoration has been satisfactorily made. A copy of the written release shall be

furnished to the CITY.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall not waste any excess earth, stone, or other excavated material on

any property without first obtaining written permission from the owner of the property. and

securing the approval of the CITY. One copy of the property owner’s written permission,

and one copy of a written release from the CITY, stating that the work has been completed

satisfactorily, shall be furnished to the CITY.

E. All items within the construction limits and the street right-of-way shall be removed, or

removed and replaced, or restored as required by the Contract Documents, including the

Drawings and Specifications and as directed by the CITY.

1.04 RIGHT-OF-WAY

A. All permanent and temporary Right-of-Way has been acquired for this Project. Copies of

signed easement drawings and agreements are on file at the Department of Sewers, 1035

Woodrow Street, Cincinnati, OH 45204.

1.05 SPECIAL RIGHT-OF-WAY

A. There are no Special Right-of-Way conditions for this project.

1.06 PIPE AND CHANNEL LOCATIONS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall locate pipelines and channels substantially as indicated in the

Contract Documents. The CITY reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as

may be found desirable to avoid interference with existing structures or for other reasons.

Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the CONTRACTOR’s

convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing different or additional items

where required.

B. CONTRACTOR shall remove and reconstruct Work which is improperly located.

1.07 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. This work consists of the CONTRACTOR being responsible for furnishing, placing, and

maintaining construction layout stakes necessary for the proper execution of the Work under

the contract and removing all stakes at the completion of the project. The CITY will not

provide any survey layout work.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall use competent personnel and suitable equipment for the layout

work required and a Surveyor currently licensed in the State of Ohio, shall supervise the

operation. The Registered Surveyor shall be made available to answer any questions from the

CITY. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the name, address, and Surveyors registration

number to the CITY before beginning any work. The Surveyor may be required to sign and


seal any survey submittals requested by the CITY.

C. All survey calculations, including filled out “Cut Sheets” supplied by the CITY, shall be

made available to the CITY as work progresses and before the Work is performed. The

construction layout shall be in accordance with Metropolitan Sewer District of Greater

Cincinnati (MSDGC) Standard Batter Board Accession Number 49054 or Alternate Batter

Board Accession Number 49054-A.

D. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for having the finished Work conform to the lines,

grades, elevations, and dimensions shown on the plans. Any inspection or checking of the

CONTRACTOR’S layout by the CITY and the acceptance of all or any part of it does not

relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility to secure the proper dimensions, grades, and

elevations of the Work.

E. Exercise care in the preservation of stakes and benchmarks, and reset them at no additional

cost to the CITY when they are damaged, lost, vandalized, displaced, or moved. No changes

or modifications shall be made without written notice to the CITY. If a change is approved,

payment will be made for additional survey work at the bid price of Item 623 Construciont

Layout – Supplement.

F. The cost of the Construction Layout shall be paid as a percentage of Lump Sum bid. Pay

requests shall be on the Work performed and shall be accompanied by copies of properly

filled out “Cut Sheets” supplied by the CITY.

1.08 PROTECTION OF TREES

A. The CONTRACTOR shall take precautions to avoid any unnecessary damage to trees.

Branches which overhang the construction limits and which interfere with the operation of

equipment shall be tied back to avoid damage, if possible. Where injury to branches is

unavoidable, the branches shall be sawed off neatly at the trunk or main branch and the cut

area shall be painted with approved tree paint immediately. Any trees damaged beyond

saving shall be removed by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the CITY, and in the

case of trees located on private property, the CONTRACTOR shall make restitution to the

property owner. CONTRACTOR shall only clear trees and vegetation deemed necessary for

any trenching work associated with the new sanitary line from the Operations Building. Other

trees and vegetation in that area will not be cleared.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall take extra measures to protect trees designated to be preserved,

such as erecting barricades, trimming to prevent damage from construction equipment, and

installing pipe and other Work by means of hand excavation or tunneling methods. Such

trees shall not be endangered by stockpiling excavated material or storing equipment against

their trunks.

C. Two days prior to clearing and grubbing, the construction limits shall be marked and the

CONTRACTOR shall walk the project with the CITY personnel to locate trees to be saved

and trees to be removed.

1.09 OPEN EXCAVATIONS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall adequately safeguard all open excavations by providing temporary

barricades, caution signs, lights and other means to prevent accidents to persons and damage

to property. Provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating travel

by pedestrians and workmen. Remove bridges provided for access during construction when

no longer required. The length or size of excavation will be controlled by the particular

surrounding conditions, but shall always be confined to the limits prescribed by the CITY or


the authority having jurisdiction of any rights-of-way being occupied by the construction. If

the excavation becomes a hazard, or if it excessively restricts traffic at any point, the CITY

may require special construction procedures such as limiting the length of the open trench,

prohibiting stacking excavated material in the street and requiring that the trench shall not

remain open overnight.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to open

trenches. Provide adequate light at all trenches, excavated material, equipment, or other

obstacles which could be dangerous to the public at night.

1.10 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

A. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for the preservation of all public and private

property and use every precaution necessary to prevent damage thereto. If any direct or

indirect damage is done to public or private property by or on account of any act, omission,

neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the work on the part of the CONTRACTOR,

restore such property to a condition similar or equal to that existing before the damage was

done, or make good on the damage in other manners acceptable to the CITY.

B. Where CONTRACTOR contemplates removal of small structures such as mailboxes,

signposts, fencing, guardrails, and culverts that interfere with CONTRACTOR’s operations,

the CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval of property owner and the CITY. Move mailboxes

to temporary locations accessible to postal service. Replace items removed in their original

location and a condition equal to or better than original. This shall be considered as part of

the sewer installation and replacement and shall be done immediately after the installation

and backfilling of the sewer. The costs for the removal, relocation, and replacement shall be

included with the price bid for various contract items.

1.11 PROTECTION AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES

A. The CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for the protection of all buildings,

structures, and utilities, public or private, including poles, signs, services to buildings,

utilities, gas pipes, water pipes, hydrants, sewers, drains and electric and telephone cables,

whether or not they are shown on the Drawings. Carefully support and protect all such

structures and utilities from injury of any kind. Immediately repair any damage resulting from

the construction operations, at no additional cost to the CITY. The CONTRACTOR shall

assume that there is at least one water, drain, gas, underground electric, telephone, etc.,

branch serving each building.

B. Assistance will be given the CONTRACTOR in determining the location of existing CITY

services. The CONTRACTOR, however, shall bear full responsibility for obtaining all

locations of underground structures and utilities (including existing water services, drain lines

and sewers). Maintain services to buildings and pay costs or charges resulting from damage

thereto.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the Ohio Utilities Protection Service at least forty-eight

(48) hours prior to start of excavating in any public way and also notify in writing all non-

participating utility companies (non-OUPS) in writing at least forty-eight (48) hours

(excluding Saturdays, Sundays and Legal holidays) before excavating in any public way.

D. If, in the opinion of the CITY, permanent relocation of a utility owned by the CITY is

required, the CITY may direct the CONTRACTOR, in accordance with Article 10 of the

General Conditions, to perform the Work. Work so ordered will be paid for at the Contract

unit prices, if applicable, or as extra work under Article 11 of the General Conditions. If

relocation of a privately owned utility is required, the CITY will notify the Utility to perform


the work as expeditiously as possible. The CONTRACTOR shall fully cooperate with the

CITY and other utilities. No claim for delay will be allowed due to such relocation.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the removal, replacement, and resetting and/or

updating the timing of traffic loops and signals, if required for the performance of the work,

at no additional cost to the CITY.

1.12 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

A. The CONTRACTOR may be allowed to use, if available, non-potable plant water after

express approval from the CITY at no charge. The CITY reserves the right to restrict access

or charge for plant water service if CONTRACTOR abuses his right of use, including water

wastage or excessive use.

B. Waste of water shall be sufficient cause for withdrawing the privilege of use. Hydrants shall

only be operated with proper approval from the CITY and water utility. It is the

CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to obtain approval from the water utility and comply with

all requirements provided by the water utility.

1.13 DUST CONTROL

A. CONTRACTOR shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust. Earth surfaces

subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by application of a chemical dust

suppressant. When practical, dusty materials in piles or in transit shall be covered to prevent

blowing dust.

B. Buildings or operating facilities which may be affected adversely by dust shall be adequately

protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, instrument panels, or similar

equipment shall be protected by suitable dust screens. Proper ventilation shall be included

with dust screens.

1.14 POLLUTION CONTROL

A. CONTRACTOR shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes,

sediment, debris, and other substances resulting from construction activities. No sanitary

wastes shall be permitted to enter any drain or watercourse other than sanitary sewers. No

sediment, debris, or other substance shall be permitted to enter sanitary sewers, and

reasonable measures shall be taken to prevent such materials from entering any drain or

watercourse.

1.15 COOPERATION WITHIN THIS CONTRACT

A. All firms or persons authorized to perform any work under the Contract Documents shall

cooperate with CONTRACTORS and Subcontractors or trades and assist in incorporating the

work of other trades where necessary or required.

B. Cutting and patching, drilling and fitting shall be carried out where required by the trade or

subcontractor having jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated herein or directed by the CITY.

1.16 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL

A. During the course of the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the site of operations as clean

and neat as possible. Dispose of all residues resulting from the construction Work and, at the

conclusion of the Work, remove and haul away any surplus excavation, broken pavement,

lumber, equipment, temporary structures and any other refuse remaining from the

construction operations and leave the entire site of the work in a neat and orderly condition.


B. In order to prevent environmental pollution arising from the construction activities related to

the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR and

Subcontractors shall comply with all applicable Federal, State and local laws and regulations

concerning waste material disposal, as well as the specific requirements stated in this Section

and in other related Sections.

C. Disposal of excess excavated material in wetlands, stream corridors and plains is strictly

prohibited even if the permission of the property owner is obtained. Any violation of this

restriction by the CONTRACTOR or any person employed by him will be brought to the

immediate attention of the responsible regulatory agencies, with a request that appropriate

action be taken against the offending parties. The CONTRACTOR will be required to

remove the fill and restore the area impacted at no increase in the Contract Sum.

D. The CITY reserves the right to instruct specific cleanup, relocation of equipment, or disposal

of material at any time.

1.17 NOISE CONTROL

A. CONTRACTOR shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary noise. Such

measures shall be appropriate for the normal ambient sound levels in the area during working

hours. All construction machinery and vehicles shall be equipped with practical sound-

muffling devices, and operated in a manner to cause the least noise consistent with efficient

performance of the Work.

B. CONTRACTOR shall provide acoustical barriers effective in reducing noise so noise

emanating from tools or equipment will not exceed legal noise levels.

C. During construction activities on or adjacent to occupied buildings, and when appropriate,

CONTRACTOR shall erect screens or barriers effective in reducing noise in the building and

shall conduct operations to avoid unnecessary noise which might interfere with the activities

of building occupants.

1.18 EROSION CONTROL PLAN

A. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for installing and maintaining sediment and erosion

control measures as necessary throughout the entire project in accordance with Ohio EPA

Best Management Practices. The CONTRACTOR shall specify a person responsible for

overseeing implementation of sediment and erosion control measures.

B. Work shall be scheduled to expose areas subject to erosion for the shortest possible time, and

natural vegetation shall be preserved to the greatest extent practical. Temporary storage and

construction buildings shall be located, and construction traffic routed, to minimize erosion.

Temporary fast-growing vegetation or other suitable ground cover shall be provided as

necessary to control runoff.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to check the Mitigative Measures installed on a

weekly basis and correct any deficiencies found or identified by the CITY throughout the

entire project.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 – EXECUTION


NOT USED



THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 20 00-1 OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 01 20 00

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Scope

B. Partial Payments

C. Part 1 General Bid Items by Reference Number (Ref. No.), and item description

D. Project Sign

E. Final Payment Considerations


A. Retainage to be held is in Section 00 52 01 “City-Contractor Agreement”.

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.03 SCOPE

A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, appurtenances and

services, including operation and maintenance manuals and training and start-up services

necessary to perform all work required, at the lump sum for the items listed herein and such

lump sum and unit prices shall represent full compensation for such work.

B. The bid items listed herein constitute all of the Items under which payment will be made. No

direct or separate payment will be made for providing miscellaneous temporary or accessory

works, plant services, layout surveys, sanitary requirements, testing safety devices, approval

and record drawings, water supplies, power, maintaining traffic, removal of waste, watchmen,

bonds (except Performance Bond), insurance, project coordination and all other requirements

of the Contract Documents. Compensation for all such services and materials shall be

included in the prices stipulated for the lump sum and unit price Items listed herein.

C. Furthermore, all work shown on the Drawings shall be a part of the Documents whether

specifically noted elsewhere in Contract Documents or not.

D. The CITY will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work, should

such apply, performed by CONTRACTOR. The CITY will review with CONTRACTOR the

CITY’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision

thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). The CITY’s

written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by the CITY to reflect

changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon the CITY and CONTRACTOR,

subject to the provisions of Article 10, Paragraph 10.05 Changes In The Work; Claims of

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions.

E. In the event of a discrepancy or conflict between the payment provisions of ODOT Standard

Specifications and these documents, these documents will take precedence over the ODOT

Standard Specifications payment provisions.


F. No payment will be due CONTRACTOR for any contingency work unless it is authorized by

the CITY and completed by the CONTRACTOR.

1.04 PART 1 GENERAL TRADE BID ITEMS BY REFERENCE NUMBER (REF. NO.) AND ITEM

DESCRIPTION

A. (Ref. No. G1) General Construction: This item includes the completion of all General

Construction required by Part 1 as outlined in Section 01 11 00 and as shown on the Drawings

and in accordance with the Specifications, unless specifically called for under other Reference

Items. Payment for work included in this Reference Item will be made based on the Lump Sum

Price Bid.

B. (Ref. No. G2) Performance Bond: The CONTRACTOR shall include the cost of his/her

Performance Bond in the Bid. The cost entered in the Bid should not exceed one percent of the

official total bid price. This item shall be included for payment on the first partial estimate. In

the event the cost entered in the Bid exceeds one percent, all costs over the one percent will be

paid with the Final Payment.

C. (Ref. No. G3) Miscellaneous Concrete Repair Allowance: Except as indicated otherwise by

the Contract Documents, all required Misc. Concrete Repair work shall be performed on a

Time and Materials (Force Account) basis against the Allowance Amount established in

Section 00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet for such work. This shall include epoxy or urethane

injection, and other minor concrete repairs, at the eight circular tanks, the building structures,

or other concrete structures on site. Cleaning, disinfecting, coating and otherwise treating

existing concrete surfaces, as indicated by the Drawings; and reviewing and sounding

existing concrete surfaces for repair needs (and outlining such identified repair needs) shall

be part of the Lump Sum Price Bid without Allowance adjustment. The CONTRACTOR

will not be permitted an overhead and profit markup on the allowance.

D. (Ref. No. G4) Testing Allowance: Except as indicated otherwise by the Contract Documents, all

required field or laboratory testing work, shall be performed on a Time and Materials Basis

(Force Account) against the Allowance Amount established in Section 00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet

for such work. All CONTRACTOR labor costs associated with testing shall not be part of the

bid item but shall be covered by Ref. No. G1. No markup shall be permitted by the

CONTRACTOR on the field or laboratory fees. Testing work required because of

CONTRACTOR deficiencies as required by the Contract Documents shall not be charged

against the Allowance and shall be performed at no additional cost to the CITY. All equipment

testing is under Ref. No. G1 and is not included in the Testing Allowance. The CONTRACTOR


E. (Ref. No. G5) Grit Removal Equipment: Payment for Base Bid equipment (Hydro International)

and installation will be based on the cost of the equipment, freight on-board job site. The cost of

installation and all other incidental expenses shall be included in Ref. No. G6.

F. (Ref. No. G6) Digester No. 2 Diffuser Protection Allowance: Except as indicated otherwise by

the Contract Documents, all required Digester No. 2 Diffuser Protection work shall be performed

on a Time and Materials (Force Account) basis against the Allowance Amount established in

Section 00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet for such work. The CONTRACTOR will not be permitted

an overhead and profit markup on the allowance.

G. (Ref. No. G7) Screen Channel (for new screen) Notch Cut Allowance: Except as indicated

otherwise by the Contract Documents, all required Screen Channel Notch Cut work shall be

performed on a Time and Materials (Force Account) basis against the Allowance Amount


established in Section 00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet for such work. The CONTRACTOR will not be

permitted an overhead and profit markup on the allowance.

H. (Ref. No. G8) Existing Screen Reconditioning Allowance: Except as indicated otherwise by the

Contract Documents, all required Existing Screen Reconditioning work shall be performed on a

Time and Materials (Force Account) basis against the Allowance Amount established in Section

00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet for such work. The CONTRACTOR will not be permitted an

overhead and profit markup on the allowance.

I. (Ref. No. G9) Reroute Drain Line at Effluent Flow Meter Allowance: Except as indicated

otherwise by the Contract Documents, all required Reroute Drain Line at Effluent Flow Meter

work shall be performed on a Time and Materials (Force Account) basis against the Allowance

Amount established in Section 00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet for such work. The CONTRACTOR


J. (Ref. No. G10) Reroute Non-Potable Water Line at Screen Building Allowance: Except as

indicated otherwise by the Contract Documents, all required Reroute Non-Potable Water Line at

Screen Building work shall be performed on a Time and Materials (Force Account) basis against

the Allowance Amount established in Section 00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet for such work. The

CONTRACTOR will not be permitted an overhead and profit markup on the allowance.

K. (Ref. N0. G11) Reroute Non-Potable Water Line at Effluent Flow Meter Allowance: Except as

indicated otherwise by the Contract Documents, all required Reroute Non-Potable Water Line at

Effluent Flow Meter work shall be performed on a Time and Materials (Force Account) basis

against the Allowance Amount established in Section 00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet for such work. The CONTRACTOR will not be permitted an overhead and profit markup on the allowance.

L. (Ref. No. G12) Existing Pipeline Jet-Cleaning Allowance: Except as indicated otherwise by the

Contract Documents, all required Existing Pipeline Jet-Cleaning work shall be performed on a


00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet for such work. High-velocity nozzle jet cleaning equipment shall be

used to thoroughly clean the interior of pipes designated. The nozzles shall be capable of

producing a scouring action from 15 to 45-degrees in all pipe sizes designated to be cleaned. The

equipment shall carry its own water tank, auxiliary engines, pumps, and hydraulically driven

hose reel. Contractor shall remove and dispose all liquid, sludge, dirt, sand, rocks, grease and

other solid or semisolid material and debris resulting from the cleaning operations. Liquid

decanted or separated from solids may be returned to a sanitary sewer on-site and shall not

contain solids greater than 125 micron size. Disposal shall be at a facility licensed for handling

and disposal of such materials. Acceptance of pipe cleaning shall be based on City inspection

following cleaning. No payment will be made for time and materials in excess of “normal”

industry production rates as determined by the City for this type of work. The CONTRACTOR


M. (Ref. N0. G13) UV Channels and Post Aeration Basin and Channels Power-Wash Cleaning

Allowance: Except as indicated otherwise by the Contract Documents, all required UV Channels

and Post Aeration Basin and Channels Power-Wash Cleaning work shall be performed on a


00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet for such work. The CONTRACTOR will not be permitted an

overhead and profit markup on the allowance.

N. (Ref. No. G14) Aeration Basin No. 1 and 2 Tank Bottom Cleaning Allowance: Except as

indicated otherwise by the Contract Documents, all required Aeration Basin No. 1 and 2 Tank

Bottom Cleaning work shall be performed on a Time and Materials (Force Account) basis


against the Allowance Amount established in Section 00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet for such work. The CONTRACTOR will not be permitted an overhead and profit markup on the allowance.

O. (Ref. No. G15) Influent Pumping Station and Drainage Pumping Station Wet Well Fillet Grout

Removal and Replacement Allowance: Except as indicated otherwise by the Contract

Documents, all required Influent Pumping Station and Drainage Pumping Station Wet Well

Fillet Grout Removal and Replacement work shall be performed on a Time and Materials (Force

Account) basis against the Allowance Amount established in Section 00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet

for such work. The CONTRACTOR will not be permitted an overhead and profit markup on the

allowance.

P. (Ref. No. G16) Aeration Basin No. 1 Equipment Refurbishment Allowance: Except as indicated

otherwise by the Contract Documents, all required Aeration Basin No. 1 Equipment

Refurbishment work shall be performed on a Time and Materials (Force Account) basis against

the Allowance Amount established in Section 00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet for such work. The

CONTRACTOR will not be permitted an overhead and profit markup on the allowance.

Q. (Ref. No. G17) SCADA Allowance: Except as indicated otherwise by the Contract Documents,

all labor and materials required to relocate and/or connect to work installed under the separate

SCADA Contract (SS No. 5950), or work required if the SCADA Contract is not completed,

including but not limited to items such as fiber optic cable, network switch, fiber patch panel,

etc., shall be performed on a Time and Materials (Force Account) basis against the Allowance

Amount established in Section 00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet for such work. The CONTRACTOR


1.05 PROJECT SIGN

A. The General CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, maintain, and subsequently remove

project signs made by a professional signage company. Work shall include restoring sign area

disturbed after sign removal. The project sign shall be constructed of new materials. The sign

shall be placed at the direction of the CITY, nevertheless, the CONTRACTOR may be

directed to relocate the sign as work progresses.

1. Plywood for sign shall be A A EXT APA grade 1 in thick, 2 feet x 3.5 feet, and

professionally painted for exterior service for the duration of the project. Posts shall be

pressure treated lumber and shall be securely anchored to minimize lateral movement.

2. Use ½-inch diameter galvanized steel button head carriage bolts and washers to attach

sign to posts.

3. The top edge of the sign should be 8 feet above existing grade.

4. Provide sign in accordance with the prototype project sign shown below; including

colors, fonts, and graphics. Add the project name, general contractor’s name, and

completion date to the sign. Completion date should read spring, summer, fall, or winter

and year. Submit proposed signage drawing to CITY for approval at least ten working

days prior to start of construction. The sign shall be erected on or before the date

construction starts.

5. The cost for the sign shall be included under Ref. No. G1.


1.06 FINAL PAYMENT

A. Comply with the requirements for Final Payment contained in the Contract Documents,

including Article 14.07 of Section 00 72 00 General Conditions and Section 01 77 00

Contract Closeout.

B. Before final payment is made to the CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to

the CITY a release, in writing, from all the property owners whose property has been used by

the CONTRACTOR outside the limits of construction and/or Right-of-Way.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED


SUBSTITUTIONS 01 25 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 25 00

SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other Division

1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. All requirements listed herein are in addition to the requirements stated in General

Conditions, paragraph 6.05.

B. If Contractor wishes to furnish or use a substitute item of material or equipment or

construction method, he shall make written application to the CITY within thirty days after

execution of the Contract, certifying that the proposed substitute will be of equal substance

to that specified and be capable of performing the same function as that specified.

C. The Contractor shall submit six copies of requests for substitution. Include in request the

following:

1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract

Documents.

2. For Products:

a. Product identification, including manufacturer’s name and address.

b. Manufacturer’s literature with product description, performance and test data, and

reference standards.

c. Samples.

d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used, date of installation,

and product performance and maintenance records.

3. For Construction Methods:

a. Detailed description of proposed method.

b. Drawings illustrating methods.

4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified.

5. Data relating to changes in construction schedule.

6. Relation to separate contracts, if any.

7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method

specified.

D. In making request for substitution, Contractor represents:

1. He has personally investigated proposed product or method, and determined that it is equal

SUBSTITUTIONS 01 25 00-2 SEPTEMBER 2013

or superior in all respects to that specified.

2. He will provide the same or better guarantee for substitution as for product or method

specified.

3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, making such changes as

required in all respects.

4. He waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution that consequently become

apparent.

5. Cost data is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract.

E. Substitutions will not be accepted if:

1. They are only shown or implied on shop drawings.

2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.

3. Substitutions would change design concepts of Specifications.

4. Substitutions would delay completion of the work.

5. Substitutions involve items for which a manufacturer was declared at time of bidding.

F. The CITY will determine whether substitute brands or products are equal to those specified in

the Contract Documents. No substitute will be ordered or installed without the CITY’s prior

written acceptance.

G. If the CITY determines that a substitute is not equal to that named in the Specifications, the

CONTRACTOR shall furnish one of the brands of products specified, at no additional cost to

the CITY.

H. Engineering Costs: CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the CITY for all associated engineering

costs, including redesign, additional shop drawings reviews, investigations, consultant fees and

revision of the Contract Documents required because of the substitute.

I. The time required by the CITY to evaluate and either accept or reject proposed substitutes is

included in the Contract time and no extension of the Contract time shall be allowed therefor.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT USED


NOT USED


CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01 26 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 26 00

CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Schedule of Values.

B. Application for Payment.

C. Contract Modification Procedures.

D. Change Order Procedures.


A. Submittals Section 01 33 00

1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. SCOPE : The Schedule of Values is an itemized list that established the value or cost of each

Pay Item that is part of the Work. The Schedule of Values shall be used as the basis for

preparing Application for Payments and may be used as a basis of negotiations concerning

additional work or credits which may arise during the construction. Quantities and unit

prices shall be included in the schedule when approved by or required by the CITY.

B. PREPARATION: The Schedule of Values shall correspond to a WBS rollup from the

approved cost loaded schedule. The Schedule of Values shall include the following:

1. Show breakdown of labor, materials equipment and other costs used by CONTRACTOR

in preparation of the Bid for the Project.

2. Prepare Schedule of Values on 8-1/2" by 11" format.

3. Upon request by the CITY, CONTRACTOR shall provide data that will substantiate the

amounts in the Schedule of Values.

4. The sum of the individual values shown on the Schedule of Values must equal the

individual Pay Item included in the CONTRACTOR’s Bid.

5. The manner in which overhead and profit are shown shall be approved by the CITY.

6. The Schedule of Values shall show the purchase costs for materials and equipment to be

stored on site prior to installation that the CONTRACTOR anticipates he shall request

payment for prior to their installation.

C. SUBMISSION

1. Submit six (6) copies of Schedule of Values to CITY for review at the Preconstruction

Conference and before work commences on the Project. After review by the CITY,

revise and resubmit Schedule of Values as required until it is accepted.


1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with the Contract

Documents, including this Section and Paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions.

B. CONTRACTOR shall submit two (2) copies of each Application for Payment on CITY’s

“Application and Certificate for Payment Summary Sheet” and “Continuation Sheet”;

CONTRACTOR’s electronic media printout containing similar information will be

considered as a substitute for CITY’s “Continuation Sheet

C. A current updated version of the CONTRACTOR’s Construction Schedule shall accompany

each Application for Payment in accordance with specification section 01 32 16.

D. Use approved Schedule of Values, including a list of approved Change Orders, with each

Application for Payment.

E. Payment Period: In accordance with the requirements in Paragraph 14.02 of the General

Conditions.

F. Include CITY’s “Stored Materials and Equipment” form when requesting payment for stored

materials and equipment not yet incorporated into the Work. Five percent (5%) of the

equipment value will be withheld until an acceptable temporarily bound copy of the O&M

manual has been received, (see Section 01 33 00 Submittals).

1.05 CONTRACT INFORMATION / NOTIFICATION PROCEDURES

A. Request for Information (RFI): CONTRACTOR shall use CITY’s RFI form, included with

the Contract Documents in Specification Section 01 33 19, to request information,

interpretations, clarifications, and changes in the Work. CONTRACTOR shall number RFI’s

consecutively and add a consecutive letter to RFI number on modified submittals of the same

item (i.e., RFI-4A); CITY will respond on the same form in ten (10) calendar days.

B. Field Order: CITY will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to

Contract Sum or Contract Times with a Field Order as provided in Article 1, Paragraph

1.01.22 and Article 3, Paragraph 3.04.B.1 of the General Conditions. CONTRACTOR shall

use CITY's Field Order Form included in Specification Section 01 33 19.

C. Request for Proposal (RFP): CITY may request a written proposal from CONTRACTOR for

changes in the Work. The CITY will issue an RFP describing the scope of the proposed

change(s) and provide any back-up documentation required. The CONTRACTOR will

respond to the RFP with twenty-one (21) calendar days of the date the RFP was issued by the

CITY with a detailed cost and schedule impact associated with the proposed change(s) in

accordance with Articles 10, 11 and 12 of the General Conditions. The CITY may use the

Request for Proposal Form included in Specification Section 01 33 19.

1.06 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. DEFINITIONS

1. Work Directive Change (WDC): When it is necessary that changes in the Work proceed

before the change in Contract Price and Contract Times can be agreed upon, CITY will

issue a WDC which will authorize and direct CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work

in accordance with Article 10 of the General Conditions. When changes in Contract


Price and Contract Times are to be based upon the cost of the Work, maintain and submit

cost records in accordance with Article 11 of the General Conditions.

2. Change Order (CO): The CITY will issue CO’s as needed which will authorize and

direct CONTRACTOR to proceed with approved and negotiated changes in the Work.

Proceed with such Work in accordance with Article 10 of the General Conditions.

Proposed Changes for which a WDC has been issued will be included in a Change Order

after the Contract Price and Contract Times have been determined.

B. PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES

1. The CITY may initiate changes by submitting a Request for Proposal (RFP) to

CONTRACTOR. The RFP will include:

a. Detailed description of the change, products and location of the change in the

Project.

b. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications.

c. The projected time span for making the change and a specific statement as to

whether overtime work is, or is not, authorized.

d. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid.

2. Such request is for information only and is not an instruction to execute the changes, nor

to stop work in progress.

3. CONTRACTOR may request a change by submitting a written request to the CITY,

containing:

a. Description of the proposed change(s).

b. Statement of the reason for requesting the change(s).

c. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

d. Statement of the effect on the Work of separate contractors.

e. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time, as

appropriate.

4. Nothing in this section relieves the CONTRACTOR from its obligations under the

claims procedure in the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to Paragraph

10.05 of the General Conditions.

C. WORK DIRECTIVE CHANGE AUTHORIZATION

1. Work Directive Change (WDC): When it is necessary that work representing a potential

change in the Contract proceed before the terms of a Change Order can be agreed upon,

the CITY may issue a WDC. A WDC will not change the Contract Sum or Contract

Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by

the WDC will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following

negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Sum or Contract Times.

2. The Work Directive Change will describe changes in the Work, both additions and

deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the

change and will designate the method of determining any change in the Contract Sum

and any change in Contract Time. Work Directive Changes will be issued on the Work

Directive Change Form included in Specification Section 01 33 19.


3. A WDC must be issued and signed no later than 2-days after direction is given. Verbal

or e-mail authorization cannot be used in place of a WDC. Reference of the initial

direction (verbal or e-mail instruction) must be noted on the WDC.

4. The CITY will sign and date the Work Directive Change as authorization for the

CONTRACTOR to proceed with the changes.

5. CONTRACTOR shall sign and date the Work Directive Change to indicate agreement

with the terms therein.

6. The CONTRACTOR returns the completed WDC back to the CITY.

D. DOCUMENTATION OF RESPONSES TO REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS

1. The requirements of this section are in addition to the other requirements in the Contract

Documents, including, but not limited to the requirements of Article 10 of General

Conditions and the Statement of Claim Form in Specification Section 00 63 64.

2. Support each lump-sum proposal and each unit price proposal, which has not previously

been established, with sufficient substantiating data to allow the CITY to evaluate the

quotation.

3. On request by the CITY, CONTRACTOR shall provide additional data to support time

and cost computations, including, but not limited to the following:

a. Labor required.

b. Equipment required.

c. Products required.

1) Recommended source of purchase and unit cost.

2) Quantities required.

d. Taxes, insurance and bonds.

e. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented.

f. Overhead and profit.

g. Justification for any change in Contract Time should be based upon results of a Time

Impact Analysis (TIA) as defined in Section 01 32 16, Construction Progress

Schedule.

4. Support each claim for additional costs and or additional time, with documentation as

required for a lump-sum proposal, plus additional information.

a. Name of the CITY’s authorized representative who authorized the work and date of

the authorization.

b. Dates and times work was performed and by whom.

c. Time record, summary of hours worked and hourly rates paid.

d. Receipts and invoices for:

1) Equipment used, listing dates and times of use.

2) Products used, listing of quantities.

3) Subcontracts.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED


PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 31 19

PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Pre-Construction Meeting.

B. Progress Meetings.

C. Cut-In Meetings.


A. Construction Sequence, Section 01 12 16.

B. Submittals, Section 01 33 00.

1.03 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. A pre-construction meeting will be scheduled by the CITY after award of the Contract.

B. The standard agenda for the meeting includes the following items:

1. Introduction of responsible personnel and contact information

a. Construction Manager

b. Construction Inspector

c. Contractor Superintendent

2. Contract Compliance

a. Signed contracts

b. Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO)

c. Subcontractors

d. Prevailing Wage Rates

e. Assignment of Contract (if applicable)

f. Insurance

g. Pay estimates

3. Safety Plan per section 01 31 21 “Site Safety Plan”– Contractor to submit three (3) days

prior to the Preconstruction Meeting

4. Document Control

a. Processing of Requests for Information (RFI) (this process will be unique to each

project), Work Directive Change (WDC), and Change Order Requests (COR)

b. Processing of Submittals (this process will be unique to each project)

5. Contractor’s Performance Rating


6. Contract Documents

7. Construction Schedule – Contractor to submit at the Preconstruction Meeting per section

01 32 16 “Construction Progress Schedule”

8. Submittal Register – Contractor to submit at the Preconstruction Meeting per section 01

33 00, “Submittals.”

9. Notice to Proceed (NTP) date determination

10. Home Owner / Business Notification

11. Schedule of Values – In accordance with Paragraph 2.05(A)(3) of the General

Conditions

12. Coordination with local entities

13. Coordination with existing utilities

14. Permits (as applicable, see section 01 11 00 “Summary of Project” and section 01 14 00

“Control of Work”)

a. Erosion Control Plan

b. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan

c. Building Permit

d. Electrical Permit

e. Street Closing Permit

f. ODOT Permit

g. Other

15. Testing (both CQC and acceptance) – soil compaction, concrete, pipe deflection,

manholes, other

16. Use of Premise

17. Restoration

18. CCTV of sewers (if applicable)

19. Record Drawings.

C. It is mandatory the CITY and CONTRACTOR attend this meeting. Other regulatory or

financial personnel may be requested to attend, along with major subcontractors and

suppliers.

D. This meeting will be chaired by the CITY, who will record and distribute meeting minutes.

1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. The CITY shall, at a prescribed time and place, hold project progress meetings each month,

to coordinate the Work and discuss Work status, as well as problems that may arise

concerning proper timing and execution of the Work.

1. Additional meetings may be requested and scheduled by the CITY or CONTRACTOR as


the need arises.

2. Responsible representatives of the CONTRACTOR and the CITY shall attend each

progress meeting. Subcontractors may occasionally be asked to attend.

3. The CITY shall preside and take minutes of each entire meeting, and subsequently

reproduce and distribute such minutes to all parties concerned within one (1) week

following each meeting.

4. The only active audio or video recording device permitted will be that of the person

presiding at the meeting. If used, the recording media shall be maintained as a Record

Document, as outlined in Section 01 78 39.

5. Suggested Progress Meeting Agenda:

a. Review and approval of minutes of previous meeting

b. Review of work progress since previous meeting

c. Field observations, problems, and conflicts

d. Problems which impede construction schedule

e. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules

f. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule

g. Revisions to Construction Progress Schedule

h. Progress, schedule, during succeeding work period

i. Coordination of schedules

j. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required

k. Maintenance of quality standards

l. Pending changes and substitutions

m. Review proposed changes for:

i. Effect on construction schedule and on completion date

ii. Effect on other contracts of the Project

n. Other business

B. Immediately prior to commencing Work on each new phase of Project construction,

CONTRACTOR’s Project superintendent shall hold a coordination meeting with the trade

foreman who will supervise or perform the new phase of work, to review Drawings and

Specifications. CONTRACTOR shall advise the CITY of the date of such meetings and who

will be in attendance. After the meeting is held, CONTRACTOR shall promptly submit a

written report to the CITY.

C. CONTRACTOR shall schedule weekly job progress meetings between himself and major

subcontractors. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the CITY on the time and place of the

meeting, which shall be the same day and hour of the week for the duration of the work,

except upon instructions of the CITY; the meetings may be increased or decreased as

required by the progress of the work.

D. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for notifying all subcontractors of the time and place of

job meetings, when the participation of the subcontractor is requested by the

CONTRACTOR or by the CITY.


E. Conduct meetings in a manner that will best resolve coordination issues.

F. CONTRACTOR shall conduct the job meetings. The CONTRACTOR will take notes on

discussions and conclusions and will distribute with seventy-two (72) hours, excluding

Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays, sufficient printed copies to those others concerned; two

(2) copies shall be furnished to the CITY.

1.05 CUT-IN MEETINGS

A. CONTRACTOR shall schedule and coordinate shutdowns and tie-ins at least two (2) weeks

in advance with CITY.

B. CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval the Cut-In-Form, included in Specification

Section 01 33 19, at least two (2) weeks in advance of scheduled Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED


SITE SAFETY PLAN 01 31 21-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 31 21

SITE SAFETY PLAN

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Scope.


A. Project Meetings are included in Section 01 31 19.

B. Submittals are included in Section 01 33 00.

1.03 SCOPE

A. File with the CITY’s representative prior to start of work a Site Safety Plan, which at a

minimum:

1. Lists key personnel and alternates responsible for site safety along with means of

contacting these personnel at all times.

2. Names one person as a Competent Person responsible for site safety activities and

includes a resume of their qualifications to be a Competent Person.

3. Describes the risks associated with each operation conducted.

4. Confirms that personnel are adequately trained to perform their job responsibilities and to

handle the specified hazardous situations they may encounter.

5. Describes the protective clothing and equipment personnel will wear during various site

operations.

6. Describes any site-specific medical surveillance requirements (hazardous waste or

material sites only).

7. Describes the program for periodic air monitoring, personnel monitoring, and

environmental sampling, if needed (hazardous waste or material sites only).

8. Describes the actions to be taken to mitigate existing hazards (e.g., containment of

contaminated materials) to render the work environment less hazardous.

9. Defines site control measures and includes a site map.

10. Establishes decontamination procedures for personnel and equipment

B. Sets forth a Contingency Plan for safe and effective response to emergencies.

C. Sets forth the site's Standard Operating Procedures (SOPS). SOPS are those standardized

activities that use a checklist. The procedures should be:

1. Prepared in advance based on the best available information, operational principles and

technical guidance.

2. Field-tested by qualified health and safety professionals and revised as appropriate.

3. Appropriate to the types of risk at that site.

4. Formulated to be easy to understand and practice.

SITE SAFETY PLAN 01 31 21-2 SEPTEMBER 2013

5. Provided in writing to all site personnel who should be briefed on their use.

6. Included in training programs for site personnel.

D. Display a copy of the Site Safety Plan at the work site at all times.

E. In addition, supply to the Engineer any safety information or documentation any state or

federal agency requires under law.

F. The CONTRACTOR shall bear all risks associated with performing the work and shall fully

indemnify and hold harmless the CITY and ENGINEER.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED


CONSTRUCTION

PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 32 16

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Software/Interface Requirements.

C. Quality Assurance.

D. Use of Float.

E. Float Suppression.

F. Non-Compliance.


A. General Conditions are included in Section 00 72 00, including Paragraph 6.04.

B. Contract Considerations are included in Section 01 26 00, including Paragraph 1.03,

Schedule of Values

C. Submittals are included in Section 01 33 00.

D. Project Meetings are included in Section 01 31 19.

E. Substantial Completion as included in Section 01 77 19.

1.03 SCOPE

A. A clear and complete Construction Progress Schedule (CPS) is required for the Project. Most

importantly, the CPS shall be a tool which the CONTRACTOR and his agents will use to

manage their Work and scope of the Project. The schedule must provide a tool that all parties

involved in the Project can use to understand the status of and intended Project plan

throughout the execution of the Project.

B. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for coordinating his own schedules (including

Subcontractors) as well as construction activities of others directed by the CONTRACTOR.

The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the overall project CPS, of which the other

CONTRACTORs’ and subcontractors’ CPS will be a part.

C. The CPS, including all variations thereof, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents, including Paragraph 6.04 of the General Conditions. The CITY’s

review or acceptance of any schedule shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from

responsibility for complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents, adhering to

those sequences of Work indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, or from

completing any Work omitted from the schedule, within the Contract Time.

D. The Work under the Contract Documents shall be planned, scheduled, executed, and reported

by the CONTRACTOR using a cost-loaded, Critical Path Method ("CPM") schedule utilizing

a Work Breakdown Structure ("WBS"). The CONTRACTOR shall adhere to industry

established technical standards for CPM scheduling using a computerized Precedence

Diagram Method ("PDM"). The CONTRACTOR is required to provide baseline and

CONSTRUCTION


progress status data as specified further herein. The CITY can and may request the

CONTRACTOR to provide additional details.

E. All accounts in the Schedule of Values shall correspond to a WBS rollup in the

CONTRACTOR’s CPS. All activities tied to a Schedule of Values ("SOV") account number

must be assigned a budget value. The budget totals in the schedule shall balance with the

SOV totals. The SOV shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with Contract

Considerations, Section 01 26 00, Paragraph 1.03.

F. The CITY may provide the CONTRACTOR with Interim and Contractual Milestones to be

included in the CPS. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to include these Milestones in

the logical sequence of activities in the CPS. If the CITY provides Interim and Contractual

Milestones, these dates shall only be changed by an approved Change Order.

G. Days are defined herein as calendar days. A day is defined as twenty-four hours (24) hours,

commencing at midnight upon a given date and ending at midnight on the following date.

H. If the CONTRACTOR should propose to complete the Work earlier than any required

milestone or completion date, the CITY shall not be liable to the CONTRACTOR for any

costs or other damages should the CONTRACTOR be unable to complete the Work before

such milestone or completion date.

1.04 SOFTWARE/INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall use modern CPM scheduling software to produce the Construction

Progress Schedules including all Project schedules, and reports as specified. This software

shall run on the Microsoft (MS) Windows operating system. It shall be commercially

available for lease or purchase and capable of processing and plotting schedule data as

specified in this Section. All Schedules shall be submitted on the latest version of the

Primavera P6 software or other approved software that is compatible with Primavera P6

software.

B. Equivalent Software:

1. Reference is made to Primavera Project Manager Version P6 software as the approved

format for schedule submittal in these Specifications. However, the CITY reserves the

right to accept a schedule submittal using equivalent software that is compatible with the

Primavera P6 software and approved by the CITY.

2. To be approved as an Equivalent or "Or Equal" software format the software must be

“completely” compatible with the CITY’s Primavera Project Manager Version P6

database. Before software can be considered “completely” compatible it must be capable

of producing schedule submittals in a format that can be imported into the CITY’s

Primavera Project Manager Version P6 database without distortion of any coding or

relationships contained in the submitted file.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall only utilize equivalent or compatible software, which has

received written approval from the CITY prior to their submittal of their proposal for the

Contract Work.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall employ a firm or individual to perform the work covered by this

section that shall have substantive experience in using computer based scheduling programs

on construction projects (the "Scheduling Consultant"). The CONTRACTOR shall submit

the following as a minimum:

CONSTRUCTION


1. Identification, qualifications, and experience of the members of the CONTRACTOR’s

scheduling staff or any consultant’s staff. The designated Scheduling Consultant shall

have at least five (5) years of experience in the computerized scheduling of public or

industrial construction work. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a resume for the

designated individual(s) that details all qualifications, experience, and references for the

CITY’s approval.

2. The CITY may reject any member of the CONTRACTOR’s scheduling staff or any of

Contractor's Scheduling Consultant’s staff. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly replace

rejected personnel and resubmit the above required qualifications for acceptable

personnel at no additional cost to the CITY.

1.06 USE OF FLOAT

A. Unless otherwise indicated herein, float and total float are synonymous. Total float is the

period of time measured by the number of Days by which an activity can be delayed before it

and its succeeding activities become part of the critical path. If a non-critical path activity is

delayed beyond its float period, then that activity becomes part of the critical path and could

impact the end date of the Work. Thus, delay of a non-critical path activity beyond its float

period will cause delay to the project itself. Total float belongs to the Project and is not for

the exclusive use of any party. Total float shall be available to the CITY and the

CONTRACTOR, to accommodate changes in the Work, or to mitigate the effect of events

that may delay performance or completion. The CONTRACTOR will monitor and optimize

the use of float for the benefit of the Project.

1.07 FLOAT SUPPRESSION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall not use any float suppression techniques, e.g., preferential

sequencing (crew movements, equipment use, for reuse, etc.), extended durations, imposed

dates, scheduling of non-critical work, artificial logic, and others, in preparation and

maintenance of the schedule. Use of any type of schedule constraints must be identified in the

CONTRACTOR’s submittal.

1.08 NON-COMPLIANCE

A. Pending an acceptable submission of the CPS, no partial payment will be made except in

such amounts as may be approved by the CITY for materials received at the Project Site, plus

any additional amounts that the CITY decides to release.

2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES GENERAL CRITERIA

A. The CONTRACTOR shall use a Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) (i.e., project, area,

facility, activity codes, etc.) to identify the hierarchy of Work that must be accomplished to

complete the project. The WBS is structured in levels of Work detail, beginning with the

product itself, and then is separated into identifiable work elements for developing the

activity I.D. and coding structures. The proposed WBS structure shall be presented and

explained by the CONTRACTOR at the Pre-Construction meeting.

B. The CPS shall include, but not limited to baselines, updated schedules, revised schedules, and

recovery schedules. All CPSs shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR and reflect the

CONTRACTOR’s plans for and status of the Work and shall comply with the requirements

of the Contract Documents. When Submitting Construction Project Schedules, the

CONSTRUCTION


CONTRACTOR shall submit four (4) copies of all CPS plotted on 11” x 17” paper and shall

submit three (3) CD ROMs containing the schedule in PDF format and the designated

Primavera Project Manager Version P6 software file format. CPSs and supporting

documentation shall be provided at the intervals listed in Table 01 32 16-1: “Table of

Schedule Submittal Requirements” or as requested by the CITY.

C. The CPSs shall show the breakdown of Work into activities and respective relationships to

the extent required to effectively manage the Work. The CPSs shall show the division of the

Work into activities and specify the progression from the Notice to Proceed (NTP) to the

completion of the Work and shall be logically linked to include all milestones. Each

construction activity shown on the CPSs shall have a respective budget value, a portion of the

Contract Sum.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall allow for inclement weather in the CPSs. The weather allowance

shall be detailed as a line item included in the Critical Path of the Project Work sequence.

Allowances for weather shall be based on Paragraph 12.03(A)(2) of the General Conditions.

To the extent that CONTRACTOR has a valid claim for additional Time due to weather

delays, Time extensions for weather will not be granted until disruptions to the Project

progress exceed the scheduled allowance and the critical path is affected as shown in a Time

Impact Analysis (see section 2.05 of this specification).

E. The CONTRACTOR’s CPS shall include all procurement related activities that lead to the

delivery of permanent materials to the site. Procurement activities include, but are not be

limited to, preparation of Submittals, review and acceptance of Submittals, materials

fabrication, and materials delivery.

1. Schedule logic shall tie the procurement activities to the installation phase of the

respective work scope.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall prioritize the Project material and equipment submittals.

3. In particular, the CONTRACTOR shall identify “Long Lead Time” equipment and

material items and schedule their submittal appropriately.

F. CONTRACTOR shall allow for Shutdown dates and necessary notification times in the CPS.

The Shutdown allowance shall be detailed as a line item included in the Critical Path of the

Project Work Sequence. The Shutdown dates are identified in paragraph 4.2.2 of the City-

Contractor Agreement in Section 00 52 01.

2.02 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE BASELINE SUBMISSION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a Baseline Construction Progress Schedule

(CPS) for review prior to the Pre-Construction Meeting. The Baseline CPS submission is

required a minimum of five working days prior to the Pre-Construction Meeting.

B. The CONTRACTOR’s Baseline CPS shall consist of a minimum of the following:

1. A pure logic Precedence Diagram Plot grouped by WBS, early start and early finish. The

plot must clearly and legibly show all activities and logical ties and shall display each

activity’s identification number, description, original duration, remaining duration and

total float value. The plot shall clearly show the critical path. A Gantt chart plot shall

also be acceptable.

2. The CPS must clearly show the sequence and interdependence of activities required for

complete performance of the Work, beginning with the Contract Start Date (CSD) and

concluding with the Contract Completion Date (CCD). The maximum duration of any

physical work activity shall not exceed twenty (20) working days (or one reporting cycle)

CONSTRUCTION


unless approved by the CITY.

3. In addition to the activities included in the Contract Documents, the network diagram and

CPS will reflect the major interfaces between the Work required under the Contract

Documents and the concurrent and succeeding work of the other contracts deemed

necessary by the CITY for Substantial Completion and turnover of the Project.

4. The original CPS Baseline submittal shall not have the use of negative lag on any

activities along the critical path or near critical path.

5. Tabular activity reports will be required as directed by the CITY. The format will be

discussed at or prior to the Pre-Construction Meeting. Activity data included in the

tabular reports may include but is not limited to the following:

a. Bid Item, SOV, WBS Level, Responsibility

b. Activity ID., Early Start Date, Early Finish Date, Late Start, Late Finish, Free Float,

Total Float

c. Physical % Complete, Original Duration, Remaining Duration

d. Predecessors, Successors, Lags

e. Budget, Earned Value to Date, Earned Value this Period

f. Cost Performance Index (CPI), Schedule Performance Index (SPI)

g. “S” curves for resource usage

h. “S” curves for project cash flow

6. A schedule narrative as described in Paragraph 2.04 will be prepared and included with

the submission of the original CPS.

7. Addition reports or plots requested by the CITY.

C. When the CONTRACTOR’s Baseline CPS is reviewed and approved by the CITY it

becomes the CONTRACTOR's “Approved Baseline” CPS. Any changes to the Approved

Baseline CPS, other than status updates, require the approval of the CITY in accordance with

the Modification provisions in the Contract Documents.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE MONTHLY UPDATES

A. Updating the CONTRACTOR’S CPS with current status and proposed schedule changes is

the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. Contract Time (including all contracted

milestones) shall not be changed without an approved Change Order or Work Directive

Change issued by the CITY.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain and status the CPS. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare

and submit a complete updated CPS for review and approval as requested by the CITY and as

required by the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall update and status the CPS at

a minimum on a monthly basis or as otherwise directed by the CITY.

C. A Schedule Update of the CPS shall be submitted prior to the monthly progress meeting

specified in Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings.

D. Updating the schedule shall consist of the following:

1. Updating Activity Status: At intervals requested by the CITY, the CONTRACTOR shall

manually status the following:

a. Actual Start Dates.

b. Physical % Complete - Physical % Complete shall be reviewed at the monthly

CONSTRUCTION


progress meeting or at intervals as requested by the CITY’s representative.

c. Remaining Duration - Remaining duration shall be the CONTRACTOR’S best

estimate of the time required to complete activities that have started but not yet

completed.

d. Actual Finish Dates.

e. Data Date - Will be set to correspond to the last day of the update period.

f. Based on the above listed items (a-e), the Contractor will recalculate the schedule.

2. Corrections to the Schedule: Prior to subsequent submittals, the CONTRACTOR shall

make those corrections to the CPS that were identified or requested at the last update by

the CITY.

3. Revisions to the CPS: Schedule Revisions are defined as any change to schedule

activities or logic, other than 1) the updating of actual start and finish dates, 2) changing

physical % complete of the Work, 3) changing remaining duration of activities, or 4)

changing the dates for Substantial of Final Completion. No Revisions to the CPS shall be

made to the Construction Progress Schedule unless approved by and or directed by the

CITY.

4. Should Project Milestones or Project Completion indicate negative float, the

CONTRACTOR may be required to submit a CPS Recovery Schedule per Paragraph

3.04 Construction Progress Schedule Recovery or a Construction Progress Schedule

Impact Analysis per Paragraph 2.05, or both. The required submittal, by the

CONTRACTOR, of a CPS Recovery Schedule or CPS Impact Analysis, shall be at the

sole discretion of the CITY. The requested CPS Recovery Schedule or CPS Schedule

impact analysis shall be provided to the CITY from CONTRACTOR no more than five

(5) working days from date of request by the CITY.

5. After any CPS Revision is reviewed and approved by the CITY, the CONTRACTOR

shall promptly incorporate the Schedule Revision into the Construction Progress

Schedule.

a. Approved Schedule Revisions shall be made and incorporated into the CPS in

accordance requirements of this specification and the Contract Documents.

b. No budget changes or time extensions shall be made to the CPS until a fully executed

change order has been processed per the requirements of the Contract Documents.

2.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE NARRATIVE

A. A Schedule Narrative report shall accompany the initial Baseline submission of the

CONTRACTOR’s CPS. The Schedule Narrative shall support and augment the CPM

Construction Progress Schedule. The Schedule Narrative shall include, but is not limited to

the following:

1. The Contract requirements and objectives.

2. A description of methods of operation.

3. A description of resources to be employed.

4. An explanation of the general sequence of the Work.

5. An explanation of the Project critical path.

6. A listing of any long lead equipment.

7. An explanation of physical constraints to completing the Work.

CONSTRUCTION


a. The basis of constraints and lags utilized in the Baseline CPS and subsequent

Schedule Updates must be documented in the CPS Narrative.

8. A description of any assumptions made in developing the CPS.

9. Time frames for the construction of major systems, achieving Substantial Completion,

and completion of all Work.

B. A CPS Narrative shall accompany each required update to the CONTRACTOR’s CPS and

shall, at a minimum, address the following:

1. Milestones completed.

2. A descriptive summary of each Schedule Revision incorporated into the CPS since the

last Schedule Update and it’s affect on the CPS.

3. Any change to the CPS critical path.

4. Any actual or anticipated problems with delivery of materials or equipment.

5. Any problems with submittal approval.

6. Any corrective action undertaken by the CONTRACTOR to address CPS problems.

7. Anything impacting critical path, milestones and contractual completion.

8. Schedule “slip” if indicated in the schedule submittal.

2.05 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE TIME IMPACT ANALYSIS

A. If the CONTRACTOR requests an extension of the Contract Time or any Contract Milestone,

the CONTRACTOR shall provide a CPS Time Impact Analysis (TIA) to support the request.

At a minimum, the CPS Time Impact Analysis must contain the following:

1. A detailed network analysis based on the current approved “Baseline” CPS.

2. The Contract milestones affected and the number of additional days requested for each

milestone extension.

3. A listing of all activities and logic added, deleted or changed which encompass the

impact of the change.

4. A complete submittal of “before and after” CPS as detailed in this specification.

5. The CONTRACTOR’s entitlement for the request of an extension of the Contract Time

and or Contract Milestone shall clearly demonstrate that impact to the CPS Critical Path

has occurred resulting from the TIA.

6. The recommended guidelines that govern the Time Impact Analysis process can be

found within AACE International Recommneded Practice no. 52R-06. “Time Impact

Analysis – As Applied in Construction”, latest version.

3 PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 SCHEDULE DEVELOPMENT

A. CONTRACTOR’S BASELINE CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit three (3) electronic and four (4) hard copies of the

CONTRACTOR’S Baseline CPS.

a. The electronic copies will be formatted in PDF file type on 11”x17” layout.

CONSTRUCTION


b. The CONTRACTOR will also submit the CPS in electronic Primavera file format of

one of the following types: PRX, XER, and/or STX. Layout files shall also be

included with the electronic Primavera file format.

2. All CPS reviews provided to the CITY will be processed in accordance with Section 01

33 00 Submittals.

3. If revisions are requested by the CITY, the CONTRACTOR shall make appropriate

adjustments or revisions and shall re-submit the revised CONTRACTOR’S CPS for

review and approval.

4. If the CONTRACTOR makes changes or revisions additional to those requested by the

CITY, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a narrative for those revisions and illustrate the

resulting change and/or impact to the CPS Project Critical Path.

5. The CITY’s review is for compliance with the Contract Documents. The review shall not

extend to the CONTRACTOR’S means, methods, or techniques, which shall remain the

sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

6. Once the CONTRACTOR’S CPS is accepted it becomes the “Baseline”

CONTRACTOR’S CPS for the Work, and is the basis for:

a. Monitoring the CONTRACTOR’S progress against milestones and Contract Time.

b. Evaluation and reconciliation of extensions in Contract Time.

c. Review and acceptance of the CONTRACTOR'S Applications for Payment.

3.02 UPDATE OF THE CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. The cut-off date (Data Date) for the CPS Updates shall be determined prior to or at the

Preconstruction Meeting.

B. Construction Progress Schedule Update Submittals:

1. A current updated version of the CONTRACTOR’S CPS shall accompany (attached to)

each Application for Payment.

2. Neither the updating of the CONTRACTOR’S CPS, nor the updating of any report

submitted by the CONTRACTOR under this section shall have the effect of amending or

modifying, in any way, the Contract Time, Contract Completion Date, or Contract

Milestone Dates.

3. CPS calculation settings shall be as listed below (note: the below criteria only applies if

the CONTRACTOR utilizes Pimavera software).

a. Calculate start-to-start lag by using Early Start option.

b. Calculate Early Start using Contiguous activity duration option.

c. Calculate total float using most critical option.

d. Calculate critical activities and critical path shall be set to “Total Float” equal to or

less that zero.

e. Use Retained Logic

3.03 CONSTRCUTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE REVISIONS

A. If requested by the CITY, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a separate subnetwork schedule

within the CPS monthly update for each proposed revision showing the revised activities and

illustrate their proposed incorporation into the CONTRACTOR’S CPS.

CONSTRUCTION


3.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE RECOVERY

A. In the event that an updated CPS indicates that the Project, or a Milestone requirement, “falls

behind schedule or slips” and there is no change to support a time extension, CONTRACTOR

shall prepare and submit a CPS Recovery Schedule for review within five (5) working days

from the CITY’s request. The CPS Recovery Schedule shall consist of proposed revisions to

the CONTRACTOR’S CPS demonstrating how the CONTRACTOR intends to achieve all

contractual milestones, including contract completion dates, within the allotted Contract

Time. An accompanying CPS Narrative Report shall describe the cause/effect scenarios

related to the “schedule slip” and the actions planned by the CONTRACTOR to recover lost

time.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly undertake appropriate action at no additional cost to the

CITY to recover lost time. Appropriate recovery actions may include, but not be limited to,

assignment of additional labor and/or equipment, shift or overtime work, expediting of

submittals or deliveries, overlapping of activities or sequencing changes to increase activity

concurrence.

C. Lack of Action: In the sole discretion of the CITY, if the CONTRACTOR fails to take

appropriate recovery action and or submit a CPS Recovery Schedule in a timely manner, the

CITY may withhold payment to the CONTRACTOR until such time that the CITY deems

that the CONTRACTOR has in fact taken adequate and appropriate action to recover the

Project.

3.05 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE SUBMISSION AND REPORTING

REQUIREMENTS TABLE:

A. The reports required by this section are to be prepared and submitted by the CONTRACTOR

in accordance with Table 01 32 16-1 of this section.

Table 01 32 16-1: Table of Schedule Submittal Requirements


S

No.

DESCRIPTION

SUBMITTED

Prior to or AT

PRE-CON

SUBMITTED

MONTHLY or

as Requested by

the CITY

SUBMITTED

AS

SPECIFIED

1. Identification of Scheduling

Software and Scheduling personnel.

v

2. Baseline Construction Progress

Schedule

5 days prior

3. Construction Progress Schedule

Updates

v

4. Revised Construction Progress

Schedules/ CPS Recovery Schedules

v

5. CPS Time Impact Analysis Per CITY

6. CPS Narrative report v v

7. Other reports when requested Per CITY

CONSTRUCTION



SUBMITTALS 01 33 00-1 OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope

B. CONTRACTOR’s Responsibilities

C. Categories of Submittals

D. Transmittal Procedure

E. Review Procedure

F. Effect of Review of CONTRACTOR’s Submittals


A. Project Meetings are included in Section 01 31 19.

B. Operating and Maintenance Information is included in Section 01 78 23.

1.03 SCOPE

A. Submittals covered by these requirements include manufacturers’ information, shop drawings,

test procedures, test results, samples, requests for substitutions, and miscellaneous work-related

submittals.

B. Submittals shall also include, but not be limited to, all mechanical, electrical and electronic

equipment and systems, materials, reinforcing steel, fabricated items, and piping and conduit

details.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all drawings, specifications, descriptive data, certificates,

samples, tests, methods, schedules, and manufacturer's installation and other instructions as

specifically required in the Contract Documents and as required by the CITY, to demonstrate

fully that the materials and equipment to be furnished and the methods of work comply with the

provisions and intent of the Contract Documents.

D. Where a Submittal is required by the Contract Documents, any related Work performed by

CONTRACTOR prior to the CITY's review and approval of the Submittal shall be at the sole

expense and responsibility of CONTRACTOR.

1.04 CONTRACTOR’s RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information

contained in each Submittal and shall assure that the material, equipment or method of work

shall be as described in the Submittal. Data shown on the Submittal shall be complete with

respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and

similar data. Samples shall be accompanied by sufficient information to identify the supplier and


pertinent data such as catalog numbers.

B. As one of its initial submittals, to be provided at the pre-construction meeting, the

CONTRACTOR shall completely review the specifications and prepare a comprehensive

submittal register, listing the required submittals by specification section. This list shall be

submitted for approval, and once approved, will serve as the baseline for all ensuing

submissions. The register shall be updated on a monthly basis with current status of each

submittal and any proposed modifications to the submission schedule. Monthly updates shall be

submitted along with the monthly schedule updates.

The following Construction Submittal Register is a list of submittals that shall be reviewed and

updated by the Contractor as applicable to this project and be submitted to the City in accordance

with responsibilities of paragraph 1.04 B.

Construction Submittal Register

Submittal Specification Reference Due Date

Contractor’s Temporary

Bypass Plan

Section 01 14 00 Control of Work Two Weeks following

Notice of Award

Construction Progress

Schedule

Section 01 32 16 – Construction

Progress Schedule

Five days prior to

Preconstruction Meeting

Site Safety Plan Section 01 31 21 Site Safety Plan,

Project Meetings 01 31 19

Three days prior to

Preconstruction Meeting

Shop drawings Section 01 78 39 Record

Documents

Prior to delivery to project

site

C. The CONTRACTOR shall include with each submittal a copy of the appropriate Specification,

with Addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections with Addendum

updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate Specification compliance or

marked to indicate requested deviations from Specification requirements. Check-marks (√) shall

denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the Specifications are

indicated and, therefore requested by the CONTRACTER, each deviation shall be underlined

and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining

portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the

CONTRACTER with the Specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed,

written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up Specification

sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the Specification

requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal

with no further consideration.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall verify that all features of all products identified in Submittals

conform to the specified requirements.

E. Submittal documents shall be clearly edited to indicate only those items, models, or series of

equipment, which are being submitted for review.

F. All extraneous materials shall be crossed out or otherwise obliterated from Submittals.

G. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that there is no conflict with other Submittals and notify the


CITY in each case where a Submittal may affect the Work of another CONTRACTOR or the

CITY.

H. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate Submittals with the Work so that the Work will not be

delayed. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate and schedule different categories of Submittals, so

that one will not be delayed for lack of coordination with another. No extension of time will be

allowed because of failure to properly schedule Submittals.

I. The CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with Work related to a Submittal until the Submittal

process is complete. This requires that Submittals for review and comment shall be returned

from the CITY to the CONTRACTOR stamped “No Exceptions Taken” or “Make Corrections

Noted.”

J. The CONTRACTOR shall certify on each Submittal document that CONTRACTOR has

reviewed the Submittal, verified field conditions, and complied with the Contract Documents.

CONTRACTOR shall also determine and verify:

1. All field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,

installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information;

2. The suitability of all materials with respect to the intended use, fabrication, shipping,

handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and

3. All information relative to CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences and

procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.

K. The CONTRACTOR may authorize in writing a material or equipment supplier to deal directly

with the CITY with regard to a Submittal. These dealings shall be limited to interpretations of

the Contract Documents to clarify and expedite the Work.

L. CONTRACTOR shall submit to the CITY all Operation and Maintenance manuals and

related Product Data and Submittal information required in all applicable Specification

Sections a minimum of three (3) weeks prior to arrival of delivered equipment to the Plant

Site. No payment for equipment will be released to the CONTRACTOR until Operation and

Maintenance manuals and other specified Product Data and Submittal information are

received, and complete, based on the contract document requirements, by the CITY.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CATEGORIES OF SUBMITTALS

A. GENERAL: Submittals fall into two (2) general categories; submittals for review and comment,

and submittals which are primarily for information only. Submittals which are for information

only are generally specified as PRODUCT DATA in Part 2 of applicable Specification Sections.

CONTRACTOR shall provide two (2) separate lists: submittals for review and comment and

product data (submittals) for information only.

B. SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT: All submittals except where specified to be


submitted as product data for information only shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the

CITY or the CITY’s representative for review and comment.

C. SUBMITTALS (PRODUCT DATA) FOR INFORMATION ONLY: Where specified, the

CONTRACTOR shall furnish submittals (product data) to the CITY or the CITY’s

representative for Information only. Submittal requirements for operation and maintenance

manuals, which are included in this category, are specified in Section 01 78 23 Operating and

Maintenance Information.

3.02 TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE

A. GENERAL: In addition to the Contractor Submittal Cover Sheet, unless otherwise specified,

Submittals regarding material and equipment shall be accompanied by O & M Transmittal Form

in Reference Forms, specified in Section 01 33 19. Submittals for operation and maintenance

manuals, information and data shall be accompanied by Transmittal Form 01 78 23-A specified

in Reference Forms, Section 01 33 19. A separate form shall be used for each specific item,

class of material, equipment, and items specified in separate, discrete sections, for which the

Submittal is required. Submittal documents common to more than one piece of equipment shall

be identified with all the appropriate equipment numbers. Submittals for various items shall be

made with a single form when the items taken together constitute a manufacturer's package or

are so functionally related that expediency indicates checking or review of the group or package

as a whole.

B. SUBMITTAL NUMBER: A unique number, sequentially assigned, shall be noted on the

transmittal form accompanying each item submitted. Original Submittal numbers shall have the

following format: “XXX”; where “XXX” is the sequential number assigned by the

CONTRACTOR. Resubmittals shall have the following format: “XXX-Y”; where “XXX” is

the originally assigned Submittal number and "Y" is a sequential letter assigned for resubmittals,

i.e., A, B, or C being the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd resubmittals, respectively. Submittal 25B, for

example, is the second resubmittal of submittal 25.

C. DEVIATION FROM CONTRACT: If the CONTRACTOR proposes to provide material,

equipment, or method of work which deviates from the Contract Documents, the

CONTRACTOR shall indicate so under “deviations” on the transmittal form accompanying the

Submittal copies.

D. SUBMITTAL COMPLETENESS: Submittals which do not have all the information required to

be submitted, including deviations, are not acceptable and will be returned without review.

E. DOCUMENT CONTROL. All Submittals shall be transmitted to MSD Document Control.

Document Control will log and distribute submittals.

3.03 REVIEW PROCEDURE

A. GENERAL: Submittals are specified for those features and characteristics of materials,

equipment, and methods of operation which can be selected based on the CONTRACTOR’s

judgment of their conformance to the specified requirements. Other features and

characteristics are specified in a manner which enables the CONTRACTOR to determine

acceptable options without Submittals. The review procedure is based on the

CONTRACTOR’s guarantee that all features and characteristics not requiring Submittals

conform as specified. Review shall not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or

procedures of construction, or to verifying quantities, dimensions, weights or gages, or


fabrication processes (except where specifically indicated or required by the Contract

Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Review of a separate item,

as such, will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. When the

Contract Documents require a Submittal, the CONTRACTOR shall submit the specified

information as follows:

1. One (1) copy in electronic PDF format or an original copy shall be submitted to MSD

Document Control. When requested by the CITY, the CONTRACTOR shall also submit

one (1) CD containing the “native files” of electronic software used to generate the

submittal.

B. SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT: Unless otherwise specified, within thirty

five (35) calendar days after receipt of a Submittal for review and comment, the CITY or CITY’s

representative shall review the Submittal and return electronic copies reflecting all review

comments. The reproducible original will be retained by the CITY. The returned Submittal

shall indicate one of the following actions:

1. If the review indicates that the material, equipment or work method complies with the

Contract Documents, Submittal copies will be marked “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN.” In

this event, the CONTRACTOR may begin to implement the Work method or incorporate

the material or equipment covered by the Submittal.

2. If the review indicates limited corrections are required, copies will be marked “MAKE

CORRECTIONS NOTED.” The CONTRACTOR may begin implementing the work

method or incorporating the material and equipment covered by the Submittal in accordance

with the noted corrections. Where Submittal information will be incorporated in O&M data,

a corrected copy shall be provided.

3. If the review reveals that the Submittal is insufficient or contains incorrect data, copies will

be marked “AMEND AND RESUBMIT.” Except at his own risk, the CONTRACTOR

shall not undertake Work covered by this Submittal until it has been revised, resubmitted

and returned marked either “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or “MAKE CORRECTIONS

NOTED.”

4. If the review indicates that the material, equipment, or work method does not comply with

the Contract Documents, copies of the Submittal will be marked “REJECTED - SEE

REMARKS.” Submittals with deviations which have not been identified clearly may be

rejected. Except at his own risk, the CONTRACTOR shall not undertake the Work covered

by such Submittals until a new Submittal is made and returned marked either “NO

EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED.”

C. SUBMITTALS (PRODUCT DATA) FOR INFORMATION ONLY: Such information is not

subject to Submittal review procedures and shall be provided as part of the Work under the

Contract Documents and its acceptability determined under normal inspection procedures.

D. RESUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required by the

CITY or CITY's representative and shall return the required number of corrected copies of the

Submittal to CITY for review. CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention in writing to

revisions other than the corrections called for by the CITY or CITY's representative on previous

Submittals.

3.04 EFFECT OF REVIEW OF CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTALS


A. Review of Contract Documents, including the drawings, methods of work, or information

regarding materials or equipment the CONTRACTOR proposes to provide, shall not relieve the

CONTRACTOR of responsibility for errors therein and shall not be regarded as an assumption

of risks or liability by the CITY or the CITY’s representative, or by any officer or employee

thereof, and the CONTRACTOR shall have no claim under the Contract Documents on account

of the failure, or partial failure, of the method of work, material, or equipment so reviewed.

B. A mark of “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED” shall mean

that the CITY has no objection to the CONTRACTOR, upon his own responsibility, using the

plan or method of work proposed, or providing the materials or equipment proposed.


REFERENCE FORMS 01 33 19-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 33 19

REFERENCE FORMS

The forms listed below and included in this section are referenced from other sections of the project manual:

Form No. Title

01 26 00-A

01 26 00-B

01 26 00-C

01 26 00-D

01 31 19-A

Work Directive Change Form

Request for Information

Field Order

Request for Proposal

Cut-in Schedule Form

01 33 00-A Submittal Transmittal Form

01 75 03-A Equipment Test Report Form

01 78 23-A Operation and Maintenance Transmittal Form

01 78 23-B Equipment Record Form

01 78 23-C Equipment Record Form

26 00 00-A Cable Test Data Form

26 00 00-B Wire and Cable Resistance Test Data Form

26 00 00-C Installed Motor Test Data Form

26 00 00-D Dry Transformer Test Data Form

26 00 00-E Motor Control Center Test Form

26 00 00-F Circuit Breaker Schedule

40 00 00-A Loop Wiring and Insulation Resistance Test Data Form

40 00 00-B Control Circuit Piping Leak Test Form

40 00 00-C Controller Calibration Test Data Form

40 00 00-D Calibration Sheet

40 00 00-E Miscellaneous Instrument Calibration Test Data Form

40 00 00-F Individual Loop Test Data Form

40 00 00-G Loop Commissioning Test Data Form

44 00 00-A Manufacturer's Installation Certification Form

44 00 00-B Manufacturer's Instruction Certification Form

44 00 00-C Unit Responsibility Certification Form

44 00 00-D Motor Data Form


FORM INSTRUCTIONS

Work Directive Change (WDC) Form

These instructions offer step-by-step directions, including definition of terms, for

completing the above referenced form. Please fill out the form legibly or enter the data

directly into the document. Completed form must be submitted to Document Control.

Purpose of Form

Use the Work Directive Change form to direct

the Contractor to complete work for unforeseen

conditions or as a directive for changed work

provided prior to issuance of a Change Order.

Specific Instructions Fill out the form using the following guidelines

for each area listed below.

Preparer – Authorized Representative of the CITY

completing the form.

Contractor – Enter the name of contracting company

performing the construction work (Standard Entry).

Project Name & Number – Enter the MSD Project

name and number. The project number can be

obtained from the MSD Document Control if not

readily available.

Date – The date the form is being completed should

be entered here.

WDC# - The WDC number will be assigned by

Document Control to this specific form. Typically

the number will include the Project number and a

sequential WDC number from the previous submittal

(i.e., 10170780- WDC-0001, 10170780- WDC-0002,

and so on).

SUBJECT - The Preparer should provide a brief

description of the work and location. For Example,

IR WINDOWS IN THE MCC’S

BODY OF FORM - The Preparer shall provide a

thorough summary of the description and purpose of

the work. All back up documentation, e.g. Drawings

or Proposed Contract Modification Forms shall be

attached or included with the form for transmittal to

the Contractor.

Routing – Routing of the form will be dependent on

the Preparer or reason as follows:

Field Personnel – Providing the document for

unforeseen site conditions or emergency. The

Authorized Representative of the CITY will

issue the WDC directly to the Contractor.

However, prior to providing the WDC to the

Contractor, Document Control shall be contacted

to provide a WDC number.

All WDC’s issued in the field shall be provided

to Document Control within the following

business day.

Construction Manager/Project Manager –

Providing the WDC to issue additional work

prior to the generation of a Change Order.

Document Control will distribute the WDC to

the Contractor. Additionally the document(s)

will be uploaded to SharePoint and/or distributed

to all applicable MSD personnel, PMC Change

Management, and the Consulting Engineer.

How to Submit

After completion of the WDC form, the preparer

should ensure they have signed the Title Block

“Issued By.”

Please include any supporting documentation (i.e.,

proposed costs, drawings, etc) with the Work

Directive Change. If the WDC is based on T&M all

supporting documentation shall be obtained from the

Contractor and submitted to Document Control on a

regular basis.

When the WDC is submitted to the Contractor it is

expected that the Contractor is to sign and date the

document. A copy of the Contractor signed WDC

shall be provided to Document Control.

Please direct any questions regarding this form to

Document Control at the following address:

[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]


WDC – 001

WORK DIRECTIVE CHANGE

CONTRACTOR

PROJECT NAME & NO.

DATE

SUBJECT: In accordance with the Contract Documents detailing the Work Directive Change requirements,

you are directed to perform the following work:

Daily time sheets are to be submitted for verification by the CITY’s inspection personnel at the

end of each day on which the work is performed. A sample Daily Time Sheet is attached for your

reference. Please note this WDC is not to exceed $ and the CITY shall be

notified when the proposed total equals 75% of the not to exceed amount. Feel free to call (513)

244-5180 if you have any questions or comments. Upon completion of the work a Change Order

will be negotiated in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Attachments: Sample Daily Time Sheet

cc: MSD DOCUMENT CONTROL

MSD CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

MSD PROJECT MANAGER

Please acknowledge receipt of this memorandum by signing and returning one copy.

CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT

MSD CONSTRUCTION RECEIVED BY:

ISSUED BY:

TITLE:

TITLE:

DATE: TIME:

REVIEWED: (MSD)


REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

Date: Project Number: Contract Number:

RFI Number:

10230070-RFI-

To: MSDGC 1600 Gest Street Cincinnati, Ohio 45204

Attn: Document Control

From: Originator:

Reference or Affected Design Document(s):

Spec. Section:

Dwg. No.:

Subject:

Description of Request:

Additional information attached Yes No

Response needed by: Submitted by:

Designer Response:

Prepared by: Company: Date:


RFI Number: 10230070-RFI-

MSD WWT Response:


Project Manager Response:


1. Response Resolution Required Yes No

2. Propose to Change Contract Drawings Yes No

3. Additional Information Attached Yes No

Distribution (following disposition)

Project Manager Field Designer Contractor Document Control


FORM INSTRUCTIONS

Field Order (FO) Form



directly into the document. Completed form must be submitted to Document Control.

Purpose of Form

A written order issued which orders minor

changes in the work but which does not

involve a change in the contract price or the

contract time.



Preparer – Authorized Representative of the CITY.


be entered here.

To – Enter the name of contracting company

performing the construction work (Standard Entry).

Project Number – Enter the MSD Project number

associated with the Project site.

Contract Number – Enter the MSD contract number

associated with the Project name. This number can

be obtained from the MSD Document Control if not

readily available.

From – The form should always come from MSDGC.

This field should remain unchanged.

Originator – see “Preparer” above.

FO# - The Field Order number will be assigned by


the number will be the Project Number followed by

sequential order from the previous FO (i.e.,

10170780- FO-0001 and so on).

Subject - The Preparer should provide a brief


DELETE IR WINDOWS IN THE MCC

Description - The preparer shall provide a thorough summary of the work to be completed by the

Contractor. In addition any supporting contract

requirements should be included.

Routing – Distribution of the form will be dependant

on the preparer or reason as follows:

Field Personnel – Providing the document for

clarification of field discussion or issues. The

Authorized Representative of the CITY will

issue the FO directly to the Contractor.

All FO’s issued in the field shall be provided

to Document Control within the following

business day, Document Control will number

and distribute to all applicable personnel.

Consulting Engineer/Project Manager –

Providing the FO as a clarification to

correspondence from the Contractor.

Document Control will distribute the FO to the

Contractor. Additionally the document(s) will

be uploaded to SharePoint and distributed to

all applicable including; MSD personnel, PMC

Change Management, and the Consulting

Engineer.

How to Submit

After completion of the Field Order form, the

preparer should ensure they have signed the Title

Block “Issued By”.


proposed costs, drawings, etc) with the Field Order.

When the Field Order is submitted to the Contractor

it is expected that the Contractor is to sign and date

the document. A copy of the Contractor signed Field

Order shall be provided to Document Control.

Please direct any questions regarding this form to


[email protected]



FIELD ORDER

Date: Project Number: Contract Number:

Number: <Inserted by Doc. Control>

<Insert Project No.> -FO-

To:

From: MSDGC 1600 Gest Street Cincinnati, Ohio 45204

Originator:

Reference or Affected Design Document(s):

Spec. Section:

Dwg. No.:

The Field Order is issued in accordance with Contract Documents for the purpose of: interpret/clarify the Contract requirements, order minor changes in the Work and/or document trade-off agreements. MSDGC and the Contractor hereby agree that the work described by this Field Order is to be accomplished without change in Contract Price or Contract Time or claims of other costs. Contractor is to execute this Field Order and return it to the Construction Manager for execution within 24 hours of the time of receipt. Subject (for tracking purposes):

Description:

Distribution (following disposition) Project Manager Field Designer Contractor Document Control



MSDGC RECEIVED BY:

ISSUED BY:

TITLE:

TITLE:

DATE:

REVIEWED:


FORM INSTRUCTIONS

Request for (Contractor) Proposal (RFP) Form



directly into the document. Completed form must be submitted to Document Control for

routing to the Contractor.

Purpose of Form

Use the Request for Proposal form to request a

written proposal from the Contractor for changes

in the work.



Preparer – Individual or entity completing the form

typically the Project Manager.

Contractor – Enter the name of contracting company

performing the construction work.

Contract Number – Enter the MSD contract number

associated with the Project name. This number can

be obtained from the MSD Document Control if not

readily available.


be entered here.

RFP# - The RFP number will be assigned by


the number will be the Project Number followed by

sequential order from the previous RFP (i.e.,

10170780- RFP-0001, 10170780- RFP-0002 and so

on).

SUBJECT - The Preparer should provide a brief


IR WINDOWS IN THE MCC’S

BODY OF FORM - This section of the document

shall provide a thorough summary of the description

and purpose of the work. All back up documentation,

e.g. Drawings or Proposed Contract Modification

Forms. shall be attached or included with the form

for transmittal to the Contractor.

Routing – The Preparer will send the completed

document to MSD Document Control for

distribution. Upon receipt of the Contractor’s

proposal or other response, Document Control will

upload the document to SharePoint and distribute the

documents to applicable MSD personnel, PMC

Change Management, and the Consulting Engineer.

How to Submit

After completion of the RFP form, the preparer

should ensure they have signed the Title Block –

“Issued By.”


proposed costs, drawings, etc) with the Request for

Proposal. The Contractor should be informed the

RFP is to be submitted to Document Control.

Next, the document, and any supporting

documentation, should be provided to MSD

Document Control for distribution.

The Contractor may be advised that if they have any

questions regarding the form, they may contact


[email protected]



REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL

CONTRACTOR

PROJECT NAME & NO.

DATE

SUBJECT: In accordance with the Contract Documents you are requested to provide a proposal for the

following:

The Contractor’s proposal shall include the following information:

1. Labor required

2. Equipment required.

3. Products required.

a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost

b. Quantities required.

4. Any insurance, and bonds costs.

5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented.

6. Overhead and profit.

7. Justification for any change in Contract Time.

The Contractor’s proposal is due twenty one (21) days after the CITY issues this FRP. Upon

MSD’s -receipt of the proposal a negotiation meeting will be scheduled. Please feel free to call

me at (513) 244-5180 if you have any questions.

cc: MSD DOCUMENT CONTROL

MSD CONSTRUCTION MANAGER



MSD PROJECT MANAGER RECEIVED BY:

ISSUED BY:

TITLE:

TITLE:

DATE: TIME:

REVIEWED: (MSD)


Form 01 31 19-A

Metropolitan Sewer District of Greater Cincinnati

(Identify Project)

Contract No.________________________

CUT-IN SCHEDULE NO. _____________

Contractor:___________________________________________________________________

Description of Work:___________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Description of Operations to be Interrupted: _______________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Method of Work: ______________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Starting Date: ______________________ Starting Time: ______________________

Estimated Duration: __________ Days__________ Hours______________

_____________________________________________________________________________

APPROVALS

__________________________________ _________________________________________

Contractor Date The CITY’s Field Rep. Date

__________________________________ _________________________________________

The CITY Date Date


CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL COVER SHEET Metropolitan Sewer District of Greater Cincinnati

To: Attn:

Plans Procedures Shop Drawings Supplier’s Data Samples

Other____________________

Submittal No.

Spec Section Sequence No. Rev.

From:

Date:

New Submittal Resubmitted

Project ID No.:

Contract No.:

No. of Copies

Spec and Paragraph No.

Drawing Brochure

No.

TITLE/DESCRIPTION (Use a separate cover sheet for each submittal)

Items are transmitted as checked below: For information only For review & comment Other:

Contractor’s Remark/Comments ____________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ This certifies that all items submitted herewith have been checked by the Contractor, and are in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

Signature: _______________________________ Title: ___________________________________ Company: ___________________________________

Deviations/Variations/(if yes attach additional comments to explain) Yes No

Consultant Recommended Action Code

NET

MCN

A&R

R

Signature: _________________ _____________ Date:____________________

MSD WWT Action Code Concurrence

NET

MCN

A&R

R

Signature: _________________________________ Date:____________________

MSD PM Action Code Concurrence

NET

MCN

A&R

R

Signature:______________________________ Date:________________

ACTION CODES NET – NO EXCEPTION TAKEN MCN – MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED A&R – AMEND AND RESUBMIT R - REJECTED – SEE REMARKS

Form 01 33 00-A. See section 01 33 00 for action code descriptions and guidance.


EQUIPMENT TEST REPORT FORM Form 01 75 03-A Page 1 of 4

NOTE: This example equipment test report is provided for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR and is not

specific to any piece of equipment to be installed as a part of this project. The example is

furnished as a means of illustrating the level of detail required for the preparation of equipment

test report forms for this project.

(INSERT PROJECT TITLE)

[This 4-page form needs review and rework.]

________________________________ , CONTRACTOR

EQUIPMENT TEST REPORT

Equipment Name:

Equipment Number:

Specification Ref:

Location:

CONTRACTOR Engineer

Verified Date Verified Date

PREOPERATIONAL CHECKLIST

Mechanical

Lubrication

Alignment

Anchor bolts

Seal water system operational

Equipment rotates freely

Safety guards

Valves operational

Hopper purge systems operational

Sedimentation tank/hopper clean

O&M manual information complete

Manufacturer's installation certificate

complete


Form 01 75 03-A Page 2 of 4

CONTRACTOR Engineer


Electrical (circuit ring-out and high-pot tests)

Circuits:

Power to MCC

Control to HOA

Indicators at MCC:

Red (running)

Green (power)

Amber (auto)

Indicators

at local control panel

Wiring labels complete

Nameplates:

MCC

Control station

Control panel

Equipment bumped for rotation

Piping Systems

Cleaned and flushed:

Suction

Discharge

Pressure tests

Temp.piping screens in place

Instrumentation and Controls

Flowmeter calibration

Calibration Report No.__________

Flow recorder calibrated

against transmitter

VFD speed indicator calibrated against

independent reference

Discharge overpressure shutdown

switch calibration

Simulate discharge overpressure

Shutdown


Form 01 75 03-A Page 3 of 4

CONTRACTOR Engineer


FUNCTIONAL TESTS

Mechanical

Motor operation temperature

satisfactory

Pump operating temperature

Satisfactory

Unusual noise, etc?

Pump operation:

Measurement:

Flow

Pressure _______________ Test gage number __________________

Alignment hot

Dowelled in

Remarks:

Electrical

Local switch function:

Runs in HAND

No control power in OFF

Timer control in AUTO

Overpressure protection switch

functional in both

HAND and AUTO

Overpressure protection switch

set at 75 psig

set at 24-hour cycle,

25 min ON

OPERATIONAL TEST

48-hour continuous test. Pump cycles as

specified, indicators functional, con-

trols functional, pump maintains capac-

ity, overpressure protection remains

functional, hour meter functional


01 75 03-A Page 4 of 4

RECOMMENDED FOR BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY

Engineer Date

ACCEPTED FOR BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY

The CITY’s Representative Date


01 78 23-A. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRANSMITTAL FORM:

Date: Submittal No:1

To: Contract No:

Spec. Section:

Submittal Description:

From:

Attention:

CONTRACTOR Engineer

Checklist Satisfactory N/A Accept Deficient

1. Table of contents

2. Equipment record forms

3. Manufacturer information

4. Vendor information

5. Safety precautions

6. Operator prestart

7. Start-up, shutdown, and postshutdown procedures

8. Normal operations

9. Emergency operations

10. Operator service requirements

11. Environmental conditions

12. Lubrication data

13. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

14. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

15. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams

16. Maintenance and repair procedures

17. Removal and replacement instructions

18. Spare parts and supply list

19. Corrective maintenance man-hours

20. Parts identification

21. Warranty information

22. Personnel training requirements

23. Testing equipment and special tool information

Remarks:

CONTRACTOR’s Signature

1See paragraph 01 33 00, Transmittal Procedure.


01 78 23-B. EQUIPMENT RECORD FORM:

EQUIP DESCRIP EQUIP LOC

EQUIP NO. SHOP DWG NO. DATE INST COST

MFR MFR CONTACT

MFR ADDRESS PHONE

VENDOR VENDOR CONTACT

VENDOR ADDRESS PHONE

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS D W M Q S A Hours

LUBRICANTS: RECOMMENDED:

ALTERNATIVE:

MISC. NOTES:

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS ELECTRICAL NAMEPLATE DATA

PART

NO.

QUAN

.

PART NAME COST EQUIP

MAKE

SERIAL NO. ID NO.

MODEL NO. FRAME NO.

HP V AMP HZ

PH RPM SF DUTY

CODE INSL. CL DES TYPE

NEMA

DES

C AMB TEMP RISE RATING

MISC.

MECHANICAL NAMEPLATE DATA

EQUIP

MAKE

SERIAL NO. ID NO.

MODEL NO. FRAME NO.

HP RPM CAP SIZE

TDH IMP SZ BELT NO. CFM

PSI ASSY NO. CASE NO.

MISC


01 78 23-C. EQUIPMENT RECORD FORM:

EQUIP DESCRIP EQUIP LOC

EQUIP NO. SHOP DWG NO. DATE INST COST

MFR MFR CONTACT

MFR ADDRESS PHONE

VENDOR VENDOR CONTACT

VENDOR ADDRESS PHONE

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS D W M Q S A Hours


26 00 00-A, CABLE TEST DATA FORM

Project and Location _____________________ Project No.______________________

Circuit Designation ______________________ Date______________________

Application of Test Voltage

The initially applied direct-current voltage shall be not greater than 3.0 times the rated alternating-current

voltage. The rate of increase from the initially applied voltage to the specified test voltage shall be not over 100

percent in 10 seconds nor less than 100 percent in 60 seconds. The duration of the direct-current voltage test

shall be 15 minutes for shielded cables and 5 minutes for non shielded cables.

Test Curve

Current

in

Microamperes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Time in Minutes After 100% Test Voltage is Applied

NOTES:

1. Plot results of test on all three phases on this graph.

2. Assign and indicate values for each division on the microamperes scale as required for the circuit being tested.

DC TEST DATA

Time in

Minutes After

100% Test

Voltage is

Applied

Current pA

Phase A Phase B Phase C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

kV dc after 1 min

Decay

Project No. _______________________________

Date: _______________________________

DC Test Voltage ___________________________

Cable Installation New ____ Used ____ Years ____

Cable Size ______________ Length _____________

Open kv _____ Grounded _____ Ungrounded _____

Rated Cable Voltage

____________________________

Insulation Wall ________________________________

(Type & Thickness)

Conductor Jacket Wall __________________________

(Type & Thickness)

Shield _______________________________________

(Type)

Cable Manufacturer ____________________________

Temperature _____________ Humidity ___________

Type of Termination ___________________________

Type of Splice & Location _______________________

_____________________________________________

Remarks _____________________________________


26 00 00-B. WIRE AND CABLE RESISTANCE TEST DATA FORM:

Wire or Cable No.: Temperature, oF

Insulation

Resistance,

Location of Test megohms

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

CERTIFIED Date

CONTRACTOR’s Representative

WITNESSED Date

The CITY’s Representative


26 00 00-C. INSTALLED MOTOR TEST FORM:

Motor Equipment Number Date of test Equipment Driven MCC Location

Ambient temp _______oF

Resistance:

Insulation resistance phase-to-ground, megohms:

Phase A , Phase B , Phase C Current at Full Load:

Phase Current, amps

Phase Current, amps

Phase Current, amps Thermal Overload Device: Manufacturer/catalog # Amperes

Circuit breaker (MCP) setting:

Motor Nameplate Markings:

Mfr Mfr type __ Frame ______ HP_____

Volts _______ Phase _______ RPM _______ **Service factor ________

Amps ______ Freq ______ Ambient temp rating _______ oC

Time rating **Design letter

(NEMA 1-10.35) (NEMA MG-1.16)

Code letter Insulation class

**Required for 3-phase squirrel cage induction motors only.

CERTIFIED Date


WITNESSED Date



26 00 00-D. DRY TRANSFORMER TEST DATA FORM:

Equipment No. Temperature

Location

Winding: Primary Secondary

A. INSULATION-RESISTANCE TEST:

The test shall be made with a megohmmeter at the test voltage for a period of 1 minute.

Test results (megohms)

Voltage rating Test voltage Phase Phase

0-600 1000 A-GRD _____ A-B ____

601-5000 2500 B-GRD _____ B-C ____

5000+ 5000 C-GRD _____ C-A ____

Resistance readings less than the manufacturer's recommended value or less than 10 megohms shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Engineer.

B. DIELECTRIC-ABSORPTION TEST:

The test shall be made with a megohmmeter at the test voltage for a period of 10 minutes.

1. TEST RESULTS: Phase Phase

(megohms) A-GRD _____ A-B _____ B-GRD _____ B-C _____

C-GRD _____ C-A _____

2. POLARIZATION INDEX:

(from paragraph “A” above)

Phase Phase

A-GRD _____ A-B ____

B-GRD _____ B-C ____

C-GRD _____ C-A ____

Polarization index values less than 2 shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Engineer.

CERTIFIED Date


WITNESSED Date


index onpolarizati = reading minute 1

reading minute 10


26 00 00-E. MOTOR CONTROL CENTER TEST FORM:

Equipment No. Ambient room temperature

Location

A. MECHANICAL CHECK:

All bolted connections, either bus to bus or cable to bus, shall be tightened according to the documented

torque recommendation of the manufacturer.

B. ELECTRICAL TESTS:

1. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase to phase and phase to ground

for 1 minute using a megohmmeter at 1000 volts.

Test results (megohms)

Phase Phase

A-GRD A-B

B-GRD B-C

C-GRD C-A

2. Set the circuit breaker in the starter unit to comply with the requirements of NEC,

Article 430-52 and Table 430-152.

3. Motor overload heater elements shall be sized and installed based on the actual

nameplate full load amperes of the motor connected to the starter.

CERTIFIED Date


WITNESSED Date



26 00 00-F CIRCUIT BREAKER SCHEDULE

Westinghouse

Type

G. E.

Type

Square D

Type

Max,

Amps

Type

Trips

Interrupting Rating

Sys. RMS Amps

120V

208/240V

480V

(I) Interchangeable Trips

(N) Noninterchangeable Trips

(A) Adjustable Magnetic Trips

(G) With built-in ground fault protection

(S) Circuit breaker with adjustable pickup and delay for long-time, short-time, instantaneous

And ground fault with fault indication.

* Magnetic only for individual motor circuits only.


40 00 00-A. LOOP WIRING AND INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST DATA FORM:

Loop No.:

List all wiring associated with a loop in table below. Make applicable measurements as indicated after

disconnecting wiring.

Continuity

Resistance a Insulation Resistance

b

Wire Panel Field Cond./ Cond./ Shield/ Shield/ Cond./ Shield/

No. Tie TB Cond. Shield Gnd. Cond. Gnd. Shield

A -- (A/SH)

B (A/B) --

C (A/C) --

D (A/D) --

(Etc.)

a. Continuity Test. Connect ohmmeter leads between wires A and B and jumper

opposite ends together. Record resistance in table. Repeat procedure between A

and C, A and D, etc. Any deviation of +2 ohms between any reading and the

average of a particular run indicates a poor conductor, and corrective action shall be

taken before continuing with the loop test.

b. Insulation Test. Connect one end of a 500 volt megger to the panel ground bus and

the other sequentially to each completely disconnected wire and shield. Test the

insulation resistance and record each reading.

CERTIFIED Date


WITNESSED Date



40 00 00-B. CONTROL CIRCUIT PIPING LEAK TEST FORM:

Loop No.:

List tubing associated with loop in table below. Make applicable measurements after isolating any air

consuming pilots from circuit.

Tube No.

Tubing Equivalent

Length of 1/4-Inch

Coppera

Test Period

(seconds)

Permitted Pressure

Drop (psi)b

Measured

Pressure Drop

(psi)

A

B

C

D

(Etc.)

a. Convert actual tubing and air motor volume to equivalent 1/4-inch copper tubing.

b. Pressure drop shall not exceed 1 psi per hundred feet 1/4-inch tubing per 5 seconds.

CERTIFIED Date


WITNESSED Date



40 00 00-C. CONTROLLER CALIBRATION TEST DATA FORM:

Tag No. and Description:

Make and Model No.:________________________________ Serial No.:________________________

Input:_________________________________ Process Variable (PV) Scale: _______________________

Output:________________________________ Output Scale: ___________________________________

PV Scale Calibration

Expected Actual

% of Range Input Reading Reading % Deviation

0

50

100

% Deviation Allowed:

Connect output to PV for following tests:

Set Point (SP) Indicator Accuracy Output Meter Accuracy Controller Accuracy

SP

PV

Reading

Expected

% Dev.

Actual

Reading

Expected

Reading

Actual

% Dev. Output Output % Dev.

(0%)

(50%)

(100%)

%Dev. Allowed: __________ % Dev. Allowed:___________ % Dev. Allowed:___________

CERTIFIED Date


WITNESSED Date



40 00 00-D. CALIBRATION SHEET

Location Number: Asset Number: Loop / Unit:

Location:

Description:

Tag I.D.: P&ID: Loop Diagram:

Mfg.: Model Number: Serial Number:

Adjustable Range: Calibration Range:

Comments:

0BU

Calibration Check:U

% Deviation Allowed: ________________

Before Calibration After Calibration

Input

(Units)

Expected

Output

Actual

Output

% Deviation Expected

Output

Actual Output %

Deviation

0%

25%

50%

75%

100%

75%

50%

25%

0%

PC reading = Instrument reading =

Switch or relay Test:

Switch / Relay Point

Setting Deadband Setting Upscale Downscale

1BTrip point 1

Trip point 2

Trip point 3

I hereby certify that the above information is true, and that the above instrument / Loop have been

tested and calibrated in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

Calibrator Signature Date

Calibration Witnessed: Yes No Witness Signature

Reviewer Date

MSD - 03/08/2010


40 00 00-E. MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION TEST DATA FORM:

(For instruments not covered by any of the preceding test forms, the CONTRACTOR shall create a form

containing all necessary information and calibration procedures.)

CERTIFIED Date


WITNESSED Date



40 00 00-F. INDIVIDUAL LOOP TEST DATA FORM:

Loop No.:

Description: (Give complete description of loop's function using tag numbers where appropriate.)

P&ID No.: (Attach copy of P&ID.)

a. Wiring tested:

(Attach test form 13000-A)

b. Instrumentation tubing/piping tested:

(Attach test form 13000-B)

c. Instruments calibrated:

(Attach test forms 13000-C through I)

d. List step-by-step procedures for testing loop parameters. Test loop with instruments,

including transmitters and control valves, connected and functioning. If it is not possible to

produce a real process variable, then a simulated signal may be used with the Engineer’s

approval.

CERTIFIED Date


WITNESSED Date



40 00 00-G. LOOP COMMISSIONING TEST DATA FORM:

Loop No.:

a. Loop tested:

(Attach test form 13000-J)

b. Controlled or connected equipment tests confirmed:

c. Give complete description of loop's interface with process.

d. With associated equipment and process in operation, provide annotated chart trace of loop

response to changes in set points for verification of performance. This chart should

demonstrate 1/4-amplitude damping as output adjusts to set point change. Show set points,

starting and finishing times on chart, as well as any other pertinent data.

Connect 2-pen recorder to process variable (PV) and to controller output. Use 1 inch/second

chart speed.

Pen 1 – PV – Connections:

Pen 2 – Output – Connections:

CERTIFIED_______________________________ Date ____________________


WITNESSED ______________________________ Date: _____________________



44 00 00-A. MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FORM:

Contract No: Specification Section:

Equipment name:

CONTRACTOR:

Manufacturer of equipment item:

The undersigned manufacturer of the equipment item described above hereby certifies that he has

checked the installation of the equipment and that the equipment, as specified in the Contract Documents, has

been provided in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and that the trial operation of the

equipment item has been satisfactory.

Comments:

Date Manufacturer

Signature of Authorized Representative

Date CONTRACTOR



44 00 00-B. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTION CERTIFICATION FORM:

Contract No: Specification section: __________________

Equipment name:

CONTRACTOR:

Manufacturer of equipment item:

The undersigned manufacturer certifies that a service engineer has instructed the designated the City

personnel in the proper maintenance and operation of the equipment designated herein.

Operations Check List (check appropriate spaces)

Start-up procedure reviewed

Shutdown procedure reviewed

Normal operation procedure reviewed

Others:

Maintenance Check List (check appropriate spaces)

Described normal oil changes (frequency)

Described special tools required

Described normal items to be reviewed for wear

Described preventive maintenance instructions

Described greasing frequency

Others:

Date Manufacturer


Date Signature of the CITY’s Representative

Date Signature of CONTRACTOR’s Representative


44 00 00-C. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY CERTIFICATION FORM

(Job Title)

CERTIFICATE OF UNIT RESPONSIBILITY

for Specification Section

(Section title)

In accordance with the contract documents, the undersigned manufacturer

accepts unit responsibility for all components of equipment furnished under

specification Section . We hereby certify that these components are

compatible and comprise a functional unit suitable for the specified performance

and design requirements.

Notary Public Name of Corporation

Commission expiration date Address

Seal: By:

Duly Authorized Official

Legal Title of Official

Date:


44 00 00-D. MOTOR DATA FORM:

Equipment Name Equipment No. (s)

Site Location

Nameplate Markings

Mfr Mfr Model Frame HP

Volts Phase RPM Service factor

FLA LRA Freq Amb temp rating ______degrees C

Time rating Design letter

(NEMA MG1-10.35) (NEMA MG-1.16)

KVA code letter Insulation class

The following information is required for explosion proof motors only:

A. Approved by UL for installation in Class _____, Div _______

B. UL frame temperature code ______; Group _______ Atmosphere

(NEC Tables 500-2 and 500-2(b))

The following information is required for all motors 1/2 horsepower and larger:

A. Guaranteed minimum efficiency

(paragraph 11060-2.04 G)

B. Nameplate or nominal efficiency

Data Not Necessarily Marked on Nameplate

Type of enclosure Enclosure material

Temp rise degrees C (NEMA MG1-12.41,42)

Space heater included?_______ Yes _______ No; If Yes: ______watts ______volts

Type of motor winding overtemperature protection, if specified:

Use the space below to provide additional information on other motor modifications, if specified:

INSTALLATION AND

ERECTION DATA 01 33 23-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 33 23

INSTALLATION AND ERECTION DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope

B. Submission


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Documents, including General Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections including Specification Section 01 35 00 – Special Provisions,

apply to this Section.


1.03 SCOPE

A. Installation and erection data are defined written instructions; drawings; illustrative, wiring and

schematic diagrams; diagrams identifying external connections, terminal block numbers and

internal wiring; and all other information pertaining to installation and erection of materials and

equipment that is not specifically to be furnished with the Submittals. Included are the installation

of storage instructions that are usually attached to equipment by the manufacturer upon shipment

and for which approval by the CITY is not required.

B. The original instructions which are shipped with the equipment shall be removed and transferred

to the CONTRACTOR's field office as soon as the equipment is delivered or uncrated.

1.04 SUBMISSION

A. Within five days after receipt of such information, the CONTRACTOR shall submit three (3)

copies of all such data to the CITY for each piece of equipment for which the manufacturer

supplies such information. Data shall be acceptably identified and accompanied with a letter of

transmittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED


INSTALLATION AND

ERECTION DATA 01 33 23-2 SEPTEMBER 2013


SPECIAL PROVISIONS 01 35 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 35 00

SPECIAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Installation of Equipment.

B. Grease, Oil and Fuel.

C. Tools.

D. Spare Parts.


A. Submittals are included in Section 01 33 00.

B. Equipment Operating and Maintenance Manual Information is included in Section 01 78 23.

1.03 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate installation of all equipment and appurtenances required for a

complete functioning, including, but not limited to:

1. Raw Sewage Pump Station

2. Influent Screens

3. Grit Removal Structure and System

4. Aeration Basins

5. Secondary Clarifier Splitter Box

6. Secondary Clarifiers

7. Aerobic Digesters

8. Operations Building

9. Influent and Effluent Sampling

10. Drains and Drain Pump System and

11. Effluent Flow Measurement

12. SCADA System Software Alarms

B. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment with particular reference to

the pumps and electric drives. All equipment shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by

qualified millwrights after their sole plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the anchor

bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened against the shims. After the


foundation alignments have been approved by the CITY, the bedplates or wing feet of the

equipment shall be securely bolted in place. The alignment of equipment shall be further checked

after securing to the foundations, and after conformation of all alignments, the sole plates shall be

finally grouted in place. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the exact alignment of

equipment with associated piping and under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be allowed.

C. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, grout, or other materials necessary to properly

align, level and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR. All parts

intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so. Perform all grinding necessary to bring

parts to proper bearing after erection.

1.04 GREASE, OIL AND FUEL

A. All grease, oil and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished with the respective

equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the CITY a year's supply of required lubricants

including grease and oil of the type recommended by the manufacturer with each item of

equipment supplied under Divisions 2 through 48 in the quantity recommended for storage by the

manufacturer.

1.05 TOOLS

A. Any special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) which may be necessary for

the adjustment, operation and maintenance of any equipment shall be furnished by

CONTRACTOR to the CITY with the respective equipment.

B. Tools shall be furnished by CONTRACTOR in heavy steel tool boxes complete with lock and

duplicate keys.

1.06 SPARE PARTS

A. Where spare parts are specified in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall furnish all

spare parts recommended by the manufacturer or system supplier for one year of service. In

addition, CONTRACTOR shall furnish all spare parts itemized in each Specification Section.

B. CONTRACTOR shall collect and store all spare parts in an area to be designated by the CITY.

CONTRACTOR shall furnish the CITY with an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment

they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier and the delivered cost of each item.

Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be furnished by CONTRACTOR with the inventory

to substantiate the delivery cost.

C. Spare parts shall be packed in cartons, properly labeled with indelible markings with complete

descriptive information including manufacturer, part number, part name and equipment for which

the part is to be used and shall be properly treated for one year of storage.

1.07 WEATHER PROTECTION

A. In the event of inclement weather, the CONTRACTOR, and his subcontractors, shall protect the

Work and materials from damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the CITY, any

portion of the Work or materials has been damaged by reason of failure on the part of the

CONTRACTOR, or his subcontractors, to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be

removed and replaced with new materials and Work to the satisfaction of the CITY.


2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT USED

3 PART 3 – EXECUTION

NOT USED


APPLICABLE CODES 01 42 19-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 42 19

APPLICABLE CODES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

1.02 SCOPE

A. All materials, equipment, products and construction procedures used during the execution of the

Contract Documents or incorporated in the Work shall comply with the latest provisions of

applicable codes, regulations, and standards. A partial listing includes the following:

1. Ohio Basic Building Code.

2. Local Building Codes.

3. National Fire Codes.

4. Regulations and Standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), of the U.S.

Department of Labor, and of the State.

5. National Electrical Code.

6. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

7. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association.

8. American National Standards Institute.

9. American Society for Testing Materials.

10. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers.

11. American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

12. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.

13. All other applicable codes, regulations listed in the Specifications, and standards of utility

companies.

B. Specific provisions of codes, regulations and standards may be referenced in the Contract

Documents to assist the CONTRACTOR and identify options selected for the design of the

Project. Such references do not relieve the CONTRACTOR from compliance with other

applicable provisions of the codes, regulations and standards not specifically referenced in the

Contract Documents.

C. In case of discrepancy, applicable codes shall govern over the Contract Documents. The

CONTRACTOR shall notify the CITY in writing of any discrepancy(ies) noted before proceeding

with the related Work.

APPLICABLE CODES 01 42 19-2 SEPTEMBER 2013

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED


NOT USED


CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 16-1 OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 01 45 16

CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Related Sections

B. Definable Features of Work

C. Three Phases of Quality Control Inspection

D. Quality Control Organization

E. Quality Testing and Inspection

F. Quality Reporting


A. Submittals (01 33 00)

B. Request for Substitution (Material and Installation Method)

C. Request for Information

D. Commissioning (01 75 00 – 01 75 06)

E. Testing Laboratory Services (01 45 29)

1.03 DEFINABLE FEATURES OF WORK (DFOW)

A. A DFOW results in a physical product, can be identified by a unique trade or a set of

coordinated trades, and requires a distinct set of quality control activities.

B. The CONTRACTOR is required to prepare a list of DFOW for the project.

C. DFOW Selection Process:

1. Begin developing the DFOW list by looking at each technical specification section.

2. Add to or replace general category task with tasks that meet the following criteria:

a. It requires quality controls such as inspections

b. It has operations, work crews, or disciplines unique to the task

c. It is a critical path activity on the schedule

d. It is monitored by inspection personnel

D. For Construction Projects which require Commissioning, at a minimum DFOWs shall align

with Specification Section 01 75 00 through 01 75 06.

1.04 THREE PHASES OF QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION

A. GENERAL

1. Contractor Quality Control (CQC) is the means by which the CONTRACTOR ensures

that the construction, including that of subcontractors and suppliers, complies with the

requirements of the contract.


2. The core of the CQC Plan is the implementation of Three Phases of Quality Control

Inspection to be conducted by the Quality Control Manager and designated Quality

Control Specialists for each DFOW.

B. THREE PHASES OF QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION

1. PREPARATORY

a. This phase shall be performed PRIOR TO BEGINNING work on each DFOW, after

all required documents and materials are approved/accepted, and after copies are at

the work site.

b. The QUALITY CONTROL MANAGER shall conduct a Preparatory Phase

Meeting attended by the Construction Superintendent, other QC Specialists,

Foreman (Subcontractor), City Construction Management, City Safety, and other

pertinent CITY representatives.

c. The following items are discussed at the Preparatory Phase Meeting as prompted by

the Preparatory Phase Meeting Checklist:

(1) Review of each paragraph of applicable specifications, reference codes, and

standards.

(2) Review of Contract Drawings

(3) Verify submittal(s) approval

(4) Physical examination of material and equipment based on shop drawings and

approved submittals.

(5) Discussion of procedures for construction:

(a). Review of the detailed sequence of the execution of the work.

(b). Review testing plan

(6) Examination of the work area to assure that all required preliminary work has

been completed and is in compliance with the contract.

(7) Review of applicable Safety requirements

d. Meeting Minutes shall be recorded and attached to the QC Daily Report.

e. Repeat Preparatory meeting and initial inspection if:

(1) Deficiencies persist

(2) Work on a DFOW resumes after a long pause

(3) Large turnover in construction crew

2. INITIAL

a. This phase shall be performed at the beginning of each DFOW and repeated for

each new workman or crews assigned to work on site or when level of

workmanship is not being met.

b. The QUALITY CONTROL MANAGER shall conduct an Initial Phase Meeting

attended by the Construction Superintendent, other QC Specialists, Foreman

(Subcontractor), City Construction Management, City Safety, and other pertinent

CITY representatives.

c. Meeting Minutes shall be recorded and attached to the QC Daily Report.

d. The following items are discussed at the Initial Phase meeting as prompted by the

Initial Phase Checklist:

(1) Review the minutes of the Preparatory Meeting and verify that the work

complies with the design documents (i.e. submittals, specifications and/or shop


drawings)

(2) Check all Preliminary work is done

(3) Resolve all differences and deficiencies

(4) Establish quality required to ensure full contract compliance

(5) Ensure testing is performed

(6) Review approved Safety Plan – check for enforcement

(7) Provide documentation of the previous inspection of the work area.

(8) Re-examine the work area for compliance.

3. FOLLOW-UP

a. Daily checks performed by Contractor Quality Control personnel during progress of

the DFOW.

b. Performed to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements, including

control testing, until completion of the particular work activity.

(1) Ensure testing reports are submitted

(2) Ensure reworks are completed

c. CQC personnel continually refer back to standards set in Preparatory Meeting and

Initial Inspection.

d. Control safety and workmanship of testing until completion of DFOW

e. Final follow-up checks shall be conducted, and all noted deficiencies corrected,

prior to the start of additional features of work that may be affected by the deficient

work.

f. The checks shall be made a matter of record in the Contractor QC Daily Report.

1.05 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION

A. CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY

1. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the quality of all materials and Work including

the Work of its Subcontractors, vendors and suppliers; and for assuring that the quality

of Work specified in the Contract Documents is achieved.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide evidence/documentation that all items have been

submitted, tested, inspected, accepted, etc. and that each step was conducted in the

appropriate time frame to control work as it progresses.

1.06 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION

A. It is the CITY’s intent that the workforce supplied by the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors,

Suppliers, Manufacturers and Independent Testing Agencies for the Project meets or

exceeds certain minimum experience qualifications, and that this experience can be

documented based on other previous projects similar in size and scope to the Project. The

CONTRACTOR shall provide evidence to demonstrate compliance with the minimum

experience qualifications required herein upon request of the CITY. Whenever the Contract

Documents use the terms listed below, CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the minimum

experience qualifications stated below shall be met or exceeded by CONTRACTOR,

Subcontractors, and Suppliers.

B. Minimum Personnel and Experience Requirements:

1. QUALITY CONTROL MANAGER – Confirm on resume at least 5 years of related


experience in quality control inspection on construction projects.

2. QUALITY CONTROL SPECIALISTS – Confirm on resume at least 2 years of related

experience under the direction of a Project Manager, Construction Superintendent, or

Quality Control Manager.

3. CONSTRUCTION SUPERINTENDENT – Confirm on resume either a degreed

graduate of engineering, architecture or construction management with 5 years of

related experience or 10 years of relevant experience.

4. PROJECT MANAGER – Confirm on resume either a degreed graduate of engineering,

architecture or construction management with 5 years of related experience or 10 years

of relevant experience.

5. SITE SAFETY MANAGER – Confirm on resume at least 5 years of related experience.

6. FOREMAN – Confirm on resume at least 5 years of related experience.

7. INSTALLERS/LABORERS - Confirm on resume at least 2 years of related experience

working under the direction of a Project Manager or Construction Superintendent.

Provide copy of current license and/or certification to drive/operate the type of

vehicle/equipment which they drive/operate either on-site or off-site.

8. MANUFACTURERS - Provide documentation of having a minimum of 5 years’

experience in manufacture and successful start-up of the specified equipment/design

demonstrated by submitting at list of 5 similar projects completed within the last 5 years

including project names, addresses, contact names, addresses & telephone numbers of

owners and any other type of information specified or requested by the CITY.

9. INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCIES - Provide documentation of having a

minimum of 5 years’ experience performing the specified independent testing required

by the Contract Documents for review and approval by the CITY. Submit a list of 5

similar projects completed within the last 5 years including project names, addresses,

contact names, addresses & telephone numbers of owners and any other type of

information specified or requested by the CITY.

C. Quality Control Manager

1. The Quality Control (QC) Manager will be responsible for overseeing overall

implementation of the Quality Control Plan and will coordinate all project testing,

inspections and reporting matters directly with the Project Manager. The QC Manager

has the authority to intercede directly and stop unsatisfactory work and control further

processing, delivery or installation of non-conforming material.

2. Responsibilities include but are not limited to:

a. Preparation, approval and implementation of the CQC Plan

b. Verification of materials as per project plans and specifications

c. Development of means and methods to store and protect materials

d. Preparation of acceptable documentation of CQC activities

e. Maintain documentation of inspection status of materials

f. Maintain documentation for material and administrative approvals

g. Ensure that all materials and construction are in accordance with the requirements

for the completeness, accuracy and constructability in accordance with applicable

building codes

h. Carry out and participate in weekly progress and QC meetings.


i. Maintain documentation of inspection of work executed by subcontractors

j. Stopping Work

D. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the CQC staff at full strength at all times. When it is

necessary to make changes to the CQC staff, the CONTRACTOR shall revise the CQC plan

reflecting the organizational changes and submit to the CITY for acceptance.

1.07 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform inspections, tests, and other services as required by the

Contract Documents, the approved CQC Program, and in accordance with laws, codes,

rules, and regulations and document the results on checklists as described herein.

B. CONTRACTOR shall provide written notice three (3) days prior to any on Site tests so that

the CITY may witness the CONTRACTOR and/or Subcontractors on Site tests. The CITY’s

witnessing of tests does not relieve the CONTRACTOR and/or Subcontractors of their

obligation to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall develop an inspection and test schedule identifying all required

inspections and tests as indicated in the Contract Documents and the approved CQC

Program. The CONTRACTOR shall provide one copy of test and inspection results to the

CITY’s representative witnessing the test, and retain, file and turnover the original

inspection and test results in accordance with Section 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain control over construction and installation processes to

assure compliance with specified requirements. In-process and final inspection and testing

of the Work shall be performed in accordance with written quality control, testing, and

inspection procedures to assure that the requirements of the Contract Documents have been

met.

E The results of all inspections shall be recorded on inspection checklists developed by the

CONTRACTOR and approved in writing by the CITY.

1.08 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals, if needed, shall be made as specified in section 01 33 00.

B. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for certifying that all submittals and deliverables are in

compliance with the contract requirements.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 DELIVERABLES

A. CQC Plan

B. All quality records that are to be developed and turned over to the CITY in accordance with

Specification Section 01 77 00 Contract Closeout.


3.01 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN

A. A required MSD CQC Plan template is available at http://www.msdgc.org/customer_care/forms_and_documents/capital_project_resource_library/index.html

http://www.msdgc.org/customer_care/forms_and_documents/capital_project_resource_library/index.html

http://www.msdgc.org/customer_care/forms_and_documents/capital_project_resource_library/index.html


B. The CONTRACTOR shall develop and maintain a CONTRACTOR’S Quality Control

(CQC) Plan that is responsive to the requirements of this Specification Section, and includes

procedures necessary to assure compliance with the requirements of the Contract

Documents.

C. The CQC Plan and implementing procedures for quality control of Work, including but not

limited to each identified DFOW, shall be submitted to the CITY for written approval prior

to commencement of the Work but no later than thirty (30) days following receipt of the

Notice to Proceed, whichever occurs first.

D. The CQC Program shall explain the CONTRACTOR’S approach to on-site quality control,

off-site quality control, the CQC organization, documentation of the CONTRACTOR and

its Subcontractors quality control activities, and provide all other information necessary to

demonstrate to the CITY that the CONTRACTOR, its Subcontractors, vendors and

suppliers will provide quality control services that ensure compliance of the Work with the

Contract Documents.

E. The CQC Plan shall include, as a minimum, the following to cover all construction

operations, both on-site and offsite, including work by subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers

and purchasing agents:

1. Introduction

a. Background

b. Purpose of CQC Plan

2. Project Organization, Responsibility, and Points of Contact

a. Description of quality control organization

b. Organization Chart

c. Resumes/Certifications/Documentation

d. Quality Control Manager Delegation of Authority Letter

List of responsibilities

Stop work authorization

3. List of Definable Features of Work

4. Submittals

5. Testing

a. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test to

include the test name, specification paragraph requiring test, feature of work to be

tested, test frequency, and person responsible for each test.

b. Testing plan and log

6. Inspection

a. Procedures for tracking and recording preparatory, initial, and follow-up phases

7. Documentation

8. Nonconformance

a. Procedures for tracking construction deficiencies

9. Quality Control Forms

a. Testing

b. Contractor Quality Control Report


c. Receiving Material Inspection Report

d. Preparatory Meeting Checklist

e. Initial Inspection Checklist

f. Contractor’s Quality Control Report

g. Construction Punch List

h. Non-Conformance Report

i. Weekly QA/QC Meeting Minutes

j. Material Stamps

3.02 WEEKLY QUALITY CONTROL REPORT

A. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver a weekly quality control report to the CITY. This report

shall address:

1. Status of the CQC Program, including procedure development.

2. Contractor’s Daily Quality Control Reports

3. The number of inspections/tests performed during the week and results.

4. Any quality problems experienced.

5. Testing agency schedule updates.

6. Non-Conformance Reports

7. Construction Punch List

8. Weekly QA/QC Meeting Minutes

9. Preparatory Meeting/Initial Inspection Checklists

10. Receiving Material inspection Reports


TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 45 29-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 45 29

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Description

C. Contractor’s Responsibilities.

D. Submittals

1.02 SCOPE

A. This section addresses the requirements and responsibilities of the General CONTRACTOR and

the CITY, with respect to testing laboratory services, and associated field testing services,

including testing required for Special Inspections, for materials used on the Project (the

"Materials"). Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Documents, including General

Conditions, Special Provisions, and other Division 1 Specification Sections. Use of the term

“CONTRACTOR” within this Specification will refer solely to the GENERAL CONTRACTOR.

1.03 DESCRIPTION

A. All Materials must conform to Work requirements in the Contract Documents. The

CONTRACTOR has the obligation to demonstrate that all Materials conform to the requirements

of the Contract Documents.

B. All Materials are subject to sampling, inspection and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide and

deliver, at no additional cost to the CITY, any samples needed for testing. Include samples in the

Work if suitable and applicable.

C. CONTRACTOR shall submit Certification of Material Compliance for any Material before

incorporating in the Work. Such certification shall include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Project Name.

2. Material Description.

3. Material Supplier including address, phone number and contact.

4. Intended use of Material.

5. Location and date of Material Production.

6. Applicable standards, tests and results thereof

7. Statements declaring the Material conforms to the Contract Requirements.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the services of an approved independent testing laboratory to


perform and report the tests listed below:

1. Concrete material and mix designs.

2. Grout material, masonry units, and mix designs.

3. Asphaltic concrete materials and mix designs.

4. Embedded, fill and backfill materials.

5. Repeat tests required because of the CONTRACTOR's negligence or nonperformance.

6. Tests made for the CONTRACTOR's convenience.

E. At the discretion of the CITY, the CONTRACTOR will perform or obtain the services of an

approved independent testing laboratory to perform and report the tests listed below. The testing

allowance will be used to pay for these tests. These services shall include both laboratory servicess

and associated field testing services.

1. Bedding and backfill material analysis.

2. Soils compaction.

3. Concrete strength, slump, entrained air content, and unit weight.

4. Additional testing, if any, required by the Structural Drawings for Special Inspections.

5. Specific testing listed in individual specification sections to use the testing allowance.

F. The CONTRACTOR shall pay for all testing listed in 1.03 above except that testing performed for

Item 1.03E shall be performed on a Time and Materials (Force Account) basis against the

allowance established for such in Section 01 20 00 Measurement and Payment. Repeat tests

requested by the CITY which do not indicate the CONTRACTOR's negligence or noncompliance

with requirements of the Contract Documents shall be paid for by the CITY.

G. The testing laboratory shall be acceptable to CITY and shall be the same throughout the Project

unless a change is requested in writing by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the CITY, or a

change is requested in writing by the CITY.

H. Three (3) printed copies of all test reports shall be submitted to the CITY as soon as is practical

following the completion of each test. Concurrently, one (1) additional copy of each test report

shall be submitted electronically to the CITY in PDF format.

I. The testing laboratory shall be available to attend Project progress meetings when requested in

order to provide their input and opinions regarding construction procedures or problems.

J. The testing laboratory is not authorized to approve or accept any portion of the Work; rescind,

alter or augment the requirements of the Contract Documents; or perform any duties of the

CONTRACTOR not outlined in this section.

K. The work of the testing laboratory shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR of any obligation

to perform work in accord with the Contract Documents.

L. The CITY will provide Special Inspection Services. However, the CONTRACTOR will provide

assistance as required during Special Inspections. This will not be included under the Testing

Allowance.


1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide reasonable notice (at least 48 hours) to the CITY prior to

expected time for any testing.

B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel; provide access to Work Site, processes and to manufacturer's

operations.

C. Provide to laboratory, preliminary representative samples of Materials to be tested, in required

quantities, and properly identified and dated.

D. Furnish copies of mill test reports.

E. Furnish labor and facilities:

1. To provide access to Work to be tested.

2. To obtain and handle samples at the Site.

3. To facilitate and coordinate inspections and tests.

4. For laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples.

5. Forms for preparing concrete test beams and cylinders.

F. Notify laboratory and the CITY sufficiently in advance of testing operations to allow for

assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

G. Arrange with laboratory and pay for, additional samples and tests required for CONTRACTOR's

convenience.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish complete identification and qualification information to the

CITY, for consideration of approval, regarding the proposed testing laboratory. Such information

shall include current staffing, testing equipment, inventory and calibration data, and shall be

sufficient to demonstrate the laboratory's ability to perform all tests required by the Contract

Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED


TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Temporary Light and Power.

C. Maintenance.

D. Temporary Heat.

E. Weather Protection.

F. Temporary Air, Steam and Water.

G. Temporary Sanitary Facilities.

H. Fire Extinguishers.

1.02 SCOPE

A. CONTRACTOR’s temporary offices shall be established on the job Site where approved or

directed by the CITY, adequately furnished, and maintained in a clean, orderly condition by the

CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR or an authorized representative shall be present in the

field office at all times while Work is in progress. Instructions received there from the CITY shall

be considered as delivered to the CONTRACTOR.

B. In addition to CONTRACTOR’s temporary office, General CONTRACTOR shall provide a

suitable temporary office, either adjacent to or partitioned-off within CONTRACTOR’s temporary

office for use of, CITY’s Inspector and/or CITY’s representative. The CITY’s temporary office

shall include but not limited to the following items or criteria:

1. Minimum two hundred (200) square feet of usable floor space.

2. Minimum seven (7) foot ceiling height.

3. Minimum two (2) telephones. For all telephones specified, provide the telephone itself, all

wiring necessary to connect the phone and computers or fax machines to phone company

system and a working phone for each phone number.

4. One (1) fax machine with separate phone line.

5. One (1) copy machine.

6. One (1) calculator with tape.

7. One (1) desk and chair set

8. One (1) two-drawer metal file cabinet for desk and chair set


9. 30”x72” Work table

10. One (1) four-drawer legal filing cabinet

11. One (1) plan rack

12. One (1) storage locker with lock suitable for surveying equipment.

13. One (1) portable fire extinguisher.

14. Four (4)all-weather parking spaces

15. Maintaining a room temperature between 68 and 75 degrees Fahrenheit.

16. Furnish cold potable water.

17. Provide unisex toilet facilities.

C. The General CONTRACTOR is responsible for establishing utilities, including power, phone, and

Internet access if required by the CITY.

1.03 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

A. The Electrical CONTRACTOR shall provide connections to existing facilities sized to provide

service required for power and lighting.

B. Where adequate electric service and lighting from the CITY’s facilities is not available or

adequate for CONTRACTOR needs, the Electrical CONTRACTOR shall furnish temporary light

and power, including 220 Volt service for welding, complete with wiring, lamps and similar

equipment as required to adequately light all work areas and with sufficient power capacity to

meet the reasonable needs of all subcontractors. Make all necessary arrangements with the local

electric company for temporary electric service and pay all expenses in connection therewith.

C. The Electrical CONTRACTOR shall install circuit(s) and branch wiring with area distribution

boxes located so that power and lighting is available throughout the Site by use of construction

type power cords where existing plant service is not available or where lighting is necessary.

D. The Electrical CONTRACTOR shall provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to

prevent insertion of 110-120 Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. For connection of power tools

and equipment, provide outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button and

pilot light.

E. The Electrical CONTRACTOR shall provide grounded extension cords. Use "hard-service" cords

where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths

of electric cords if more than one length is required.

F. The Electrical CONTRACTOR shall provide general service incandescent lamps as required for

adequate illumination where necessary. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures where

exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.

1.04 WEATHER PROTECTION

A. The General CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install and maintain temporary heat and enclosures to

provide adequate working areas for personnel during the months of November through March.


B. The General CONTRACTOR shall furnish temporary heating units that shall have been tested and

labeled by UL, FM, or other recognized association related to the type of fuel being used, and

maintain reasonable temperatures within the temporary enclosure.

1.05 TEMPORARY AIR, STEAM AND WATER

A. The General CONTRACTOR shall provide all air, steam and water, including temporary piping

and appurtenances required for cleaning and testing pipelines and equipment. Remove temporary

piping and appurtenances upon approval of equipment being tested.

1.06 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. The General CONTRACTOR shall provide self-contained, single occupant toilet units of the

chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed in a

fiberglass or other approved non-absorbent shell.

B. The General CONTRACTOR is responsible for maintaining temporary sanitary facilities,

including coordinating and paying for periodic disposal of contents, and removing it at Final

Completion.

C. If the existing restroom in the Control Building will be out of service for more than three months

or during the summer, before the proposed restroom in the new Operations Building is functional,

the General CONTRACTOR shall provide portable toilet and wash facilities specifically for the

CITY’s use.

1.07 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. The General CONTRACTOR shall provide portable UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for

temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide portable UL-rated Class ABC dry

chemical extinguishers or a combination of NFPA recommended Classes for the exposure.

Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing agent and size required by

location and class of fire exposure.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT USED


NOT USED


TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING 01 51 43-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 51 43

TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This Section covers furnishing, maintaining, and operating a temporary bypass pumping system

during construction. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment, power,

maintenance, etc., to implement a temporary pumping and control system for the purpose of

diverting the existing flow around the work area.

B. Design and installation of these systems shall be the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility subject to

Engineer’s approval as specified.

1.02 GENERAL

A. The design, installation and operation of the temporary pumping system shall be the

CONTRACTOR’s responsibility. The CONTRACTOR shall employ the services of a

Specialty Firm (Firm) who can demonstrate to the CITY that it specializes in the design and

operation of temporary bypass pumping systems. The Firm shall provide at least five

references of projects of a similar size and complexity as this Project performed by his

company within the past three years. The bypass system shall meet the requirements of all

codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare with the Firm a specific, detailed description of the

proposed pumping system(s) required for each location and submit it along with the Firm’s

references within one month following Notice to Proceed.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit detailed plans and descriptions outlining all provisions and

precautions to be taken by the CONTRACTOR regarding the handling of existing wastewater

flows in accordance with the submittal section. This plan must be specific and complete,

including such items as schedules, locations, elevations, capacities of equipment, pump and

drive control selection and design, materials and all other incidental items necessary and/or

required to insure proper protection of the facilities. The plan shall include but not be limited

to details of the following:

1. Staging areas for pumps.

2. Structure bulkheading or plugging method and types of plugs.

3. Number, size, material, location and method of installation of suction piping.

4. Number, size, material, location and method of installation of discharge piping.

5. Bypass pump sizes, capacity, and number of each size to be on site and power

requirements.

6. Motor control package design, including wiring diagrams, voltage and amperage

requirements, control logic description.

7. Calculations of static lift, friction losses, and flow velocity (pump curves showing pump

operating range shall be submitted).


8. Standby power provisions.

9. Thrust and restraint block sizes and locations if applicable.

10. Any temporary pipe supports and anchoring required.

11. Design plans and access provisions to bypass pumping and generator fueling locations

indicated on the Drawings.

12. Calculations for selection of bypass pumping pipe size.

13. Schedule for installation and maintenance of bypass pumping lines.

14. Continuous monitoring, operating and emergency response plan.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all pumps of adequate size to handle the flow events and

temporary piping to ensure that the total flow can be safely diverted around the work area.

B. CONTRACTOR shall have adequate standby equipment available onsite and ready for

immediate operation and use in the event of an emergency or breakdown.

C. The design, installation and operation of the temporary pumping system shall be the

CONTRACTOR’s responsibility. The bypass system shall meet the requirements of all codes

and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary means to safely convey the sewage past the

work area. The CONTRACTOR will not be permitted to stop or impede the main flows

under any circumstances.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall protect water resources wetlands and other natural resources.

F. The CONTRACTOR shall provide standby power to all electric pumping units in the event of

power loss.


3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND MAINTENANCE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform leakage and pressure tests of the bypass pumping

discharge piping using treated plant effluent (NPW) prior to actual operation.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall inspect the bypass pumping system every two hours to ensure that

the system is working correctly.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall insure that the temporary pumping system is properly maintained

and that a responsible operator shall be on hand at all times when pumps are operating.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a plan for the replacement of malfunctioning equipment.

E. Spare parts for pumps and piping shall be kept on site as required.

F. Adequate hoisting equipment for each pump and accessories shall be maintained on the site.

3.02 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate temporary bypass pumping with Wastewater


Treatment Plant personnel and perform bypass pumping only after receiving the consent of

the Plant personnel.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall install the bypass pipelines to minimize any disturbance to

existing utilities and shall obtain approval of the pipeline locations from the CITY. Routing

of bypass pipelines shall not impede plant traffic flow.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall protect the temporary pumping station and piping from damage

during construction.

D. CONTRACTOR shall provide all fuel and power for the temporary pumping facility.

CONTRACTOR shall make arrangements for a power meter and pay all associated fees.


DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 01 60 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 60 00

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.01 PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Transportation and Delivery.

C. Storage and Protection.


A. Material and Equipment is provided in Section 01 66 00.

1.03 SCOPE

A. This Specification Section specifies the general requirements for the delivery, handling, storage

and protection for all items required for the performance of the Work. Specific requirements, if

any, are specified with the related item.

1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND DELIVERY

A. Transport and handle items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Schedule delivery to reduce long term on-site storage prior to installation and/or operation. Under

no circumstances shall equipment be delivered to the site more than one (1) month prior to

installation without written authorization from the CITY.

C. Coordinate delivery with installation to ensure minimum holding time for items that are

hazardous, flammable, easily damaged or sensitive to deterioration.

D. Deliver products to the Site in manufacturer's original sealed containers or other packing systems,

complete with instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing.

E. All items delivered to the Site shall be unloaded and placed in a manner which will not hamper

the CONTRACTOR's normal construction operation or those of subcontractors and other

contractors and will not interfere with the flow of necessary traffic.

F. Provide necessary equipment and personnel to unload all items delivered to the Site.

G. Promptly inspect shipment to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct

and items are undamaged. For items furnished by others (i.e. the CITY, other contractors),

perform inspection in the presence of the CITY. Notify the CITY verbally, and in writing, of any

problems.

1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store and protect products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and


labels intact and legible. Storage instruction shall be studied by the CONTRACTOR and

reviewed with the CITY or CITY’s representative, when requested. Instruction shall be carefully

followed and a written record of this kept by the CONTRACTOR. Arrange storage to permit

access for inspection.

B. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with

foreign matter.

C. Cement and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and shall be kept completely dry

at all times. All structural, miscellaneous and reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or

otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease and in a position to prevent accumulations of

standing water and to minimize rusting. Beams shall be stored with the webs vertical. Precast

concrete shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing water,

staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry products shall be handled and

stored in a manner to reduce breakage, cracking and spalling to a minimum.

D. The requirements of this Section are in conjunction with the requirements contained within

individual technical equipment Specification Sections and according to the equipment

manufacturers. In the event of conflict, the more stringent requirement shall govern. All

mechanical and electrical equipment and instruments subject to corrosive damage by the

atmosphere if stored outdoors (even though covered by canvas) shall be stored in a weathertight

building to prevent injury. The building may be a temporary structure on the Site or elsewhere,

but it must be satisfactory to the CITY. Building shall be provided with adequate ventilation to

prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer.

1. All equipment shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease and other lubricants unless

otherwise instructed by the manufacturer.

2. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once weekly to ensure proper lubrication and to

avoid metal-to-metal "welding". Upon installation of the equipment, the CONTRACTOR

shall start the equipment, at least half load, once weekly for an adequate period of time to

ensure that the equipment does not deteriorate from lack of use.

3. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as frequently as required

thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance. New lubricants shall be put

into the equipment at the time of acceptance.

4. Prior to acceptance of the equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall have the manufacturer

inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected by the

long storage period. Such certifications by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the

equipment is judged by the manufacturer to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that

has been shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the

manufacturer will guaranty the equipment equally in both instances. This guarantee is in

addition to all other warranties and guarantees in the Contract Documents. If such a

certification is not given, the equipment shall be judged to be defective. It shall be removed

and replaced at the CONTRACTOR's expense.

2.01 PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT USED


3.01 PART 3 – EXECUTION

NOT USED


MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01 66 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 66 00

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Products.

B. Transportation and handling.

C. Storage and protection.

D. Product options.

E. Material and Equipment Checklist.


A. Delivery, Storage and Handling is provided in Section 01 60 00.

1.03 PRODUCTS

A. For the purpose of standardization, equipment of any one type shall be products of one

manufacturer.

B. Do not use secondhand or salvaged materials and equipment whether removed from an

existing premises or from another source, except as specifically permitted by the Contract

Documents.

C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being

replaced.

1.04 NOISE CRITERIA

A. Unless otherwise specified, noise levels for all operating equipment shall not exceed 82 dB at

5 feet from the equipment when measured on the A scale of a calibrated sound level meter at

slow response.

B. Noise criteria shall be met without the use of special external barriers or enclosures.

1.05 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are

correct, and products are undamaged.

C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.


A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

B. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.

C. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment

favorable to product.


D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

E. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation

to prevent condensation and degradation of products.

F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing

with foreign matter.

G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.

H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify

products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

I. Provide lubricants and perform initial lubrication and all subsequent lubrication until

Substantial Completion. Lubricants and lubrication shall be in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's instructions.

J. Limit size and maintain stockpiles of construction materials in such a manner that they will

not block existing drainage or be hazardous to pedestrian or vehicular traffic in any way. The

limitation relative to the stockpiling of construction materials shall be controlled by the

CITY. In the event CONTRACTOR fails to satisfactorily modify his operations relative to

the stockpiling of construction materials upon order of the CITY, all Work except cleanup

operations will be stopped, and remain stopped, until the order of the CITY has been

complied with.

1.07 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting

those standards or description.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers

named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Or As

Approved: Submit a request for consideration of any manufacturer not named in accordance

with Article 6.05 of the General Conditions.

1.08 SCHEDULE

A. Manufacturer’s field services, including equipment installation checks and training, and

operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided for the items of equipment indicated in

the following schedule:

Spec. Section Type of Equip. Spare

Parts

Mfr’s. Field

Services

O&M

Manual

Training by

Mfr

22 30 00 Plumbing No No Yes No

23 34 00 Fans No No Yes No

23 81 26.19 Split System Air Conditioning

Unit

No No Yes No

23 82 39.23 Electric Heaters No No Yes No

26 05 86B Motors No No Yes No

26 24 19B Low Voltage Motor Control

Centers

Yes No Yes No

26 29 23.13B Variable Speed Drives No No Yes No


Spec. Section Type of Equip. Spare

Parts

Mfr’s. Field

Services

O&M

Manual

Training by

Mfr

26 44 01 Self-Regulating Heat Tracing No No Yes No

35 20 16 Hydraulic Gates Yes Yes Yes Yes

40 05 23 Valves No No Yes No

40 91 00P Instrumentation Devices No Yes Yes Yes

40 92 43 Motorized Actuators Yes Yes Yes Yes

40 94 43 Programmable Logic Controllers Yes Yes Yes Yes

40 95 13 Control Panels No No Yes No

43 21 14 Recessed Impeller Pumps Yes Yes Yes Yes

43 21 39.19P Submersible Grinder Sample

Pumps

No Yes Yes Yes

43 21 40 Submersible Pumps No Yes Yes Yes

46 21 00 Mechanical Screen and

Compactor

Yes Yes Yes Yes

46 23 00 Grit Removal Equipment Yes Yes Yes Yes

46 33 00 Liquid Deicer Feed System Yes Yes Yes Yes

46 41 23 Submersible Mixers Yes Yes Yes Yes

46 43 21.19 Circular Clarifier Yes Yes Yes Yes

46 51 21.13 Coarse Bubble Aeration Systems Yes Yes Yes Yes

46 51 46 Membrane Diffused Aeration

System

Yes Yes Yes Yes

46 71 80 Floating Decanter Equipment No Yes Yes Yes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED


FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 71 23

FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Description

C. Field Engineering.

1.02 SCOPE

A. This section addresses the requirements and responsibilities of the CONTRACTOR, with respect

to onsite engineering tasks performed during performance of the Work.

1.03 DESCRIPTION

A. Field tests required by this Section are additional to the start-up and field test services required

elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

1.04 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. CONTRACTOR shall employ and retain at the Site of the Work a field engineer capable of

performing all engineering tasks required of the CONTRACTOR. Engineering tasks shall

include:

1. Daily reports submitted each day when requested by the CITY with all pertinent information

pertaining to the Project including: numbers of employees, subcontractor employees,

breakdown of employees by trade, major equipment and materials installed, major

construction equipment utilized, location of all Work areas and materials and equipment

received.

2. Maintain field office files and drawings, record drawings, and coordinate engineering services

with subcontractors. Prepare layout and coordination drawings for construction purposes.

3. Review and coordinate work for conflicts and interferences and immediately advise the CITY

of all discrepancies noted.

4. Cooperate and participate with the CITY in field inspections as required and requested.

5. At Project start, set temporary markers to indicate the construction limits where the Work is in

process. Replace the markers as necessary throughout construction, and remove the markers

upon Final Completion of the Project.

6. Note the location of all field tile, utilities and other underground structures on a field set of

drawings, to be shown on the as-built drawings.

FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23-2 SEPTEMBER 2013

2.01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

3.01 PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED


RESTORATION OF IMPROVEMENTS 01 71 33-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 71 33

RESTORATION OF IMPROVEMENTS

1.01 PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Structures and Facilities.

B. Roads, Streets, and Other Paved Surfaces.

C. Cultivated Areas and Other Surface Improvements.



1.03 STRUCTURES AND FACILITIES

A. The CONTRACTOR shall take all precautions necessary to protect the integrity and

usefulness of all existing facilities. The CONTRACTOR may, with the approval of the

CITY, remove such existing structures, including but not limited to, curbs, gutters, conduits,

pipelines, vaults, manholes, cables and conduits and poles as may be necessary for the

performance of the Work, and shall re-build the structures thus removed in as good a

condition as found in accordance with the regulatory requirements and the Contract

Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall also repair existing structures which may be

damaged as a result of the Work under the Contract Documents, to the satisfaction of the

owner.

1.04 ROADS, STREETS, AND OTHER PAVED SURFACES

A. Unless otherwise specified, roads and streets in which the surface is removed, broken, or

damaged during the Work under the Contract Documents, shall be resurfaced and brought to

the original grade and section. Roadways used by the CONTRACTOR shall be cleaned and

repaired. Before resurfacing material is placed, edges of pavements shall be trimmed back

far enough to provide clean, solid, vertical faces, and shall be free of loose material. All

paved surfaces shall be cut with a pavement saw. Rough cuts are not allowed. Repair work

shall conform to the provisions of the Governing Agency, applicable specifications in Part 3

of this section and as directed by the CITY.

1.05 CULTIVATED AREAS AND OTHER SURFACE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Cultivated or planted areas and other surface improvements which are damaged by actions of

the CONTRACTOR shall be restored as nearly as possible to their original condition.


3.01 NOT USED


3.01 INSTALLATION

RESTORATION OF IMPROVEMENTS 01 71 33-2 SEPTEMBER 2013

A. All restoration shall be completed in strict accordance with the appropriate items of the

Specifications, as directed by the CITY. All disturbed areas shall be restored as nearly as

practical to the condition they were prior to construction within thirty (30) days of pipe

installation, at the direction of the CITY. All drainage ditches disturbed by the

CONTRACTOR’s Work shall be restored, reshaped, and graded to drain properly. Sod,

erosion control mats, or other methods shall be used by the CONTRACTOR to ensure that

drainage ditches are restored to the pre-construction condition as much as practical.

B. Pavement restoration shall be in accordance with the “Typical Restoration Section” on the

Drawings and provisions of the Governing Agency responsible for the particular road, as

directed by the CITY.

C. The restoration of sunken trenches shall be the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility. Sunken

areas shall be backfilled and compacted to meet adjoining grades and the surface area

reseeded, or resurfaced with asphalt or concrete matching the existing surface. The

CONTRACTOR’s responsibility for this item shall be under the terms of, and for the duration

of, the guarantee defined in Section 00 72 00 General Conditions, Article 13.07 “Correction

Period”.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall restore unpaved areas by seeding and mulching in accordance

with Item 659 of the Ohio Department of Transportation Construction and Material

Specifications (ODOT CMS) unless otherwise noted herein. Commercial fertilizer shall be

used and shall have a chemical analysis of 10-20-10. The fertilizer shall be delivered to the

Project Site in manufacturer's containers, unopened. The container, or an attached tag, shall

have printed upon it the manufacturer's name and the chemical analysis of the contents.

E. All maintained residential yards shall be restored with shredded topsoil and fertilizer prior to

seeding and mulching, in accordance with Item 659 of the ODOT CMS. CONTRACTOR

shall remove all stones 1-inch and greater in any dimension. Shredded topsoil shall be placed

in loose lifts that construct a 4-inch compacted depth. Grass seed shall be twenty percent

(20%) Annual Ryegrass and eighty percent (80%) Finelawn Fescue.

F. For landscaping done in the summer months of June, July, and August, the CONTRACTOR

shall utilize temporary mulching and seeding. Temporary mulching shall then be removed as

necessary, with final seeding and mulching performed September 1 through September 15.

G. All driveways shall be constructed in kind in accordance with Item 627 of the City

Supplement to ODOT CMS.

H. Concrete walks shall be restored with a five (5) inch thick Plain Portland Cement Concrete

Walk (Item 608).

I. The cost of all restoration of streets, drives, walks, sod, curbs, etc., shall be included in the

various items of the Contract Documents. When restoring walks, curb ramps shall be

constructed at intersections where the existing walk has been disturbed. Contact the

jurisdictional agency for curb ramp requirements.


CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 73 29

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Submittals


A. Restoration of Improvements is included in Section 01 71 33.


C. Cast-In-Place Concrete is included in Section 03 31 00.

1.03 SCOPE

A. Provide all cutting, fitting and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill, required to

complete the Work or to:

1. Make parts fit together properly.

2. Uncover portions of the Work as necessary or as directed by the CITY.

3. Remove and replace defective work.

4. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.

5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.

6. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical

conduit.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01 33 00, a written request well in advance of executing any

cutting or alteration which affects:

1. Work of the CITY or any separate CONTRACTOR.

2. Structural value or integrity of any element of the Project.

3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems.

4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements.

5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.

B. Request shall include:


1. Identification of the Project.

2. Description of affected Work.

3. The necessity for cutting, alteration or excavation.

4. Effect on Work of the CITY or any separate CONTRACTOR, or on structural or

weatherproof integrity of Project.

5. Description of proposed Work:

a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.

b. Trades who will execute the Work.

c. Products proposed to be used and associated standards.

d. Extent of refinishing to be done.

6. Alternatives to cutting and patching.

7. Cost proposal, when applicable.

8. Written permission of any separate CONTRACTOR whose Work will be affected.

C. Submit written notice to the CITY designating the date and the time the Work will be performed.


2.01 MATERIALS

A. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved.

3.01 PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Inspect existing conditions of Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement

during cutting and patching.

B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of products, or performance of

Work.

C. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the CITY in writing; do not proceed with

Work until the CITY or the CITY’s representative has provided further instructions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of affected

portion of Work.

B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.

C. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting

and patching work, and maintain excavations free from water.


3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other Work and will

provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.

B. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other

Work.

C. Employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for:

1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.

2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces.

D. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with

specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.

E. Restore Work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed Work in

accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces.

G. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes:

1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.

2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.


CLEANING 01 74 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 74 00

CLEANING



A. Scope.

1.02 SCOPE

A. CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish

at all times. CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate trash receptacles about the Site and shall

promptly empty the containers when filled, or as directed by the CITY.

B. Construction materials such as concrete forms and timbering shall be neatly stacked by

CONTRACTOR when not in use. CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove splattered concrete,

asphalt, oil, paint, corrosives, or cleaning solutions from surfaces to prevent marring or other

damage.

C. Wastes shall not be buried or burned on the Site, nor disposed of into storm drains, sanitary

sewers, streams or waterways. All wastes shall be removed from the Site and disposed of in a

manner complying with local ordinances and laws.


2.01 MATERIALS

A. Provide all required personnel, equipment, and materials needed to maintain cleanliness.

B. Use only the cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with the surface being

cleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer of the material or as reviewed by the CITY.


3.01 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Retain all stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not

impeding drainage or traffic, and providing the required protection of materials. Do not allow the

accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material, and other items not required for performance of the

Work. Provide adequate storage for all items awaiting removal from job Site, observing all

requirements for fire protection and protection of the environment.

3.02 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Prior to Final Completion of the Work, remove from the job Site all tools, surplus

materials, equipment, scrap, debris and waste.

B. Site: Unless otherwise specifically directed by the CITY, broom clean all paved areas on the Site

CLEANING 01 74 00-2 SEPTEMBER 2013

and all public paved areas directly adjacent to the Site. Completely remove all resultant debris.

C. Timing: Schedule final cleaning as approved by the CITY to enable the CITY to accept a

completely clean Project.


COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

AND SEQUENCE 01 75 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 75 00

COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS AND SEQUENCE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Submittals.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Special

Provisions, and other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

B. Manufacturer Product Warranties are included in Section 01 78 36.

C. CONTRACTOR’s General Condition Warranty and Guarantee are included in the General

Conditions, Section 00 72 00, Article 6.19.

D. Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing, Section 01 75 01.


F. System Functional Testing, Section 01 75 03.


H. Operational Testing, Section 01 75 05.

I. 30-Day Commissioning Reliability Test, Section 01 75 06.

J. Equipment Technical Specifications

1.03 SCOPE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall follow procedures to assure that the correct equipment is installed, that

the equipment is properly installed, that all supporting documentation is complete and accurate,

and that all equipment, systems and processes operate as specified and submitted.

B. The procedures to be followed are outlined in the following sections:

1. Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing, Section 01 75 01.

2. Equipment Startup and Checkout, Section 01 75 02.

3. System Functional Testing, Section 01 75 03.

4. Process Performance Testing, Section 01 75 04.

5. Operational Testing, Section 01 75 05.

6. 30-Day Commissioning Reliability Test, Section 01 75 06.

C. The requirements and expectations for each of these sections are indicated in each respective

technical section.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall include adequate and itemized scheduling requirements for each of the

Startup and Verification tasks in the overall Construction Progress Schedule.

E. All Startup and Verification provisions in the Contract Documents shall be completed, and the



sequence shall follow the exact order in which these are listed in the Specifications. Each section

contains an Execution section and Documentation section, which shall be completed and

approved prior to the start of any subsequent Execution section or Documentation section. As

indicated in the subsequent sections, the CONTRACTOR shall actively coordinate and participate

with the CITY to complete these tasks in an efficient and timely manner.

F. Flow charts of the Commissioning Requirements and Sequence are included at the end of this

section.

G. A Master Commissioning Checklist is available from the CITY and is to be used in the

commissioning process.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Commissioning Requirements and Sequence. The CONTRACTOR shall separately submit the

sections of the overall Construction Progress Schedule which are applicable to Commissioning

Requirements and Sequence.



1.05 FLOW CHARTS

EQUIPMENT FACTORY

ACCEPTANCE TESTING 01 75 01-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 75 01

EQUIPMENT FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Submittals.


A. Drawings and requirements of the contract as put forth in the various portions of the Project

Manual, including General Conditions, any Special Provisions, and other Division 1 through

Division 46 Specification Sections and addenda apply to this Section. A partial list of

specification sections where Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing are indicated as being

required is presented for convenience in the table appearing below but this summary is not

guaranteed to be all inclusive of all references and related sections for Equipment Factory

Acceptance Testing that may appear elsewhere in the Contract Documents

(CONTRACTOR’s attention to any addenda modifications is of particular importance).

Specification

Reference Number

Title of Specification Section

23 34 00 Fans

23 81 26.19 Split System Air Conditioning Unit

23 82 39.23 Electric Heaters

35 20 16 Hydraulic Gates

40 05 23 Valves

40 91 00P Instrumentation Devices

40 92 43 Motorized Actuators

40 94 43 Programmable Logic Process Controllers

40 95 13 Control Panels

43 21 14 Recessed Impeller Pumps

43 21 39.19P Submersible Grinder Sample Pumps

43 21 40 Submersible Pumps

46 21 00 Mechanical Screen and Compactor

46 23 00 Grit Removal Equipment

46 33 00 Liquid Deicer Feed System

46 41 23 Submersible Mixers

46 43 21.19 Circular Clarifier




D. Commissioning Requirements and Sequence, Section 01 75 00. (See PART 4 for the

Commissioning Requirements and Sequence flow chart associated with this Section.)


F. System Functional Testing, Section 01 75 03.

EQUIPMENT FACTORY





1.03 SCOPE

A. Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing ("FAT") shall be performed to verify proper

assembly, per the manufacturer’s documentation and technical specifications. Drawings by

the CONTRACTOR are also reviewed to verify accuracy and completeness.

B. Equipment FAT shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR. At the CITY’s discretion, some

or all Equipment FAT’s may be witnessed by the CITY.

C. Equipment FAT shall be performed for all fully assembled control panels, cabinets, and other

pertinent control systems and devices. Equipment FAT also includes static and dynamic

testing of wiring and devices, mechanical connections, and preliminary mechanical

functionality, as required by the Contract Documents.

D. Equipment FAT shall be performed at the location where the equipment or panel was

assembled, immediately prior to shipment to the CITY’s facility. Equipment FAT shall be

initiated and performed by the CONTRACTOR after the equipment or system has been

fabricated and assembled in the factory. Prior to Equipment FAT, all mechanical connections

shall have been completed, and all power and temporary wiring shall be terminated, as

applicable.

E. All Equipment FAT procedures and results shall be documented, indicating compliance with

the manufacturer’s recommendations and the requirements of the Contract Documents. The

accuracy and completeness of the drawings and documentation shall also be verified and

corrected as necessary.

F. In accordance with Commissioning Requirements and Sequence, Section 01 75 00,

Equipment FAT shall be successfully completed in compliance with Part 3 Execution and

approved prior to execution of all subsequent verification sections, including Equipment

Checkout and Startup, Section 01 75 02.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Equipment FAT Plan. The CONTRACTOR shall submit all of the following documents to

the CITY for approval (referred to as the "Equipment FAT Plan"). Upon receipt of the

CITY’s approval, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate Equipment FAT activities with the

CITY’s staff at least two (2) weeks prior to the proposed date Equipment FAT is to begin.

B. Submittal Documents.

1. Proposed start day of Equipment FAT tasks to be performed, including testing procedures

and what functionality or document detail is to be verified.

2. Examples of the forms to be used to document tasks, successful completion and

deficiencies.

3. Detailed panel layout drawing, including itemized bill of materials.

4. Control panel schematic diagrams.

5. PLC input and output (I/O) drawings.

6. Controls sequences and functional descriptions.

EQUIPMENT FACTORY


7. Digital network diagrams and riser diagrams.

8. PLC source files.

9. PLC documentation, complete, in PDF format, including all available aspects of the

project report available within the PLC programming software.

10. HMI documentation, in PDF format, including a full-page screenshots of every overview

and control screen, complete tag database, complete driver database and all custom

programming scripts.

11. Mechanical assembly documentation and drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. At least three (3) work days prior to Equipment FAT activities and arrival of the CITY, the

CONTRACTOR shall verify that the equipment is powered and ready for testing. All

installations shall be complete. All temporary connections shall be made, and all electrical

and mechanical aspects of each component and equipment are properly installed. Electrical

control power, uninterruptible power supplies, and reduced voltage power supplies shall be

energized and verified.

B. The CITY shall be notified immediately of any circumstances which may hinder, delay or

interrupt the Equipment FAT.

C. All test equipment and analysis instruments to be used for Equipment FAT verification shall

be calibrated and prepared for testing.

3.02 EXECUTION: EQUIPMENT FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Equipment FAT may begin two (2) weeks after approval of each applicable Equipment FAT

Plan, subject to the following stipulations:

1. Refer to each applicable technical specification section for clarifications or additional

installation and Equipment FAT requirements or expectations.

2. All Equipment FAT activities shall be coordinated with the CITY, at least two (2) weeks

in advance. At the CITY’s discretion, the CITY may elect to witness some or all of these

activities.

3. Once started, Equipment FAT shall continue or be repeated until successful completion is

accomplished. All requests to interrupt, suspend, or restart Equipment FAT activities

shall be submitted to CITY for approval.

4. Equipment FAT shall be successfully completed and approved prior to shipment, as well

as Execution of all subsequent verification sections, including Equipment Checkout and

Startup, Section 01 75 02.

B. All details of all documents required for Submittal for this Section shall be verified. Each

word and marking on the documentation and drawings shall be visually inspected,

functionally tested, and highlighted to indicate accuracy.

EQUIPMENT FACTORY


C. Electrical Equipment FAT shall be performed, including the following, per the

manufacturer’s documentation and the technical specifications:

1. With power off, verify each detail of each drawing for completeness and accuracy.

Verify that all panel equipment, components and wires are properly labeled and tagged.

Verify terminal and tag lists. Verify physical layout and measurements.

2. Verify that the Bill of Materials adequately describes the equipment installed and that all

equipment meets the requirements of the design and approved Submittal documents per

each applicable technical section.

3. Record identification information of all parts with a Serial Number.

4. Verify that all installations of electrical equipment and conductors are per the

manufacturer’s recommendations, especially regarding proper sizing, grounding,

insulation, resistance and protection.

5. Verify wire routing and labels, including separation of AC and DC wiring.

6. Verify and record UL approval label identification.

7. With power applied, verify proper and functional circuit and motor protection equipment,

such as disconnects, breakers, fuses and overloads. Measure, verify and record the

current through each protected device.

8. Verify the functionality of each panel device.

D. Instrument and Control Equipment FAT shall be performed, including the following, per the


1. Verify each point, one point at a time, applying the applicable voltage or current to each

field input termination point. Verify proper functionality of the hardware, software and

HMI indication. By making database adjustments, cause the proper signal to each field

output termination, then measure and record.

2. Perform functional tests of each algorithm described in the Functional Description. Use

simulation software or test assembly to simulate field devices.

3. Make connections to each field termination as necessary to simulate each Control

Sequence. Verify all outputs, PLC programming and HMI configurations.

4. Verify correct operation of each HMI element, including navigation, graphics, numerical

displays, controls, alarms and trends.

5. Verify program tag identifications, including PLC program and HMI configuration.

6. Perform fault tolerance (what-if) and failure recovery testing.

E. Mechanical Equipment FAT shall be performed, including the following, per the


1. Verify that all equipment and components have been fully and properly installed.

2. Verify mechanical connections, fittings and mountings.

3. Verify equipment alignment.

4. Verify proper operation.

F. If any Equipment FAT cannot be completed successfully, necessary modifications,

EQUIPMENT FACTORY


adjustments, repairs or field engineering shall be performed as required for successful

completion. Equipment FAT shall continue or be repeated prior to submittal of any

completed documentation for approval, until successful completion is accomplished.

G. No equipment shall ship to the Project Site until all Equipment FAT is successfully

completed and approved.

H. Any proposed deviation from the approved plans or schedules shall require written

authorization by the CITY.

3.03 DOCUMENTATION

A. Only the forms and documents submitted to and approved by CITY shall be used to

document Equipment FAT. As each activity is completed, all related forms shall be

completed, dated and signed by the CONTRACTOR.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a list of Equipment FAT deficiencies, which shall be

updated and sent to the CITY at the end of each week during testing. All deficiencies shall be

corrected prior to submittal of any completed documentation for approval.

C. Upon completion of all Equipment FAT, all completed and witnessed documents shall be

compiled and formally submitted for approval.

PART 4 - FLOW CHART

Refer to 01 75 00 Section 2 for the Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing workflow.


EQUIPMENT FACTORY



EQUIPMENT STARTUP

AND CHECKOUT 01 75 02-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 75 02

EQUIPMENT STARTUP AND CHECKOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Submittals.




Division 46 Specification Sections and addenda apply to this Section. A Partial list of

specification sections where Equipment Startup and Checkout are indicated as being required

is presented for convenience in the table appearing below but this summary is not guaranteed

to be all inclusive of all references and related sections for Equipment Startup and Checkout

that may appear elsewhere in the Contract Documents (CONTRACTOR’s attention to any

addenda modifications is of particular importance).

Specification

Reference Number


22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment

23 34 00 Fans



26 05 86B Motors

26 24 16B Panelboards

26 24 19B Low Voltage Motor Control Centers

26 29 23.13B Variable Speed Drives

26 44 01 Self-Regulating Heat Tracing

26 52 00B Emergency Lighting Equipment


40 05 23 Valves



40 94 43 Programmable Logic Controllers










46 51 21.13 Coarse Bubble Aeration Systems

46 51 46 Membrane Diffused Aeration System

EQUIPMENT STARTUP


Specification

Reference Number


46 71 80 Floating Decanter Equipment




D. Commissioning Requirements and Sequence, Section 01 75 00. (See Part 4 for the

Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing flow chart associated with this section.)

E. Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing, Section 01 75 01.

F. System Functional Testing, Section 01 75 03.Process Performance Testing, Section 01 75 04.

G. Operational Testing, Section 01 75 05.

H. 30-Day Commissioning Reliability Test, Section 01 75 06.

1.03 SCOPE

A. Equipment Startup shall be performed to verify proper installation and initial, powered

operation of equipment.

B. Equipment Startup shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR, as described by the

manufacturer’s documentation and recommendations. The services of factory field service

representatives shall be utilized, as directed in the technical specifications or recommended

by the manufacturer. Refer to each applicable technical specification section for

clarifications or additional installation and startup requirements or expectations.

C. After installation is completed, components and equipment shall be initially powered.

Electrical power feeds and supplies currents shall be measured and recorded. Rotating

equipment shall be tested, especially regarding proper rotation direction, alignment and

vibration.

D. All Equipment Startup procedures and results shall be documented, showing compliance with

the manufacturer’s recommendation, as well as the requirements of the technical

specifications.

E. All instrument and control signals shall be calibrated and verified for proper loop

performance. Instrument and control signals shall be simulated as necessary to test and verify

equipment functionality. All discrete signals shall be verified for proper activation and

continuity. All digital communications signals and devices shall be tested for proper

operation.

F. In accordance with Commissioning Requirements and Sequence, Section 01 75 00,

Equipment Startup and Checkout Execution shall be initiated only subsequent to all

successful Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing, Section 01 75 01.

G. Equipment Startup shall be successfully completed in compliance with Part 3, Execution and

approved prior to Execution of all subsequent verification sections, including Functional

Testing, Section 01 75 03.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Equipment Startup Plan. A set of detailed Equipment Startup Plans shall be submitted for

approval. Each Equipment Startup Plan shall be specific to the equipment or system to be

EQUIPMENT STARTUP


tested. Markups and excerpts of the manufacturer’s operation and maintenance manuals are

acceptable. Each Equipment Startup Plan shall include detailed documentation, as follows:

B. Submittal Documents

1. A comprehensive list of the equipment or instruments to be factory calibrated, prior to

delivery.

2. A comprehensive list of the equipment or instruments to be calibrated by a factory field

service representative.

3. A comprehensive list of the equipment, instruments to be field calibrated by

CONTRACTOR authorized personnel.

4. Copies of detailed Equipment Startup reports and calibrations completed, signed and

dated by factory or factory authorized personnel who performed the Work.

5. A statement of qualifications for the CONTRACTOR personnel proposed to conduct

field Equipment Startup and calibrations. Documentation shall include experience and

attendance in applicable training courses.

6. Copies of calibration forms to be used. Forms shall be modified as necessary to reflect

any additional measurements or requirements indicated by the manufacturer’s

recommended calibration instructions. Each form shall be preprinted to the extent

possible prior to field startup and calibration. Each calibration form shall indicate the

maximum and minimum transmitted value, for each test point, required for successful

calibration.

7. A list of test and support equipment, temporary systems and other resources required to

complete Equipment Startup and calibrations.

8. Copies of certifications, which indicate the validity or recent calibration of all test

equipment and resources to be used.

9. An outline of specific resources to be provided by the CITY, such as the isolation of

systems or processes.

4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

5 PART 3 – EXECUTION: EQUIPMENT STARTUP AND CHECKOUT

6 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prior to startup, all structural and mechanical aspects of each component and equipment shall

be verified for complete and proper installation. All permissive, interlocks and safety devices

shall be verified to be in place and fully functional.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall assure that all preliminary and cursory installation reviews have

been performed and corrected, including inspections of connections, fittings and mountings.

All safeties, guards and interlocks shall be completed and placed in operation.

C. Electrical distribution, control power, uninterruptible power supplies, and reduced voltage

power supplies shall be energized, measured, verified and documented.

EQUIPMENT STARTUP


D. All test equipment and analysis instruments to be used for Equipment Startup verification

shall be calibrated and certified prior to testing. At the CITY’s discretion, test equipment or

analysis instruments may be subject to re-certification after completion of Equipment Startup.

3.02 EQUIPMENT STARTUP AND CHECKOUT

A. Equipment Startup may begin two (2) weeks after approval of each applicable Equipment

Startup Plan, subject to the following stipulations:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the CITY at least eight (8) work hours prior to each

Equipment Startup or calibration activity. To minimize facility disruptions, all

Equipment Startup and calibration activities shall be coordinated with the CITY. At the

CITY’s discretion, the CITY may elect to witness some or all of these activities.

B. Instrument calibrations shall be performed per the manufacturer’s instructions and the

technical specifications.

C. Equipment Startup or calibrations, which are not performed and documented by the factory or

factory representative, shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR. Equipment setup in a

CONTRACTOR shop area shall be field verified after completion of permanent installation.

Field verification of transducers, meters, transmitters and analytical instruments shall be

performed by applying sample process conditions to the sensor. The use of factory

authorized simulators may be used to simulate the sensing device. Calibration procedures,

which only test the output transmitted signal are not sufficient for successful completion of

verification or calibration.

D. Loop testing shall not commence until all individual component calibration has been

successfully completed and documented. Each instrument loop shall be tested as an

integrated system. This test shall verify proper operation from the sensing device or switch to

all receiving components within the loop. For loop testing, signals may be injected at the

signal connection to the primary measuring elements. Loop testing, which includes an

interface to a programmable logic controller (PLC), shall include verification of the PLC

processor, the input/output (I/O) database and the I/O system. If any loop device fails to

operate or indicate properly, corrections shall be made, and the loop test repeated until all

devices operate properly. All loop tests shall be fully documented.

E. Record the identification information of each field device, including Model No. and Serial

Number. Verify that all installed field devices are per the requirements of the design and

approved submittal documents.

F. Verify each point, one point at a time, applying the applicable voltage or current to each field

input termination point. Verify proper functionality of the hardware, software and HMI

indication. By making database adjustments, cause the proper signal to each field output

termination, then measure and record.

G. Verify network and communications documentation, including parts inventories, labels, cable

terminations and testing certifications. All equipment configuration parameters and addresses

shall be set and recorded.

H. Make connections to each field termination as necessary to simulate each Control Sequence

and Functional Description. Verify all outputs, PLC programming and HMI configurations.

I. If any Equipment Startup or calibration is not completed successfully, necessary

modifications, adjustments, repairs or field engineering shall be performed as required for

successful completion. Equipment Startup shall continue or be repeated until successful

completion is accomplished.

EQUIPMENT STARTUP


J. At the discretion of the CITY, previously completed calibrations shall be repeated if

subsequent modifications may have altered the equipment or system, and to have logically

affected previous test results or observations.

K. Any proposed deviation from the approved plans or schedules shall require written


3.03 DOCUMENTATION

A. Only forms submitted and approved shall be used during field Equipment Startup or

calibration. As each activity is completed, all forms shall be completed, dated and signed by

the CONTRACTOR.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a list of Equipment Startup or calibration deficiencies,

which shall be updated and sent to the CITY at the end of each week. All deficiencies shall

be corrected prior to submittal of any forms for approval.

C. Upon completion of all Equipment Startup and calibrations, all completed and witnessed

documents shall be compiled and formally submitted for approval.

PART 4 – FLOW CHART

Refer to 01 75 00 Section 2 for the Equipment Startup and Checkout workflow.


EQUIPMENT STARTUP



SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TESTING 01 75 03-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 75 03

SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Definitions

C. Submittals.


Drawings and requirements of the contract as put forth in the various portions of the Project



specification sections where System Functional Testing are indicated as being required is

presented for convenience in the table appearing below but this summary is not guaranteed to be

all inclusive of all references and related sections for System Functional Testing that may appear

elsewhere in the Contract Documents (CONTRACTORS’s attention to any addenda

modifications is of particular importance).

Specification

Reference Number



23 34 00 Fans



26 05 86B Motors







40 05 23 Valves















Specification

Reference Number




A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Special


B. Manufacturer Product Warranties are included in Section 0178 36.



D. Commissioning Requirements and Sequence, Section 01 75 00. (See Part 4 for the

Commissioning Requirements and Sequence flow chart associated with this Section.)

E. Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing, Section 01 75 01.

F. Equipment Startup and Checkout, Section 01 75 02.




1.02 SCOPE

A. Functional Testing shall be performed to verify proper powered operation of systems,

comprised of multiple equipment and components ("Systems"), typically prior to exposing

these to operating processes or conditions.

B. Functional Testing shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR, and witnessed by the CITY,

to verify proper integration, interaction and operation of component equipment, operating as

a system, as described by the manufacturer’s documentation and recommendations. Refer to

each appropriate technical specification section for clarifications or additional functional

requirements or expectations. Functional Testing shall also include preliminary verification

of each Functional Description, typically limited to dry testing.

C. Basic System operation and control System response shall be tested and verified. Instrument

and control signals shall be simulated as necessary to test and verify all equipment

functionality within the System.

D. A System may be obtained from a single vendor. Factory certified field service

representatives or technicians shall be utilized for Functional Testing of each single source

System. Single source Systems are identified as such in the technical specifications included

in the Contract Documents.

E. Each System comprised of equipment and components from multiple vendors shall be

assembled, integrated and functionally tested by the CONTRACTOR.

F. For each System, the CONTRACTOR shall plan, schedule, execute and document the

Functional Testing of the applicable and related System.

G. In accordance with Commissioning Requirements and Sequence, Section 01 75 00,

Functional Testing shall be initiated subsequent to all successful Equipment Start-Up, and

Checkout, Section 01 75 02.


H. System Functional Testing shall be successfully completed in compliance with Part 3,

Execution and approved prior to Execution of all subsequent verification sections, including

Process Performance Testing, Section 01 75 04.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Successful Completion. All aspects of Functional Testing have been completed, and all

requirements listed in the specifications and in the Submittals have been proven to have been

met, within the specified constraints.

B. System. Regarding Functional Testing, a System shall include all components of equipment,

devices and appurtenances connected such that the operation or function of each

complements, protects or controls the operation or function of the others. For example, a

pumping system may be comprised of various equipment: motor, pump, gear reducer, piping,

instruments, controls, motor starter, wiring, etc. Other examples of Systems used in

wastewater facilities include power distribution, programmable controller, compressor, odor

control, centrifuge or boiler.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Functional Testing Plan. A set of detailed Functional Testing Plans shall be submitted for

approval. The System Functional Testing may begin two (2) weeks after approval by the

City. Each Functional Testing Plan shall be specific to the equipment or System to be tested.

Markups and excerpts of the manufacturer’s operation and maintenance manuals are

acceptable. Each Functional Testing Plan shall include detailed descriptions of the

preparation, execution and documentation, as follows:

1. A detailed list of the equipment and Systems to which the Functional Testing procedures

will apply. This list shall include at least all applicable mechanical, electrical,

instrument, controls and HVAC equipment and Systems.

2. Complete descriptions of the preparation procedures necessary to achieve the desired test

conditions. Identify which items will require CITY action or participation.

3. A detailed list of procedures by which the CONTRACTOR plans to adequately and

completely perform each aspect of the Functional Testing.


complete the test plan.

5. A list of personnel, which will be used to perform Functional Testing. This list shall

indicate all subcontractors or representatives of manufacturers or vendors required to be

present for testing. At the CITY’s discretion, the qualifications of personnel shall be

documented and provided for approval upon request.

6. An outline of specific resources to be provided by the CITY during testing, such as the

isolation of systems or processes.

7. Verification of the validity or calibration of the test equipment or resources to be used.

8. A detailed outline of the specific results or observations, which will constitute acceptable

completion of each Functional Testing Plan.

9. Sample documentation to be used to record the procedures and results of each Functional

Testing Plan, including a sample of each form to be used. Samples of the format and

level of detail required for the documentation forms are available in Section 01 33 19

B. Functional Testing Schedule. A detailed Functional Testing Schedule shall be submitted for


approval. This Submittal shall accompany the Functional Testing Plan Submittal.

Requirements of the Functional Testing Schedule are as follows:

1. The proposed date that Functional Testing is to begin, and the estimated completion date.

2. A sequence, and relative daily schedule, by which the Functional Testing will be

executed.

3. The proposed Functional Test dates shall be indicated on and coordinated with the

CONTRACTOR’s Construction Progress Schedule specified in Section 01 32 16.

C. Functional Testing Documentation and Results. Upon completion of all aspects of Functional

Testing, all documentation indicating compliance with the requirements shall be signed and

dated by the CONTRACTOR for completeness and accuracy, and by the CITY as witness. A

copy of the project specific signed results shall be submitted to the CITY for consideration of

successful completion. Only upon approval of completion, by OWNER, shall the

CONTRACTOR begin the Execution phase of subsequent verification Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 – EXECUTION: SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TESTING

3.01 PREPARATION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall inform and coordinate the activities of all individuals required for

Functional Testing, including all subcontractors, vendors, suppliers, the CITY’s operations

and maintenance personnel, and other resources needed to implement the requirements of this

section.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall assure that all preliminary and cursory installation reviews have

been performed and mitigated, including inspections of connections, fittings, mountings,

leaks, pressures, temperatures, vibrations, electrical measurements, rotations and alarms. The

testing areas shall be cleaned and free of installation equipment and debris. All safeties,

guards and interlocks shall be completed and placed for operation.

C. All test equipment and analysis instruments to be used for Functional Testing shall be

calibrated and certified prior to Functional Testing. At the CITY’s discretion, test equipment

or analysis instruments may be subject to re-verification after completion of the Functional

Testing and prior to approval.

3.02 SCHEDULE

A. The approved Functional Testing Schedule shall be followed.

B. The schedule shall be updated and posted weekly, showing actual dates of test Work, and

indicating the status of each Functional Testing Plan. Functional Testing procedures and

Schedules shall be contiguous for each System, only interrupted for necessary modifications,

adjustments, repairs and field engineering, as required for successful completion. If any

interruption exceeds two (2) hours, the CONTRACTOR shall give twenty four (24) hours

notice to the CITY and all resources, prior to continuation or restart of the Functional Testing

Plan.

3.03 FUNCTIONAL TESTING


A. Functional Testing shall proceed under the direction of the CONTRACTOR. Only one

System and Functional Test Plan shall be executed at a time. All Functional Testing shall

follow the approved Plans and Schedules.

B. If any Functional Testing Plan is not completed successfully, necessary modifications,


completion. Functional Testing shall continue or be repeated until successful completion is

accomplished.

C. Verify each point, one point at a time, applying the applicable voltage or current to each field

input termination point. Verify proper functionality of the hardware, software and HMI

indication. By making database adjustments, cause the proper signal to each field output

termination, then measure and record. All equipment configuration parameters and addresses

shall be set and recorded.

D. At the discretion of the CITY, previously completed Functional Test Plans shall be repeated

if subsequent modifications may have altered the equipment or System, and to have logically

affected previous test results or observations.

E. Any proposed deviation from the approved Functional Testing Plans or Schedules shall

require written authorization by the CITY.

3.04 DOCUMENTATION

A. As each procedure is completed, the results shall be documented, dated and signed by the

CONTRACTOR. The CITY will also sign and date the documentation as witness.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a list of Functional Deficiencies, which shall be updated

and sent to the CITY at the end of each week.

C. Upon completion of all Functional Testing, all completed and witnessed documents shall be

compiled and formally submitted to the CITY for approval.

3.05 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. As a condition precedent to receiving progress payments in the period in advance of the date

the CONTRACTOR wishes to begin any testing work, the CONTRACTOR must have had

submitted all Functional Testing Plans required for the systematic field performance and

operational tests for all equipment and Systems installed under the Contract Documents.

Once the CITY has reviewed and taken no exception to the CONTRACTOR’s Functional

Testing Plans, the CONTRACTOR shall reproduce the Functional Testing Plans in sufficient

number for the CONTRACTOR’s purposes and an additional five (5) copies for delivery to

the CITY. No Functional Testing work shall begin until the CONTRACTOR has delivered

the specified number of approved Functional Testing Plans to the CITY.


Refer to 01 75 00 Section 2 for the System Functional Testing workflow.


PROCESS PERFORMANCE TESTING 01 75 04-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 75 04

PROCESS PERFORMANCE TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Definitions.

C. Submittals.





specification sections where Process Performance Testing are indicated as being required is

presented for convenience in the table appearing below but this summary is not guaranteed to

be all inclusive of all references and related sections for Process Performance Testing that

may appear elsewhere in the Contract Documents (CONTRACTOR’s attention to any

addenda modifications is of particular importance).

Specification Reference

Number


26 05 86B Motors


















B. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Special


C. Manufacturer Product Warranties are included in Section 01 78 36.

D. CONTRACTOR’s General Condition Warranty and Guarantee are included in the General



E. Commissioning Requirements and Sequence, Section 01 75 00. (See Part 4 for the Process

Performance Testing flow chart associated with this Section.)

F. Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing, Section 01 75 01.

G. Equipment Startup and Checkout, Section 01 75 02.

H. System Functional Testing, Section 01 75 03.

I. Operational Testing, Section 01 75 05.

J. 30-Day Commissioning Reliability Test, Section 01 75 06.

1.03 SCOPE

A. Process Performance Testing shall be performed to verify proper powered operation of

equipment and Systems, as intended to perform a Process.

B. Performance Testing is performed as the process is initially exposed to operating or surrogate

media and conditions.

C. Performance Testing shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR to verify proper operation,

as described by the following items, as outlined in the technical specifications in the Contract

Documents. Refer to each appropriate technical Specification Section for the performance

requirements or expectations. Performance requirements may be specified for various media

conditions and levels of operation, including equipment, System and Process.

1. Specific performance parameters or expectations.

2. The Functional Description, complete.

3. The Sequence of Operation.

4. Alternative modes of operation.

5. Process functionality, using process or surrogate media as practical.

6. Process or System upsets and recovery:

D. For each of the items listed, the CONTRACTOR shall plan, schedule, execute and document

the Performance Testing of the applicable and related equipment, Systems and Processes.

E. In accordance with Section 01 75 00, Commissioning Requirements and Sequence,

Performance Testing shall be initiated subsequent to the approved Successful Completion of

Functional Testing, Section 01 75 03.

F. Performance Testing shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR, and witnessed by the CITY.

If specifically required by a technical specification included in the Contract Documents, or

otherwise at the CITY’s discretion, Certified Performance Tests may be required in lieu of an

CITY-Witnessed Performance Test.

G. The CONTRACTOR shall identify and utilize the services of a Testing Manager, to oversee

and directly supervise all aspects pertaining to Performance Testing and Operational Testing.

H. Performance Testing shall be successfully completed in compliance with Part 3, Execution

and approved prior to Execution of all subsequent verification sections, including Operational

Testing, Section 01 75 05.

1.04 DEFINITIONS


A. Successful Completion. All aspects of Performance Testing have been completed, and all

requirements listed in the specifications and in the submittals have been proven to have been

met, within the specified constraints.

B. Testing Manager. The person appointed by the CONTRACTOR to plan, schedule, manage,

coordinate, and supervise the CONTRACTOR’s Performance Testing and Operational

Testing programs, including Submittals, Execution and Documentation.

C. Certified Performance Testing. Tests performed and documented by factory authorized

personnel.

D. System. Regarding Performance Testing, a System shall include all items of equipment,


complements, protects or controls the operation or function of the others. The following are

examples of systems used in wastewater facilities: pumping, flow measurement,

programmable controller, level controls, compressor, centrifuge and boiler.

E. Process. Regarding Performance Testing, a Process shall include a collection or series of

Systems or equipment, which act together upon a fluid media to cause a separation or change

in properties, location or energy. The following are examples of wastewater processes: grit

removal, clarification, aeration, dewatering and incineration.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Testing Manager. The CONTRACTOR shall propose the appointment of a Testing Manager

to execute the CONTRACTOR’s Performance Testing and Operational Testing programs.

Upon approval, the Testing Manager shall also develop all subsequent Submittals required by

the Performance Testing and Operational Testing Specification Sections. The Testing

Manager Submittal shall include detailed descriptions of the proposed Testing Manager’s

qualifications and experience in executing, managing and coordinating similar Performance

and Operational Testing programs. An Operations Engineer or equally qualified Operations

Specialist, is expected. Operations Engineers shall be graduates of a minimum 4-year

curriculum in mechanical, civil or equivalent engineering discipline. Operations Specialists

shall have relevant qualifications and experience in plant process operation and maintenance

activities. The submittal pertaining to the Testing Manager shall be approved by CITY prior

to the Testing Manager’s development of all subsequent Submittals in the Performance

Testing section.

B. Performance Testing Plan. A set of detailed Performance Testing Plans shall be submitted to

CITY for approval. The complete Performance Testing Plans shall be submitted no later than

two (2) weeks in advance of the proposed date testing is to begin. Each Performance Testing

Plan shall be specific to the equipment or System to be tested. Each Performance Testing

Plan shall include detailed descriptions of the preparation, execution and documentation, as

follows:

1. A detailed list of the equipment, systems and processes to which the Performance Testing

procedures will apply. This list shall include at least all applicable mechanical, electrical,

instrument, controls, HVAC and process equipment and systems. It shall be indicated

whether a Certified Performance Test or a CITY-Witnessed Performance Test is to be

performed for each equipment, System or Process.

2. Copies of all Functional Descriptions, Alternative Modes of Operation, Sequence of

Operations, and Outline of System Upsets and Recovery to be tested, simulated and

verified by the Performance Testing.



conditions.


completely perform each aspect of the Performance Testing. The compiled list of the

Performance Testing procedures shall address all components of all descriptions -

Functional Description, Mode of Operation, Sequence of Operations or System Upset and

Recovery.


complete the test plan.

6. A list of personnel, which will be used to perform Performance Testing. This list shall



documented and provided upon request.




9. A detailed outline of the specific results or observations, which will constitute successful

completion of each Performance Testing plan.

10. Sample documentation to be used to record the procedures and results of each

Performance Testing plan, including a sample of each form to be used. Samples of the

format and level of detail required for the documentation forms are available in Section

01 33 19.

C. Performance Testing Schedule. A detailed Performance Testing Schedule shall be submitted

for approval. This submittal shall accompany the Performance Testing Plan submittal.

Requirements of the schedule are as follows:

1. The proposed date that Performance Testing is to begin, and the estimated completion

date.

2. A sequence, and relative daily schedule, by which the Performance Testing will be

executed.

3. The proposed Performance Test dates shall be indicated on and coordinated with the

CONTRACTOR’s Construction Progress Schedule specified in Section 01 32 16.

D. Performance Testing Documentation and Results. Upon completion of all aspects of

Performance Testing, all documentation indicating compliance with the requirements shall be

signed and dated by the Testing Manager for completeness and accuracy, and by the CITY as

witness. A copy of the signed results shall be submitted to the CITY for consideration of

Successful Completion. Only upon approval of this Submittal shall the CONTRACTOR

begin to execute subsequent verification Sections.

E. For items requiring only Certified Performance Testing, documentation of this certification

shall be submitted to the CITY for approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 – EXECUTION: PROCESS PERFORMANCE TESTING


3.01 PREPARATION

A. The Testing Manager shall inform and coordinate the activities of all individuals required for

Performance Testing, including the CONTRACTOR, all subcontractors, vendors, suppliers,

the CITY’s operations and maintenance personnel, and other resources needed to implement

the requirements of this Section.

B. The Testing Manager shall assure that all preliminary and cursory installation reviews have




guards and interlocks shall be completed and placed for operation. All temporary equipment

and configurations, including bypasses and jumpers, shall no longer be required and shall be

removed.

C. All test equipment and analysis instruments to be used for Performance Testing shall be

available. At the CITY’s discretion, test equipment or analysis instruments may be subject to

re-verification after completion of the Performance Testing.

3.02 SCHEDULE

A. The approved Performance Testing Schedule shall be followed.

B. The schedule shall be updated and posted weekly, showing actual dates of testing, and the

status of each test plan. Performance Testing procedures and schedules shall be contiguous,

only interrupted for necessary modifications, adjustments, repairs and field engineering, as

required for successful completion. If any interruption exceeds 4-hours, the Testing Manager

shall provide at least twenty four (24) hours notice to the CITY and all resources, prior to

continuation or restart of the test plan.

3.03 PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Performance Testing shall proceed under the direction of the Testing Manager. Only one

process and one Performance Test plan shall be executed at a time. All Performance Testing

shall follow the approved plans and schedules.

B. If any test plan is not completed successfully, necessary modifications, adjustments, repairs

or field engineering shall be performed as required for successful completion. Performance

Testing shall continue or be repeated until successful completion is accomplished.

C. At the discretion of the CITY, previously completed Performance Test plans shall be repeated

if subsequent modifications may have altered the equipment, system or process, and to have

logically affected previous test results or observations.

D. Any proposed deviation from the approved plans or schedules shall require written


3.04 DOCUMENTATION


Testing Manager. The CITY will also sign and date the documentation as witness.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a list of Performance Testing Deficiencies, which shall

be updated and sent to the CITY at the end of each week.

C. Upon completion of all Performance Testing, all completed and witnessed documents shall be

compiled and formally submitted for approval. Unless a waiver is granted in writing by the


CITY, partial submittals of individual equipment, systems or processes shall not be submitted

for review or considered for approval.

3.05 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. As a condition precedent to receiving progress payments in the payment period in advance of

the date the CONTRACTOR wishes to begin any testing work, the CONTRACTOR must

have had submitted all test plans required for the systematic field Performance Testing for all

equipment and Systems installed under the Contract Documents. Once the CITY has

reviewed and taken no exception to the CONTRACTOR’s test plans, the CONTRACTOR

shall reproduce the plans in sufficient number for the CONTRACTOR’s purposes and an

additional five (5) copies for delivery to the CITY. No test work shall begin until the

CONTRACTOR has delivered the specified number of final test plans to the CITY.


Refer to 01 75 00 Section 2 for the Process Performance Testing workflow.


OPERATIONAL TESTING 01 75 05-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 75 05

OPERATIONAL TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Definitions.

C. Submittals.





specification sections where Operational Testing are indicated as being required is presented

for convenience in the table appearing below but this summary is not guaranteed to be all

inclusive of all references and related sections for Operational Testing that may appear

elsewhere in the Contract Documents (CONTRACTOR’s attention to any addenda

modifications is of particular importance).


Number


26 05 86B Motors




















C. Manufacturer Product Warranties are included in Section 0178 36.




E. Commissioning Requirements and Sequence, Section 01 75 00. (See Part 4 for the

Operational Testing flow chart associated with this Section.)




I. Process Performance Testing, Section 01 75 04.

J. 30-Day Commissioning Reliability Test, Section 01 75 06.

1.03 SCOPE

A. Operational Testing shall be performed to verify proper powered operation of a process,

under actual operating conditions, and using the process media for which the process was

designed.

B. Operational Testing shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR to verify proper operation, as

described by the following items, as outlined in the technical specifications. Refer to each

appropriate technical specification section for the operational requirements or expectations.

Operational requirements may be specified for various media conditions and levels of

operation, including equipment, system and process.

1. Specific operational parameters or expectations.

2. The Functional Description, complete.

3. The Sequence of Operation.

4. Alternative modes of operation.

5. Process functionality, using process or surrogate media as practical.

6. Process or system upsets and recovery.

C. For each of the items listed, the CONTRACTOR shall plan, schedule, execute and document

the Operational Testing of the applicable and related equipment, systems and processes.

D. In accordance with Section 01 75 00, Commissioning Requirements and Sequence,

Operational Testing shall be only initiated subsequent to the approved Successful Completion

of Process Performance Testing, Section 01 75 04.

E. Operational Testing shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR, and witnessed by the CITY.

F. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize the services of the Testing Manager, defined and approved

in the Performance Testing section. The Testing Manager shall oversee and directly

supervise all aspects pertaining to Operational Testing.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Successful Completion. All aspects of Operational Testing have been completed, and all

requirements listed in the specifications and in the submittals have been proven to have been

met, within the specified constraints. Conformance to test plan requirement will be the

commissioning checklist.

B. Testing Manager. The person appointed by the CONTRACTOR to plan, schedule, manage,

coordinate, and supervise the CONTRACTOR’s Performance Testing and Operational


Testing programs, including Submittals, Execution and Documentation.

C. System. Regarding Operational Testing, a system shall include all items of equipment,


complements, protects or controls the operation or function of the others. The following are

examples of systems used in wastewater facilities: pumping, flow measurement,

programmable controller, level controls, compressor, centrifuge and boiler.

D. Process. Regarding Operational Testing, a process shall include a collection or series of

systems or equipment, which act together upon a fluid media to cause a separation or change

in properties, location or energy. The following are examples of wastewater processes: grit

removal, clarification, aeration, dewatering and incineration.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Testing Manager. The CONTRACTOR shall submit confirmation that the Testing Manager

appointed under the requirements of Performance Testing, Section 01 75 04, shall be the

same individual performing the Testing Manager tasks, outlined as follow. A proposed

change of Testing Manager shall be submitted for approval. The Testing Manager

confirmation shall be approved prior to the Testing Manager’s development of all subsequent

submittals in the Operational Testing section.

B. Operational Testing Plan. A set of detailed Operational Testing plans shall be submitted for

approval. The Operational Testing may begin 2 weeks after approval by the City. Each test

plan shall be specific to the process to be tested. Each test plan shall include detailed

descriptions of the preparation, execution and documentation, as follows:

1. A detailed list of the equipment, systems and processes to which the Operational Testing

procedures will apply. This list shall include at least all applicable mechanical, electrical,

instrument, controls, HVAC and process equipment and systems.

2. Copies of all Functional Descriptions, Alternative Modes of Operation, Sequence of

Operations, and Outline of System Upsets and Recovery to be tested, simulated and

verified by the Operational Testing.


conditions.


completely perform each aspect of the Operational Testing. The compiled list of testing

procedure shall address all components of all descriptions - Functional Description, Mode

of Operation, Sequence of Operations or System Upset and Recovery.

5. A list of test and support equipment and other resources required to complete the test

plan.

6. A list of personnel, who will be used to perform Operational Testing. This list shall



documented and provided upon request.




9. A detailed outline of the specific results or observations, which will constitute successful

completion of each Operational Testing plan.


10. Sample documentation to be used to record the procedures and results of each

Operational Testing plan, including a sample of each form to be used. Samples of the

format and level of detail required for the documentation forms are available in Section

01 33 19.

C. Operational Testing Schedule. A detailed Operational Testing Schedule shall be submitted

for approval. This submittal shall accompany the Operational Testing Plan submittal.

Requirements of the schedule are as follows:

1. The proposed date that Operational Testing is to begin, and the estimated completion

date.

2. A sequence, and relative daily schedule, by which the Operational Testing will be

executed.

3. The proposed Operational Test dates shall be indicated on and coordinated with the

CONTRACTOR’s construction schedule specified in Section 01 32 16.

D. Operational Testing Documentation and Results. Upon completion of all aspects of

Operational Testing, all documentation indicating compliance with the requirements shall be

signed and dated by the Testing Manager for completeness and accuracy, and by the CITY as

witness. A copy of the signed results shall be submitted to the CITY for consideration of

Successful Completion.

E. For items requiring only Certified Operational Testing, documentation of this certification

shall be submitted to the CITY for approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 – EXECUTION: OPERATIONAL TESTING

3.01 PREPARATION

A. The Testing Manager shall inform and coordinate the activities of all individuals required for

Operational Testing, including the CONTRACTOR, all subcontractors, vendors, suppliers,

the CITY’s operations and maintenance personnel, and other resources needed to implement

the requirements of this section.

B. The Testing Manager shall assure that all preliminary and cursory installation reviews have




guards and interlocks shall be completed and placed for operation. All temporary equipment

and configurations, including bypasses and jumpers, shall no longer be required and shall be

removed.

C. All test equipment and analysis instruments to be used for Operational Testing shall be

available. At the CITY’s discretion, test equipment or analysis instruments may be subject to

re-verification after completion of the Operational Testing.

3.02 SCHEDULE

A. The approved Operational Testing Schedule shall be followed.


B. The schedule shall be updated and posted weekly, showing actual dates of testing, and the

status of each test plan. Operational Testing procedures and schedules shall be contiguous,

only interrupted for necessary modifications, adjustments, repairs and field engineering, as

required for successful completion. If any interruption exceeds 4-hours, the Testing Manager

shall provide at least 24 hours notice to the CITY and all resources, prior to continuation or

restart of the test plan.

3.03 OPERATIONAL TESTING

A. Operational Testing shall proceed under the direction of the Testing Manager. Only one

process and one Operational Test plan shall be executed at a time. All Operational Testing

shall follow the approved plans and schedules.

B. If any test plan is not completed successfully, necessary modifications, adjustments, repairs

or field engineering shall be performed as required for successful completion. Operational

Testing shall continue or be repeated until successful completion is accomplished.

C. At the discretion of the CITY, previously completed Operational Test plans shall be repeated

if subsequent modifications may have altered the equipment, system or process, and to have

logically affected previous test results or observations.

D. Any proposed deviation from the approved plans or schedules shall require written


3.04 DOCUMENTATION


Testing Manager. The CITY will also sign and date the documentation as witness.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a list of Operational Testing Deficiencies, which shall be

updated and sent to the CITY at the end of each week.

C. Upon completion of all Operational Testing, all completed and witnessed documents shall be

compiled and formally submitted for approval. Unless a waiver is granted in writing by the

CITY, partial submittals of individual equipment, systems or processes shall not be submitted

for review or considered for approval..


Refer to 01 75 00 Section 2 for the Operational Testing workflow.


30-DAY COMMISSIONING

RELIABILITY TEST 01 75 06-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 75 06

30-DAY COMMISSIONING RELIABILITY TEST

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Submittals.

C. Quality Assurance.





specification sections where 30-Day Commissioning Reliability Testing are indicated as

being required is presented for convenience in the table appearing below but this summary is

not guaranteed to be all inclusive of all references and related sections for 30-Day

Commissioning Reliability Testing that may appear elsewhere in the Contract Documents

(CONTRACTOR’s attention to any addenda modifications is of particular importance).

Specification

Reference Number



23 34 00 Fans



26 05 86B Motors







40 05 23 Valves
















Specification

Reference Number






C. Manufacturer Product Warranties are included in Section 01 78 36.



E. Commissioning Requirements and Sequence, Section 01 75 00. (See Part 4 for the 30-Day

Commissioning Reliability Test flow chart associated with this Section.)




I. Process Performance Testing, Section 01 75 04.

J. Operational Testing, Section 01 75 05.

1.03 SCOPE

A. This section contains requirements for the CONTRACTOR’s performance during the

commissioning of the structures, equipment and systems constructed and installed during the

course of the Work required by the Contract Documents. All commissioning work, as

described in this Section, shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR.

1. The commissioning process does not automatically begin solely upon completion of prior

requirements as described in Section 01 75 00, but depends also on establishing normal

operating parameters and completing other Work as described herein.

B. Commissioning shall be performed to verify proper onsite installation, per the manufacturer’s

documentation and technical specifications included in the Contract Documents. Drawings

by the CONTRACTOR are also reviewed to verify drawing accuracy and completeness.

C. Equipment Commissioning shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR and witnessed by the

CITY. Depending upon the project, the City shall be responsible for the operation of the

plant as related to obtaining the required effluent quality, controlling odor stack emissions

and/or maintaining acceptable sound control decibel readings.

D. Commissioning shall also include static testing of wiring and devices, mechanical

connections, and preliminary mounting inspections.

E. Commissioning shall be initiated and performed after all mechanical and electrical equipment

have been delivered and fully installed. Prior to Commissioning, all mechanical connections

shall have been completed, and all power and interconnecting wiring shall be terminated and

labeled.

F. All Equipment Startup and Checkout procedures and results shall be documented, indicating

compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the requirements of the technical

specifications included in the Contract Documents. The accuracy and completeness of the

drawings and documentation shall also be verified.



G. All required training must be completed prior to the start of the 30-Day Commissioning

Reliability Test.

H. In accordance with the requirements of Commissioning Requirements and Sequence, Section

01 75 00, the procedure in the Execution section of the 30-Day Commissioning Reliability

Test Specification shall be initiated only subsequent to all prior work being approved.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. All Shop Drawings and Operations and Maintenance Manuals are submitted in advance of the

Commissioning Plan submittal.

B. Commissioning Plan. The CONTRACTOR shall submit all of the following documents

listed to the CITY for approval (collectively referred to as the “Commissioning Plan”. Upon

receipt of the CITY’s approval of these documents, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the

activities with the CITY’s staff and start the field 30-Day Commissioning Reliability Testing

no sooner than two (2) weeks.

C. Submittal Documents: the following information shall be submitted to the CITY in

accordance within the provisions of Submittals, Section 01 33 00 and shall be field verified

prior to submission:

1. Written verification that all installation tasks of the equipment to be included in the

Equipment Commissioning activities have been totally completed, per the requirements

of the design and approved Submittal documents. This document shall also indicate that

all permanent field equipment labels and tags are installed.

2. Motor Control Center wiring diagrams, marked and updated to identify field wiring

connections and final circuit breaker assignments.

3. Control panel schematic diagrams, updated to include field wiring identification.

4. PLC input and output (I/O) drawings, updated to include field wiring identification.

5. Control panel interconnection diagrams, updated to include all field wiring.

6. Process and Instrument Diagrams (P&ID’s), updated to reflect any changes or

clarifications made during installation.

7. Instrument loop diagrams, updated to include specific terminal and wire label

identifications.

8. Digital network diagrams and riser diagrams, updated to reflect all device identification

and cable labels.

9. A detailed certification procedure for verification of all digital network cables, including

testing under static and dynamic conditions.

10. The CONTRACTOR’s plan for providing a Commissioning Team during the

commissioning period. The plan shall be complete with a daytime staffing plan and

names, qualifications, and telephone numbers of those assigned to off-hour standby duty.

11. A schedule and subsequent updates, presenting the CONTRACTOR’s plan for

commissioning systems installed under the Contract Documents. The schedule shall

establish the expected time period (calendar dates) when the CONTRACTOR plans to

commence commissioning of the completed equipment and systems. The schedule shall

coincide with the CONTRACTOR’s Construction Progress schedule required in Section

01 32 16.




A. CLEANUP: Following completion of the operational testing period, the CONTRACTOR shall

remove, clean, and replace all permanent and temporary filters and strainers in all pipeline

systems; replace all HVAC filters; dewater and clean all sumps; and dewater all process units for

final inspection as a condition precedent to commissioning.

B. COMMISSIONING TEAM: The CONTRACTOR shall assemble a commissioning team

under the direction of the Quality Assurance Manager. The CONTRACTOR shall appoint an

operations engineer or equally qualified operations specialist as the Quality Assurance

Manager to manage, coordinate, and supervise the CONTRACTOR’s quality assurance

program. The Quality Assurance Manager shall be duly authorized to commit the

CONTRACTOR’s personnel and resources to respond to requests for assistance on the part of

the CITY. The commissioning team shall consist of representatives of the CONTRACTOR’s

mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation subcontractors, and others as appropriate (the

"Commissioning Team"). The Commissioning Team shall be available at the site of the work

during normal working hours (8 hours a day, 5 days a week, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal

holidays excepted) and shall be available within two (2) hours notice at all other times upon

notice by telephone. The Commissioning Team shall at all times be equipped and ready to

provide for emergency repairs, adjustments, and corrections to the equipment and systems

installed and modified as a part of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Working with representatives of the CITY, the CONSULTANT shall develop and produce a

detailed, written plan for operation, under actual operating conditions and actual process

fluids and materials, of the equipment and systems installed and constructed under the

Contract Documents. The written plan for operation document, after acceptance by the

CITY, shall serve as the CONTRACTOR’S guidance manual for the commissioning process

and procedures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: 30-DAY COMMISSIONING RELIABILITY TEST

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prior to Commissioning Execution, all structural and mechanical aspects of each component

and equipment shall be verified for complete and proper installation. All permissive,

interlocks and safety devices shall be verified to be in place and fully functional.

B. Commissioning shall commence only after all normal operating process parameters are

established, including flow, pressure, temperature, etc., and all ancillary equipment is

completely installed, calibrated and available for routine use. Commissioning will be

authorized only with written notice from the CITY that the equipment and systems did meet

all test requirements and that commissioning may proceed. The commissioning period for

each modified or new major equipment or new unit process system shall be a minimum of

thirty (30) days. The CONTRACTOR shall remove all temporary appurtenances and other

alterations to the permanent systems that may have been needed during the performance and

operational testing and shall perform the tasks necessary to make the improvements

constructed under the Contract Documents fully operational. The CONTRACTOR shall

complete all punch list items designated by the CITY as necessary for commissioning prior to

beginning the commissioning period.



C. The CONTRACTOR shall assure that all preliminary and cursory installation reviews have

been performed and corrected, including inspections of connections, fittings and mountings.

All safeties, guards and interlocks shall be completed and placed in operation.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall be available at all times during commissioning periods to provide

immediate assistance in case of failure of any portion of the equipment or system being

constructed. At the end of the commissioning period and when all corrections required by the

CITY to assure a reliable and completely operational facility are complete, the CITY shall

issue a completion certificate. All equipment and each system shall have been issued a

completion certificate as a condition precedent to the final acceptance of the Work under the

Contract Documents.

E. Proper installation of electrical equipment and conductors shall be verified per the

manufacturer’s recommendations, especially regarding proper sizing, grounding, insulation,

resistance and protection.

F. All test equipment and analysis instruments to be used for Commissioning verification shall

be calibrated and certified prior to testing. At the CITY’s discretion, test equipment or

analysis instruments may be subject to re-certification after completion of Commissioning.

G. Refer to each applicable technical specification section in the Contract Documents for

clarifications or additional installation and commissioning requirements or expectations.

H. Electrical Equipment Commissioning shall be performed, including the following, per the


1. Check and correct all items used during installation to temporarily defeat the designed

operation of equipment and systems, including undocumented jumpers and non-

terminated wires.

2. Verify field equipment labels and tags, including the identification of the breaker, from

which each device is fed.

3. Verify proper and functional circuit and motor protection equipment, such as disconnects,

breakers, fuses and overloads.

4. Verify that all installations of electrical equipment and conductors are per the

manufacturer’s recommendations, especially regarding proper sizing, grounding,

insulation, resistance and protection.

5. Verify proper and functional personnel protection equipment, such as disconnect handles,

lockout devices, machine guards, safety protection & emergency stop switches, gas

detectors, and signaling devices. Verify that all protection devices are in place and

enabled.

I. Instrument and Controls Equipment Commissioning shall be performed, including the

following, per the manufacturer’s documentation and the technical specifications:

1. Verify all field wire terminations, per I/O drawings and interconnect drawings. Drawings

shall be updated to include specific terminal identification.

2. Verify wire routing and labels, including separation of AC and DC wiring.

3. Verify the labels on all panels, field devices, and process equipment for consistency and

completeness of all documents.

4. Verify and document network physical integrity. Refer to the technical specifications in

the Contract Documents for detailed requirements.



J. Mechanical Equipment Commissioning shall be performed, including the following, per the


1. Verify that all equipment and components have been fully and properly installed.

2. Verify mechanical connections, fittings and mountings.

3. Verify equipment alignment.

3.02 COMMISSIONING

A. Commissioning may begin two (2) weeks after approval of each applicable Commissioning

Plan, subject to the following stipulations:

1. In accordance with Commissioning Requirements and Sequence, Section 01 75 00,

Commissioning shall only be initiated subsequent to all prior work being approved.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the CITY at least eight (8) work hours prior to each

Commissioning activity. To minimize facility disruptions, all Commissioning activities

shall be coordinated in advance with the CITY. At the CITY’s discretion, the CITY may

elect to witness some or all of these activities.

3. Once started, Commissioning shall continue or be repeated until successful completion is

accomplished. All requests to interrupt, suspend or restart Commissioning activities shall

be submitted for approval.

B. Commissioning of completed systems shall be in accordance with the scheduling

requirements of Testing Laboratory Services, Sections 01 45 29 and Commissioning, as

described in this Section. As such, it shall be necessary to perform multiple commissioning

periods.

C. The CITY’s operation and maintenance personnel will be responsible for operation of the

equipment and systems to be commissioned. The portion of the Work to be commissioned

shall be fully operational, performing all functions for which it was designed.

D. During the commissioning period, the CITY shall be responsible for all normal operational

costs and the CONTRACTOR shall bear the costs of all necessary repairs or replacements,

including labor and materials, required to keep the portion of the plant being commissioned,

operational.

E. The date on which the commissioning period is successfully completed shall be noted by the

CITY in writing to the CONTRACTOR.

F. If any Equipment Commissioning cannot be completed successfully, necessary modifications,


completion. Equipment Commissioning shall continue or be repeated until successful

completion is accomplished.

G. Any proposed deviation from the approved plans or schedules shall require written


3.03 DOCUMENTATION

A. Only the forms and documents submitted to and approved by CITY shall be used to

document field Equipment Commissioning. As each activity is completed, all forms shall be

completed, dated and signed by the CONTRACTOR.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a list of Commissioning deficiencies, which shall be

updated and sent to the CITY at the end of each week during Commissioning. All



deficiencies shall be corrected prior to submittal of any completed documentation for

approval.

C. Upon completion of all Commissioning, all completed and witnessed documents shall be

compiled and formally submitted for approval.


Refer to 01 75 00 Section 2 for the 30-Day Commissioning Reliability Test workflow.




THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 77 00

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SECTIONS INCLUDES

A. Closeout Procedures.


A. Substantial Completion is included in Section 01 77 19.

B. Warranties and Bonds are included in Section 01 78 36.

C. Record Documents are included in Section 01 78 39.

1.03 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Upon Substantial Completion, as determined in accordance with section 01 77 19 of the

specifications, the CITY will issue to the CONTRACTOR a written punch list of minor work

required as a condition of final acceptance. The CITY’s punch list will stipulate a reasonable

time, if different than 30 days, to complete the required work. Failure of the CONTRACTOR

to complete the punch list items by the stipulated term, normally 30 days, will result in an

administrative fee of $100 per calendar day for every day beyond the stipulated time period

the punch list work remains incomplete.

B. CONTRACTOR shall submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed,

Work has been inspected and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and

ready for CITY inspection. The CITY will inspect the improvement, and if items remain which

the CONTRACTOR must complete or remedy, perform the work immediately. When the

CONTRACTOR corrects such items, the CITY will make final inspection. The work must pass

final inspection before the CITY will accept it.

C. Provide submittals to the CITY or the CITY’s representative that are required by governing or

other authorities.

D. Submit Application for Final Payment, in accordance with Article 14.07 of Section 00 72 00

General Conditions. Application for Final Payment shall include all Record Documents in

accordance with Section 01 78 39 of the Specifications, and identify total adjusted Contract Sum,

previous payments and sum remaining due.

E. CONTRACTOR shall repair defective land, areas, or Work during the Correction Period in

accordance with Article 13.07 of Section 00 72 00 General Conditions and as stipulated in

Contract Documents.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT USED

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2 SEPTEMBER 2013


NOT USED


SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 01 77 19-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 77 19

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Partial Utilization.

C. Final Completion


A. Summary of Project is included in Section 01 11 00.

B. Cleaning is included in Section 01 74 00.

C. Measurement and Payment is included in Section 01 20 00.

D. Contract Closeout is included in Section 01 77 00.

E. Equipment and System Performance and Operational Testing is included in Section 01 75 03.

F. Reliability Testing is included in Section 01 75 04.

G. System Functional Testing is included in Section 01 75 03.

H. Process Performance Testing is included in Section 01 75 04.

1.03 SCOPE

A. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use, CONTRACTOR

shall, in writing to CITY, certify that the entire Work is Substantially Complete as defined

below and request that CITY issue a letter or Certificate of Substantial Completion. Within

fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt of such notice from the CONTRACTOR, CITY and

the CONTRACTOR shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of the

Work. If CITY does not consider the Work Substantially Complete, CONTRACTOR will be

notified in writing giving reasons therefore. If CITY considers the Work Substantially

Complete, a letter or Certificate of Substantial Completion will be prepared by the CITY

which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the letter or

Certificate of Substantial Completion, a final list of items to be completed or corrected before

Final Completion and final payment. If appropriate, CITY will deliver to the

CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final

payment between CITY and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety,

maintenance, heat, utilities and insurance.

B. Substantial Completion occurs when all startup and testing has been performed on the Project

in accordance with the Contract Documents or the CITY has beneficial occupancy of the

Project, whichever comes later. Substantial Completion shall also mean that all elements of

the Project, including all systems incorporated into the Project, are operational and will

perform as specified in the Contract Documents; that the Project, including all systems

incorporated into the Project, will in no way become a public nuisance; that the Project,

including all systems incorporated into the Project, in no way will adversely affect the public

health, welfare or safety; that the operation of the system Project, including all systems


incorporated into the Project, may be conducted in a safe and efficient manner; and that safe,

all-weather access be assured in order that any equipment necessary for the normal activities

associated with operation of the Project, including all systems incorporated into the Project,

may have free continual ingress and egress. In addition, all O&M manuals and “as-built”

drawings shall have been received and approved and any training that is required by the

Contract Documents shall have been provided. In addition, all elements of the Work to be

automated shall operate automatically as a complete system under automated control.

C. The inspection to verify Substantial Completion shall include, but not be limited to:

1. All Work performed under the original Contract Documents and any additional Work

performed in accordance with approved changes to the Contract Documents.

2. All equipment and systems tested and shown operational in the presence of the CITY

and/or the CITY’s designated representatives and stakeholders.

D. CITY shall have the right to exclude items from the Work after the date of Substantial

Completion, but CITY shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct

items on the list attached to the letter or Certificate of Substantial Completion.

CONTRACTOR shall also have reasonable access to make corrections during the one (1)

year Correction Period in accordance with Paragraph 13.07 of the General Conditions

included in the Contract Documents.

1.04 PARTIAL UTILIZATION

A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, CITY may request CONTRACTOR in

writing to permit CITY to use a specified part of the Work which CITY believes to be

Substantially Complete and which may be used without significant interference with Work of

the other parts of the Project. If CONTRACTOR agrees, he will certify to CITY that said

part of the Work is Substantially Complete and request CITY to issue a letter or Certificate of

Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within fourteen (14) calendar days of this

request by the CONTRACTOR, the CITY and CONTRACTOR shall make an inspection of

that part of the Work to determine its status of completion and shall issue a letter or

Certificate of Substantial Completion as described in Paragraph 1.03.A in this Specification

Section.

B. In lieu of the issuance of a letter or Certificate of Substantial Completion as to part of the

Work, CITY may take over operation of a facility constituting part of the Work whether or

not it is Substantially Complete if such facility is functional and separately useable; provided

that prior to any such take over, the CITY and CONTRACTOR have agreed as to the division

of responsibilities for security, operation, safety, maintenance, correction period, heat,

utilities and insurance with respect to such facility. The Correction Period, described in

Article 13.07 of the General Conditions, shall be interrupted if the equipment is out of service

for repairs during the Correction Period.

1.05 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Final completion occurs at a point in time after Substantial Completion has been attained. At

Final Completion any contractual obligation, outstanding at Substantial Completion, has been

satisfied; all punch list items have been satisfactorily completed to the CiITY’s’s

requirements; and all restoration, seeding, final cleaning, and site demobilization have

occurred.

B. At Final Completion, all closeout submittals, final adjustment of accounts, and the final

payment request have been submitted and approved in accordance with Section 01 77 00


Contract Closeout.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST

A. Refer to Project Equipment Checklist, Table 01 77 19-1, for a list of required operational

equipment to be included in Substantial Completion Inspection:

Table 01 77 19-1: Minimum System Requirements for Substantial Completion

SYSTEM OR

SUBSYSTEM

OR

STRUCTURE

P&ID or

Drawing or

Spec

Reference

EQUIPMENT O&M

MANUAL

REQUIRED

TRAINING

REQUIRED

PERFORMANCE

AND

OPERATIONAL

TESTING

RELIABILITY

TESTING

Plumbing 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment Yes No No Yes

HVAC

22 34 00 Fans Yes No No Yes

23 81 26.19 Split System Air

Conditioning Unit Yes No No Yes

23 82 39.23 Electric Heaters Yes No No Yes

Electrical and

Instrumentation

26 05 86B Motors Yes No Yes Yes

26 24 16B Panelboards No No Yes

26 24 19B Low Voltage Motor

Control Center Yes No Yes Yes

26 29 23.13B Variable Speed Drives Yes No Yes Yes

26 44 01 Self-Regulating Heat

Tracing Yes No No Yes

40 91 00 Instrumentation

Devices Yes Yes Yes Yes

40 94 43 Programmable Logic

Controllers Yes Yes Yes Yes

40 95 13 Control Panels Yes No Yes Yes

Valves and

Gates

35 20 16 Hydraulic Gates Yes Yes No Yes

40 05 23 Valves Yes No No Yes

40 92 43 Motorized Actuators Yes Yes Yes Yes

Sample Pumps 43 21 39.19P Submersible Grinder

Sample Pumps Yes Yes Yes Yes


SYSTEM OR

SUBSYSTEM

OR

STRUCTURE

P&ID or

Drawing or

Spec

Reference

EQUIPMENT O&M

MANUAL

REQUIRED

TRAINING

REQUIRED

PERFORMANCE

AND

OPERATIONAL

TESTING

RELIABILITY

TESTING

Influent PS 43 21 40 Submersible Pumps Yes Yes Yes Yes

Screens and Grit

43 21 14 Recessed Impeller

Pumps Yes Yes Yes Yes

46 21 00 Mechanical Screen and

Compactor Yes Yes Yes Yes

46 23 00 Grit Removal

Equipment Yes Yes Yes Yes

Aeration

46 33 00

Liquid Deicer Feed

System

Yes Yes Yes Yes

46 41 23 Submersible Mixers Yes Yes Yes Yes

46 51 21.13 Coarse Bubble

Aeration Systems Yes Yes Yes Yes

46 51 46 Membrane Diffused

Aeration System Yes Yes Yes Yes

Clarifiers 46 43 21.19 Circular Clarifier Yes Yes Yes Yes

Digesters 46 71 80 Floating Decanter

Equipment Yes Yes Yes Yes

3.02 INSPECTION

A. If the inspection by CITY and CONTRACTOR confirms that the Work is Substantially

Complete, the CITY or the CITY’s representative shall:

1. Prepare, and submit to the CONTRACTOR, a list of items (punch list) to be completed or

corrected, as determined by the inspection, along with the designated timeframe for

completion.

2. Prepare and issue a letter or Certificate of Substantial Completion, containing:

a. The date of substantial completion.

b. A list of items (punch list) to be completed or corrected by the CONTRACTOR.

c. The timeframe within which the CONTRACTOR shall complete or correct the Work

of the above listed items.

d. The time and date the CITY will assume possession of the Work or designated

portion thereof.

e. The responsibilities of the CONTRACTOR for:

i. Operation of mechanical, electrical and other systems.

ii. Maintenance and cleaning.

iii. Security.

f. The signature of the:


i. CITY

ii. CONTRACTOR


OPERATING AND 01 78 23-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

SECTION 01 78 23

EQUIPMENT OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL INFORMATION

1 PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Definitions.

C. CONTRACTOR Responsibilities.

D. Schedule of Submittals.

E. Types of Information Required.



B. A partial list of specifications sections where Operating and Maintenance Manuals are

required is presented for convenience in the table appearing below, but this summary is not

guaranteed to be all inclusive of all references and related sections.

Specification

Reference Number



23 34 00 Fans



26 05 86B Motors





40 05 23 Valves


















1.03 SCOPE

A. Equipment Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals shall be provided in accordance

with this section and Contract Documents. O&M Manuals shall be provided for each

maintainable piece of equipment, equipment assembly or subassembly, and material provided

or modified under the Contract Documents.

B. O&M Manuals must be submitted and accepted before on-site training may start.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Preliminary Operation and Maintenance Manual: The Preliminary O&M Manual will be

provided by the CONTRACTOR. The Preliminary O&M Manual will incorporate the

Submittal review comments and contain the necessary preventive maintenance tasks,

assembly/disassembly procedures, parts lists, special tools, storage requirements, emergency

start-up and shutdown procedures, and wiring diagrams to service the equipment and order

replacement parts until the Final O&M Manual is compiled.

B. Final Operation and Maintenance Manual: The Final O&M Manual shall be produced by the

CONTRACTOR upon completion and approval of all field testing. Distribution of the Final

O&M Manual shall be withheld until the product warranty documents, field test records, and

as-built information have been completed, submitted to the CITY, approved and inserted into

the Final O&M Manual.

1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITES

A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals as defined in Paragraph 1.04 above will be compiled by the

CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the CITY electronic and hard copies of

the O&M Manuals to the CITY as specified in 1.04 of this section.

1.06 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS

A. Preliminary O&M Manual Information: Within thirty (30) days after approval of any

equipment Submittal by the CITY, the CONTRACTOR shall submit six (6) preliminary hard

copies, one (1) electronic copy (pdf) and one (1) electronic copy (native file) of the

Preliminary O&M Manual information to the CITY for approval.

B. The CITY will review the Preliminary O&M Manual information and will return one copy

with pertinent comments to the CONTRACTOR, as defined in 01 33 00 – Submittals, for

inclusion in the Final O&M Manual.

C. Final O&M Manual: Distribution of Final O&M Manual shall be withheld until the

Preliminary O&M Manual information has been accepted and the CONTRACTOR has

provided all field test records, and as-built information has been completed by the

CONTRACTOR and approved by the CITY for insertion in the Final O&M Manuals, and the

manufacturer’s product warranties are active. The CONTRACTOR shall submit six (6) hard

copies, one (1) electronic copy (pdf), and one (1) electronic copy (native) of the Final O&M

Manual to the CITY.

1.07 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED

A. GENERAL: O&M information shall contain the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of

the manufacturer, the nearest representative(s) of the manufacturer, and the nearest

supplier(s) of the manufacturer's equipment and parts. In addition, one or more of the

following items of information shall be provided as applicable.



B. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: Specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations shall be

provided for the following phases of operations:

1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS: List personnel hazards for equipment, personal protective

equipment (PPE), and list safety precautions for all operating conditions.

2. OPERATOR PRESTART: Provide requirements to set up and prepare each system for

use.

3. START-UP, SHUTDOWN, AND POST-SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES: Provide a

control sequence for each of these operations.

4. NORMAL OPERATIONS: Provide control diagrams with data to explain operation and

control of systems and specific equipment.

5. EMERGENCY OPERATIONS: Provide emergency procedures for equipment

malfunctions to permit a short period of continued operation or to shut down the

equipment to prevent further damage to systems and equipment. Include emergency

shutdown instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable contingencies.

Provide guidance on emergency operations of all utility systems including valve locations

and portions of systems controlled.

6. OPERATOR SERVICE REQUIREMENTS: Provide instructions for services to be

performed by the operator such as lubrication, adjustments, and inspection.

7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Provide a list of environmental conditions

(temperature, humidity, and other relevant data) which are best suited for each product or

piece of equipment and describe conditions under which equipment should not be

allowed to run.

8. LOCK-OUT AND TAG-OUT REQUIREMENTS: Provide detailed instructions that

others can employ to ensure that equipment and systems are isolated from all energy

sources. Where stored or residual energy may be encountered, identify and document

type(s) of stored or residual energy, and appropriate methods of dissipating or restraining

each type of stored or residual energy. Stored or residual energy may be encountered in a

variety of equipment or systems including but not limited to capacitors; springs; elevated

machine members; rotating flywheels; hydraulic systems; and air, gas, steam, or water

pressure; etc.

C. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE: The following information shall be provided for

preventive and scheduled maintenance to minimize corrective maintenance and repair:

1. LUBRICATION DATA: Provide lubrication data as required below.

a. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges and

applications;

b. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points,

recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities; and

c. A lubrication schedule showing service interval frequency.

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PLAN AND SCHEDULE: Provide manufacturer's

schedule for routine preventive maintenance, inspections, tests, and adjustments required

to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize corrective maintenance and

repair. Provide manufacturer's projection of preventive maintenance man-hours on a

daily, weekly, monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft.

D. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE: Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be provided on



procedures and instructions for correcting problems and making repairs.

1. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDES AND DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUES: Provide step-

by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions. Describe

clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought. Identify

tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and

equipment may be reused or require replacement.

2. WIRING DIAGRAMS AND CONTROL DIAGRAMS: Wiring diagrams and control

diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of wiring and control circuits including

factory-field interfaces. Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job-

specific wiring and control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring

and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type identically to actual

installation numbering.

3. MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES: Provide instructions and list tools

required to restore product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards.

4. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTIONS: Provide step-by-step

procedures and list required tools and supplies for removal, replacement, disassembly,

and assembly of components, assemblies, subassemblies, accessories, and attachments.

Provide tolerances, dimensions, settings, and adjustments required. Instructions shall

include a combination of test and illustrations.

5. Provide replacement cost information for all equipment included in the O&M Manual.

6. SPARE PARTS AND SUPPLY LISTS: Provide lists of spare parts and supplies required

for maintenance and repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable

delays. Special consideration is required for facilities at remote locations. List spare

parts and supplies that have a long lead time to obtain. Provide list of recommended

spare parts on separate sheet in O&M Manual. Provide price and availability information

for spare parts.

7. Provide a spare parts table including part description, part number, reorder information,

cost, lead time, supplier contact information, and reference to assembly drawing for all

equipment included in the O&M Manual.

8. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE MANHOURS: Provide manufacturer’s projection of

corrective maintenance man-hours including craft requirements by type of craft.

Corrective maintenance that requires participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be

identified and tabulated separately.

E. APPENDICES: The following information shall be provided. Include information not

specified in the preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the

product or equipment.

1. PARTS IDENTIFICATION: Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each

component, assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to

replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as the requirement to use

high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial number, and source of

supply to allow reordering without further identification. Provide clear and legible

illustrations, drawings, and exploded views to enable easy identification of the items.

When illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the illustrations and

separate listings shall show the index, reference, or key number which will cross-

reference the illustrated part to the listed part. Parts shown in the listings shall be

grouped by components, assemblies, and subassemblies.



2. WARRANTY INFORMATION: List and explain the various product warranties and

include the servicing and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or

Contract Documents to keep warranties in force.

3. PERSONNEL TRAINING REQUIREMENTS: Provide information available from the

manufacturers to use in training designated personnel to operate and maintain the

equipment and systems properly.

4. TESTING EQUIPMENT AND SPECIAL TOOL INFORMATION: Provide information

on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools needed for the

operation, maintenance, and repair of components.

2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

3 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE

A. Unless otherwise specified, O&M Manuals, information, and data shall be transmitted in

accordance with Section 01 33 00 accompanied by Transmittal Form 01 78 23-A and

Equipment Record Forms 01 78 23-B and/or 01 78 23-C, as appropriate, all as specified in

Section 01 33 19. The transmittal form shall be used as a checklist to ensure the O&M

Manual is complete. Only complete sets of O&M Manuals will be reviewed for acceptance.

Operation and maintenance manuals shall be comprised of equipment manufacturers’ original

printed material and literature. No reproductions will be accepted except as required to

reduce the original documents to the specified size.

B. For ease of identification, each manufacturer’s brochure and manual shall be appropriately

labeled with the equipment name and equipment number as it appears in the Contract

Documents. The information shall be organized in numerical order by the equipment

numbers assigned in the Contract Documents.

C. If manufacturers’ standard brochures and manuals are used to describe O&M procedures,

such brochures and manuals shall be modified to reflect only the model or series of

equipment used on the Project. Extraneous material shall be crossed out neatly or otherwise

annotated or eliminated.

3.02 FIELD CHANGES

A. Following the acceptable installation and operation of an equipment item, the item’s

instructions and procedures shall be modified and supplemented by the CONTRACTOR to

reflect any field changes or information requiring field data. These changes will be

incorporated into the Final O&M Manual as required by paragraph 1.06.C, Schedule of

Submittals above.


MANUFACTURER PRODUCT WARRANTIES 01 78 36-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 78 36

MANUFACTURER PRODUCT WARRANTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Submittals.

C. Schedule of Warranties.

D. Warranty Requirements.

E. Manufacturer’s Certifications.

F. Definitions


A. Refer to the General Conditions, including Article 6 for the general requirements relating to

warranties.

B. General Closeout or Contract Closeout requirements are included in Section 01 77 00.

C. Substantial Completion is included in Section 01 77 19.

D. A list of required manufacturer product warranties listed below is for CONTRACTOR

convenience. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for any additional requirements for warranties

for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted elsewhere in the

Contract Documents.


Number


07 41 13.16 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels

07 41 13.23 Insulated Metal Roof Panels

07 42 13.19 Insulated Metal Wall Panels

07 42 13.53 Metal Soffit Panels

08 11 16 Aluminum Flush Doors

08 12 16 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors and Aluminum Frames

08 31 13 Floor Doors

08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors

08 39 19 Watertight Doors

08 51 13 Aluminum Windows

08 71 00 Door Hardware

08 80 00 Glazing

10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories

10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers

12 32 16 Manufactured Plastic-Laminate-Faced Casework




Number


23 34 00 Fans

23 81 13 Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Unit



26 05 86B Motors





26 50 00B Lighting Fixtures



40 05 23 Valves
















1.03 SCOPE

A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for manufacturer

warranties required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer’s standard product and

equipment warranties ("Standard Product Warranties") and special product and equipment

warranties from manufacturers ("Special Product Warranties").

B. All products and equipment shall be warranted by the manufacturer in accordance with Section

1.05 A of this Specification.

C. This Section shall in no way limit the CONTRACTOR's general warranty obligations specified in

Article 6 of the General Conditions of the Contract Documents.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written product and equipment warranties to the CITY prior to Substantial Completion.

B. When a Special Product Warranty is required to be executed by the CONTRACTOR, or the

CONTRACTOR and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that


contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit

a draft to the CITY for approval prior to final execution.

C. Refer to individual Sections of these Specifications for specific content requirements, and

particular requirements for Submittals of Special Product Warranties.

D. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide

additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.

Coordinate this work with the requirements of Section 01 78 23.

1.05 SCHEDULE OF WARRANTIES

A. All products and equipment shall be warranted by the manufacturer from the time of Substantial

Completion to a period of 12-months following Substantial Completion of the Project. If a

Standard Product Warranty from a product or equipment manufacturer does not meet this

requirement, CONTRACTOR shall provide, at no additional cost to the CITY, extended

warranties for products and equipment to meet the warranty requirements in this Section. The

manufacturer warranties are in addition to all other warranties included in the Contract

Documents.

B. CONTRACTOR shall provide extended warranties for products and equipment, as needed, so that

all warranties comply with this Section. This cost shall be included in the cost of the Work in the

Schedule of Values.

C. Refer to technical requirements found elsewhere in the Contract Documents for the products and

equipment to be warranted by the manufacturer.

1.06 MANUFACTURER WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting Work warranted by a manufacturer that has failed,

CONTRACTOR and/or the manufacturer shall remove and replace other Work that has been

damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for

correction of warranted Work.

B. Reinstatement of a Manufacturer's Product Warranty: When Work covered by either a Standard

or Special Product Warranty has failed and has been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, the

CONTRACTOR and the manufacturer shall reinstate the warranty by written endorsement from

the CONTRACTOR and the manufacturer to the CITY. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to

the original warranty in duration and coverage.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a either a Standard or Special

Product Warranty has failed within the warranty period, CONTRACTOR and/or manufacture

shall replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of

Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the entire cost of replacing or

rebuilding defective work regardless of whether the CITY has benefited from use of the Work

through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

D. CITY’s Recourse: Written Standard or Special Product Warranties made to the CITY are in

addition to CONTRACTOR's other warranty obligations included in the Contract Documents and

implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise

available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which

the CITY can enforce such other warranties, duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.


E. Rejection of Warranties: The CITY will consider the warranty provisions in reviewing the product

Submittals and reserves the right to reject Submittals based solely upon the warranties’

compliance to the Contract Documents. The CITY also reserves the right to limit selections to

products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product Standard or

Special Product Warranties do not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the warranty on the Work that

incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers and subcontractors required

to countersign Special Product Warranties with the CONTRACTOR.

1.07 LIMITED “EXTENDED MUNICIPAL WARRANTY”

A. Where required by reference in other specification sections, an Extended Municipal Warranty

shall be provided and shall conform to requirements as put forth in this section. The Municipal

Warranty shall run from a period starting 12-months after Substantial Completion of the Project to

60-months following the Substantial Completion of the Project.

B. The Extended Municipal Warranty shall be a pro rata limited warranty wherein the equipment

supplier shall pay the following share of the cost of replacement of repair parts:

Months following project

Substantial Completion

Date

12-18 months 19-39 months 40-60 months

Maximum hours of

operation 3000 hours 6500 hours 10,000 hours

Coverage of replacement or

repair parts 100% 50% 25%

C. Warranty for the period from project Substantial Completion to 12 months following the

Substantial Completion of the project shall conform to requirements of Section 1.05 A of this

specification.

D. When Work covered by this Extended Municipal Warranty has failed and has been corrected by

replacement or rebuilding, the manufacturer shall reinstate the warranty by written endorsement

from the manufacturer to the CITY. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original

Extended Municipal Warranty in remaining duration and coverage as per table in Section 1.07 B

of this specification.

1.08 MANUFACTURERS’ CERTIFICATIONS

A. Where required, the CONTRACTOR shall supply evidence, satisfactory to the CITY, that the

CONTRACTOR can obtain manufacturers’ certifications as to the CONTRACTOR’s installation

of equipment.

1.09 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual

manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the CONTRACTOR and/or

Subcontractor, Supplier or manufacturer to the CITY.

B. Special Product Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract

Documents, either to extend time limits provided by Standard Product Warranties or to provide


greater rights for the CITY as required by the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED


RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 78 39

RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL.


A. Scope.

B. Description.


A. Contract Closeout is included in Section 01 77 00.

1.03 SCOPE

A. This section addresses the requirements and responsibilities of the CONTRACTOR, with respect

to record documents to be maintained in the field by the CONTRACTOR. Drawings and general

provisions of the Contract Documents, including General Conditions, and Division 1 Specification

Sections, including Section 01 35 00 – Special Provisions, apply to this Section.

1.04 DESCRIPTION

A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain and provide the CITY with record documents as specified as

follows, except as otherwise specified or modified in Divisions 2 through 48 of the Specifications.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents:

1. Maintain in clean, dry legible condition the following: Contract Drawings, Specification,

Addenda, Approved Shop Drawings and Submittals, Change Orders, other Modifications of

Contract, Progress Meeting Minutes, Test Records, Survey Data, and all other documents

pertinent to the Work of the CONTRACTOR (collectively referred to as the "Record

Documents").

2. Provide for proper storage and easy access. File in accordance with filing format acceptable

to the CITY.

3. Make documents available at all times for inspection by the CITY.

4. Record Documents shall not be used for any other purpose and shall not be removed from the

Project Site without the approval of the CITY.

C. Marking System: Provide and maintain colored pencils for making changes, revisions, additions

and deletions, to the record set of Contract Drawings. Document and maintain a consistent color

code.

D. Recording:

1. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in 2 inch high printed letters.

2. Keep record documents current.

RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2 SEPTEMBER 2013

3. All pertinent and required information shall be collected and recorded before the related work

becomes inaccessible.

4. Contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual Work including:

a. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to datum.

b. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to

permanent surface improvements.

c. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in Work referenced to visible

and accessible features of structure.

d. Field verifications and changes of dimension and detail.

e. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order.

f. Pertinent details not on original Contract Drawings.

5. Specification and Addenda: Legibly mark up each Section to record:

a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of

equipment actually installed.

b. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order.

c. Other installation additions or changes not originally specified.

6. Submittals: Maintain Submittals, including shop drawings, as Record Documents and legibly

annotate drawings to record changes made after review and after installation.

E. Submittals:

1. At completion of Project, submit Record Documents to the CITY in accordance with the

requirements of Section 01 33 00.

2. Accompany Submittal with transmittal letter containing:

a. Date of Submittal.

b. Project identification, including title, Project ID (Number), and sewer number (if

applicable).

c. CONTRACTOR's identification, including name and address.

d. Title and document identification number for each Record Document provided.

e. Certification that each Record Document as submitted is complete and accurate.

f. Signature of CONTRACTOR, or authorized representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED


SPARE PARTS AND

MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 01 78 43-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 78 43

SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.


A. Operating and Maintenance information is included in Section 01 78 23.

1.03 SCOPE

A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish spare parts and maintenance materials as specified in the individual

Sections and in accordance with the requirements of the approved O & M manual.

B. CONTRACTOR shall furnish a master spare parts list to the CITY once preliminary O&M

manuals are completed. The master spare parts list shall include the specification reference

section for each spare part and where the equipment is used.

C. Parts and materials shall be furnished in manufacturer's unopened cartons, boxes, crates or other

protective covering suitable for preventing corrosion or deterioration for the maximum length of

storage which may be normally anticipated. They shall be clearly marked and identified as to their

contents and storage instructions including manufacture part number and reorder number.

D. Parts and materials shall be delivered to the CITY upon completion of the Work or when the

CITY assumes Partial Utilization in accordance with Specification Section 01 77 19.

E. Provide a letter of transmittal including the following information for turnover to the City:

1. Date of letter and transfer of spare parts and material.

2. Contract title and sewer number.

3. CONTRACTOR's name and address.

4. A complete inventory of the parts and material listing the applicable Specification Section for

each.

5. Manufacture part number.

6. Reorder number.

7. Part description.

8. Manufacture drawings or cut sheets. For example, an exploded view showing all parts with

labels.

9. Equipment reference and/or location numbers of where the spare parts will be used. Example:

a. Location number - MLC-H-51.0001

SPARE PARTS AND


b. Equipment number - 001234

c. Reference identification number on drawing – RSP-001, Raw Sewage pump #1

10. No parts maybe turned over to the City until all parts shown on list are present.

11. A place for the CITY to sign and signify receipt of the parts and materials.

F. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for loss or damage to parts and materials until they are

received by the CITY.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SPARE PARTS NOT REQUIRED OR ACCEPTED

A. The following spare parts are typically not required unless otherwise specifically requested:

1. Fuses

2. Relays

3. Terminal blocks

4. Breakers

5. Lights

6. Indicator lights

7. Push buttons

8. Electrical switches

9. Control transformers

10. Bearings

11. Pump seals

12. Oil seals

13. Fasteners

14. Gaskets

15. Lubricants

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMPLE SPARE PARTS TURNOVER TABLE

Part

Description

Manufacturer

Part Number

Reorder Part

Number

Manufacturer Supplying

Vendor

Vendor

Contract

Equipment or

location used

Reference Project

Drawing No.

SPARE PARTS AND



TRAINING 01 79 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 01 79 00

TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scope.

B. Quality Assurance.

C. Submittals.

D. Minimum Training Requirements.


A. Example: Submittals are included in Section 01 33 00

1.03 SCOPE

A. This section contains requirements for training the CITY’s personnel, by persons retained by

the CONTRACTOR specifically for the purpose, in the proper operation and maintenance of

the equipment and systems installed under the Contract Documents.


A. Where required by the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall provide on-the-job

training of the CITY’s personnel. The training sessions shall be conducted by qualified,

experienced, factory-trained representatives of the various equipment manufacturers.

Training shall include instruction in both operation and maintenance of the subject

equipment.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. The following information shall be submitted to the CITY or the CITY’s representative in

accordance with the provisions of Section 01 33 00-Submittals. The materials shall be

reviewed and accepted by the CITY or the CITY’s representative as a condition precedent to

receiving progress payments in excess of 50 percent of the Contract Sum and not less than

three (3) weeks prior to performing the training.

1. Lesson plans for each training session, to be conducted by the manufacturer's

representative.

2. Training documents, including manuals, handouts, visual aids, and other reference

materials as recommended and needed.

3. Subject, date and time of each training session.

4. Identity and qualifications of each individual to be conducting the training session.


1.06 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

A. Training shall be required on the following equipment, as a minimum:

Spec Section Equipment/Item
















B. Unless listed specifically in the individual equipment section, duration of training shall be as

recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Training and startup are not to occur at the same time.

2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Where specified, the CONTRACTOR shall conduct training sessions for the CITY’s

personnel to instruct the staff on the proper operation, care, and maintenance of the

equipment and systems installed under the Contract Documents. Training shall take place at

the location of the Work and under the conditions specified in the following paragraphs.

Training shall be scheduled and provided to accommodate each of the operation and

maintenance shifts of the CITY – a minimum of one training session for each shift for each

system or equipment item requiring training. Unless approved by the CITY, each training

session shall be presented in its entirety, in a contiguous time frame. Preliminary operation

and maintenance manuals shall be available at least thirty (30) days prior to the date

scheduled for the first individual training session.

2.02 LOCATION

A. Preferably, training sessions shall take place at or near the Project Site, or at an alternative

location mutually agreeable to the CONTRACTOR and CITY.

2.03 LESSON PLANS

A. Formal written lesson plans shall be prepared for each training session. Lesson plans shall

contain an outline of the material to be presented along with a description of visual aids to be

utilized during the session. Each plan shall contain a time allocation for each subject. Time


shall also be allocated for brief breaks.

B. One complete set of originals of the lesson plans, training manuals, handouts, visual aids, and

reference material shall be the property of the CITY and shall be suitably bound for proper

organization and easy reproduction. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish ten (10) copies of

necessary training manuals, handouts, visual aids and reference materials at least one (1)

week prior to each training session.

2.04 FORMAT AND CONTENT

A. Each training session shall be comprised of time spent both in the classroom and at the

specific location of the subject equipment or system. Attendee interaction and open dialogue

with the instructor shall be expected and accommodated. As a minimum, training session

shall cover the following subjects for each item of equipment or system:

1. Familiarization

a. Review catalog, parts lists, drawings, etc., which have been previously provided for

the plant files and operation and maintenance manuals.

b. Check out the installation of the specific equipment items.

c. Demonstrate the unit and indicate how all parts of the specifications are met.

d. Answer questions.

2. Safety

a. Using material previously provided, review safety references.

b. Discuss proper precautions around equipment.

3. Operation

a. Using material previously provided, review reference literature.

b. Explain all modes of operation (including emergency).

c. Check out the CITY’s personnel on proper use of the equipment.

4. Preventive Maintenance

a. Using material previously provided, review Preventive Maintenance ("PM") lists

including:

1) Reference material.

2) Daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual jobs.

b. Demonstrate and discuss Preventive Maintenance procedures.

c. Demonstrate and discuss possible indications of equipment problems.

5. Corrective Maintenance

a. List possible problems.

b. Discuss repairs--point out usual and unique problems.

c. Disassemble equipment and demonstrate procedures, where practical.

6. Parts

a. Show how to use previously provided parts list and order parts.

b. Verify and check over spare parts on hand. Make recommendations regarding

additional parts that should be available, or which usually incur extensive lead times.


7. Local Representatives

a. Where to order parts: name, address, telephone.

b. Service problems:

1) Who to call.

2) How to get emergency help.

8. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

a. Review any other material submitted.

b. Update material, as required.

2.05 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING:

A. The CITY intends to retain the services of a commercial audio/video (A/V) recording service

to record each training session. After recording, the material will be edited and supplemented

with professionally produced graphics to provide a permanent record. The CONTRACTOR

shall advise all manufacturers providing training sessions that the training sessions will be

recorded. The CONTRACTOR shall assure that each manufacturer representative shall

optimally utilize, facilitate and accommodate the recording production equipment, as well as

coordinate with the persons responsible for the recording of the session. The manufacturer’s

representative shall provide contact information to the recording service, and shall respond to

specific requests for clarification, as necessary during post production.

3 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Training shall be conducted in conjunction with the operational testing and commissioning

periods. Classes shall be scheduled such that classroom sessions are interspersed with field

instruction in logical sequence. Training sessions for each shift, as required in 01 79 00,

Paragraph 2.01, shall be identical in content and method. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange

to have the training conducted with no more than four (4) hours of sessions scheduled for any

one day. Concurrent classes shall not be allowed. Training shall be certified on Form 44 00

00-B - Manufacturer's Instruction Certification Form, as specified in Section 01 33 19.

B. Training and startup are not to occur at the same time.

C. Training shall be conducted through a minimum of two sessions in one of the following

weekday formats:

1. Tuesdays and Wednesdays (to be the same day each week) on consecutive weeks, from

7:30 a.m. – 11:30 a.m.

2. Tuesday or Wednesday, and Thursday during the same week, from 7:30 a.m. – 11:30

a.m.

C. CONTRACTOR shall provide acceptable preliminary operation and maintenance manuals for

the specific equipment to the CITY prior to the start of any training. Audio/video recording

shall take place concurrently with all training sessions.

D. The following services shall be provided for each item of equipment or system as required in

individual specification sections. Additional services shall be provided, where specifically


required in individual Specification Sections.

3. At a minimum, classroom equipment and system training for operations personnel will

include:

a. Slides, drawings, presentations and discussions of the specific location in the facility

of the equipment or system, as well as an operational overview.

b. Present and discuss the purpose and functions of the equipment or systems.

c. Present a working knowledge of the operating theory of the equipment or systems.

d. Start-up, shutdown, normal operation, and emergency operating procedures,

including detailed discussions of the system integration and electrical interlocks, if

applicable.

e. Identify and discuss safety items and procedures.

f. Routine Preventative Maintenance, including specific details on lubrication and

maintenance of corrosion protection of the equipment and ancillary components.

g. Operator detection, without test instruments, of specific equipment trouble symptoms

and recommended correction procedures.

h. Required equipment exercise procedures and intervals.

i. Routine disassembly and assembly of equipment or system, if applicable, (as judged

by the CITY on a case-by-case basis) for purposes such as operator inspection of

equipment.

j. Manufacturer Warranty requirements and expectations.

4. As a minimum, hands-on equipment training for operations personnel will include:

a. Identify location of equipment and systems, and review the purpose.

b. Identify piping and flow options.

c. Identify valves and their purpose.

d. Identify instrumentation:

1) Location of primary element.

2) Location of instrument readout.

3) Discuss purpose, basic operation, and information interpretation.

e. Discuss, demonstrate, and perform standard operating procedures and round checks.

f. Discuss and perform the Preventative Maintenance procedures.

g. Discuss and perform start-up and shutdown procedures.

h. Perform the required equipment exercise procedures.

i. Perform routine disassembly and assembly of equipment and systems if applicable.

j. Identify and review safety items and perform safety procedures, if feasible.

5. Classroom equipment training for the maintenance and repair personnel will include:

a. Theory of operation.

b. Description and function of equipment.

c. Start-up and shutdown procedures.

d. Normal and major repair procedures.

e. Equipment and system inspection, problem indications and troubleshooting

procedures including the use of applicable test instruments and the "pass" and "no

pass" test instrument readings.


f. Routine and long-term calibration procedures.

g. Safety procedures.

h. Preventative Maintenance such as lubrication; normal maintenance such as belt, seal,

and bearing replacement; and up to major repairs such as replacement of major

equipment part(s) with the use of special tools, bridge cranes, welding jigs, etc.

i. Manufacturer Warranty requirements and expectations.

6. Hands-on equipment training for maintenance and repair personnel shall include:

a. Locate and identify equipment or system components.

b. Review the equipment or system function and theory of operation.

c. Review normal repair procedures.

d. Perform start-up and shutdown procedures.

e. Review and perform the safety procedures.

f. Perform the CITY approved practice maintenance and repair procedures, including

mechanical and electrical adjustments, and calibration, problem identification,

troubleshooting and correction procedures.


SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 02 30 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 02 30 00

SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS


1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Soil boring logs inside the project area are shown in the report entitled “Geotechnical

Engineering Report”, dated December 10, 2012. This report was prepared by Terracon and

includes soil boring logs at select locations in the project site. This information, as well as prior

geotechnical reports and boring logs, may be obtained upon request from the CITY.

B. This soil investigation information is offered as an aid in bidding only and is not a part of the

Contract Documents. The boring logs are available for the CONTRACTOR's information, but

are not a warranty of subsurface conditions. The CITY, ENGINEER and geotechnical engineer

assume no responsibility for any variation between materials encountered during construction

and those indicated on the boring logs, nor for any variation between the location of the water

table encountered and that indicated on the boring logs at the date borings were taken.

C. Additional Investigation: The CONTRACTOR shall visit the site and become acquainted with

site conditions. Prior to bidding, prospective CONTRACTORs may make their own site and

subsurface investigations to satisfy themselves with site and subsurface conditions as long as

they have obtained prior written permission to do so. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible

for obtaining approval from the CITY for site and subsurface investigation and shall assume all

responsibility for any damage to property caused as a result of the CONTRACTOR's

investigation.

D. Location of Borings: CONTRACTORs shall be responsible for making their own determination

of the location of the soil borings on this Project.


NOT USED


NOT USED


SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 02 30 00-2 SEPTEMBER 2013


Salvaged Equipment Turn-Over Form

Submit to MSDGC in accordance with specification section 01 33 00 Submittals

Form No. 02 41 00 Page 1 of 1 Revision 02/21/2014

Date:

Project ID: Project Name:

Contract No: MSDGC Staff Requesting Salvage:

Print Name

Equipment

Manufacturer:

Model No.: Serial No.:

Description:

Special Handling/Preparation Procedures:

Hazardous Materials (list): Attach supporting MSDGC MSDS Documentation that is in addition to Construction Contract requirements.

Additional Special Instructions (i.e. drain, wrap, seal):

Current Location Storage Location Facility: Facility:

Building: Building:

Process/Room: Process/Room:

Treatment Superintendent/Designee (Ryan Welsh) Concurrence:

Print Name Signature Date

Completed Actions:

Contractor submitted disposal plan: Yes / No

If yes, identify actions and completion date. If no, state reason.

Contractor:


Construction Manager:


Salvaged Equipment Turn-Over Form

Submit to MSDGC in accordance with specification section 01 33 00 Submittals

Form No. 02 41 00 Page 1 of 1 Revision 02/21/2014


DEMOLITION OF EXISTING

FACILITIES 02 41 01-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 02 41 01

DEMOLITION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work in this section consists of furnishing all material and equipment and performing all labor

necessary for demolishing and disposing of designated facilities indicated on the Drawings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

The CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request, to include a detailed demolition procedure, to the

CITY for approval at least 10 days before demolition is started. The demolition procedure shall include a

detailed description of the methods and equipment to be used for each operation and the sequence of

work. The demolition procedures shall provide for safe conduct of work, protection of the property,

which is to remain undisturbed, and coordination with other work or operation which may be in progress.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT USED


3.01 DEMOLITION

A. All material shall be removed as necessary for construction, or in any event, to a minimum depth of

three feet below finished grades as shown on the Drawings.

B. Any structure, or part thereof, remaining below grade shall be mechanically fractured so that

subsurface water will freely pass through the slab or floor of the structure, and so that no void will

remain after backfilling the work site to grade as shown on the Drawings.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for removing all existing service connections to the

buildings or site and permanently plugging the pipes where required in accordance with requirements

of the utility companies concerned.

D. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for any damage caused to other structures, and shall be

held liable for any and all repairs, replacement of parts or renovations required to restore any

structure, portion of structure, equipment or items, not intended for demolition. The

CONTRACTOR shall restore any damaged facilities to their condition prior to demolition provided

the damage was result of the demolition. If the CONTRACTOR does not repair any such damage

immediately, or if the repairs are not suitable to the CITY, the CITY reserves the right to have such

repairs made by another party and deduct the cost of required repairs from money due

CONTRACTOR.

E. Dust-tight, weathertight partitions shall be erected to protect existing facilities from dust and weather

while wrecking is in progress and until such time as closures have been made. Partitions may be

constructed of wood and shall have a covering of tarred roofing felt on the weather side.

DEMOLITION OF EXISTING

FACILITIES 02 41 01-2 SEPTEMBER 2013

F. All salvageable metal materials shall remain the property of the CITY and shall be cleaned and

stored on the CITY's property as directed by the CITY.

3.02 DISPOSAL

A. All materials, which are not delivered to the CITY as specified above, shall become the property of

the CONTRACTOR, and shall be demolished, moved or otherwise disposed of at the option of the

CONTRACTOR by a method approved by the CITY.

B. All demolished structures, equipment and materials shall be removed from the Work site by the

CONTRACTOR.

C. All demolished structures, equipment and materials which are either left in place or removed to the

disposal site shall be in a non-hazardous condition.


SALVAGE 02 41 13-1 OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 02 41 13

SALVAGE

PART 1—GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies demolition, salvage, cutting, and patching.


A. Submittals Section 01 33 00

B. Construction Sequence 01 12 16

C. Restoration of Improvements 01 71 33

D. Cutting and Patching 01 73 29

E. Demolition of Existing Facilities 02 41 01

F. Electrical Demolition 02 41 19.23

G. Removal of Existing Equipment and Piping 02 42 00

H. General Conditions Section 00 72 00: Article 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at

Site, Article 6.14 Safety Representative, Article 6.15 Hazard Communication Program.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00:

1. Plan for disposal for demolition debris and materials.

2. Salvage Equipment Turn-Over Form: Form No. 02 41 00

1.04 SALVAGE DISPOSITION, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. GENERAL:

The CONTRACTOR shall salvage items, designated for CITY salvage, as a unit. Removal

of salvaged equipment shall be done in a manner that protects adjacent equipment and piping.

Clean, list, and tag for storage. Protect from damage and deliver to locations designated by

the ENGINEER. Salvage each item with auxiliary systems or associated equipment required

for operation.

The CONTRACTOR shall Not salvage any items for turnover to CITY until the CITY

receives the CONTRACTOR signed Salvage Equipment Turn-Over Form: Form No. 02 41

00. The City shall prepare the Salvage Equipment Turn-Over Form for CONTRACTOR’S

signature of acknowledgement. CONTRACTOR must submit the signed form to CITY as a

Construction Submittal in accordance with Submittals Section 01 33 00 prior to starting

salvage work.

B. ITEMS DESIGNATED FOR SALVAGE:

Items designated for salvage to CITY are identified in table below. These items shall be

removed, cleaned, labeled and delivered to a location to be designated by the CITY.


INDIAN CREEK WWTP - CITY SALVAGE LIST

ITEM EXISTING LOCATION

C. DISPOSAL:

Dispose of items or materials not designated for the CITY’S salvage or reuse. Promptly

remove from site. Do not store or sell CONTRACTOR salvaged items or materials on site.

PART 2—MATERIALS & PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with ODOT Item 202, the City Supplement, and this Section, unless otherwise noted

on the plans or directed by the CITY.

B. Compacted granular fill (No. 304 aggregate or CITY approved equal) or Controlled Low

Strength Mortar (CLSM).

C. Accurately show locations of abandoned utilities or subsurface obstructions remaining on site

on as-built record drawings.

PART 3—EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

The CONTRACTOR shall notify the CITY prior to beginning any salvage work so that the

proper salvage items are verified and the condition of the salvage item and adjacent equipment,

piping, and structures can be documented. The CITY may elect to have any items on the salvage

list removed and disposed of by the CONTRACTOR, rather than being salvaged.

3.02 OPERATION PROCEDURES

Start and complete work in order of precedence as established by Section 01 12 16 and the

approved schedule. Operational procedures and sequence of work are optional with

CONTRACTOR, provided they do not infringe upon or violate schedule.

Execute work to protect occupants from injury and discomfort. Provide protection to persons and

property. Conduct operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, walks, entrances, exits,

and other adjacent occupied facilities.

Where temporary partitions are required in plant staff or public areas, construct partitions of

clean, painted, minimum 1/2-inch (12 mm) thick, plywood.

Provide covered passageways where necessary to ensure safe passage of persons in or near areas

of work. Provide substantial barricades and safety lights as required. Provide temporary dust-

proof partitions where indicated or necessary to prevent infiltration of dust into occupied areas.

Provide temporary weather protection as necessary to prevent damage to existing facilities and

discomfort to persons in occupied areas.

3.03 CUTTING AND REMOVAL


Neatly cut and remove materials, and prepare all openings to receive new work.

Remove masonry or concrete in small sections.

Provide shoring, bracing, and other supports to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of

remaining or adjacent wall areas, structure, or facilities. Arrange shoring, bracing, and supports

to prevent overloading of structure.

Take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to existing remaining work or to adjacent

facilities. Execute work using methods which will prevent interference with use of remaining and

adjacent facilities by the CITY.

Salvaged items shall be properly disconnected to retain their full salvage value, removed from

their foundations and carefully stored at a location on the plant site as directed by the CITY.

3.04 UTILITIES

Determine whether there are utilities in demolition areas that are needed for continued service to

other facilities. Relocate, test and make functional such utilities before demolition work begins.

Notify CITY of utilities that must be turned off before isolation and demolition are started.

Utilities serving facilities to be demolished shall be isolated as directed by the CTIY. Isolation

shall occur at a point closest to the remaining active portion of the utility.

3.05 MATCHING AND PATCHING

Where items are removed from existing walls, ceilings, floors, or partitions to remain,

CONTRACTOR shall repair wall, ceiling, floor, or partition disturbed by removal.

Where walls, ceilings, floors, or partitions are removed, CONTRACTOR shall repair abutting

walls, ceilings, or floors disturbed by removal.

Where existing construction is cut or otherwise disturbed to permit installation of new work,

CONTRACTOR shall match and patch existing disturbed construction.

Use methods and materials similar in appearance, and equal in quality to areas or surfaces being

repaired. See Section 09 91 00 for repairing coated surfaces damaged by the work.

Methods, materials, and finished work are subject to review and approval by the ENGINEER.

Remove areas, surfaces, or items which cannot be satisfactorily matched and patched. Replace at

no additional expense to the CITY.

Unless otherwise called for on the plans; all equipment bases and pads are also to be removed

where the equipment is shown or otherwise called to be removed on the drawings or in the

specifications.

3.06 CLEANUP

Cleanup of demolition activities shall be performed in accordance with Section 01 71 33.

3.07 ABANDON EXISTING PIPELINES

Pipe lines that are designated to be abandoned shall be plugged or sealed. Pipe less than 1-inch

diameter shall be sealed by grouting unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Pipe between 1-

inch and 6-inches shall be sealed by the installation of a mechanical plug a distance of either two

inches or equal to the diameter of the pipe whichever is greater, and grouted flush using a non-

shrink, non-metallic grout. Pipe less than 12-inches but greater than 6-inches in diameter shall be

sealed by the installation of a suitable precast concrete or vitrified clay stopper, properly


cemented into place.

Pipe 12-inches and larger shall be filled, sealed, and abandoned in accordance with the method

described in Section 202.041 of the Cincinnati Supplement to the State of Ohio, Department of

Transportation, Construction and Material Specification. The material used for filling the

existing pipe shall be Controlled Density Fill, when the pipe is located in pavement areas.

3.08 OPERATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all work in a manner so that MSDGC can keep the

existing wastewater treatment plant and influent pump station in continuous dependable

operation.

B. Temporary pumping may be required during construction in order to avoid raw sewage

bypasses.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and operate any temporary pumping equipment required to

maintain the wastewater flow around the construction operations so that pumping will be

continuous and not out of service.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall notify MSD-Inspector a minimum of (72) hours before the

temporary pumping equipment is to be started. This is needed so the inspector can notify the

Supervisor of Maintenance of this change. The contact for the Indian Creek WWTP is Mr.

Rick Meade. His phone number is 513-557-5947.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall have an employee on call 24 hours per day if an electrical pump

system is used for raw sewage pumping to assure that no bypasses will occur due to plugging

or circuit failure. If an engine powered pump system is utilized, an employee must be in

attendance 24 hours a day, unless approved by the CITY.

F. CONTRACTOR shall inform MSD Supervisor of Maintenance if CONTRACTOR’S

equipment fails leading to wastewater bypass event of sewage or SBU (Sewer Back Up)

report from homeowners near pump station. Contact must be made within 24 hours.

G. CONTRACTOR shall install (auto dialer system) to report equipment failure.

CONTRACTOR shall report any equipment failures leading to down time of pumping

operation or bypass events of sewage

H. Power to electric motor driven pumps shall be paid for by the CITY. Fuel for engine driven

pumps shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR (including fuel and delivery charges).

Temporary wiring, piping and circuit protection shall be the responsibility of the

CONTRACTOR.

I. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the CITY informed of any work which will interfere with the

operation of the treatment facility and/or influent pump station. Any necessary shut-down of

the facility shall be scheduled in advance with the CITY. All shut-down periods shall be

scheduled so that the capacity requirements of the facility can be maintained. The CITY shall

have the authority to order work stopped or prohibited which would, in the CITY’s opinion,

unreasonably result in stopping the necessary function of the facilities.

J. Whenever it is necessary during the period of construction to shut-down parts of the facility,

the CONTRACTOR shall be required to make every effort to minimize the time any unit is

out of service. When all equipment, labor and materials necessary to begin and complete the

work required during the shut-down time are on-site and ready, the shut-down period may

commence. The CONTRACTOR shall give the CITY a minimum of 72 hours notice when

the work requires a shut-down.


K. CONTRACTOR shall inform Supervisor of Maintenance 24 hours before shutdown of

equipment to prevent emergency response of Pump Station or Treatment Plant Staff to power

loss alarms.

L. The CITY reserves the right to determine the exact time of shut-down and may determine that

the work will have to be performed on a Sunday, holiday or at night, at no additional cost to

the CITY.

M. The operation of all equipment and valves owned by the CITY shall be performed by CITY.

3.09 PREPARATION

A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.

B. CONTRACTOR shall remove all equipment, piping, electrical, and appurtenances.

Material to be salvaged shall be thoroughly cleaned, inside and out, and left in a satisfactory

operating condition and ready for new paint, and shall be delivered to the Mill Creek

Treatment Plant and placed in storage as directed by the CITY. See Section 1.04 B: Items For

Salvage listing.

3.10 TANK CLEANING

A. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to remove all grit and organic solids from

the various treatment tanks and prepare them for work or decommissioning. Care shall be taken

to perform the operations such that hydrostatic pressures will not structurally damage the tanks.

Grit, sludge, and other organic solids removed from the tanks shall be disposed of in a manner

approved by the CITY. Unless otherwise specified, this material shall be hauled to the Mill

Creek Treatment Plant for disposal. The Mill Creek Treatment Plant is located at 1600 Gest

Street, Cincinnati, OH 45204. At least 48 hours prior to dumping, contact Terry Gray at the

Mill Creek Treatment Plant at (513) 244-5545 to coordinate the delivery. All costs for hauling

and disposal shall be included under this Item.

3.11 SALVAGE EXISTING EQUIPMENT

A. Existing equipment shall be removed to the limits shown on the plans. See Section 1.04 B for

list of items to be salvaged and delivered to the Mill Creek Treatment Plant.

B. Pumps salvaged shall be salvaged with entire set of electrical cables. If any of the cables are

damaged or cut by the CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR shall purchase new cables

appropriate for the equipment and deliver to the CITY.

C. A demolition schedule shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the CITY.

The schedule shall include the proposed methods and sequence of operations and include

coordination for shut-off, capping and continuation of utility services as required, together

with details for dust and noise control protection.

D. In lieu of totally removing the entire concrete structures, the Contractor may cut and remove

the top sections to a point two (2) feet below the finished grade. The bottom of each structure

shall be punctured sufficiently with 3 to 4 inch diameter holes to provide adequate drainage

prior to abandonment. Inspection by CITY will determine the location and amount of holes

needed in each tank. Concrete pavement shall be broken-up and removed.

E. As soon as demolition work has been completed and approved by the Engineer, filling shall be

performed. Final grading of the site shall meet with the existing surrounding grade and

graded to drain naturally.

F. Do not burn or bury materials on site. Leave site in clean condition.


G. NOTE: Entrance into the wet well and other portions of the pump station shall be considered

a confined space entry and shall be treated as such according to OSHA’s Regulation 29CFR-

1910.14-6.


ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 02 41 19.23-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 02 41 19.23

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The electrical demolition work commences with the point where indicated on the Drawings and

includes furnishing all equipment, materials and labor to accommodate new work.

B. Scheduling: Coordinate all demolition and modification work with the requirements of

Division 01 of these Specifications.

C. The methods of demolition work shall provide for a safe conduct of work and for the protection

of property which is to remain in-service and undisturbed.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

Submit to the CITY for review a written detailed procedure and method for each structure to be

demolished or modified. The submittal shall include approximate dates and times of the de-

energization of services.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DEMOLITION

A. Coordinate and schedule all demolition work and outages of existing services prior to starting

work.

B. Existing services and facilities damaged or otherwise interrupted by the CONTRACTOR

through negligence or through the use of faulty materials or workmanship shall be promptly

repaired, replaced, or otherwise restored by the CONTRACTOR without additional cost to the

CITY.

C. Interruptions of service necessary for the connection to or modification of existing systems or

facilities shall occur only at pre-arranged times approved by the CITY. Interruptions shall only

occur after the provision of all necessary temporary work and the availability of adequate labor

and materials have been assured that the duration of the interruption will not exceed the time

agreed upon.

D. Existing materials shall remain the property of the CITY and shall be stored at a location and in

a manner as directed by the CITY. If classified by the CITY as unsuitable for further use,

existing materials shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR and shall be removed from

the site.

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 02 41 19.23-2 SEPTEMBER 2013

E. All underground ductbank and conduits which are not in conflict with the new work shall be

abandoned.

F. All exposed conduits in structures or buildings to be removed, shall be cut and plugged flush

with structure or floor.

G. All wiring to be removed shall be disconnected at distribution panels or MCCs. All wiring

which serves equipment to be removed shall be removed.

H. Schedule: Demolish electrical equipment from structures as indicated or as required to

facilitate the installation of new equipment and work.

I. All wiring, conduit or equipment designated on the Demolition Plans shall be disposed of in a

safe manner in accordance with all applicable local, state, and federal environmental agencies.

END OF SECTION 02 41 19.23

REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT

AND PIPING 02 42 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 02 42 00

REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work covered under this Section includes furnishing all labor, equipment and material

required to remove, handle, store and dispose of all materials from existing structures and

piping as shown on the Drawings, directed by the CITY or required for the completion of the

work, including all necessary excavation and backfilling.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall remove from existing structures, store and turn over to the City as

directed, or dispose of in an approved manner, valves, piping, mechanical equipment, electrical

equipment, heating and ventilating equipment, and associated materials and elements which are

not to remain in service in the finished work, whether or not shown on the Drawings and/or

specified herein.

C. The work specified herein and shown on the Drawings is intended to give a general idea of the

scope of this work but must not be construed as covering it entirely. The CONTRACTOR shall

visit the site and judge the amount of work required and the problems CONTRACTOR might

encounter in the performance of the work.

1.02 EQUIPMENT AND PIPING TO BE REMOVED

A. The existing equipment and piping to be removed and stored or otherwise disposed of, as

directed by the CITY, shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Influent Pump Station—Pump No. 1 and discharge piping; existing sluice gate stems;

access hatch lid

2. Influent Screens—building enclosure; grating; dumpster enclosure; stop plates;

screenings compactor

3. Grit Removal Structure—stop plates; dumpster enclosure; grit slurry pump, grit screen

and associated piping

4. Aeration Basin No. 1—drain valve and vault

5. Aeration Basin No. 2—aeration process equipment

6. Clarifier No’s 1 and 2—scraper mechanisms

7. Clarifier Splitter Box—fixed weir plates

8. Post Aeration Tanks—stop plates; grating; guardrail

9. Drain Pump Station—pumps, valves and partial force main

10. Control Building —MCC sections; restroom; sludge piping



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

All concrete, mortar, grout, steel reinforcement and backfill used in patching, plugging or repairing

shall comply in all respects with the applicable material requirements of these Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 REMOVAL

A. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise full care and shall use such methods and equipment during

removal as will maintain the usefulness of the various materials and equipment removed. The

sequence and order of removal and the method of storing and disposal of removed equipment

and piping shall be at all times subject to the direction and approval of the CITY.

B. Any damage done to structures or equipment during removal and any patching, plugging of

holes or repairs necessitated because of removal of equipment and piping shall be repaired as

directed by, and to the satisfaction of, the CITY and the cost thereof shall be included in the

Contract Price.

C. Equipment specified to be removed shall be removed completely, including all related

accessories and concrete bases. Any embedded items such as anchor bolts, steel reinforcement,

conduit and piping shall be cut off 1-inch below adjacent finished surfaces. The surface shall

then be repaired to match adjacent surfaces in finish and appearance.

D. Prior to removing any electrical equipment, all power to the equipment shall be shut off and

properly locked out. All power and control wiring for the equipment shall then be disconnected

at the starter or circuit breaker, as applicable, and removed from the conduit. Unused conduits

shall be plugged.

E. Blemishes or unsightly areas on walls and floors left after removal of equipment shall be

cleaned and refinished as necessary to match adjacent surfaces.

F. All holes and openings left after removal of equipment shall be filled or plugged to provide a

neat and workmanlike appearance.

G. Where piping designated for removal passes through concrete walls, the openings shall be

suitably plugged or capped. Wall pipes and wall sleeves shall be sealed with blind flanges or

mechanical joint plugs. Steel pipe sleeves shall be filled with nonshrink grout.

H. Where equipment or piping designated for removal serves to support other equipment or piping

designated to remain in service, the CONTRACTOR shall provide permanent supports in place

of the removed equipment and piping. Where it is necessary to temporarily remove other

equipment, piping or electrical work in order to gain access to an item of equipment or piping

designated for removal, the CONTRACTOR shall restore all such equipment, piping or

electrical work to its original condition.

I. Abandoned Piping: Existing vitrified clay, concrete, PVC, cast iron and steel piping to be

abandoned shall be cut and plugged or capped at each end. Where existing piping interferes

with new piping or construction, it shall be removed beyond the limits required for the proper

completion of the work and the open ends plugged or capped. Unless otherwise shown, lines



shall be plugged or capped at least 1-inch behind or below finished building surfaces and at

least 12-inches below outside grade surfaces.

J. Piping and Valving Reinstallation: The CONTRACTOR shall include in the Contract Price the

cost of removing, refitting, and reinstalling certain pipe, fittings and valves as shown on the

Drawings or as deemed by the CITY to be satisfactory for reuse.

K. Removal of Existing Concrete and Masonry: Existing concrete and masonry shall be removed

and disposed of in accordance with the requirements of Section 02 42 01 of these

Specifications.

L. Storage: All materials removed shall remain the property of the CITY unless otherwise

designated by the CITY and shall be carefully moved and stored on the plant site where

directed by the CITY. Mechanical and electrical equipment shall be stored indoors. If the

equipment is too large to store indoors, it shall be stored outdoors above ground and under

cover.

M. Disposal: The CITY will direct the CONTRACTOR to assume ownership of and dispose of

off site any removed equipment, piping and materials which the CITY elects not to retain. The

cost of disposing of any or all of the removed equipment, piping and materials shall be included

in the lump sum prices bid and no separate payment will be made therefor.


REMOVAL OF EXISTING CONCRETE 02 42 01-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 02 42 01

REMOVAL OF EXISTING CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work described in this Section includes furnishing all labor, equipment and materials to

demolish, remove, handle and dispose of all existing concrete, both plain and reinforced, from

existing structures as shown on the Drawings, directed by the CITY or required for the proper

completion of the work, including all excavation and backfilling.

B. Where concrete is cut from existing structures under this Section to permit setting or inserting

pipes, flumes, equipment or appurtenances, or the lowering of existing walls, etc. to facilitate

new work, the work shall include all re-concreting, dressing and finishing of openings, or other

cut areas, to the required lines and dimensions or as necessary for the placing and fixing of

inserts, or to support new construction.


Should conflicts arise between information shown in this Section and Section 03 01 30.71, the

information in Section 03 01 30.71 shall take precedence; except in all cases the most stringent

requirements shall govern.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

All concrete, grout, steel reinforcement, backfill and other materials furnished in conjunction with

this work shall conform in all respects to the applicable material requirements of these

Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MODIFICATION TO EXISTING CONCRETE

A. Existing concrete to be removed as a part of structural modifications to existing facilities, shall

be broken by air hammer and chisel in such manner as to leave adjoining portions of the

structure in an undisturbed condition. Blasting shall not, under any circumstances, be used in

the removal of concrete. Refer to Section 03 01 30.71 for additional information including

restrictions of the size of pneumatic jack-hammer equipment which may be used for certain

aspects of concrete excavation work.

B. In removing existing concrete, special care shall be taken to cut it as closely as possible to the

required shape and with no projection into the neat outside line of new work. The surfaces of

all concrete shall be sufficiently rough to bond well with the new work. Existing concrete

surfaces on which new work is to be constructed, bonded, or otherwise supported shall be

sound and free of loose, fractured, delaminated or otherwise deteriorated or damaged concrete,

REMOVAL OF EXISTING CONCRETE 02 42 01-2 SEPTEMBER 2013

including being free of micro-cracking caused by improper jack-hammering equipment or

techniques.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall take every precaution not to disturb the walls, floors, foundations

and footings of existing structures when necessary to remove existing concrete adjacent thereto.

This shall be done by bracing, needling, shoring and installation of other supports as necessary

to assure the safety of the structures which are to remain.

D. All walls, footings, floor slabs, columns and other items of existing work directly adjoining new

work to be installed at levels lower than existing conditions at locations where designated on

the Drawings or directed by the ENGINEER shall be underpinned as required for safety and by

conditions at the site. Responsibility for the adequacy and safety of all underpinning, shoring

and bracing shall rest solely upon the CONTRACTOR and this work shall be done in such a

manner as will positively prevent settlement of or damage to existing work that is to remain.

3.02 PREPARATION FOR BONDING TO NEW WORK

Refer to Specification Section 03 01 30.71.

3.03 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL

Unless otherwise directed by the CITY, all materials removed under this Section shall be removed

from the site and disposed of at the CONTRACTOR's expense. Point of disposal shall be subject to

approval of the CITY and the local jurisdiction responsible for the issuance of dumping permits.


CONCRETE WORK 03 00 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 03 00 00

CONCRETE WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete as shown and indicated on the Drawings and as

specified in this Section, complete.

B. All formwork, reinforcing, sleeves, inserts, piping, hangers, anchors, frames, and other items to

be built into the concrete work shall be correctly positioned, secured and inspected by the

CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER prior to placing concrete.

C. Where the term ENGINEER is used in the section, it shall mean “the CITY’s Structural

ENGINEER”.


A. Should conflicts arise between information shown in this Section and Section 03 01 30.71,

the information in Section 03 01 30.71 shall take precedence.

B. All ACI, or other, referenced documents shall mean the latest version accepted under the

current addition of the Ohio Building Code (OBC) shall be used unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Submit concrete design mix and shop drawings on reinforcing, admixtures, waterstops and curing

compound for the ENGINEER's review prior to any work.


All materials shall be stored and protected in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 60 00

of these Specifications.


All concrete work shall be in accordance with the provisions of the American Concrete Institute's

“Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete” (ACI 318), unless specified or noted

otherwise.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Materials for use in concrete work including admixtures, aggregates, cement, form material,

reinforcing and water shall be in accordance with the following:

1. Cement: All cement shall be Type I/II and meet the requirements of ASTM C 150. One


bag of Portland cement shall be considered to weigh 94 pounds. Air-entraining cement is

not permitted.

2. Aggregates: Aggregates shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 33.

3. Water: Mixing water for concrete shall be fresh, clean and potable.

4. Admixtures: Refer to Specification 03 01 30.71.

5. Formwork

a. Form Material: Forms shall be of plywood or architectural type steel panel forms.

b. Form Oil: Form oil shall be non-staining, paraffin base type oil equal to “Chevron K

Pale 40” as manufactured by Standard Oil Company.

c. Form Ties: Form ties shall have a minimum working strength of at least 3,000 pounds

when fully assembled and shall be of the snap or break type with a water stop in the

center. Ties shall be free of cones, washers or other devices which will leave a hole

larger than 7/8-inch diameter in the exposed surface of the concrete. Ties shall be such

that when forms are removed no metal shall be within 2-inches of the finished surface.

d. Chamfer Strips: Chamfer strips shall be placed in forms for exposed corners of

columns and exposed edges of beams, slabs, walls and curbs. Chamfer strips shall

have a minimum dimension of 1-inch.

6. Reinforcing Steel: Reinforcing steel shall be properly supported and secured in position

before concrete is placed.

a. Reinforcement Bars: Bar reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM

A 615 Grade 60. The reinforcement shall be bent cold to the shapes indicated on the

Drawings. This shall be done in the shop, before shipment, and not in the field, unless

otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the ENGINEER. Reinforcing steel

shall be non-epoxy coated accept for locations, if any, specifically shown otherwise on

the drawings.

b. Wire Fabric: Wire fabric for concrete reinforcement, shall conform to the requirements

of ASTM A 185.

c. Bending: Hooks of 90 degrees shall have a radius of bend on the axis of the bar of not

less than six bar diameters plus an extension of 12 bar diameters at the free end.

7. Waterstops: If required at expansion joints or in construction joints between two segments

of new concrete, or between a segment of new concrete and a segment of existing concrete,

waterstops shall be either polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or hydrophilic rubber (HR) as indicated

on the Drawings. The (PVC) waterstop shall incorporate a galvanized steel wire along both

edges which shall be used to secure the waterstop in position during concrete placement. It

shall be sized as noted on the Drawings. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings the PVC

waterstop between two segments of new concrete shall be equal to Wirestop CR-6380, and

the PVC waterstop between a segment of existing concrete and a segment of new concrete

shall be equal to the Greenstreak 609 Retrofit Waterstop with “Tee-shaped” PVC

configuration, or (if so indicated by the Drawings) equal to Greenstreak 655 Retrofit

Waterstop with “L-shaped” configuration, adhered to existing concrete by an epoxy gel

and by pre-drilled stainless steel batten bars with stainless steel anchor bolts. Unless shown

otherwise on the Drawings the HR waterstop shall be equal to the HR waterstops permitted

in Section 03 15 00, Concrete Accessories.


At both waterstop applications (new concrete to new concrete, and new concrete to existing

concrete) and for either type of waterstop (PVC or HR) the waterstop shall extend the

entire length of the joint and all splices shall be made and tested in accordance with the

manufacturer's written instructions. (PVC splices shall be heat welded.) Prior to the

installation of the Retrofit PVC waterstop the entire area of the existing concrete onto

which the waterstop system is to adhere shall be cleaned by high pressure water-blasting

and as additionally required by the manufacturer. The waterstop system (PVC or HR) shall

only be installed to existing concrete that is sound, clean and dry. Repair all existing

concrete as required to make this condition.

All work shall be performed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written

instructions. A technically competent manufacturer’s representative, not associated with the

installation crew, shall be on site before and during the first significant installation of

waterstop, for each application (new-to-new and new-to-existing) and for each waterstop

type (“straight” PVC, “tee-shaped” PVC, or HR). For the installation of the “tee-shaped”

PVC system, the “L-shaped” PVC system, or the HR system the waterstop shall not be

adhered in-place until the manufacturer’s representative has reviewed and approved the

cleaned and prepared existing concrete surface. The manufacturer’s representative shall

also be on site for at least the first occurrence of heat welding splices of the PVC material.

If, in the opinion of the CITY, it is necessary for the manufacturer’s representative to be on

site for more extensive periods than just stated the CONTRACTOR shall comply with this

request at no additional cost to the CITY.

Refer to Section 03 15 00, Concrete Accessories, for additional requirements regarding

waterstops. Where conflicts arise between Section 03 00 00 and Section 03 15 00, this

Section 03 00 00 shall take precedence except in all cases the most stringent requirements

shall govern.

8. Non-Shrink Grout

a. All grout shall be non-metallic, non-shrink type suitable for exterior exposure with

severe freeze-thaw potential. It shall further be suitable to exposure to hydrogen

sulfide. Cement shall be Type III. Grout shall meet the following requirements:

Criteria Test Method Result

Workability ASTM C 191 Initial set time not less than 60 minutes

Compressive Strength ASTM C 109

(restrained condition)

One day - 3,000 psi

Shrinkage ASTM C 827

and CRD 621

No shrinkage after placement or

shrinkage after set

b. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish independent laboratory test results as evidence of

full compliance with these requirements.

c. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of a technical representative of the

grout manufacturer to instruct the CONTRACTOR's personnel and insure compliance

with the grout manufacturer's recommendations.

d. All grout not specifically indicated as grout which does not require the characteristics

of non-shrink or high-strength material shall be considered “non-shrink grout” whether

so indicated or not.


9. Epoxy Bonding Compound: Refer to Specification Section 03 01 30.71.

10. Expansion Joint Filler: Refer to Specification Section 03 01 30.71.

11. Curing Compound: Curing compound, if permitted, shall be an acrylic based compound

conforming to ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. The curing compound shall form a moisture

impermeable film which retains a minimum of 95 percent of the mixing water beyond the

required curing time. Curing compound shall be equal to Meadows Sealtight CS-309.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PLACING AND FASTENING OF REINFORCING

A. Unless otherwise called for, provisions of the American Concrete Institute's “Building Code

Requirements for Reinforced Concrete” (ACI 318) shall be strictly followed.

B. All reinforcement shall be furnished in full length as indicated on the Drawings. No splicing of

bars, except where shown on the Drawings, will be permitted.

C. Splices which are permitted shall have a lap of not less than forty times the diameter of the bar,

unless otherwise shown. Splices shall be well distributed or otherwise located at points of low

tensile stress.

3.02 CONCRETE COMPOSITION AND MIXING

A. Refer to Specification Section03 01 30.71.

B. Admixtures

1. Air-entraining and chemical admixtures shall be charged into the mixer as a solution and

shall be dispensed by an automatic dispenser or similar metering device. Powdered

admixtures shall be weighed or measured by volume as recommended by the manufacturer.

The accuracy of measurement of any admixture shall be within + three percent.

2. Addition of retarding admixtures shall not be significantly delayed after the addition of the

cement.

3.03 PLACING

A. Before concrete is placed, steel forms shall be uniformly coated with form oil and wood forms

shall be thoroughly wetted.

B. Concrete shall be placed to avoid the segregation or separation of aggregates, and displacement

of reinforcing. Concrete shall not be allowed to drop freely more than four feet.

C. All concrete shall be placed in daylight, the placing of concrete in any portion of the work shall

not be begin if such work cannot be completed during daylight.

D. Concrete shall not be placed when the atmospheric temperature is below 40 degrees F. If after

placing concrete the temperature drops below 40 degrees F, the CONTRACTOR shall enclose,

heat and protect the work in a manner to keep the air surrounding the fresh concrete at a

temperature of not less than 45 degrees F for a period of five days after concrete is placed.


E. Concrete shall be compacted by the use of mechanical internal vibrating equipment

supplemented by hand spading. Vibrating shall not be used to transport concrete within forms.

Internal vibrators shall maintain a speed of at least 5,000 impulses per minute when submerged

in concrete.

F. Keys shall be formed in all construction joints as indicated on the Drawings and as directed by

the ENGINEER.

G. Waterstops shall be used where shown on the Drawings and in all joints buried or submerged

on one side and exposed on the other.

3.04 FINISHING

A. All exterior concrete surfaces shall be finished to 12-inches below finish grade. Interior

concrete surfaces within buildings, and other such surfaces exposed to view shall be finished.

B. The interior of basins shall be finished to a level not less than 12-inches below overflow level.

Concrete not exposed to view, therefore not specified to be finished, shall have rough edges

tooled off and shall be pointed and spot finished to fill irregularities.

1. Vertical Surfaces

a. Forms and form ties shall be carefully removed after concrete has set sufficiently. All

depressions resulting from removal of form ties and all other holes and rough places

shall be thoroughly wetted with water and pointed with sand cement grout.

b. After pointed surfaces have set sufficiently to permit, all surfaces specified to be

finished shall be kept wetted with water and rubbed with a carborundum stone of

medium fineness or other equally good abrasive, to bring the surface to a smooth

texture and to remove all form and tie marks.

2. Slabs

a. After the concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, it shall not be

worked further until ready for floating. Floating shall begin when the water sheen has

disappeared and the mix has hardened sufficiently that the weight of a person standing

on it leaves only a slight imprint on the surface. The surface shall then be consolidated

by handfloating with wood floats.

b. After floating, interior surfaces shall be steel troweled until the surface is free from

trowel marks or other imperfections, uniform in texture and appearance and true to

plane.

c. Immediately after the floating has been completed, exterior surfaces shall be given a

coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across the surface.

3.05 CURING

Refer to Specification 03 01 30.71.

3.06 TESTING

A. Testing shall be performed by an independent laboratory, approved by the CITY, and

performed on a Time and Materials Basis (Force Account), against the Allowance

established for such in Section 01 20 00 Measurement and Payment.


B. Required Tests: The following tests of materials and concrete are required to be conducted in

accordance with the current ASTM Standards.

1. Test Cylinders: Cylinders shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31. One

set of eight cylinders (6” diameter x 12” long) from the same batch of concrete shall be

made for each day's placing of concrete.

2. Two cylinders from each set shall be broken at three days, two at seven days and two at 28

days in accordance with ASTM C 39. The test results shall be the average of the strengths

of the cylinders tested at 28 days. Two cylinders shall be held as a spare to be broken at 56

days in the event that cylinders broken at 28 days do not meet specified values.

3. All sampling, molding, transporting, storing, curing, preparation for breaking and testing of

cylinders shall be the responsibility of the laboratory and shall be performed by qualified

laboratory personnel. The CONTRACTOR shall supply wheelbarrows, shovels, mixing

boards and shaded area for molding cylinders, and similar equipment required by the

laboratory representative for molding test cylinders.

4. Slump Tests: At least two slump tests shall be made on each day that concrete is placed.

One slump test shall be made at the time cylinders are made for compression tests. Tests

shall meet ASTM C 143.

5. Air-Entrainment Test: All exterior concrete shall be tested for the proper quantity of

entrained-air.

6. Test Results: The laboratory shall send one copy of all reports to the CITY, one copy to

the ENGINEER, one copy to the CONTRACTOR and one to the ready mix plant. Concrete

test reports shall include slump tests and state where the concrete was used in the structure.

The test reports shall also state the concrete temperature and the ambient temperatures and

other pertinent information.

3.07 IMPERFECT OR DAMAGED WORK

Defective or damaged work, or any work damaged before final acceptance, shall be satisfactorily

removed and replaced in accordance with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications.

Removal and replacement of concrete work shall be done in such a manner that the strength of the

structure will not be impaired. All testing required to verify compliance with the Specifications and

ACI Code shall be paid for by the CONTRACTOR. All removing and replacing of concrete is

subject to inspection by the ENGINEER.

3.08 CLEANING

Upon completion of the work, all forms, equipment, protective coverings and rubbish resulting

therefrom shall be removed from the premises. Finished surfaces shall be left in a condition

satisfactory to the CITY.


REHABILITATION OF CAST-IN

PLACE CONCRETE 03 01 30.71-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 03 01 30.71

REHABILITATION OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Where the term “the ENGINEER” is used in this Section it shall mean “the CITY’s Structural

Engineer”.

B. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with fly ash or silica fume.

1.02 SCOPE

A. The work under this Section generally includes, but is not limited to, providing all labor,

equipment, materials and tools necessary to identify areas of localized concrete deterioration

and to repair same. Specifically, the work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the

following elements.

1. At all existing wall, beam or slab elements, etc. that are to support, or to be connected to,

new construction, visually review, supplemented by hammer and chain sounding, all

exposed concrete surfaces for signs of spalls, delaminations or otherwise deteriorated

concrete. Outline all deteriorated areas with approved marking medium and review with

the ENGINEER prior to commencing repairs. This shall include review of horizontal

concrete surfaces (slabs, etc.) within four feet either side of planned new vertical

elements that are to be supported by, or in contact with, the existing horizontal concrete

surfaces. This shall further include review of vertical concrete elements (walls, columns,

etc.) that are to support, or to be in contact with, new construction. For existing vertical

concrete review the full exposed height of the elements for the region directly below, or

within four feet of, the new construction to be supported by, or in contact with, the new

construction. Existing concrete beam elements shall be similarly reviewed. Concrete

deterioration observed on-site is known to have resulted from two causes, 1) freeze-thaw

deterioration of the concrete and, 2) corrosive deterioration of the internal reinforcing

steel within the concrete. At some locations both deterioration mechanisms are

occurring together. Significant deterioration is not anticipated.

2. After the ENGINEER’s review of outlined areas, execute concrete repairs as required by

the Contract Documents. The concrete repairs shall be performed on a Time and

Materials (Force Account) basis against an Allowance amount established for such

occurrences. Refer to Section 01 20 00 Measurement and Payment for the Allowance

amount that is to be included as part of the Lump Sum Base Bid. Review of existing

concrete and outlining for repair shall be part of the Lump Sum Base Bid without Time

and Materials adjustment. Areas of repair which are specifically designated by the

Documents shall be performed as part of the Lump Sum Base Bid without Time and

Material adjustment. Generally such non-Time and Material items are typical concrete

conditions which have an additional component of specific work (such as the removal

and replacement of significant equipment or hardware) associated with it. Some

relatively minor items of ancillary work (like the temporary removal and replacement of

portions of the guard rail system, or the temporary support or reattachment of piping



elements, etc.) which must be performed to properly execute work specifically identified

on the Drawings may occur. Where such work is identified, specifically or in general, it

shall be performed as part of the Lump Sum Price without additional compensation.

3. At locations where work such as non-designated shoring or non-designated temporary

removal and replacement of heavy equipment is required in order to facilitate the

concrete repairs such work shall be performed on a Time and Materials (Force Account)

basis against an Allowance amount established for such occurrences. Refer to Section

01 20 00 Measurement and Payment for the Allowance amount that is to be included as

part of the Lump Sum Base Bid.

4. Core, or otherwise cut, holes through concrete members (floors, beams or walls, etc.), as

shown on the Drawings for the removal of existing piping or sleeve elements, or for the

installation of new piping or sleeve elements or for the installation, by others, or new

mechanical elements or components. The installation and grouting of sleeve elements,

where shown on the Drawings, shall be part of this work as shall the patching of

identified abandoned holes through concrete members.

5. At locations designated by the ENGINEER in the field, repair cracks in otherwise sound

concrete by means of epoxy-injection or urethane-injection. This shall include work on

building structures, tank structures, or other concrete structures on site. Such work shall

be performed on a Time and Materials (Force Account) basis against an Allowance

amount established for such occurrences. Refer to Section 01 20 00 Measurement and

Payment for the Allowance amount to be included as part of the Lump Sum Base Bid.

6. At all interior sludge storage tank, grit tank and weir surfaces clean the existing concrete

by high-pressure water-blasting and apply an approved disinfectant to the cleaned

concrete.

7. Perform other work associated with the rehabilitation of concrete as designated by the

documents.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including but not limited to, General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. Related Sections include, but are not

necessarily limited to, the following. Should conflicts arise between information shown in

this Section 03 01 30.71 and the following related Sections, the information in Section 03 01

30.71 shall take precedence; except in all cases the most stringent requirements shall govern.

1. 00 41 02 Unit Price Sheet

2. 01 20 00 Measurement and Payment

3. 03 00 00 Concrete Work

4. 03 15 00 Concrete Accessories

5. 03 15 19 Concrete Anchoring Systems

6. 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement

7. 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete



8. 03 31 00 Concrete Formwork

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Do not proceed with the work utilizing products or mixes associated with the following

submittals until all submittals have been received, reviewed, and approved for use by the

ENGINEER.

B. Manufacturer’s product information: For each type of manufactured material and product

indicated include specifications, test data, and instructions for mixing, application and

curing.

C. Mix Design: Submit mix design to the ENGINEER for review at least 14 days prior to first

intended use of Ready-Mixed concrete. Mix design shall include strength history as required

by ACI 301. For each concrete mix, include alternate mix designs when characteristics of

materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances that warrant

adjustments. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items

complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.

2. Form materials and form-release agents.

3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.

4. Admixtures.

5. Curing materials.

6. Bonding agents.

7. Adhesives.

8. Joint fillers.

9. Repair materials.

E. Submit material safety data sheets for all products used or stored on the site and utilized in

performing the work of this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete repair work

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Prior to commencing any work, installer shall meet with General Contractor and ENGINEER

to review all requirements and all proposed installation materials and methods.

C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the

necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed

for proper and timely performance of the work of this Section.



D. Ready Mix Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed

concrete complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete

Association’s Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.

E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the

testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. Personnel conducting field tests

shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-

1 or an equivalent certification program.

F. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand

from the same manufacturer’s plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture

from the same manufacturer. Use all concrete admixtures including silica fume admixture

from the same manufacturer.

G. ACI Publications: Comply with the following publications (editions current at the time of

bidding) unless more stringent provisions are given by the Contract Documents. The

CONTRACTOR shall have the appropriate publications on site.

1. ACI 301, Specification for Structural Concrete.

2. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

3. ACI 305R, Hot Weather Concreting.

4. ACI 306R, Cold Weather Concreting.

1.06 GUARANTEE

A. Unless more stringent requirements are given elsewhere in the Contract Documents the

following shall be the minimum warranty period and requirements for the various elements

associated with the concrete rehabilitation work. The warranties shall be for all aspects of

the entire in-place system and shall apply to defects in both labor and material. The

complete system shall be guaranteed jointly by both the CONTRACTOR and the material

manufacturer, on a single document, beginning with the Date of Substantial Completion of

the entire Project.

1. Concrete patching repairs – two year warranty period.

2. Epoxy, or urethane, injection – three year warranty period.

3. Urethane joint sealant work – five year warranty period.

4. Any aspect of the work not covered by another specific warranty – one year warranty

period.

5. Waterstops – seven year warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS



A. Horizontal top surface concrete repair materials (for partial depth and full depth repairs) may

be either prepackaged site mixed materials or ready-mixed materials at the

CONTRACTOR’s option except at locations where rapid set materials are needed to meet

the requirements the Project schedule. At such locations only prepackaged site mixed

materials shall be used unless a rapid set ready-mixed design is specifically developed for

review and approval by the ENGINEER.

1. Prepackaged, site mixed (rapid set) materials. Extend with clean washed 3/8” diameter

pea gravel meeting, or exceeding, the manufacturer’s minimum requirements.

a. EMACO T415 or EMACO T430 (as appropriate) by Master Builders, Inc.

b. SikaTop 122 Plus by Sika Corporation.

2. Ready-mixed concrete.

a. Concrete materials shall comply with the following standards including the noted Ohio

Department of Transportation (ODOT) specifications.

i. Fine aggregate (natural sand) ODOT 703.02

ii. Coarse aggregate, No. 8 ODOT 703.02 (at full depth

areas use No. 57, ¾” diameter)

iii. Portland Cement ASTM C 150, Type I

iv. Superplasticizing admixture ASTM C 494, Type F

v. Silica Fume admixture ASTM C 1240

b. Concrete mix shall be a silica fume modified, ready-mixed concrete that shall have the

following minimum properties:

i. Minimum cement content shall be 658 lbs. per cubic yard.

ii. Minimum silica fume content shall be 66 lbs. per cubic yard.

iii. Maximum water/cement ratio shall be 0.38. Water/cement ratio shall be calculated

based on the total cementitious material. Total cementitious material shall include

the total weight of the Portland cement and the solids weight of the silica fume.

Mixing water shall be potable.

iv. Maximum total water soluble chloride ion content in the concrete, from all sources,

per weight of cement, shall not exceed 0.1%. Chloride ion contents of the mix

ingredients shall be included in the mix design submittal, as shall the total from all

ingredients.

v. Entrained air content shall be 6.5 to 8.5% at the point of placement. The method of

concrete transportation from the point of discharge from the ready-mixed truck to

the point of placement shall be considered in designing the concrete mix for the

appropriate entrained air content. Use air entraining admixture to achieve the

required air content. The use of air entraining cement is not permitted.

vi. The slump shall be maintained at a constant value by the CONTRACTOR and

shall not be less than 4” nor more than 7”, and shall be (within this range) as

determined by the CONTRACTOR to be appropriate for the placement condition.

vii. The compressive strength at 3 days shall not be less than 3,500 psi; and the

compressive strength at 28 days shall not be less than 5,500 psi.

3. Partial depth vertical surface or overhead concrete repair material.

a. EMACO S88-CA by Master Builders.



b. SikaTop 123 Plus by Sika.

4. Bonding agent: Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem by Sika Corporation.

5. Curing compound:

a. Masterkure 100W by Master Builders, Inc.

b. Horsey-Set WDE by Watson-Bowman Acme Corp.

c. L&M Cure by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

6. Evaporation reducer.

a. Confilm by Master Builders, Inc.

b. Sikafilm by Sika Corporation.

7. Reinforcing steel: Deformed reinforcing bars, size as required, ASTM A615, 60 ksi

yield.

8. Concrete reinforcing dowel anchor adhesive.

a. HIT-HY 200 Adhesive by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc.

b. Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel by Sika Corporation.

9. Concrete Expansion anchors: Kwik Bolt 3, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc.

10. Zinc rich epoxy primer.

a. PorterZinc 3000 Zinc Rich Epoxy Primer by Porter Coatings.

b. EPO Coat Zinc-Rich Primer by Dynamis Corp.

11. Dry pack grout for bearing elements, if required, or pipe sleeve attachment: Approved

5,000 psi (minimum), non-shrink, shrinkage compensating (both before and after set),

non-metallic, rapid setting, premixed grout suitable for exterior usage with excellent

resistance to freeze-thaw cyclical damage under extreme exposure. Comply with Corps

of Engineers CRD-C621.

B. Joint Sealant and Accessories. Joint sealant shall be a multi-component, polyurethane

having a Shore A Hardness of 28-35. The sealant manufacture shall submit, on the

manufacturer’s letterhead, a document stating that the material is not only suitable for an

exterior exposure but also is suitable for a continuously submerged condition of waste water

as is used in the waste water treatment tanks at this site. The sealant material shall be

capable of a minimum compression or extension of 25% of the nominal joint width without

adhesive or cohesive failure in a properly prepared, primed and sealed joint. Unless

indicated otherwise on the Drawings, the joint shall have a width to depth ratio of 1.5 to 2.0

with the use of bond breaker, or backer rod in the bottom of the joint. The backer rod

material shall be closed-cell polyethylene in sizes appropriate for the depth and width of the

joint. Pending the manufacturer’s suitability document as required above, the following

sealant materials are approved for use on this Project.

1. Sikaflex 2C NS or SL by Sika Corp.

2. LymTal 420NS or LymTal 420 SL by LymTal International.

3. Sonolastic NP1 or NP2 by Sonneborn.



C. Epoxy Injection Resin and Urethane Injection Material: Injection pressure shall not exceed

75 psi without the approval of the ENGINEER. The following injection products are

approved for use on this Project. Urethane injection materials shall be approved by the

ENGINEER. Neatly grind off all surface seals from the injected crack.

1. Prime Rez 1100 by Prime Resins.

2. Sikadur 52 by Sika Corp.

3. SCB Concresive 1360 by Master Builders, Inc.

4. Denepox I-300, by DeNeef Construction Chemical Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Refer to the Drawings for repair details, and for concrete excavation and preparation

requirements. Refer to the Drawings, and the Scope paragraph of this Specification Section,

for information regarding the determination of deteriorated concrete to be repaired.

B. Do not damage existing reinforcing steel within the excavated areas. Do not strike existing

reinforcing with chipping hammers during concrete removal. Repair damage caused by

improper concrete removal techniques at no cost to the CITY.

C. Cold-Weather Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect

concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,

freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When air temperature has fallen to, or is expected to fall to, below 40 deg. F., uniformly

heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not

less than 50 deg. F. and not more than 80 deg. F. at point of placement. The concrete

mixture, however, shall not have a temperature beyond the range permitted by ACI for

the temperature differential between the mixed concrete and the surface of the material

(existing concrete or formwork, etc.) against which it is to be placed. Heat existing

material if necessary to make this requirement.

2. Do not use frozen materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen

subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

D. Hot-Weather Concrete Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI

305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist.

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain temperature below 85 deg. F. at time of

placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,

provided that water equivalent of ice is calculated as part of the total amount of mixing

water. Using liquid to cool concrete is CONTRACTOR’s option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed

ambient air temperature at the time of concrete placement.



3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, existing concrete and subgrade, etc. just before

placing concrete. Keep concrete excavations, formwork and subgrade, etc., moisture

uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. Do not wet areas previously

covered by bonding agent.

3.02 FINISHING AND CURING

A. Finish concrete to match existing conditions.

B. Continuously wet cure with wet burlap and polyethylene, wet burlene, or by soaker hoses

covered by polyethylene after proper finishing. Check curing material at least daily

throughout the entire curing period and re-dampen material or modify the curing technique to

ensure a continuously wet cure. Unless more stringent requirement are given elsewhere in

the Contract Documents, or by the prepackaged repair material manufacturer, or except as

stated in 3.03 D., all concrete shall be continuously wet cured for a minimum of three full

days (72 hours). At vertical surface, or soffit, repairs curing material shall be held in contact

with concrete as required.

C. Protect newly applied material from direct sunlight, wind, rain, and frost.

D. Water based curing compounds may be used in accordance with ASTM C309 but must be

submitted and approved by ENGINEER, and only when wet curing is determined by the

ENGINEER to be impractical or detrimental.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Provide protections as necessary to prevent damage to existing building elements and to

prevent spread of dust, debris, and other contaminants from work.

B. Provide shoring, bracing, or support to prevent uncontrolled movement, settlement, or

collapse of structure or structure elements being worked on. Unless provided for elsewhere

in the Contract Documents the means and methods of safely supporting structure or structure

elements during work is responsibility of CONTRACTOR.

C. Entire area being repaired shall not be subjected to any vehicular or any other heavy load for

a 2-week period commencing with completing of repair, unless specifically permitted

otherwise, on a case-by-case basis, by the ENGINEER. Coordinate with OWNER.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Site testing is not required for approved, prepackaged, site mixed concrete provided that the

manufacturer’s technically competent representative is present for mixing, placing and

curing of the first instance of significant use. The ENGINEER may require compressive

strength, and other, testing of material from this first significant use. If required, such testing

shall be arranged and coordinated by the CONTRACTOR and performed by an independent

laboratory, approved by the CITY, and performed on a Time and Materials Basis (Force

Account), against the Allowance established for such in Section 01 20 00 Measurement and

Payment.

B. Ready-mixed concrete shall be tested as required by Specification Section 03 30 00. The

CONTRACTOR shall arrange, coordinate and pay for all testing. The testing agency shall

provide timely written test reports to the CITY, ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR and ready-mix



supplier. The cost for the testing, except as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents,

shall be charged, on a Time and Material Basis (Force Account), against the Allowance

established for such in Section 01 20 00 Measurement and Payment.

C. If the CITY or the ENGINEER suspect that concrete materials used, or the repair techniques

performed, are out of compliance with the Contract Documents they may direct that the

CONTRACTOR arrange for additional testing. If this testing confirms repairs that are not in

compliance then the CONTRACTOR shall pay the costs of the testing as well as the costs to

repair, or remove and replace, the defective material or condition, as determined by

CITY/ENGINEER. If the testing shows the material or condition in question to be in

conformance with the Contract Documents then the CITY will pay for the testing.


CONCRETE ACCESSORIES 03 15 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 03 15 00

CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work under this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, furnishing and installing

all concrete accessories as indicated on the Drawings, herein specified, and as necessary for the

progress and complete performance of this work.

B. Where the term ENGINEER is used in the section, it shall mean “the CITY’s Structural

ENGINEER”.



information in Section 03 01 30.71 shall take precedence.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The waterstop manufacturer shall submit documented test results demonstrating that the

waterstop will not permit water leakage when subjected to pressure and joint movement.

B. Submit certification from the waterstop manufacturer for each person responsible for waterstop

installation stating that such person is certified and trained to install waterstop per manufacturer’s

written requirements.

C. The Vapor Barrier and Retarder manufacturer shall submit samples and literature of the product

and instructions for placement, seaming and pipe installation.

D. Control and construction joint plate dowel manufacturer for slab-on-grade construction shall

submit literature of the products, design information and installation instructions.

E. Submit manufacturer’s product literature, with application and installation instructions for all

miscellaneous products specified in this Specification.

F. Submit for approval a drawing showing the proposed location of all waterstops and the specific

type of waterstop to be installed at each location.


The waterstop manufacturer shall demonstrate five years (minimum) continuous, successful

experience in production of waterstops. A technically competent representative of the waterstop

manufacturer, not associated with the installation crew, shall be on site before and during a portion of

the waterstop installation as required by Section 03 00 00 Concrete Work.


Store waterstops under tarps to protect from oil, dirt, and sunlight. Hydrophilic Rubber (HR)

waterstops shall be protected against contact with moisture while in storage and while in its installed

position prior to placement of concrete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. PVC Waterstops: Waterstops for construction joints shall be Wirestop Waterstop Type No. CR-

6380 manufactured by Paul Murphy Plastics Company, Rossville, Michigan; or Greenstreak

Waterstop Style 783 manufactured by Greenstreak, St. Louis, Missouri.

B. PVC Waterstops Between Existing Concrete and New Concrete: PVC retrofit waterstops

adhered to existing concrete shall be Greenstreak 609 Retrofit Waterstop with “Tee-shaped”

configuration or Greenstreak 655 Retrofit Waterstop with “L-shaped” configuration, by

Greenstreak, St. Louis, Missouri.

C. PVC Waterstops for Expansion Joints: Waterstops for expansion joints shall be Greenstreak

Waterstop Type 717 as manufactured by Greenstreak, St. Louis, Missouri, Wirestop Waterstop

Type No. CR-6380 as manufactured by Paul Murphy Plastics Company, Rossville, Michigan, or

Vinylex Waterstop Type RB638H as manufactured by Vinylex Corporation, Knoxville,

Tennessee.

D. Chemical Resistant Waterstops (TPER) for construction joints shall be equal to WESTEC

Envirostop 600 Series TPE-R, Style 619 manufactured by Westec Barrier Technologies, St.

Louis, Missouri.

E. Chemical Resistant Waterstops (TPER) for expansion joints shall be equal to WESTEC

Envirostop 600 Series TPE-R, Style 620 manufactured by Westec Barrier Technologies, St.

Louis, Missouri.

F. HR Waterstops: HR waterstops for construction joints shall be Hydrotite Waterstop Profile CJ-

0725 manufactured by Greenstreak, St. Louis, Missouri; or Swellseal 2010 manufactured by

deNeef Conchem, Inc., Waller, Texas.

G. Chemical Resistant Retrofit Waterstops at Existing-to-New Expansion Joints: Chemical resistant

waterstops at joints between existing and new conditions shall be Westec Envirostop TPE-R

Style No. 697 manufactured by Westec Barrier Technologies, St. Louis, Missouri or EarthShield

ThermoPlastic Vulcanizate Part No. JP320L with Novalac epoxy VEN-1000 manufactured by

JP Specialties, Lake Elsinore, California.

H. Vapor Barriers: Vapor Barriers shall be equal to Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil) by Stego

Industries LLC, San Clemente, California.

I. Slab-on-Grade Dowels: Dowels for slab-on-grade control and construction joints shall be equal

to PNA Construction Technologies.

J. Bonding Agent: Refer to Specification 03 01 30.71.


A. Waterstops

1. PVC waterstops shall be extruded from an elastomeric plastic compound of which the basic

resin shall be prime virgin polyvinyl chloride meeting U.S. Army Corps of Engineers

Specification CRD-C572-74. The PVC compound shall not contain any scrapped or

reclaimed material or pigment whatsoever.

2. Chemical resistant waterstops shall be extruded from a fully vulcanized synthetic rubber

with high resistance to wide range of oils, solvents and chemicals tested in accordance with

ASTM D471, Test Methods for Rubber Waterstops.

3. Provide factory installed grommets, pre-punched holes or embedded wire loop to facilitate

tying off waterstop at 12-inches on center along the length of the waterstop.


4. Provide factory made PVC waterstop fabrications for all changes of direction, intersections

and transitions, leaving only straight butt joint splices for the field. For 90 degree corners,

waterstop shall be continuous and “radiused” around corner provided waterstop can

maintain at least 2-inches clear from all reinforcing steel.

5. Provide factory made TPER waterstop fabrications for all changes of direction, intersections

and transitions, leaving only straight butt joint splices in the field. For 90 degree corners,

waterstop shall be continuous and “radiused” around corner provided waterstop can

maintain at least 6-inches clear from all reinforcing steel.

6. Hydrophilic rubber (HR) waterstops shall be coextruded hydrophilic rubber consisting of a

combination of chloroprene rubber and chloroprene rubber modified to impart hydrophilic

properties.

7. Hydrophilic rubber (HR) waterstops shall have a delay coating to inhibit initial expansion

due to moisture present in fresh concrete.

8. Minimum profile dimensions of HR waterstop shall be 1/4 x 1-inch.

9. HR waterstop shall not contain any bentonite.

B. Dovetail Slots

1. No. 22 gauge, galvanized steel, 1-inch wide back.

2. Crimped anchors shall be furnished by other trades whose work abuts concrete.

C. Inserts for General Trades

1. Malleable iron, strength as required.

2. Include bolts, nuts, and washers.

D. Expansion Joint Filler: Refer to Specification 03 01 30.71.

E. Construction Joint Dowels for Floor Slabs-on-Grade: Diamond dowel system as manufactured

by PNA ConstructionTechnologies.

F. Control Joint Dowels for Floor Slabs-on-Grade: Flat, tapered PD3 plate dowels and basket

system as manufactured by PNA Construction Technologies.

G. Vapor Barriers and Retarders

1. Water Containment Structures: Vapor retarder shall be polyethylene sheeting, minimum 6

mil thickness, conforming to ATSM C171. Sheeting shall be drilled with ½-inch holes at 6

inches on center each way.

2. Interior Slabs-on-Grade without Floor Coverings: Vapor retarder shall be polyethylene

sheeting, minimum 10 mil thickness, conforming to ASTM C171.

3. Interior Slabs-on-Grade with Floor Coverings: Vapor barriers shall have a composite

sheeting of plastic and resins, minimum 15 mil thickness and permeance of less than 0.01

perms, comforming to ASTM F1249 or ASTM E96 and conforming to ASTM C1745 Class

A.

H. Vapor Barrier and Retarder Accessories

1. Seam Tape with permeance less than 0.3 perms per ASTM F1249 or ASTM E96.

2. Vapor Proofing Mastic with permeance less than 0.3 perms per ASTM F1249 or ASTM

E96.


3. Pipe boots constructed from vapor barrier or retarder material, pressure sensitive tape and/or

mastic per manufacturer’s instructions.

I. Flashing Reglet: 26 gauge galvanized steel. Coordinate with waterproofing subcontractor.

2.03 OTHER MATERIALS

All other materials not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation of

concrete accessories, shall be as selected by the CONTRACTOR subject to the approval of the

ENGINEER.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install concrete accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, as

indicated on the Drawings, specified in these Specifications, in various other Sections and as

necessary for the proper and complete performance of this work.

B. Waterstops

1. Waterstops shall be installed in all construction joints in walls and slabs which are to hold

water and also where shown on the Drawings. The waterstop shall extend the entire length

of the joint and all splices shall be installed and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.

2. Waterstops for all joints shall be continuous around all corners and intersections.

Waterstops shall be located as near as possible to the center of the joint. For PVC and TPER

waterstops, provide factory formed corners and intersections where angle intersections

occur, and only straight splices shall be made in the field. Splices shall be made in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be subject to the approval of

the ENGINEER.

3. Field butt splices shall be heat fused welded using a Teflon coated thermostatically

controlled waterstop splicing iron. Follow approved manufacturer recommendations.

Lapping of waterstop, use of adhesives, or solvents shall not be permitted.

4. No holes will be permitted in waterstops.

5. PVC waterstops shall be securely fastened to formwork or reinforcing steel every 12-inches

or less on both edges as required for concrete placement.

6. Hydrophilic rubber (HR) waterstops shall be spliced using cyanoacrylate adhesive (super

glue) and a band-aid seal of hydrophilic polyurethane sealant.

7. Cut coil ends of HR waterstops square (or at proper angle for mitered corners) with shears or

sharp blade to fit splices together without overlaps.

8. Joinery between PVC and HR waterstops shall be sealed using hydrophilic polyurethane

sealant.

9. The concrete surface under the hydrophilic rubber (HR) waterstop shall be smooth and

uniform. The concrete shall be ground smooth if needed.

10. Existing surfaces to receive a retrofit waterstop shall be clean and free from any loose or

foreign material. Surface shall be cleaned by sandblasting or grinding the surface to assure a

solid, clean surface prior to application of epoxy and waterstop. Retrofit waterstops shall be

set in a bed of epoxy with stainless steel batten bars and 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel


anchors at 6-inches on center, staggered, and in accordance with manufacturer’s written

instructions.

C. Piping, Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Support

1. Inserts for hangers shall be supplied by the trade whose work is supported.

2. Locations of the inserts shall be given to the CONTRACTOR by the various trades.

3. Installation of the cast-in-place inserts shall be by the CONTRACTOR.

D. Vapor Barriers and Retarders

1. Preparation

a. Ensure that subsoil is approved by GEOTECH ENGINEER prior to placement of vapor

barrier and retarder.

b. Level and tamp or roll aggregate, sand or granular base.

2. Installation

a. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the

concrete pour.

b. Lap vapor barrier over footings and/or seal to foundation walls.

c. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s tape.

d. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions.

e. No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent

utilities.

f. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6

inches and securing all four sides with tape.

3.02 INSPECTION

Inspect all the work in accordance with Section 03 30 00 of these Specifications.


CONCRETE ANCHORING SYSTEMS 03 15 19-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 03 15 19

CONCRETE ANCHORING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work covered by this Section includes furnishing all labor, materials and equipment required

to furnish and install post-installed concrete anchoring systems, cast-in-place concrete anchoring

systems, and concrete masonry unit anchoring systems and related work as specified herein

and/or shown on the Drawings.

B. Post-installed Anchoring Systems: Refer to Specification 03 01 30.71.

C. Cast-in-place anchoring systems shall include threaded rods (with a tack welded nut) and

embedded plates or angles with headed studs.

D. Adhesive Type Anchor Systems: Refer to Specification 03 01 30.71.

E. Mechanical anchor rods shall be installed when anchoring to existing concrete where indicated

on the Drawings or where recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Mechanical anchoring

into concrete masonry units is not permitted.

F. Cast-in-place anchor rods shall be installed in all new concrete construction where indicated on

the Drawings or as recommended by the equipment manufacturers.

G. Embedded plates or angles with headed studs shall be installed in new concrete construction

where indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications or where recommended by the

equipment manufacturers.

H. Where the term ENGINEER is used in the section, it shall mean “the CITY’s Structural

ENGINEER”.





1.03 MATERIAL STORAGE

All material shall be stored in a manner which will protect the material from dirt, deterioration and

damage.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Cast-in-place anchors and embedded plates/studs shall be submitted indicating

fabrication details. Reproduction of the Drawings for use as shop drawings is not permitted.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications, material specifications, technical data and

installation instructions shall be submitted for adhesive anchor rods, adhesives, and mechanical

anchors. Anchor and adhesive load data shall also be included.

C. Manufacturer’s Literature: The CONTRACTOR shall submit manufacturer’s ICC-ES Code

report information.

D. Manufacturer Training Reports: The CONTRACTOR shall submit the training records for the


required manufacturer’s training.

E. Submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these

Specifications.


A. The preparation and installation of all adhesive anchors shall be included in the Special

Inspection Plan.

B. Installations made under continuous special inspection must be performed with the special

inspector on the jobsite continuously during anchor installation to verify the hole drilling method

is in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions, hole location, hole

diameter and depth, hole cleaning in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation

instructions, anchor type, anchor diameter and length, anchor embedment, adhesive

identification and expiration date, adhesive installation in accordance with manufacturer’s

printed installation instructions, edge distances(s), anchor spacing(s), concrete type, concrete

compressive strength, age of concrete, concrete thickness and installation torque.

C. Installations made under periodic special inspection must be performed with the special

inspector on the jobsite initially during anchor installation to verify the hole drilling method is in

accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions, hole location, hole diameter and

depth, hole cleaning in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions, anchor

type, anchor diameter and length, anchor embedment, adhesive identification and expiration

date, adhesive installation in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions,

edge distances(s), anchor spacing(s), concrete type, concrete compressive strength, age of

concrete, concrete thickness and installation torque. The special inspector must verify the initial

installations of each type and size of anchor by construction personnel on site. Subsequent

installations of the same type and size of anchor, by the same construction personnel is permitted

to be performed in the absence of the special inspector. Any change in the anchor product being

installed or the personnel performing the installation must require an initial inspection. For

ongoing installations over an extended period of time, the special inspector must make regular

inspections to confirm correct handling and installation the product.

D. For anchor rods specified on the Structural Drawings and installed in cracked concrete, or

concrete that has the potential to crack, the anchor shall have been tested in accordance with

ICC-ES AC308 (adhesive anchors) and ICC-ES AC193 (mechanical anchors).

E. CONTRACTORS installing anchor systems shall be trained, certified or otherwise qualified by

the anchor manufacturer verifying that the necessary training has been provided to install the

manufacturer’s products. Training shall consist of a review of the complete installation process,

to include but not limited to: hole drilling procedure, hole preparation and cleaning technique,

adhesive injection for adhesive anchors, rod (or rebar), preparation and installation, torquing the

anchor as specified. An anchor manufacturer’s representative shall provide the training to all

contractor installers. If additional installers are added throughout the Project, they shall be

trained/certified prior to installing anchors.

F. An anchor manufacturer’s representative shall initially demonstrate anchor installation using the

procedure described in the manufacturer’s published installation instructions to all installers. All

subsequent anchor installations shall be done by the installer using the same procedure as

demonstrated by the anchor manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to contact

the anchor manufacturer.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


A. Deliver materials undamaged in Manufacturer’s clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified

with brand, type, and ICC-ES Evaluation Report number.

B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date, minimizing storage time at job-

site.

C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with

manufacturer’s requirements, including temperature restrictions.

D. Do not use damaged or expired materials.

E. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions, or remedies described in material safety

data sheets as applicable.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before

proceeding.

B. Do not proceed with installation of adhesive anchoring systems at temperatures not described by

the manufacturer’s recommended range for installation printed on product instructions, product

data sheet and ICC-ES report.

C. Drilled hole condition must comply with the applicable ICC-ES report and manufacturers

provided written product instruction.

D. Do not install anchors in hollow concrete masonry units.

E. All concrete shall be considered “cracked” for anchoring purposes except where the Structural

ENGINEER of Record identifies, determines or verifies “un-cracked” concrete conditions in

writing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEMS (POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS):


2.02 MECHANICAL ANCHOR RODS (POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS)

A. Stainless steel drilled in expansion anchor rods shall have a stainless steel body conforming to

AISI 304 and a stainless steel sleeve conforming to AISI 316. Nuts shall be stainless steel and

conform to the requirements of ASTM F 594 Alloy Group I, Condition CW. Washers shall be

stainless steel (AISI 304) and shall meet dimensional requirements of ASTM F 436.

B. Carbon steel drilled-in expansion anchor rods shall be zinc electroplated in accordance with

ASTM B 633, Type III to a minimum thickness of 5 µm. expansion sleeves (wedges) shall

conform to AISI 316. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A563, Grade A, Hex. Washers shall meet

the dimensional requirements of ASTM F844.

C. Expansion anchor rods shall conform to the applicable requirements of Federal Specifications A-

A 1923A, Type 4.

D. Expansion Anchors: Refer to Specification 03 01 30.71.

E. Screw Anchors: Refer to Specification 03 01 30.71.

F. Internally Threaded Insert Anchors: Refer to Specification 03 01 30.71.


2.03 CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHOR RODS

A. Cast-in-place anchor rods, except those used for equipment anchoring, shall be carbon steel

unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or Specifications. Cast-in-place anchor rods used for

anchoring equipment shall be stainless steel. Tack weld one heavy hex nut at end of anchor rod.

B. Carbon steel anchor rods less than 1” in diameter shall meet the requirements of ASTM F1554

Grade 36 unless noted otherwise on the Drawings; rods 1” in diameter or larger shall be Grade

55. Carbon steel nuts shall be heavy hex and meet the requirements of ASTM A563. Carbon

steel washers shall be hardened and meet the requirements of ASTM F436. Carbon steel

material shall be considered uncoated.

C. Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel anchor rods shall conform to ASTM A153. Nuts shall conform

to A563, Grade A, heavy hex.

D. Stainless steel anchor rods shall be continuously threaded (all thread) and meet the requirements

of ASTM A193 Grade B8M (AISI 316). Stainless steel nuts shall be heavy hex and meet the

requirements of ASTM F594, Alloy Group I, Condition CW. Stainless steel washers shall meet

the requirements of ASTM A240 and dimensional requirements of ANSI B18.22.1, Type A

Plain.

2.04 EMBEDDED PLATES OR ANGLES WITH HEADED STUDS (CAST-IN-PLACE)

A. Carbon steel embedded plates and angles shall meet ASTM A36. Carbon steel headed studs

shall meet ASTM A108. All headed stud to plate/angle welds shall meet the requirements of

AWS D1.1 Chapter 10.

B. Stainless steel embedded plates and angles shall meet ASTM A 240 and A 276, respectively.

Stainless steel headed studs shall meet ASTM A 593. All headed stud to plate/angle welds shall

meet the requirements of AWS D1.6.

2.05 DEFORMED REINFORCING BAR (REBAR)

Deformed reinforcing steel dowels specified to be epoxy set into hardened concrete shall be installed

in accordance with the adhesive anchoring system for sizes between No. 4 and No. 8. Reinforcing

steel shall conform to ASTM A 615.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions

detrimental to proper or timely completion.

B. Verify that conditions are in accordance with the design requirements and product specific ICC-

ES AC308 and ICC-ES AC193 report.

C. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Installation of adhesive anchors shall be in conformance with the manufacturer's published

installation instructions and under the supervision of a manufacturer's field representative. This

includes as a minimum, but not limited to, drilling of the hole, cleaning the hole, dispensing of

adhesive, anchor rod installation and curing.

B. Do not disturb, bolt up, or apply load to adhesive anchors prior to the full cure of the adhesive.


Refer to manufacturer’s instructions on curing including cure time.

C. All anchor rods shall be clean and free of cutting oils, grease, dirt, dust, and other foreign

material.

D. Adhesive anchors should not be installed in concrete that is less than 21 days old, regardless of

the strength of the concrete. When inserting threaded rod, turn rod continuously until rod is fully

embedded.

E. Drilled Holes: Holes for adhesive anchors shall be drilled with a rotary percussion hammer drill

with a carbide tipped masonry drill bit conforming to ANSI B94.12. The anchor hole diameter

shall be as specified by the manufacturer. Core drilling for adhesive anchors is not permitted.

F. The hole shall be drilled perpendicular to the concrete surface unless noted otherwise on the

Drawings.

G. Hole Cleaning and Preparation: After drilling, dust and fragments shall be cleared out as

specified in accordance with the manufacturer's published installation instructions. As a

minimum, the hole shall be blown out for a period of 4 seconds with an 80 psi compressed air

hose. After blowing out debris, the hole shall be brushed with a nylon brush for 4 times, and

then blown out a second time with the 80 psi compressed air hose for 4 seconds. The hole may

be damp (unless prohibited by the manufacturer) but all water must be blown out. Air used for

blow outs shall be clean and dry.

H. Adhesive Installation: After the hole is properly cleaned the adhesive shall be installed in strict

accordance with the manufacturer's published installation instructions. Care shall be taken so as

to not allow any air pockets in the hole.

I. Minimum anchor embedment depth, anchor spacing, anchor finish, and minimum anchor edge

distance shall be as specified on the Drawings. In no case shall the anchor embedment be less

than twelve times the anchor diameter. Minimum distance between center of any adhesive

anchor and an edge or exterior corner of concrete shall not be less than 6 times the anchor

diameter.

J. Anchor Installation: Immediately after adhesive installation, the anchor shall be installed in

accordance with the manufacturer's published installation instructions.

K. Curing: Anchor shall be unloaded and allowed to cure for manufacturer's recommended curing

time.

3.03 MECHANICAL ANCHOR ROD INSTALLATION

A. Drill expansion bolt holes into concrete through item being supported or locate by a template.

Drill all holes with a tool designed by or approved by the expansion anchor manufacturer.

B. Installation of mechanical anchors shall be in conformance with the manufacturer's published

installation instructions and under the supervision of a manufacturer's field representative. This

includes as a minimum, but not limited to, drilling of the hole, cleaning the hole, and anchor

installation.

C. Drill holes for mechanical anchors with carbide-tipped drill bits meeting the diameter

requirements of the manufacturer's published installation instructions. Rotary hammer drills,

with light, high frequency impact are recommended for drilling holes in concrete. Core drilling

for anchors in concrete shall not be permitted. Core drilling is required for anchors in hollow

masonry.

D. Minimum anchor embedment depth, anchor spacing, anchor finish, and minimum anchor edge

distance shall be as specified on the Drawings. Minimum distance between center of any


expansion anchor and an edge or exterior corner of concrete shall not be less than 6 times the

anchor diameter.

3.04 CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHOR ROD INSTALLATION

A. Anchor rods with tack welded nut shall be shipped to the Project site.

B. Anchor rods shall be properly located and built into connecting work. Anchor rods shall be

preset by the use of templates or such other methods as may be required to locate the anchor

bolts accurately.

3.05 EMBEDDED PLATE OR ANGLE WITH HEADED STUDS INSTALLATION

A. Embedded plate and stud assembly shall be shop fabricated and shipped to the Project site.

B. Embedded plate and stud assembly shall be secured in place prior to casting new concrete.


CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work included in this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment

necessary to provide and properly fabricate and place all concrete reinforcement steel, welded

wire fabric, couplers, and inserts for use in the reinforced concrete construction. This includes

all wires, clips, supports, chairs, spacers and other accessories.

B. The furnishing, fabrication and construction of the concrete reinforcement shall be in

accordance with ACI 301, ACI 315, CRSI and as shown and indicated on the Drawings and

specified in this Section.


ENGINEER”.



information in Section 03 01 30.71 shall take precedence.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings

1. All shop drawings shall be of the same size. Reproductions of the Drawings for use as

shop drawings are not permitted. Shop drawings shall include placing drawings, bending

details, splice locations, and bar lists with bar marks. All details and notes appearing on the

Drawings, giving information for the placing of reinforcing steel, shall be shown on the

shop drawings. Shop drawings will not be reviewed without such information.

2. Shop drawings shall comply with ACI 315, Details and Detailing of Concrete

Reinforcement and CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, showing bar schedules,

arrangement of reinforcement, stirrup spacing, layout of splices, layout of ties, and

diagrams of bent bars. Shop drawings shall include special reinforcement required, such as

corner bars and openings through concrete structures.

3. Wall reinforcing shall be shown in elevation.

4. Show location and size of all penetrations greater than 6-inches in diameter or across the

opening with the corresponding added reinforcing around the penetrations.

5. Submittals shall be complete for each structure. Partial submittals are not permitted and

will be returned unmarked. Each submittal shall clearly indicate the structure and Drawing

numbers for which the work applies. The identifying numbers of the shop drawings for

each structure shall be in numerical order with a unique designation for each structure.

6. Location and arrangement of accessories shall be clearly indicated.


7. All shop drawings shall be checked by the fabricator and CONTRACTOR before being

submitted to the ENGINEER.

8. Any revised shop drawings re-submitted for review shall have all changes clouded with a

revision number that is associated with the date of the revision.

B. Mill tests of reinforcing steel shall be submitted prior to use for each 15 tons or less shipped to

the site. Tests shall be conducted in conformance with ASTM A 615, and methods prescribed

therein.

1. Cost of mill tests shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.

2. Three copies of each test report stating whether the material meets the requirements of the

ASTM specifications shall be submitted to the ENGINEER.

3. Certified copies of the mill tests may be considered evidence of compliance provided such

tests are regularly conducted by the reinforcement supplier by experienced, competent

personnel using adequate testing equipment. In case of doubt as to the adequacy or

accuracy of the mill tests, the ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish, at

no additional cost to the CITY, test results from an independent testing laboratory

acceptable to the ENGINEER on mill samples or delivered steel reinforcement.

C. Manufacturer’s Literature and Certifications: The CONTRACTOR shall submit

manufacturer’s literature for all accessories which contains written instructions and

recommendations for installation and certified test reports to verify load capacity where

applicable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 BAR REINFORCEMENT

A. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed-type bars conforming to ASTM A 615. Reinforcement

shall be manufactured from new billet steel of American manufacture, Grade 60.

1. Actual yield strength of reinforcement, based on mil tests, shall not exceed 78,000 psi.

2. The ratio of the actual tensile strength to the actual yield strength of reinforcement, based

on mil tests, shall be greater than or equal to 1.25.

B. Bar reinforcement shall be shop fabricated to shapes and dimensions indicated on the Drawings

and in compliance with applicable provisions of ACI 315 and ACI 318.

C. Bars shall be bent cold. Bars shall be pre-fabricated to detail and delivered on the job plainly

tagged and ready to set.

2.02 DEFORMED BAR ANCHORS

A. Deformed bar anchors shall be manufactured from cold-rolled, deformed-type bars conforming

to the requirements of AWS D1.1 and ASTM A 496 with a minimum yield strength of 70 ksi

and tensile strength of 80 ksi.

B. Deformed bar anchors shall be manufactured by Nelson Stud Welding, Inc., Elyria, Ohio or

Stud Welding Associates, Inc., Strongsville, Ohio.


2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement in compliance with CRSI

Manual of Standard Practice, including bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,

supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcing in place.

B. All chairs, spacers, bolsters and other devices shall have plastic-covered or galvanized steel legs

at formed slabs and beams, and plastic-covered for all walls and liquid containment structures.

For slabs on grade concrete bricks may be used as an alternate to coated chairs unless required

otherwise on the drawings.

C. Mechanical Couplers: Mechanical couplers shall be provided where indicated and where

approved by the ENGINEER. The couplers shall be ICC-ES certified and shall develop a

tensile strength that exceeds 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcement bars being

spliced at each splice. Splice locations shall be staggered.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

Reinforcing steel delivered to the site, not immediately placed in forms, shall be protected from

mud and excessive rust-producing conditions by storing in a well-drained area and supported off the

ground. All reinforcing shall be properly tagged with their bar marks and location in the structure

clearly noted.

3.02 TOLERANCES

A. Allowable tolerances shall be in accordance with the latest edition of ACI 117, except as

indicated.

B. Allowable tolerances for fabricating steel reinforcement shall be as follows:

Item Maximum Tolerance, Inches

Sheared Length of Bars +1 -1

Depth of Truss Bars +0.0 -1/2

Outside Dimensions of Stirrups, Ties and Spirals +1/2 -1/2

Location of Bends +1 -1

C. Allowable tolerances for placing steel reinforcement shall be as follows:


Concrete Cover from Outside of Bar to Finished

Surface

+1/4 -0.0

Lateral Spacing of Bars in Plane of Reinforcement in

Beams and Joists

+1/4 -0.0

Lateral Spacing of Bars in Plane of Reinforcement in +3/4 -3/4



Slabs and Walls

Spacing of Stirrups, Ties and Spirals Along

Longitudinal Axis of Member

+1/2 -1/4

Height of Bottom Bars in Slabs, Beams and Joists +1/4 -1/4

Height of Top Bars in Slabs, Beams and Joists

Depth 8" and Less

Depth 9" and Greater

+1/4

+1/2

+3/4

-1/4

-1/2

-3/4

3.03 FABRICATION

A. Field fabrication of reinforcing steel is not permitted.

B. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately fabricated to the dimensions shown.

C. Reinforcing bars shall be bent cold and shall not be bent in a manner which will damage the

material.

3.04 PLACEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Space metal chairs, bolsters, spacers and hangers in accordance with ACI 315.

B. Reinforcement and other metalwork to be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned

of all dirt, grease, loose scale, form release agent, rust, mortar or other foreign substances or

coatings immediately before concrete is placed. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the

plans shall not be used.

C. Reinforcement shall be accurately placed in accordance with the Drawings and shall be

adequately secured in position with not less than 16 gauge annealed wire or suitable clips at

intersections. Set wire ties so that ends are directed into the member and not toward the face of

the concrete. Reinforcement shall be held securely in position, at the required distance from the

forms, during concrete placement. Nails shall not be driven into outside forms to support

reinforcement. Tack welding may not be used to secure reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire reinforcement for concrete slabs on ground and as otherwise indicated. Lap

all joints 12-inches and wire securely. Extend mesh to within 2-inches of sides and ends of

slabs. Sheets that do not lay flat when in their intended position will be rejected. Tags

designating the wire size and spacing shall be left on each sheet until ready for use. Tuck ends

of welded mesh well down into edge of beams or walls. Do not leave unreinforced border

strips. Welded wire reinforcement shall not contain loose rust. All welded wire reinforcement

shall be supported and tied in its proper location. The construction practice of placing welded

wire reinforcement on the ground and hooking it into place in the freshly placed concrete shall

not be permitted. Supports shall be spaced not more than 3-feet on center in any direction.

E. Conduits: Where conduits are permitted in slabs as noted on the Drawings, low conduit shall

be wired to the upper side of bottom reinforcing in the transverse direction and top conduit shall

be wired to lower side of top reinforcing in the transverse direction. Where parallel conduits

occur, they shall be separated from reinforcing and each other by at least 2-inches clear.


F. Reinforcement partially embedded in concrete shall not be bent in the field unless permitted by

the ENGINEER.

G. Weld deformed bar anchors to A36 steel plates in accordance with Chapter 7 of AWS D1.1

using a stud welding gun.

H. Properly cap all vertical reinforcement steel.

3.05 CONCRETE COVER

Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the following concrete cover shall be provided for

reinforcement:

Bottom and Sides of Footing 3-inches

Walls 2"

Slabs (Framed)

Bottom

Top

3/4-inch

1-inch

Beams (Stirrups)

Bottom and Sides

Top

1-1/2-inches

2-inches

Columns (Ties, Spirals) 2-inches

Slabs on Grade - Liquid Containment Structures

Bottom and Sides

Top

3-inches

See Drawings

Slabs on Grade - Other Structures See Drawings

3.06 SPLICING

A. Splicing of reinforcement shall be as shown and indicated on the Drawings. Splices not shown

on the Drawings shall be Class "B" splice, in accordance with ACI 318. Any changes to the

location and type of splices desired by the CONTRACTOR must be specifically requested and

must meet with the acceptance of the ENGINEER before they can be used.

B. Splices shall not be made at point of maximum stress and shall provide sufficient lap to transfer

stress between bars by bond.

C. Mechanical splices may be used instead of lap splices provided that their location and type

meets with the acceptance of the ENGINEER.

D. Welded splices are not permitted.

E. Couplers which are located at a joint face shall be the type which can be set either flush or

recessed from the face as indicated. The couplers shall be sealed during concrete placement to

completely eliminate concrete or cement paste from entering. Couplers intended for future


connections (form savers) shall be recessed a minimum of 1/2-inch from the concrete surface.

After the concrete is placed, the coupler shall be plugged with plastic plugs which have an O-

ring seal and recess filled with sealant to prevent any contact with water or other corrosive

materials.

3.07 INSPECTION



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work included in this Section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and

materials necessary for the proper placement, curing, finishing, protection and repair of the

cast-in-place concrete required by the Contract Documents.

B. The furnishing and placement of the cast-in-place concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 301

and as shown and indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section.


ENGINEER”.





1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit mix designs for all groups and classes of concrete in accordance with ACI requirements.

For each mix design, provide the Project name, city, general contractor, concrete strength, slump,

w/c ratio, sources of ingredients, mixture proportions and characteristics, and its intended use.

All concrete materials shall be listed.

B. Submit concrete strength, slump tests and air-entrainment results.

C. Submit the following information for concrete materials, along with evidence demonstrating

compliance with this Section.

1. Cement Types: Types, manufacturing locations, shipping locations and certificates showing

compliance with ASTM C150.

2. Aggregates, types, pit or quarry locations, producers’ names, gradings (including aggregate

gradation test results and certification), specific gravities, and evidence not more than 90

days old demonstrating compliance with ASTM C33.

3. Fly Ash: Types, manufacturing locations, shipping locations and certificates showing

compliance with ASTM C618.

4. All Admixtures: Types, brand names, producers, manufacturer’s technical data sheets, and

certification data including conformance to NSF 61 and chloride ion limit.

5. Certifications for miscellaneous products specified in this Specification.

D. Submit materials, procedures and methods on concrete curing will be provided.

1.04 PRE-CONCRETE CONFERENCE

A. A meeting to review the detailed requirements of the CONTRACTOR’s proposed concrete

design mixes and to determine the required methods and procedures to achieve the required

concrete quality shall be held at least 21 days prior to start of concrete construction.


B. The CONTRACTOR shall require responsible representatives of all parties involved in the

concrete work to attend the conference, including but not limited to the following:

1. CONTRACTOR’s representative

2. Testing laboratory representative

3. Concrete subcontractor and finisher

4. Reinforcing steel subcontractor (if required)

5. Concrete supplier

6. Admixture manufacturer’s representative

C. The conference shall be held at a mutually agreed upon time and place. The Engineer shall be

notified no less than 10 days prior to the scheduled date of the conference.

D. Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed, printed and distributed by the CONTRACTOR

to all parties concerned within five days of the meeting. One copy shall also be sent to the

ENGINEER and Special Inspector.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CEMENT

A. Cement shall be standard Portland cement, of American manufacture, conforming to ASTM C

150, Type I/II. Do not use air-entrainment cement. Only one brand of commercial Portland

cement shall be used in the exposed concrete of the structure. Cement reclaimed by cleaning

bags or from leaking containers shall not be used in this work. Each bag shall weigh

approximately 94 pounds and contain one cubic foot.

B. Cement in liquid containment structures shall be standard Portland cement, of American

manufacture, conforming to ASTM C150, Type I/II and certified to NSF/ANSI Standard 61,

Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects.

2.02 COARSE AGGREGATES

A. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone having clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles

conforming to ASTM C 33. Aggregate for lightweight concrete shall conform to ASTM C 330.

B. Coarse aggregate shall not contain clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter. Its maximum size shall be

no larger than 1/5 of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, 1/3 of the depth of slabs,

or 3/4 of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars.

C. Combined aggregate gradation for slabs-on-grade and walls 12-inch or less shall be 8% - 18%

for large size aggregate (1-1/2”) and 8%-22% for smaller top size aggregates (1” or 3/4”)

retained on each sieve below the top size and above the No. 100.

2.03 FINE AGGREGATES

A. Fine aggregate shall be sand having clean, hard, durable, uncoated grains and free from

deleterious substances and shall conform to ASTM C 33.

B. When tested in accordance with ASTM D2419, the sand equivalency shall not be less than 75

percent for an average of 3 samples, nor less than 70 percent for an individual test. Gradation of

fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C136 for the

fineness modulus of the sand used, including the optional grading in Section 6.2. The fineness


modulus of sand used shall not be over 3.1.

C. When tested in accordance with ASTM C33, the fine aggregate shall produce a color in the

supernatant liquid no darker than the reference standard color solution.

2.04 WATER

Water used in mixing concrete shall be potable, clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids,

alkalis or organic materials and conform to ASTM C1602.

2.05 ADMIXTURES

When required or permitted, admixtures shall meet the requirements of the following:

A. Admixtures in water containment structures shall conform to NSF/ANSI Standard 61.

B. Water reducing admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type A.

C. Water reducing, retarding admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type D.

D. Non-Corrosive, Non-Chloride Accelerator: The admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type

C.

E. Air entraining admixture shall conform to ASTM C 260.

F. Fly ash shall conform to ASTM C 618, Type F.

G. High range water reducer (HRWR) shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type F or G and shall be one

of the following:

1. Rheobuild 1000 and Glenium 3030 NS, manufactured by Master Builders

2. Daracem 100, manufactured by W.R. Grace

3. Sikament 320, manufactured by Sika Corporation

4. Eucon 37, manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company

H. Chloride: Calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.1 percent chloride ions are not

permitted.

I. Evaporation Retardant: Consists of a thin, continuous film which prevents rapid moisture loss

from the concrete surface. Use Eucober by the Euclid Chemical Company or Confilm by Master

Builders (BASF). Evaporation retarders shall not be used as finishing aids or otherwise worked

into the surface of fresh concrete.

J. Cementitious Crystalline Waterproofing Admixture: Xypex Admix C-1000 (no dye)

manufactured by Xypex Chemical Corporation, Krystol Internal Membrane (KIM)

manufactured by Kryton International Inc., Penetron Admix manufactured by ICS/Penetron

International Ltd. Dosage rate shall be 2% by weight of Portland cement of Xypex, 2% of total

cementitious material for KIM, and 1% by weight of Portland cement for Penetron Admix. Do

not reduce the amount of cement in the mix. Cementitious Crystalline Waterproofing Admixture

shall meet the following standards:

1. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers CRD C 48-92, “Standard Test Method for Water

Permeability of Concrete”. Requirement: No water penetration (leakage) after 28 days

under hydrostatic pressure of 200 psi (460 feet of head).

2. NSF “Standard Water System Component Health Effects”. Requirement: Certified for use

in potable water in accordance with ANSI/NSF Standard 61.


3. Chemical Resistance Testing based on ASTM C 266.

4. Crack Bridging Capability based on ASTM C 856 “Standard Practice for Petrographic

Examination of Hardened Concrete”. Requirement: Admixture shall be capable of sealing

static cracks up to 1/64 inch.

5. ASTM C 39 “Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens”. Requirement: After 28 days, concrete tests containing permeability retarding

admixture shall have an increase in compressive strength (ASTM C 39) by at least 10%

compared to samples prepared without admixture having equal proportions, slump and air

content.

6. Product storage, application, dosing methods, usage, mixing and any special precautions

shall be in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.06 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER

See Section 03 15 00 of these Specifications for expansion joint filler.

2.07 WATERSTOPS

See Section 03 00 00 and Section 03 15 00 of these Specifications for waterstops.

2.08 VAPOR BARRIERS AND RETARDERS

See Section 03 15 00 of these Specifications for vapor barriers and retarders.

2.09 CURING AND SEALING COMPOUNDS

A. Curing compound, if permitted, shall be acrylic based, conforming to ASTM C309 Type I.

When curing compound must be removed for grouting or finishes, it shall be of a dissipating

type.

B. Curing compound shall be one of the following:

1. Kure-n-Seal 30, manufactured by Sonneborn

2. Dress and Seal 30, manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

3. Super Rez Seal, manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company

C. Sealing compound shall be: Sikaguard 701W, manufactured by Sika Corporation

2.10 PRODUCT CERTIFICATION

All products shall be NSF 61 certified if included in concrete mix and which will be in contact with

raw or treated process water. This applies to, but not limited to, liquid containment structures,

concrete pipe for water transmission, concrete lining for tunnels used to transmit raw water and

concrete caissons used for raw water collection.

2.11 CONCRETE QUALITY

A. In general, the concrete mix shall be designed to produce a concrete capable of being deposited

so as to obtain maximum density, maximum strength, minimum shrinkage, and where deposited

in forms, to have good consolidation properties and maximum smoothness of surface. In liquid

containing structures, concrete’s mix shall provide the required liquid tightness.

B. Refer to Specification 03 01 30.71.


2.12 MIX DESIGNS

A. For mix designs for Ready-Mixed concrete to be used for repair of existing concrete refer so

Specification Section 03 01 30.71.

B. Mix design shall be proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1 making maximum use of the

coarse aggregate. The proportioning shall be based on the requirements of a well-graded, high

density plastic, workable mix within the slump range and strengths required. Pumping

equipment, if used, shall be of sufficient size and design to pump the mix designed for

conventional conveyance.

C. Submit samples in adequate quantities for each mix design and verification of all concrete

materials to be used on the Project to the designated testing laboratory. Do not use any concrete

in this work without acceptance and verification of design mix by the testing laboratory and the

approval of the ENGINEER.

D. If trial batches are used, the testing laboratory shall make strength tests from trial batches in the

laboratory using materials and mix designs proposed for use by the CONTRACTOR. The

testing laboratory shall prepare trial batches in accordance with ACI 211.1.

E. If field experience method is selected, the proposed mix design shall be accompanied by

complete standard deviation analysis and at least 30 consecutive strength tests that represent the

proposed mix.

F. The proposed mix design and supporting data shall be submitted, in triplicate, to the testing

laboratory for their review and comments at least 21 days prior to the expected start of

concreting operations. The testing laboratory will forward two copies of the submittal to the

ENGINEER with their comments. The ENGINEER will review the submittal and return one

copy to the CONTRACTOR with the ENGINEER's comments.

G. Compression test specimens made to verify the mixes shall be made in accordance with ASTM

C 192. All compression test specimens shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 39.

H. Water Cement Ratio: Water cement ratio is given for aggregates in saturated-surface dry

condition, and total moisture of all aggregates, calculated by ASTM C566, less the absorption of

the aggregate as calculated by ASTM C127 and C128, shall represent total free moisture in the

aggregate to determine the water/cement ratio. Total free moisture of aggregates shall be added

to batch water to estimate water content of concrete.

I. The concrete shall have the following minimum characteristics.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28-days .............................. 4,500 psi

2. Minimum Cement Content ......................................................... 658 lbs/CY

3. Maximum Water to Cement Ration (W/C) ................................ 0.40

4. Maximum Course Aggregate Size .............................................. ¾” Diameter

5. Entrained Air Content ............................................................... 5% to 7%.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PLANT MIXING

A. For mix proportioning for Ready-Mixed concrete to be used for repairs of existing concrete refer

to Specification Section 03 01 30.71.


B. Proportioning Concrete

1. Proportions shall be in compliance with approved design mix for each class of concrete.

2. The mixing plant shall be provided with adequate equipment and facilities for accurate

measurement and control of the quantities of material and water used in the concrete.

3. Concrete materials shall be measured by weight except that admixtures shall be measured by

volume.

C. Batching

1. Provide all necessary equipment to accurately determine and control actual amount of

materials entering into the concrete mix. Individual ingredients shall be weighted separately

for each batch. Accumulative weighing will be allowed if equipment is in acceptable

working order as determined by the testing laboratory and approved by the ENGINEER.

Accuracy of all weighing devices shall be such that successive quantities can be measured to

within one percent of the desired amount.

2. Completely discharge contents of the mixer before each new batch is loaded. Use of

retempered concrete is not permitted.

3. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with requirements of

ASTM C 94 and the following:

a. A separate water metering device (not truck tank) shall be used for measuring water

added to the original batch.

b. Use of wash water as a portion of the mixing water is not permitted. Wash water added

to empty drums after discharging shall be dumped before a new batch is received.

c. Centrally mixed concrete shall be mixed for the length of time specified herein, not

“shrink-mixed”.

d. Mixing drums shall be watertight.

e. Concrete shall be discharged within one and one-half hours (90 minutes) from the time

concrete was mixed, if centrally mixed, or from time the original water was added, if

transit-mixed. Concrete shall be discharged in less than 90 minutes during severe

weather conditions per Article 3.05 below.

f. Furnish delivery ticket with each load of concrete delivered under these Specifications.

Delivery ticket shall show clearly the class and strength of concrete, size of coarse

aggregate, water per cubic yard, its slump, quantities of all admixtures, the date and time

of departure from the batching plant, and the time of placement.

3.02 DELIVERY AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS

A. Deliver ready mixed concrete in compliance with requirements of ASTM C 94.

B. The following tests shall be made at the work site prior to placement of concrete unless noted

otherwise:

1. Slump Tests: ASTM C 143 (tested at batch plant prior to HRWR added and at the point of

discharge after HRWR added for Group I Class A concrete. Tested at point of discharge for

all other Groups of concrete.)

2. Entrained Air Content

3. Test Cylinders: 6” diameter x 12” cylinders per ASTM C 31

C. Each load of concrete arriving at the Project site shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket that


shall be collected by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the ENGINEER and shall contain the

following minimum information (but not limited to):

1. The design mix number, strength of concrete, and other key parameters being delivered.

2. The exact time the cement, aggregate, and water were discharged into the delivery truck.

3.03 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

A. If concrete is to be transported in carts or buggies, the carts or buggies shall be equipped with

pneumatic tires.

B. Equipment for chuting or other methods of conveying concrete shall be of such size and design

as to insure a practically continuous flow of concrete at delivery without segregation of concrete.

3.04 CONVEYING

A. Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to place of final placement by methods which will

prevent separation or loss of the material.

B. Runway supports shall not bear upon reinforcing steel or fresh concrete.

C. All conveying equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned before each run of concrete is begun. No

aluminum materials shall be used in conveying any concrete.

D. Pumping

1. If the pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, the CONTRACTOR shall

discontinue the pumping operation and proceed with the placing of concrete using

conventional methods.

2. The pumping equipment shall have two cylinders and be designed to operate with one

cylinder in case the other one is not functioning. In lieu of this requirement, the

CONTRACTOR may have a standby pump on the site during pumping.

3. The minimum diameter of hose conduits shall be in accordance with ACI 304.

4. Concrete samples for slump, air content and test cylinders shall be taken at the placement

end of the hose.

5. Care shall be taken during pumping operations that displacement of reinforcement does not

result. If such displacement does occur the pumping operation shall cease until the

reinforcing steel is repositioned in its proper location and is sufficiently tied to prevent

recurrence. Removal and replacement of concrete and reinforcing steel resulting from such

remedial activity shall be at no cost to the CITY.

3.05 SEVERE WEATHER PROVISIONS

A. Hot Weather Concreting: Protect in accordance with ACI 305R except as modified herein.

1. Provide adequate methods of lowering temperature of concrete ingredients so that the

temperature of concrete when placed does not exceed 90 degrees F.

2. Concrete shall not be placed when the air temperature is expected to exceed 100 degrees F

within 12 hours after casting.

3. When the air temperature is 75 degrees F and above, forms and reinforcing shall be

thoroughly wetted with water so that the concrete will be placed against wet and cooled

surfaces. All excess water shall be removed before casting the concrete. For slabs-on-grade,

the base coarse shall be dampened.


4. During hot weather or under conditions that contribute to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter

mixing time than that specified in ASTM C94 may be required. When the air temperature is

between 85 degrees and 90 degrees F, reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours

to 75 minutes; when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce the mixing time to 60

minutes.

5. Protection and Curing - Slabs (On Grade and Formed)

a. Protect slabs from damage due to dry winds and high temperatures.

b. Protect slabs from direct sun at temperatures of 85 degrees F and above.

c. Refer to Specification 03 01 30.71.

6. Protection and Curing - Formed Surfaces: As soon as the concrete has set, wet the forms

and keep the forms wet during the curing period. Provide for keeping the top of the walls,

and other top surfaces, moist during the curing period.

B. Cold-Weather Concreting: Protect in accordance with ACI 306R except as modified herein.

1. Provide adequate equipment for heating concrete materials and protecting concrete from

damage during freezing or near-freezing weather. No frozen materials, or materials

containing ice, shall be used.

2. All concrete materials and all reinforcement, forms, fillers and ground with which concrete

is to come into contact shall be free from frost.

3. Whenever the temperature of the surrounding air is below 40 degrees F and falling, all

concrete placed in the forms shall have a temperature of between 70 and 80 degrees F, and

adequate means shall be provided for maintaining a temperature of not less than 70 degrees

F for three days, or 50 degrees F for five days, or for as much more time as is necessary to

insure proper curing of the concrete. If high early strength concrete is used, the requirement

for maintenance of 50 degrees F may be reduced to three days.

4. Use only the specified non-chloride accelerator. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing

more than 0.1 percent chloride ions are not permitted.

5. Housing, covering or other protection used in connection with curing shall remain in place

and intact at least 24 hours after the artificial heat is discontinued.

C. When high evaporative conditions necessitate protection of concrete immediately after placing

or finishing, the CONTRACTOR shall make provisions in advance of concrete placement for

wind-breaks, shading, fogging, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering. Liquid evaporation

retarders shall also be used when appropriate. However, the evaporation retarders shall not be

used as finishing aids and shall not be worked into the concrete surface by any means.

3.06 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, CONTROL JOINTS AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Formed Construction Joints in Containment Structures and Where Otherwise Shown: Prior to

placing concrete next to the joint, the joint surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and dampened

with water. Remove all free water so that the surface of the joint shows signs of drying before

placing the adjacent concrete.

B. Construction Joints in Beams, Girders and Elevated Slabs where Waterstops are not Specified or

Shown to be Installed: location of these joints shall be approved by the ENGINEER before they

are bulkheaded. These joints shall be roughened and thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter

and laitance and dampened with water. Remove all free water and slush with a coat of neat

cement grout just before placing the adjacent concrete. Place the adjacent concrete before the

neat cement grout takes its initial set. In lieu of use of neat cement grout a bonding agent per


Section 03 01 30.71 may be used. The bonding agent shall have not set or dried at the time of

placement of concrete. Refer to Section 03 01 30.71 for other bonding agent requirements.

C. Construction Joints in Beams, Girders and Elevated Slabs where Waterstops are specified or

shown to be installed. These joints shall be treated as specified in Paragraph A above.

D. Construction Joints in Columns: These joints, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, shall be

located at the bottom of the girder, beam or slab it receives, and at the top of slabs when the

column continues through a slab level. These joints shall be treated as specified in Paragraph B

above.

E. Expansion Joints: Expansion joints shall be installed where shown on the Drawings.

F. Construction or Control Joints (sawed) in Floor Slabs-on-Grade: Construction and control joints

(sawed joints) shall be installed in slabs-on-grade at locations shown on the Drawings. Unless

indicated otherwise on the drawings all joints shall include a plate dowel to transfer slab loads

across the joint. Plate dowels shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Immediately after final

trowel of an area, all joints shall be tooled unless permitted otherwise by the Engineer.

3.07 WATERSTOPS

Waterstops shall be provided where specified and as indicated and noted on Drawings and shall be

made continuous throughout their length.

3.08 INSPECTION OF WORK BEFORE PLACING CONCRETE

A. Inspect the area to receive concrete for any deficiencies which would prevent proper placing of

concrete. Do not proceed with placing concrete until such deficiencies are corrected.

B. Do not place in the concrete any item that is not required to be in the concrete by the Drawings

and Specifications. Insert all the items shown on the Drawings or specified properly positioned

and secured. Openings other than those which are facilitated by sleeves shall be properly formed

and positioned.

C. Remove hardened, or partially hardened, concrete on forms or reinforcement before placing

concrete.

D. Do not place concrete on earth until the fill or excavation has been prepared as set forth under

applicable Sections of the Specifications for that work.

E. Give the ENGINEER at least 48 hours notice before any concrete is to be placed. Concrete shall

not be placed until the Resident Inspector has signed a Concrete Preplacement Sign-Off Card

completed by the CONTRACTOR. The Concrete Pre-placement Sign-Off Card certifies that the

formwork, reinforcing, and all inserts required for mechanical and electrical work,

instrumentation, plumbing, process piping, metal embeds, and any other inserts or miscellaneous

specialties required for the work are supported in their proper position; that the formed enclosure

is clean, and the surfaces to receive concrete are prepared as specified. A sample of the Concrete

Pre-Placement Sign-Off Card is attached to this Section.

3.09 PLACING

A. Place concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to re-

handling or flowing. Do not subject concrete to any procedure that will cause segregation. Do

not place concrete on work that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign material,

and do not use re-tempered concrete.

B. Concrete shall be placed in a manner to avoid the displacement of reinforcing, and coating or


spattering the reinforcing steel. The placing of concrete within formwork shall be regulated so

that the pressure within formwork does not exceed the design pressure. In placing concrete, each

layer shall be placed following the preceding layer to prevent lines of separation or “cold joints”

in the work. After the concrete reaches it initial set, jarring the formwork or placing strain or

vibration on the ends of projecting reinforcing bars shall be avoided.

C. Concrete shall not be dropped more than 4-feet. All concrete placed over waterstops shall drop

no more than 6-inches until there is at least one foot of concrete above the waterstop, at which

point the drop distances may be increased to those noted above unless indicated otherwise by

waterstop manufacturer literature.. Use special devices extending down to the point of

placement.

D. Once concrete placing has started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until placing of

the concrete between construction joints is completed.

E. Concrete shall be placed in layers thick enough to prevent fresh concrete being placed on

concrete that has hardened enough to cause the formation of seams or weakened planes within

the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified.

F. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24-inches and in a manner that

avoids inclined construction joints.

G. Each layer of concrete shall be consolidated with the aid of mechanical internal-vibrating

equipment supplemented by hand spading. The proper use and selection of vibrators to

consolidate concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 309R. Vibrators shall in no case be used to

transport or move concrete and shall not be applied until concrete is of sufficient depth. Use of

form vibrators is not permitted. Internal vibrators shall maintain a speed of not less than that

specified in ACI 301 Table 5.3.2.5. At least one spare working vibrator shall be on the job site

as a back-up. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to

satisfactory consolidate the concrete without causing objectionable segregation. Vibrator shall

not be lowered into courses that have begun to set. Apply vibrator at uniformly close and spaced

points, not further apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine in a systematic manner to

ensure that all concrete is adequately consolidated. The vibrator shall be inserted and withdrawn

vertically or perpendicular to the concrete surface. Vibrators shall be inserted quickly and

withdrawn slowly to remove entrapped air. Do not drag vibrators horizontally. All workers shall

be experienced in the use of vibrators and the proper techniques. The type and use of vibrators

shall be in accordance with ACI 301.

H. Care shall be used in placing concrete around waterstops. The concrete shall be carefully

worked by rodding and vibrating to make sure that all air and rock pockets have been eliminated.

Concrete surrounding the waterstops shall be given additional vibration over and above that used

for adjacent concrete placement to assure embedment of the waterstop in the concrete.

I. Casting New Concrete Against Old Concrete: In cases where reinforcing steel is not continuous

through a joint and new (fresh) concrete is cast against old concrete (hardened), the surface of

the old concrete (more than 60 days old) shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened by hydro-

blasting or sandblasting to expose aggregate. The joint surface shall be coated with a bonding

agent, per Specification Section 03 01 30.71, unless indicated otherwise by the ENGINEER.

Where the surface of the old concrete is prepared by grinding such shall be followed by hydro-

lasting or sandblasting to ensure that the pores of the exposed concrete are open at the time of

placement of new concrete. Final preparation by hydro-blasting or sandblasting shall not be

performed sooner than 24 hours prior to planned placement of new concrete. Re-blast if existing

concrete becomes contaminated or if the period of time between blasting and placement becomes

longer than 24 hours, unless permitted otherwise by the ENGINEER. Bonding agent shall have


not reached its initial set (must still be tacky) at the time that new concrete is placed on it. Refer

to Section 03 01 30.71 for additional requirements.

J. Provide vapor barrier under all slabs on soil, sand or stone. Use largest sheets practicable to

reduce number of joints. Lap joints a minimum of 24-inches. Remove torn and punctured

sheets and replace with new sheets prior to placing concrete. Placing of concrete shall be done

in a manner that will not damage the vapor barrier material. The sub-base material shall be as

shown and/or noted on the Drawings.

3.10 PROTECTION

Protect freshly placed concrete from damage or injury due to water, falling objects, persons or

anything that may mar or injure finish surface on concrete. Only light use of slabs will be permitted

for the first 14 days after placing of the concrete.

3.11 CURING

A. Curing shall conform to ACI 308 except as modified herein.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a curing plan for each type of surface to the ENGINEER for

review.

C. Begin initial curing as soon as the curing process will not mar the concrete. Specification

Section 03 01 30.71 governs.

D. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the final curing process on unformed top surfaces of slabs,

floors, walls, stairs, and curbs. An approved liquid evaporation retardant may be used

immediately after the concrete has been screeded provided the retardant will have no effect on

cement hydration; meets VOC requirements; does not affect adhesion of curing compounds;

shall not affect the color of the concrete. The evaporation retardant shall not be used as a

finishing aid.

E. All Floor Slabs-on-Grade: Refer to Specification Section 03 01 30.71.

F. All Other Concrete: Refer to Specification Section 03 01 30.71.

1. Concrete in Formed Surfaces - Slabs, Beams, Columns and Building Walls: Keep forms

and exposed surfaces wet with water during the curing period. If forms are removed before

the end of the curing period, apply a curing compound within one hour after form removal.

2. Concrete in Formed Surfaces - Containment Vessel Walls: Keep forms wet with water

during the curing period. If forms are removed before the end of the curing period, continue

the moist curing in accordance with Paragraph A of this Article of these Specifications.

G. Method 1: To be applied to surfaces in which the forms have not been stripped. Wooden forms

shall be wetted with water immediately after concrete has been placed and shall be kept wet until

forms have been removed. Forms may be loosened. If steel or other types of forms are used, the

exposed concrete surfaces shall be kept continuously wet until the forms are removed. If forms

are removed within 7 days of concrete placement, curing shall be continued with Method 4

below.

H. Method 2: Applies to horizontal surfaces between footings and walls, walls and slabs and

columns and slabs. The surface shall be covered with burlap mats which shall be kept wet with

water for the duration of the curing period or until the walls/slabs have been placed. No curing

compound shall be applied to surfaces cured with this method.

I. Method 3: Applies to mat foundations/slabs on grade, in liquid containing structures.


1. Until the concrete surface is covered with curing compound, the entire surface shall be kept

damp by applying water using nozzles that atomize the flow so that the surface is not marred

or washed. The concrete shall be given a coat of curing compound in accordance with

Method 5 below. Not less than one hour or more than 4 hours after the curing compound

has been applied, the surface shall be wetted with water delivered through a fog nozzle, and

concrete-curing blankets shall be placed on the slabs. The curing blankets shall be

polyethylene sheet, polyethylene-coated waterproof paper sheeting, or polyethylene-coated

burlap. The blankets shall be laid with the edges butted together and with the joints between

strips sealed with 2-inch wide strips of sealing tape or with edges lapped not less than 3-

inches and fastened together with a waterproof cement to form a continuous watertight joint.

2. The curing blankets shall be left in place during the 7-day curing period and shall not be

removed until after the concrete for adjacent work has been placed. If the curing blankets

become torn or otherwise ineffective, the CONTRACTOR shall replace damaged sections.

During the first 3-days of the curing period, no traffic of any nature, and no depositing,

temporary or otherwise, of any materials shall be permitted on the curing blankets. During

the remainder of the curing period, foot traffic and temporary depositing of materials that

impose light pressure will be permitted only on top of plywood sheets 5/8-inch minimum

thickness, laid over the curing blanket. The CONTRACTOR shall add water under the

curing blanket as often as necessary to maintain damp surfaces at all times.

J. Method 4: Applies to walls (with forms removed), elevated floors, and floor slabs-on-grade.

1. The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the application of water for a minimum

period of at least 7 consecutive days beginning immediately after the concrete is placed. If

forms have been removed before 7 days other approved methods of curing shall be applied

to allow curing for the full 7 days.

2. Until the concrete surface is covered with the curing medium, the entire surface shall be kept

damp by applying water using nozzles that atomize the flow so that the surface is not marred

or washed.

3. Heavy curing mats shall be used as a curing medium to retain the moisture during the curing

period. The curing period shall be weighted or otherwise held substantially in contact with

the concrete surface to prevent being dislodged by wind or any other causes. Edges shall be

continuously held in place.

4. The curing blankets and concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the use of sprinklers or

other means both during and after normal working hours.

5. Immediately after the application of water has terminated at the end of the curing period, the

curing medium shall be removed, the entire concrete surface shall be wetted, and curing

compound shall be immediately applied to the entire surface in accordance with Method 5

below.

6. The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of excess water from the curing operation to avoid

damage to the work.

K. Method 5: The surface shall be sprayed or rolled with a liquid curing compound.

1. The curing compound shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers’ printed

instructions at a maximum coverage of 200 square feet per gallon and in such a manner as to

cover the surface with a uniform seal that will seal thoroughly.

2. Curing compound shall be applied as soon as the concrete has hardened enough to prevent

marring on unformed surfaces and within two hours after removal of forms. Repairs to

formed surfaces shall be made within the 2 hour period; provided, however, that any such


repairs which cannot be made within the said 2 hour period shall be delayed until after the

curing compound has been applied. When repairs are to be made to an area on which curing

compound has been applied, the area involved shall first be wet-sandblasted to remove the

curing compound.

3. At locations where concrete is placed adjacent to a panel which has been coated with curing

compound, the panel shall have curing compound reapplied to an area within 6-feet of the

joint and to any other location where the curing membrane has been disturbed.

4. Prior to final acceptance of the work, all visible traces of curing compound shall be removed

from all surfaces in such a manner that does not damage the surface finish.

3.12 PATCHING

A. As determined by the ENGINEER, any concrete which is out of alignment or level has a

defective surface or has defects which reduce its structural adequacy, shall be considered as not

conforming with the Drawings and Specifications and shall be rejected.

B. Do not take any remedial action on concrete with any defect without the permission of the

ENGINEER.

C. Unless the ENGINEER grants permission to patch the rejected concrete, remove the rejected

concrete and replace it with concrete that conforms to the Drawings and Specifications. The

location of cut lines and the extent of removal will be determined by the ENGINEER.

D. If the ENGINEER grants permission to patch the rejected concrete, it shall be done in

accordance with the following, or as shown in Section 03 01 30.71 if, in the opinion of the

ENGINEER, such requirements are more applicable to the situation.

1. Permission to patch rejected concrete will not be a waiver of the ENGINEER's right to

require complete removal of the rejected concrete if the patching does not, in the

ENGINEER's judgment, restore the concrete to the requirements of the Specifications and

Drawings.

2. Patching shall be accomplished after the curing is completed.

3. Defective areas shall be chipped away to a depth of not less than 1-inch, in all cases to sound

concrete, with edges perpendicular to the surface. Feather edges will not be permitted.

Remove all loose material and thoroughly clean the chipped surfaces with a high pressure air

hose delivering air at 100 psi. The area to be patched and an area at least 6-inches wide

surrounding it shall be dampened. A bonding grout shall be prepared using a mix of

approximately one part cement to one part fine sand passing a No. 30 mesh sieve, mixed to

the consistency of thick cream, and then well brushed into the surfaces as noted below in

Paragraph 5.

4. The patching mixture shall be made of the same materials and of approximately the same

portions as used for the original concrete, except that the coarse aggregate shall be omitted

and the mortar shall consist of not more than one part cement to two and one-half parts sand

by damp, loose volume. White Portland cement shall be substituted for a part of the gray

Portland cement to produce a color matching the color of the surrounding concrete, as

determined by a trial patch. The quantity of mixing water shall be no more than necessary

for handling and placing. The patching mortar shall be mixed in advance and allowed to

stand with frequent manipulation with a trowel, without addition of water, until it has

reached the stiffest consistency that will permit placing.

5. After surface water has evaporated from the area to be patched, the bond coat shall be well

brushed into the surface. When the bond coat begins to lose the water sheen, the premixed


patching mortar shall be applied. The mortar shall be thoroughly consolidated into place and

struck off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. To permit

initial shrinkage, it shall be left undisturbed for at least one hour before being finally

finished. The patched area shall be kept damp for seven days. Finishing tools that produce a

finish matching the surrounding shall be used.

E. Tie holes left by withdrawal of rods or the holes left by removal of ends of wall ties shall be

filled solid with mortar after first being wetted. For holes passing through the wall, a

plunger-type grout gun shall be used to force the mortar through the wall starting at the back

face. A piece of burlap or canvas shall be held over the hole on the outside and when the hole is

filled, the excess mortar shall be struck off with the cloth flush with the surface. Holes not

passing through the walls shall be filled with a small tool that will permit packing the hole solid

with mortar. Any excess mortar at the surface of the wall shall be struck off flush with a cloth.

Mortar shall consist of one part cement, two and one-half parts sand and no more water than

necessary for handling and packing.

F. For liquid containing walls, full depth tie holes shall first be plugged with the specified plug

(refer to Specification Section 03 15 00) and the patching defined in Paragraph E (above) shall

be applied.

3.13 FINISHES ON FORMED SURFACES


3.14 TESTING LABORATORY

A. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange, coordinate, and pay for all testing. The testing agency shall

provide timely written test reports to the CITY, ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR, and ready-mix

supplier. The cost for the testing, except as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents, shall

be charged, on a Time and Material Basis (Force Account) against the Allowance established for

such in Section 01 20 00 Measurement and Payment.

B. The testing laboratory shall have access to all places where concrete materials and concretes are

manufactured, stored, proportioned, mixed, placed and tested. Duties shall include, but not

necessarily be limited to the following:

1. Make, store, transport, cure and test compression specimens made during placing of

concrete. Compression test specimens shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. Test

reports shall show all pertinent data, such as class of concrete, exact location of pour, air

temperature, date of pour, time of pour, truck number for ready-mixed concrete, date on

which specimen was broken, age of specimen, compressive strength of specimen, concrete

slump test results and air content of concrete from which the specimen was made. One copy

each of all tests shall be sent to the CONTRACTOR, one copy each to the CITY, and one

copy each to the ENGINEER.

2. Each strength test requires seven standard test cylinders.

3. Samples for strength tests of each class of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less

than once a day, nor less than once for each 100 cubic yards of concrete, nor less than once

for each 5,000 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls. For silica-fume enhanced,

ready-mixed concrete used for structural repairs testing shall be more frequently than once

for each 100 cubic yards of concrete. Refer to Section 03 01 30.71 the for testing

requirements for repair concrete.

4. Each class of concrete shall be tested with at least seven strength tests.


5. From each set of seven cylinders, two shall be tested at 28 days and shall comprise a strength

test under the definition of these Specifications. Two cylinders shall be broken at three days

and two cylinders shall be broken at seven days and will be used as an aid in determining the

early strength of the concrete and the 28 day strength, and one cylinder retained in reserve

for later testing if required.

6. Test for unit weight of concrete when the first load of each class of concrete is delivered and

thereafter at the discretion of the testing laboratory.

C. Periodically inspect the batching plant and file a report with the CITY and ENGINEER stating

whether the supplier's equipment and methods meet the requirements of these Specifications.

D. Temperature and Placing Record: Temperature record shall be made each day during the

concreting operations. Records shall also include location, quantity and starting and finishing

time of placement for all concrete work. Copy distribution shall be as specified above for test

reports.

E. Drying shrinkage tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C157 for the trial batches,

the first placement of each class of structural concrete, and during construction to insure

continued compliance with these Specifications. If the required shrinkage limitation is not met

during construction, the CONTRACTOR shall take any or all of the following actions to

reestablish compliance. These actions may include changing the source of aggregates, cement

and/or admixtures, reducing water/cement ratio; washing coarse or fine aggregate to reduce

fines, increasing the number of construction joints; modifying the curing methods, or other

actions designed to minimize shrinkage or the effects of shrinkage.

3.15 EVALUATION OF COMPRESSION TESTS

A. Evaluation of compression test results shall be as follows: For each class of concrete,

compression-strength tests for laboratory-cured cylinders shall be considered satisfactory if the

averages of the results of all sets of three consecutive compression-strength tests equal or exceed

the 28 day design compression-strength specified; and, no individual cylinder strength test falls

below the required compression strength by more than 500 psi. Strength tests of specimens

cured under field conditions may be required by the ENGINEER to check the adequacy of

curing and protecting of the concrete placed. Specimens shall be molded by the field testing

laboratory at the same time and from the same samples as the laboratory-cured specimens.

B. Faulty Concrete: Failure to comply with any of the specified conditions shall constitute faulty

concrete. Unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER, faulty concrete shall be removed and

replaced with concrete as specified, at no expense to the CITY.

C. Additional Test: If permitted by the ENGINEER, additional tests shall be subject to the approval

of the ENGINEER and at no expense to the CITY. Load tests, if permitted by the ENGINEER,

shall be conducted in accordance with the loading criteria as required by the design of the

structure, as determined by the ENGINEER.

D. Neither the results of laboratory verification tests nor any provision in the Contract Documents

shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of the obligation to furnish concrete of the class and strength

specified.

3.16 INSPECTION

A. Inspect all the work in accordance with Section 01 45 29 of these Specifications, in addition to

the following:

1. Quality and proportions of concrete materials.


2. Construction and removal of forms and reshoring.

3. Significant construction loadings on completed floors, members or walls.

4. General progress of work.



CONCRETE PREPLACEMENT SIGN-OFF CARD

Project:

Inspection Date: Concrete Placement Date:

Expected Time of Concrete Placement:

Estimated Quantity:

Mix Design Strength:

Location of Structure:

Member (walls, beams, etc.):

Weather Conditions:

Method of Pour: Chute _______________ Bucket_____________ Pump

Conveyor ____________ Other _ _________________________________

Status

Work Ready N/A Signature Date

Formwork

Reinforcing

Mechanical

Electrical

Instrumentation

Plumbing

Process

Metal Embeds

Miscellaneous

Specialties

Clean-Up/OK to Place

The CONTRACTOR certifies that the above work to be cast is prepared in accordance with the Contract

Documents.

CONTRACTOR (Superintendent): Date:

Resident Inspector: Date:

CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 31 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 03 31 00

CONCRETE FORMWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work included in this Section consists of the design, furnishing and construction of all

necessary concrete formwork and falsework to produce cast-in-place concrete in the finished

structure(s).

B. The design, furnishing and construction of the concrete formwork and falsework shall comply

with industry standards including but not limited to the latest edition of ACI 301 and 347 and as

indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section.


ENGINEER”.





1.03 FORMWORK DESIGN

Provide the design by an engineer registered in the Project’s state of all formwork, including

shoring and reshoring, for this work. Formwork shall comply with ANSI A10.9 and OSHA

Construction Standards, Part 1926, Subpart Q, Concrete, Concrete Forms, and Shoring. In addition,

the formwork design shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of ACI 347.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Do not submit formwork shop drawings or structural design calculations. However, a written

statement (signed and stamped by the registered engineer providing the formwork design)

attesting to the fact that the requirements of Article 1.03 have been met shall be submitted.

B. Form Tie Assemblies: Manufacturer's product data sheets fully describing the form tie

assemblies, including the taper tie plugs.

C. Form Releasing Agent: Manufacturer's product data sheets fully describing the form coating.

Manufacturer’s certification that the form releasing agent meets the specified standard for

liquid containment vessels in water treatment plants.

D. Plywood Panels: Certification that the plywood panels for use on this work meet the specified

standard.

E. Pan joist form layouts showing all joists and connecting beam and/or wall supports. Review

and comments will be for layout only.

F. Construction and control joint proposed locations if different from those indicated in the


Contract Documents.

1.05 RESPONSIBILITIES

The CONTRACTOR is fully responsible for the design and construction of all forms, falsework

and shoring to be in compliance with all applicable OSHA requirements, ACI requirements and the

requirements of all agencies having jurisdiction on the Project. The submission of any design

details for falsework, forms and shoring is for information only.


All form materials and accessories shall be stored above ground on framework or blocking, shall be

protected from precipitation and shall have adequate air circulation and ventilation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FORM MATERIAL

A. Smooth Form Finish: Forms for this finish shall be applied to surfaces specified in Section 03

30 00 of these Specifications. Some of these surfaces will receive a brushed surface coating as

specified in Section 03 30 00 of these Specifications.

1. Form facing material shall produce a smooth, dense, uniform texture on the concrete. Form

facing shall be one of the following:

a. Plywood, meeting the requirements of U.S. Department of Commerce Product

Standard (PS). PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood, B-B Concrete Form

Panels. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly with the number of

seams kept to a practical minimum.

b. Patented forms may be used, subject to acceptance by the ENGINEER, provided they

produce a smooth, even surface. This acceptance is for the finish these forms will

leave on the contact surfaces and will not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the

responsibility for the design and structural soundness of the forms. Patented forms

shall be lined with the specified plywood. Plywood panels and form liners shall not be

used more than three times unless further use is acceptable to the ENGINEER.

B. Rough Form Finish: Forms for this finish shall be applied to the surfaces specified in Section

03 30 00 of these Specifications. Forms for this finish may be the same as specified for the

Smooth Form Finish or may be constructed of used plywood panels, unlined steel forms or

straight dressed lumber.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Form ties for use in all liquid containment structure walls shall be selected to prevent form

deflection. Form ties shall be as follows:

1. Standard one-piece crimped snap ties with a 1-inch snapback. Ties shall be provided with

smooth rods, and plastic cones, or other means for forming a conical cone to insure that the

form tie is broken off back of the concrete face. The cone-shaped depressions at the

surface of the concrete shall be at least 1-inch out diameter to allow filling and patching

with the specified grout. Ties shall be provided with an intregal waterstop at the center


which tightly fits the form tie so that they cannot be moved from the mid-point of the tie.

2. All of the assemblies shall permit tightening of the forms and be of such type that leaves no

tie metal, or any other tie material, within 1-1/2-inch of the surface after use.

B. Form ties for use in all other walls shall be one of the assemblies specified in Article 2.02,

Paragraph A, except that waterstops are not required.

C. Form releasing agent for liquid containment vessels in water treatment plants shall be non-toxic

and leave no residue on or in the concrete unless safe for potable water (certified as compliant

with NSF 61).

D. Form releasing agents for liquid containment vessels in water treatment plants shall be equal to

Sealtight Duogard by W.R. Meadows.

E. Form releasing agents shall permit coating the concrete surface without additional surface

preparation.

F. Form releasing agents shall be a non-staining form coating compound.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FORM CONSTRUCTION

A. Formwork shall be designed, erected, and removed in accordance with the latest edition of ACI

347 and as follows:

1. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 and ACI SP-4 to the sizes, shape, lines, and

dimensions of members as indicated on the Drawings. Forms shall be properly braced or

tied together so as to maintain position and shape. Plumb and string lines shall be installed

before concrete placement and shall be maintained during placement. During concrete

placement, the CONTRACTOR shall monitor plumb and string lines form positions and

immediately correct deficiencies.

2. Forms shall be substantial and sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent leakage of water,

cement and fines during placing and vibrating the concrete. Specifically, the bottom of

wall forms that rest on concrete footings or slabs shall be provided with a gasket to prevent

loss of fines and concrete paste during placement and vibration of concrete.

3. Construct forms so that they can be easily removed without hammering or prying against

the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage

cast concrete surfaces. Forms for exposed concrete shall be carefully made and accurately

placed to obtain correct shape and lines.

4. Joints shall be butted tight. Arrangements of panels shall be orderly and symmetrical, and

use of small pieces shall be avoided. Unless otherwise indicated, forms shall be chamfered

3/4-inch for external corners and edges of concrete, including top of walls, which will be

exposed to view in the finished work.

5. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for the adequacy of the formwork in its

entirety and any forms that are unsafe or inadequate in any respect shall promptly be

removed from the work and replaced. Forms shall be securely braced against lateral


deflection and instability to safely support the loads they will sustain and to maintain their

dimensional and surface correctness to produce members required by the Drawings. Form

ties shall be spaced close enough to avoid bulges and variations in the required

cross-sectional dimensions shown on the Drawings for the members being cast.

6. CONTRACTOR may reuse forms only if in good condition. Reused forms shall be

thoroughly cleaned and may require light sanding between uses to obtain a uniform surface

texture on all exposed concrete surface. Forms shall not be reused if they have developed

defects that would affect the surface texture of exposed concrete. Split, frayed, dented,

worn, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Do

not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces or liquid containing structures. In the

case of forms for the inside wall surfaces of liquid containing structures, unused tie rod

holes in forms shall be covered with metal caps.

7. Holes left by the removal of form tie cones shall be reamed with suitable toothed reamers

so as to leave the surface of the holes clean and rough before being filled with mortar.

Wire ties for holding forms are not permitted. No form-tying device or part thereof, other

than metal, shall be left embedded in concrete. Ties shall not be removed in such manner

as to leave a hole extending through the interior of the concrete members. The use of snap

ties, which cause spalling of the concrete upon form stripping or tie removal, will not be

permitted. If steel panel forms are used, rubber grommets shall be provided where the ties

pass through the form in order to prevent loss of cement paste. Where metal tie rods

extending through the concrete are used to support or strengthen forms, the rods shall

remain embedded and shall terminate not less than 1-inch back from the formed face or

faces of concrete.

8. Box out for chases, recesses or other openings required in the completed work.

9. Install all the items (sleeves, inserts, hangers, anchors, etc.), to be supported by the

formwork as required by the work.

10. Install pipe sleeves, wall pipes and wall sleeves, as shown or specified, for all piping

penetrating walls and slabs. The use of block-outs in walls is prohibited. Pipe sleeves shall

be used in slabs for plumbing pipes and wiring conduits.

11. Inspect formwork and remove deleterious material immediately before concrete is placed.

Provide a sufficient number of temporary cleanout openings at the base of wall and column

formwork to facilitate cleaning, inspection and the application of grout to the column bases.

12. The use of reinforcing steel, partially embedded in concrete, as toe pins or form spacers is

prohibited.

3.02 FALSEWORK

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the design, engineering, construction,

maintenance and safety of all falsework, including staging, walkways, forms, ladders, and

similar appurtenances, which shall equal or exceed the applicable requirements of the

provisions of the OSHA Safety and health Standard of Construction, and the requirements

herein.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall design and construct falsework to provide the necessary rigidity and

to support the loads. Falsework for the support of the superstructure shall be designed to


support the loads that would be imposed if the entire superstructure were placed at one time.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall place falsework upon a solid footing, safe against undermining, and

protected against softening.

3.03 TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES

Tolerances shall be limited to the criteria in the latest edition of ACI 117, except as indicated.

A. Deviation from Plumb

1. In the Lines and Surfaces of Columns, Piers, Walls:

a. In any 10 Feet of Height: 1/4-inch (walls 1/2-inch).

b. Maximum for the Entire Height: 1-inch.

2. For Exposed Corner Columns, Construction and Expansion Joint Grooves and Other

Conspicuous Lines:

a. In any 20 Foot Height: 1/4-inch.

b. Maximum for the Entire Height: 1/2-inch.

B. Deviation from the Level or from the Grades Shown on the Drawings

1. In Slab Soffits, Beam Soffits and Tops of Slabs, Measured Before Removal of Supporting

Shores:

a. In any 10 Foot Length: 1/4-inch.

b. In any Bay or in any 20 Foot Length: 3/8-inch.

c. Maximum for the Entire Length: 3/4-inch.

d. Except where FF and FL values are more stringent as indicated in Specification Section

03 30 00 or on the Drawings.

2. In Exposed Lintels, Sills, Parapets, Horizontal Grooves and Other Conspicuous Lines:

a. In any Bay or in any 20 Foot Length: 1/4-inch.

b. Maximum for the Entire Length: 1/2-inch.

C. Deviation of the Linear Building Lines from Established Position in Plan and Related Position

of Columns, Walls and Partitions

1. In any Bay: 1/2-inch.

2. In any 20 Foot Length: 1/2-inch.

3. Maximum for the Entire Length: 1-inch.

D. Deviation in the Sizes and Location of Sleeves for Plumbing Pipes and Electrical Conduits,

Floor Openings and Wall Openings: +1/4-inch.

E. Deviation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions of Columns and Beams and in the Thickness of Slabs

and Walls: -1/4-inch, +1/2-inch.

F. Deviation in Sizes of Pipe Sleeves, Wall Pipes and Wall Sleeves: None.

G. Deviation in Location of Pipe Sleeves, Wall Pipes and Wall Sleeves: +1/8-inch.


H. Footings

1. Deviations in Dimensions in Plan: -1/2-inch, +2-inches.

2. Misplacement or Eccentricity: Two percent of the footing width in the direction of

misplacement but not more than: 2-inches.

3. Thickness: Decrease in specified thickness - none; increase in specified thickness 25

percent unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER.

4. Tolerances above apply to concrete dimensions only, not to positioning of vertical

reinforcing steel, dowels or embedded items.

I. Deviation in Steps

1. In a Flight of Stairs:

a. Rise: +1/4-inch.

b. Tread: +1/4-inch.

2. In Consecutive Steps:

a. Rise: +0-inch, -1/8-inch.

b. Tread: +1/8-inch.

3.04 APPLICATION OF FORM COATING

Before the placing of reinforcing, faces of all forms to be in contact with the concrete shall receive a

thorough coating of the liquid form-releasing agent specified, applied in compliance with the

manufacturer's instructions.

3.05 INSPECTION


3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. Forms shall be removed in a manner that will insure the safety of the workers, insure the

serviceability and the structural integrity of the structure. Unless indicated otherwise, the forms

and shoring shall remain in place for the following minimum concrete strengths and periods of

time after the casting of the concrete is completed, whichever is more stringent:

Form Removal, Days Reshoring, Days Concrete Strength

Beams and Slabs (Soffits) 7 14 28-day

Walls 3 0 n/a

Columns 2 0 n/a

B. Formwork for beam and slab soffits shall be designed so that they can be removed without

removal of sufficient original shores to adequately support the work until such time that the

concrete strength reaches its specified 28 day strength.

C. Removal of forms shall be coordinated with the selected method of curing concrete specified in


Section 03 30 00.

D. Wood forms shall be completely removed from all the work to avoid termite infestation.

E. All elevated concrete shall be shored and/or reshored to the foundation until the structure is

complete and the concrete has reached its 28-day strength.


PRECAST CONCRETE 03 40 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 03 40 00

PRECAST CONCRETE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. SCOPE:

1. This section specifies the materials and labor required for the manufacture and erection of

precast concrete box, or vault, type precast concrete structures.

B. TYPE:

1. This section includes precast concrete Valve Chambers.

2. This section includes precast concrete Effluent Flow Meter Vault.


A. GENERAL:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide certification from the precast concrete manufacturer that

the materials and manufacture of precast work supplied conforms to these specifications.

The certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer's corporation.

2. The responsibility for furnishing and installing precast concrete conforming to the

specifications is solely that of the CONTRACTOR.

3. The Manufacturer shall retain a licensed professional engineer who shall be responsible for

the design, manufacture, and inspection of the precast units and their connections. The

Engineer shall be licensed in the State of Ohio.

B. TESTING LABORATORY:

1. All testing shall be performed by recognized independent laboratories specializing in the

particular test to be performed, and conforming to the requirements of the National Bureau

of Standards and ASTM E329.

C. REFERENCE STANDARDS:

Reference Title

ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel

AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges

MNL-116 Prestressed Concrete Institute's Manual for Quality Control for Plants and

Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products, third edition


1.03 SUBMITTALS

In accordance with specification Section 01 33 00 and in addition to the requirements of that section,

the following submittals shall be provided:

A. CONCRETE MIX:

1. Prior to casting any precast elements, concrete mix design shall be submitted to the CITY

for acceptance.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS:

1. Shop drawings shall be provided showing product location, fabrication details, number

identification marks, reinforcement, connection details including field installed anchor sizes

and locations, if required, openings, loose or embedded items and inserts, dimensions and

relationship to adjacent materials in sufficient detail to cover manufacture, handling, and

erection. Shop drawings shall be accompanied by a letter signed by a Professional Engineer

registered in the State of Ohio, certifying that the shop drawings submitted represent

construction which meets or exceeds the requirements of the Contract Documents and the

requirements of codes and agencies having jurisdiction over the Work.

1.04 LABELING

A. Each panel or member shall have an identification mark indicating its location in the structure as

shown on the placing diagrams and date of casting.

1.05 HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Unless specified otherwise herein, fabrication, handling and erection of precast elements shall be

in accordance with the recommendations made by ACI 318 and ACI Committee 533.

B. Precast elements shall be properly supported off the ground to avoid damage during curing,

storage, handling and hauling. Lateral support shall be sufficient to prevent bowing, warping, or

permanent set due to creep. Edges of the units shall be adequately protected by padding or other

means to prevent staining, chipping or spalling of concrete. Lifting devices shall have a

minimum safety factor of 4.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Concrete mix design and compressive strength shall meet or exceed that as specified in Section

03 00 00.

B. Design precast units for Valve Chambers to support the wheel load from an AASHTO HS20-44

vehicle.

C. Design units to not float up under flood conditions of up to 15’-0” of head. The CONTRACTOR

shall furnish the precast supplier with locations and loads of mechanical equipment. The precast

units shall be designed for the actual mechanical equipment to be supplied.

D. Unless more explicit design criteria is given in the Drawings, design units for an Equivalent

Hydrostatic Fluid Pressure of 65 pcf, and an Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure of 1500 psf.. The


Manufacturer’s GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER may develop different design criteria based on

data from the actual site conditions. The Manufacturer’s GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER shall

be a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Ohio.

2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. CEMENT:

1. Concrete in contact with soil or liquids shall be formulated using Type II or Type V Portland

Cement conforming to ASTM C150. Concrete not in contact with soil or liquids may be

formulated using Type I or Type III Portland Cement. Cement shall contain less than .60

percent alkalis and shall be from one source throughout the entire project.

B. AGGREGATES:

1. Aggregates for normal weight concrete shall conform to ASTM C33 with a maximum size

of 3/4 inch.

C. WATER:

1. Water shall be clean, potable, free from injurious amounts of oil, alkalis, organic materials

and other deleterious substances.

D. ADMIXTURE:

1. Admixture shall be Pozzolith 300-R manufactured by Master Builders, Plastiment

manufactured by Sika Chemical Corp., or equal. Admixture shall be used in strict

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Calcium chloride or any admixture

containing calcium chloride shall not be used.

E. REINFORCING STEEL:

1. Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A615, including supplementary requirements, and

shall be Grade 60 except that bars to be welded shall be Grade 40 or ASTM A706.

F. EMBEDDED ITEMS AND ANCHORAGE DEVICES:

1. All embedded items, inserts, and anchorage devices exposed to view, moisture or weather

shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel. Anchorage devices shall be fabricated from ASTM

A36 steel.

G. PENETRATIONS:

1. All required penetrations and openings larger than 6-inches in diameter or 6-inches square

shall be formed in place at the time of casting. Additional reinforcing shall be added where

required to meet loading requirements. Openings and penetrations smaller than 6-inches

may be core drilled.

H. MOLDS:

1. Material from which molds are to be fabricated shall be steel, concrete, fiberglass, reinforced

plastic or wood. The selection of materials for molds shall be at the manufacturer's option,

except that wood shall not be used without the express approval of the CITY. All elements

shall be cast in molds of rigid construction, accurate in detail with precise corners and arises,

and designed to provide a close control of dimensions and details as indicated on the


Drawings.

2. Prior to casting of precast elements, molds shall have all surface joints, radii, corners, etc.,

filled, ground, filed, straightened or otherwise removed to provide a finished concrete

surface that is smooth and dense, free of honeycombing, large air pockets, offsets, sinkages,

or other irregularities.

I. PARTING COMPOUND:

1. All molds shall be coated with parting compound to facilitate removal of elements from

molds. Parting compound shall be non-petroleum, nonstaining and shall be of a nature and

composition not deleterious to concrete.

2.03 PRODUCT DATA

The following information shall be provided:

A. LABORATORY TEST REPORTS:

Before delivery of materials, three copies of the reports of the tests specified herein shall be

provided. Test reports on previously tested materials shall be accompanied by the

manufacturer's statement that the previously tested material is the same type, quality,

manufacture, and make as that proposed for use in this project. Test reports are required for the

following:

1. Cement

2. Aggregates

3. Pozzolan

4. Admixtures

5. Curing compounds

6. Waterstops

7. Concrete mix designs


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. CASTING:

1. Casting shall be accomplished by methods and equipment that are in conformance with

generally acceptable systems for this type of Work. All precast concrete shall be

manufactured by a plant thoroughly experienced in this type of Work. The manufacturer

shall meet all production schedules. Surfaces on which units are cast shall be level and free

from any imperfections detrimental to the surface appearance of the finished units. Parting

compound shall be applied evenly as per manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Concrete shall be so handled as to prevent segregation of materials and shall be continuously

vibrated during casting, either internally or externally, to achieve proper compaction, finish


and distribution of concrete. All precautions must be taken to keep the reinforcing steel in

the proper location during placing and consolidation of the concrete. Unless shown

otherwise and except at concrete faces exposed to soil or liquids, all reinforcing steel shall

have a minimum cover of ¾ inch. At concrete faces exposed to soil or liquids, cover shall

be 1-1/2 inches minimum. Embedded items shall be accurately placed and maintained in

their proper location during the casting operation. Special inserts or other devices for

handling of panels for the convenience of the manufacturer shall not be exposed to view

after members are erected. Embedded anchors, inserts, plates, angles and other cast-in items

shall have sufficient anchorage and embedment for design requirements.

3. Casting, bowing, warpage and dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with

MNL-116, third edition.

B. CURING:

1. All precast units shall be steam cured for a period of at least 12 hours. Fog spraying may be

used when reviewed by the ENGINEER. Precast elements shall not be removed from

molds for a minimum period of 12 hours after casting, or until concrete has attained a

minimum compressive strength of 3500 pounds per square inch, whichever governs. After

removal from the forms, curing by steam or fog spraying shall be continued until concrete

has attained specified strength and confirmed by standard tests. Curing procedures shall be

consistent and uniform throughout the entire project.

C. WELDING:

1. The quality of material and fabrication of all welded connections shall conform to the latest

AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for

Buildings." All weldments shall be made in accordance with the applicable provisions of

AWS. All welding, other than tacks, shall be done by certified welders. All units shall be

protected from damage by field welding or cutting operations. Noncombustible shields shall

be provided as necessary for this purpose.

D. JOINTS AND JOINT SEALANTS:

1. In all instances, the edges of precast concrete units and of adjacent material shall be sound,

smooth, clean and free of all contaminants prior to joint treatment.

2. Sealant and primer shall be supplied by the same manufacturer and the primer, when

required, shall be as recommended for the particular sealant used. All sealant compounds

shall be delivered to the job in the manufacturer's original sealed containers with labels intact

and shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.02 ERECTION

A. Any errors or misalignment in the structure which would prevent the proper setting of the

elements shall be corrected by the CONTRACTOR before the erection is commenced. Erection

shall be supervised and performed by workmen skilled in this type of Work. Each element shall

be set in the proper position, carefully plumbed and anchored securely to the structural frame.

Adjustments or changes in connections which could involve additional stresses in the products

or connections shall not be permitted without approval of the ENGINEER. All bearing

surfaces shall be true to line and grade. Erection tolerances shall be in accordance with

MNL-116. All joints shall be uniform and straight.


3.03 CLEANING AND REPAIRING

A. After installation, precast elements shall be protected from all damage until final acceptance by

the CITY. Precast units with cracks, spalls, and other defects shall be subject to rejection. Units

reviewed for repair shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the CITY.

3.04 ALTERNATIVE DESIGN

A. The CONTRACTOR may offer an alternative design for any precast element. Such design shall

be comparable in terms of strength, deflection, finish and all other design criteria indicated.

Complete drawings prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of

Ohio shall be submitted to the CITY and ENGINEER for his review in accordance with

specification Section 01 33 00 of this project manual. No alternative design will be permitted

unless it has been specifically accepted in writing by the ENGINEER. If an alternative

design is accepted, all expenses resulting there from shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.


MISCELLANEOUS METALS 05 50 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 05 50 00

MISCELLANEOUS METALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

The work under this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing and

installation of all miscellaneous metals and related items as indicated on the Drawings, herein

specified and as necessary for the proper and complete performance of this work.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications.

B. Shop Drawings

1. Submit shop drawings of all items to be furnished.

2. Submit plan locating embedded connections in masonry and cast-in-place concrete.

1.03 DIVISION OF WORK

A. General: The following list of items to be furnished under this Section is placed here to aid the

various trades in estimating their portion of the work. It is not a full and complete list and does

not relieve the CONTRACTOR from providing a totally complete Project including all

miscellaneous items.

B. Miscellaneous Metal Items

1. Loose angle and wide flange lintels.

2. Stairs and landings including posts, bearing plates, and integral support beams.

3. Beams, angles and other supporting grating over pipe trenches including embedded

connections.

4. Embedded connections and plates in masonry and cast-in-place concrete for precast plank

and tees.

5. Bumper posts and sleeves.

6. Bearing plates for other items specified herein.

7. Railings.

8. Edge angles cast-in-concrete.


A. Qualifications: For fabrication and erection of the work of this Section, use only personnel

completely trained and experienced in the type of work being performed and thoroughly


familiar with the original design and the approved shop drawings.

B. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations,

comply with applicable standards for materials design and construction of the following:

1. American Society for Testing Materials

2. American Institute of Steel Construction

3. American Iron and Steel Institutes "Specifications for the Design of Light Gage Cold

Formed Steel Structural Members"

4. Occupational Safety and Health Act

5. American Welding Society

6. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

C. Conflicting Requirements: In the event of conflict between pertinent codes and regulations and

the requirements of the referenced standards or these Specifications, the provisions of the more

stringent shall govern.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Materials shall be new, top quality of their respective kinds, standard sizes and

fabricated in a shop whose principal business is manufacturing the items specified in this

Section. Materials shall be free of defect impairing strength, durability or appearance.

Miscellaneous anchors, plates, clips, bolts, nuts and the like shall be provided as necessary to

complete the work, whether or not they appear on the Drawings or in the Specifications.

B. Steel shall conform to ASTM A 36 for non w-shapes and ASTM A 992 for w-shapes.

C. Cast iron shall be soft, gray iron, true to pattern, smooth and straight, free from defects

impairing strength, durability or appearance.

D. Malleable iron shall be high grade white iron castings, fully annealed and of uniform ductile

structure throughout.

E. Aluminum alloys shall be of uniform quality and free from injurious defects and meet the

properties and applicable specifications of the Aluminum Company of America.

F. Bird screen shall be stainless steel wire cloth, minimum wire diameter 0.063-inch.

G. All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation

of the work of this Section, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds and as selected

by the CONTRACTOR subject to approval of the ENGINEER.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. General

1. Workmanship: Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion and


defects.

2. Temporary Bracing: Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing; keep work

in alignment.

3. Welding: Welding shall be continuous along entire area of contact. Welding shall be in

accordance with "Code for Welding in Building Construction" of the American Welding

Society. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces.

4. Painting: Prime paint metal fabrications in accordance with Section 09 91 00 of these

Specifications.

5. Items fabricated from structural steel members which are to be architecturally exposed shall

be given special attention for material selection with respect to rolling tolerances, surface

finish and straightness.

6. Normal structural steel fabrication tolerances will not be acceptable where in conflict with

the intent and requirements of this Section.

7. Straightness tolerance, additive to deflection, shall not exceed +1/16-inch to 10 feet.

8. All cope, mitre, and butt caps on exposed surfaces shall be made to the closest possible

tolerances consistent with metal shop equipment and practice in order to provide a pleasing

appearance.

9. Galvanizing: Items specified to be hot-dip galvanized shall be coated after fabrication.

10. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness or metal and details of

assembly and supports shall give ample strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to weather

shall be formed to exclude water. Provide holes and connections for the work of other

trades.

B. Aluminum Ladder: Meet OSHA requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Workmanship: Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion and

defects.

B. Coordination: Supply to appropriate trades, items requiring to be cast into concrete, embedded

in masonry, complete with necessary setting templates.

C. Touch-Up: After installation, touch-up field welds and scratched and damaged surfaces.

D. Protection: Where required, provide approved protection against galvanic action between

contacts of dissimilar metals or situations that will cause deterioration of metals in contact or

associated in any way.

3.02 PAINTING

Painting shall be in accordance with Section 09 91 00 of these Specifications.


3.03 CLEANING

Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section, thoroughly clean all installed materials and related

areas in accordance with Section 01 74 00 of these Specifications.


WELDED ALUMINUM HANDRAILS 05 52 13.10-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 05 52 13.10

WELDED ALUMINUM HANDRAILS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work covered by this Section includes furnishing all labor, equipment and materials

required to furnish and install aluminum handrail for walkways, stairs, and openings, including

all fittings, anchors, sleeves and accessories, as shown on the Drawings or specified herein.

B. Unless specifically designated otherwise on the Drawings, all handrails shall be aluminum pipe

handrail.

C. Handrails shall be furnished and installed where shown on the Drawings and at the edge of all

walking or working surfaces where the distance from the surface to the adjacent floor, ground

or slab exceeds four feet.

D. Handrails shall be furnished with a 4-inch aluminum toeboard. Toeboards will not be required

on the railings for stairs or where concrete curbs are provided.

1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Railings shall be designed and constructed in strict compliance with the requirements of OSHA

and OBC.

B. The Railing system shall be designed by a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of

Ohio, employed by the CONTRACTOR. Submit stamped calculations for the ENGINEER’S

review if requested.

C. Aluminum handrail shall be designed for a minimum safe working load of 50 pounds per linear

foot applied horizontally to the top rail or a concentrated load of 200 pounds applied in any

direction at any point on the railing, whichever is greater. All handrail sections and

components shall withstand the design loads with a minimum factor of safety of 1.5 based on

the ultimate strength of the alloy used.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit complete shop drawings and engineering data in accordance with the requirements of

Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications.

B. Submit supplier's recommendations and procedures for maintaining and repairing handrail,

including methods, cleaning materials, refinishing materials and precautions as to the use of

materials which may be detrimental to handrail finish.


A. Provide storage and protection for aluminum handrail in accordance with the requirements of

Section 01 60 00 of these Specifications.

B. Keep handling to a minimum and maintain protective covering on handrail until the work is


complete.


The CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with written certification that the aluminum

handrail and accessories are in conformance with the material and mechanical requirements

specified herein. Certified copies of independent laboratory test results or mill test results from the

aluminum handrail supplier may be considered evidence of compliance, provided such tests are

performed in accordance with the appropriate ASTM testing standards by experienced, competent

personnel. In case of doubt as to the accuracy or adequacy of mill tests, the ENGINEER may

require that the CONTRACTOR furnish test reports from an independent testing laboratory on

certified samples of handrail stock. Cost of this testing to be borne by the CONTRACTOR.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Aluminum Handrail

1. Aluminum tubing shall be, as a minimum, 1-1/2-inch nominal diameter, Schedule 40 for all

horizontal elements and Schedule 80 for all Vertical elements, 6061-T6 aluminum tubing

meeting the requirements of ASTM B 429.

2. Handrail shall be fabricated by welding. All weld joints shall be ground smooth and

polished.

3. Handrail shall meet all OSHA requirements and shall be uniform throughout the work.

4. All aluminum railing components shall be satin clear anodized with 0.07+, R215-R1 finish

on all exposed surfaces. Railing components shall be individually wrapped in paper or

plastic film sleeves to protect the finish during shipment and installation.

5. All handrail installations shall provide for draining of entrapped water from the railing

system by minimum 15/64-inch diameter weep holes or other approved means.

B. Toeboards: Toeboards shall be of the same material and finish as the rails and posts and

furnished where required by OSHA.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Aluminum railings shall be erected plumb, straight and true at the locations and elevations

shown on the Drawings. Prefabricated aluminum handrail shall be assembled and installed in

strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Aluminum handrail coming into contact with concrete or dissimilar metals shall be coated with

bituminous protective coating or installed with a vinyl isolation gasket.

C. All rails at splice joints to be fabricated 1/2-inch longer in the shop to permit cutting to fit in the

field. Adequate provisions for expansion and contraction are to be incorporated in the rails.


Handrail shall not be continuous across concrete expansion joints. Posts shall be fixed as

shown on the Drawings. Open rail ends shall be closed by terminal end fittings. Provide toe

plate where required to meet OSHA regulations.

D. Shop-applied coatings which are damaged during transit, storage and/or handling shall be

repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.

E. All defective, damaged or otherwise improperly installed handrail shall be removed and

replaced with material that satisfies the requirements of this Section.

3.02 CLEANING

A. Following installation, aluminum handrail shall be cleaned using soap and clean water. Acid

solutions, steel wool or harsh abrasives shall not be used. If stains remain after cleaning,

remove finish and restore in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section, thoroughly clean all install materials and related

areas in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 74 00 of these Specifications.


ALUMINUM WEIR PLATES 05 59 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 05 59 00

ALUMINUM WEIR PLATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work within this Section includes providing all labor, equipment and materials required to

install the weir plates shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.

B. Thicknesses shown on the Drawings are minimums for use in construction. Details are to

provide a guide to the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall be responsible for structural

integrity of the system based on the manufacturer's standard manufacturing techniques and

practices.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications and

shall include product data to show compliance with this Section.

B. Shop drawing submittals shall be signed and sealed by a structural engineer registered in the

state of Ohio if required or directed by the ENGINEER.


A. Weir plates and accessories shall be stored and protected in accordance with the requirements

of Section 01 60 00 of these Specifications.

B. Weir plates and appurtenances shall be manufacturer packaged and shipped for normal

handling and storage. Precautions shall be taken by the CONTRACTOR to prevent bending

and deformation during on-site storage.

1.04 WASTEWATER/WATER INFORMATION

A. Origin: Wastewater Plant Influent

B. pH: 6.5 to 7.5

C. Abrasiveness: Moderate

D. Temperature: Ambient

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Troughs, weir plates, flanges, angles and structural plates shall be made from 1/4-inch

minimum thickness 6061-T6 or 6061-T651 aluminum, ASTM B 209. Structural pipe shall

meet the requirements of ASTM A 429 and be 6061-T6 and sized as shown on the Drawings.

ALUMINUM WEIR PLATES 05 59 00-2 SEPTEMBER 2013

Pipe shall be a minimum of Schedule 40. Troughs shall be flat-bottomed as shown on the

Drawings.

B. Weir plates shall be either flat or V-notch with as shown on the Drawings. Edges and V-

notches shall be made by shearing or mechanically cutting. Torch cutting shall not be

permitted. Edges and V-notches shall be free of burrs. Gaskets shall be 1/8-inch thick

neoprene gaskets and be permanently bonded to the weir plates to seal between weir plate and

supporting structure.

C. Weir plates may utilize forming or weldments for construction. All weldments shall utilize

inert gas or resistance welding techniques. All welds shall be ground smooth and shall be flush

where component parts or flanges mate or join. Components that mate or join shall not rely

upon gaskets to cover or fill in weldment irregularities. All weldments shall be free of burrs

and smooth to the touch.

D. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be 300 series stainless steel. The manufacturer shall provide all

bolts, nuts and washers used to assemble weir components and subparts. Anchor bolts and

washers used to mount weir components or supports to the structure shall be 300 series

stainless steel and shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install weir plates per the manufacturer's instructions and locations and elevations as shown on

the Drawings.

B. Weir plate shall be installed such that the top of weir is perfectly level.


FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT FOR

SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 17 53-1 DECEMBER 2013

SECTION 06 17 53

FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT FOR SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Con-

ditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fire-retardant Treatment for Wood roof trusses.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For fire-retardant-treated lumber.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certi-

fication by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physi-

cal properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing

agency.

2. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before

and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent

testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of

treatment.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses indicated to comply

with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed

by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Fire-retardant-treated wood.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-

retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification

marking is representative of the material tested.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT FOR

SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 17 53-2 DECEMBER 2013

2.01 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED WOOD

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with

requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with

fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test

method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of

25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progres-

sive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front

not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time

during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less

when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exte-

rior type is not indicated.

3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to

ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to

ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high-

temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors

of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Pro-

ject's climatological zone.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and in-

specting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Application: Treat all trusses unless otherwise indicated.


FIBERGLASS REINFORCED

PLASTIC (FRP) FABRICATIONS 06 75 13-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 06 75 13

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

The work covered by this Section includes furnishing all labor, materials and equipment required to

fabricate and install all fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) items, with all appurtenances,

accessories and incidentals necessary to produce a complete, operable and serviceable

installation as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein, and in accordance with

the requirements of the Contract Documents. All fiberglass products herein specified shall be

furnished with ultraviolet protective agents.


A. FRP components, including their fasteners and anchors, shall be designed and constructed in

strict compliance with the requirements of OSHA, the 2006 International Building Code and

the Contract Documents under the supervision of a registered professional engineer licensed in

the state in which the Project is located.

B. FRP grating shall be designed for the following:

1. Dead loads including self weight.

2. Uniform live load as indicated on the Drawings, but not less than 100 pounds per square

foot.

3. Concentrated live loads as indicated on the Drawings but not less than 1,000 lbs. applied at

mid-span.

4. Uniform and concentrated live loads shall not be applied simultaneously.

5. Under either condition of uniform or concentrated load, live load deflection of FRP grating

shall not exceed 1/180 of span or 0.25 inch, whichever is smaller and total load deflection

shall not exceed 1/240 of span or 0.38 inch, whichever is smaller.

C. FRP handrail and guardrail shall be designed for the following:

1. A minimum safe working load of 50 pounds per linear foot applied in any direction to the

top rail and to transfer this load throughout the supports to the supporting structure.

2. A single concentrated load of 200 pounds applied in any direction at any point on the top

railing, and to transfer this load throughout the assembly to the supporting structure. This

load need not be assumed to act concurrently with the loads specified in Article 1.02

Paragraph C.1 of this section of these Specifications.

3. Intermediate rails and fillers shall be designed to withstand a horizontally applied normal

load of 50 pounds on an area equal to one-square foot, including openings and space

between rails. This load need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads specified in

Article 1.02 Paragraph C.1 or Article 1.02 Paragraph C.2 of this section of these



Specifications.

4. Handrail and guardrail assemblies shall be designed in accordance with the allowable stress

design provisions.

D. FRP ladder system shall be designed for the following:

1. Ladder rungs shall be designed to withstand a concentrated service load of 300 pounds plus

30 percent impact applied at midspan of the rung. Maximum rung deflection shall not

exceed L/360 based on the above load (where L = run width, inches). The design load shall

be applied at the center of the rung on a 4-inch wide area.

2. Ladder rungs shall be designed for an ultimate concentrated load of 1,200 pounds applied

at midspan of the rung.

3. Ladder side rails shall be designed to withstand a minimum live load of two 250 pound

loads plus 30 percent impact concentrated between any two consecutive attachments.

E. FRP structural platform, landings, stair stringers and component support framing shall be

designed for the following:


2. Uniform live loads as indicated on the Drawings but not less than 100 psf.

3. Concentrated loads from equipment as shown or indicated on the Drawings.

4. All seismic and wind loads required by the referenced code and as shown on the Drawings.

5. All other loads not listed but applicable from the referenced codes or as shown or indicated

on the Drawings.

6. Live load deflections shall be limited to 1/180 of the span, and total load deflections shall

be limited to 1/240 of the span. The 10-year wind lateral drift shall be limited to 1/240 of

the height and the inelastic seismic drift shall be limited to 1/100 of the height. Lateral

drifts shall include P-delta effects.

F. Stair Treads shall be designed for the following:



3. Concentrated load of 300 lbs. or as indicated on the Drawings. Concentrated load placed at

centerline of the tread, over a width of 4-inches and a depth of 6-inches, starting at the

nosing edge to simulate the landing of a foot.

4. Under either condition of uniform or concentrated load, live load deflection of FRP stair

treads shall not exceed 0.25 inch.

G. FRP solid-plank gratings shall be designed for the following:





3. Concentrated loads from equipment as shown or indicated on the Drawings.

5. All other loads not listed but applicable from the referenced codes or as shown or indicated

on the Drawings.

6. Live load deflections shall be limited to 1/180 of the span, and total load deflections shall

be limited to 1/240 of the span.

H. Splice joints shall be designed and constructed to provide strength equivalent to a straight

section of FRP material.

I. FRP design shall be based on elastic behavior and allowable stress design.

J. Compression flanges of platform beams shall be stabilized by suitable struts and/or bracing as

required for design. The use of the grating to support compression flanges is prohibited.

K. The use of grating to act as a diaphragm to resist or transfer lateral forces is prohibited.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit complete shop drawings, engineering calculations and engineering data for all FRP

components in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications.

B. Submit samples of FRP grating proposed for use on the Project.

C. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the material sizes, types, styles, part or catalog numbers,

complete details for the fabrication and erection of components including, but not limited to,

location, lengths, type and sizes of fasteners, clip angles, member sizes and connection details.

Only the general dimensions and elevations are shown on the Drawings. The shop drawings

shall provide a fully dimensioned detailed layout of all platform framing, including stairs and

structural framing.

D. Shop drawings, engineering calculations and manufacturer’s published literature shall be

sealed, signed and dated by a registered professional engineer licensed in the state in which the

Project is located.

E. Submit the manufacturer’s published literature including structural design data, structural

properties data, grating load/deflection tables, corrosion resistance tables, certificates of

compliance, test reports as applicable, concrete anchor systems and their allowable load

tables, and design calculations for all systems and components not sized or designed in the

Contract Documents.

F. Data and design information shall clearly illustrate the stair profile, layout and loads

considered. Submit all information concurrently with the shop drawings.

G. Ladder manufacturer shall provide supporting test data for the rung capacity.

H. Submit warranty copies in accordance with Article 1.04.


A. All items to be provided under this Section shall be furnished only by manufacturers having

a minimum of 10 years experience in the design and manufacture of similar products and

systems. Additionally, if requested, a record of at least five previous, separate, similar



successful installations in the last five years shall be provided.

B. Manufacturer shall offer a 3 year limited warranty on all FRP products against defects in

materials and workmanship.

C. Manufacturer shall be certified to the ISO 9001-2000 standard.

D. Manufacturer shall provide proof of certification from at least two other quality assurance

programs for its facilities or products (UL, DNV, ABS, USCG, AARR).

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Delivery of Materials: manufactured Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original,

unbroken pallets, packages, containers, or bundles bearing the label of the manufacturer.

Adhesives, resins, and their catalysts and hardeners shall be crated or boxed separately and

noted as such to facilitate their movement to a dry indoor facility.

B. Storage of Products: All materials shall be carefully handled to prevent them from abrasion,

cracking, chipping, twisting, other deformations, and other types of damage. Store items in

an enclosed area and free from contact with soil and water. Store adhesives, resins and their

catalysts and hardeners in dry indoor storage facilities between 70 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit

until they are required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Fibergrate Composite Structures

2. Ohio Gratings

3. Strongwell.

B. Component FRP ladder system shall be “Dynarail Safety Ladder System” as manufactured by

Fibergrate Composite Structures, Inc. of Dallas, Texas, (800) 527-4043.

2.02 GENERAL

A. All FRP items furnished under this Section shall be composed of fiberglass reinforcement and

resins in qualities, quantities, properties, arrangements, and dimensions necessary to meet the

design requirements and dimensions as specified in the Contract Documents.

B. All finished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be smooth (except for grit top

surfaces), resin-rich, free of voids and without dry spots, cracks, crazes, unreinforced areas

and visual defects such as foreign inclusions, delaminations, blisters, resin burns, air bubbles

and pits. All glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure

due to wear or weathering.

C. Resins shall be a premium grade vinyl ester unless noted otherwise herein or on the Drawings

with chemical formulation necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, strength and other



physical properties as required.

D. All FRP items, components and fabrications shall be further protected from ultraviolet (UV)

attack with integral UV inhibitors in the resin and a synthetic surfacing veil to help produce a

resin rich surface.

E. All FRP items, components and fabrications shall have a tested flame spread of 25 or less per

ASTM E-84 Tunnel Test. Gratings and stair treads shall also have tested burn time of less than

30 seconds and an extent of burn rate of less than or equal to 10 millimeters per ASTM D635.

Test data performed only on the resin shall not be accepted.

F. Color Gray or as specified by the City.

G. All shop fabricated and field fabricated cut and machined edges, holes and abrasions shall be

sealed with a resin compatible with the resin used in the manufacture of the product and in

strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.03 OPEN MOLDED FRP GRATING

A. Fiberglass reinforcement for open molded FRP grating shall be reinforced with continuous

glass strand roving of equal number of layers in each direction and in sufficient quantities as

needed by the application and/or physical properties required and constructed to provide

complete wetting of the glass by the resin. A premium grade vinyl ester resin shall be used.

B. All molded FRP grating shall have square mesh pattern providing bi-directional strengths with

minimum dimensions of 2-inches x 2-inches x 2-inches deep unless noted otherwise on the

Drawings. The grating shall be molded of single piece construction such that reinforcing glass

of bearing bars are interwoven with the cross bar glass and tops and bottoms of bearing and

cross bars are in the same plane.

C. After molding, no dry glass fibers shall be visible on any surface of bearing or cross bars. All

bars shall be smooth and uniform with no evidence of fiber orientation irregularities,

interlaminar voids, porosity, resin rich or resin starved areas.

D. Grating bar intersections are to be filleted to a maximum radius of 1/16-inch to eliminate local

stress concentrations and the possibility of resin cracking at these locations.

E. The top layer of reinforcement shall be no more than 1/8-inch below the top surface of the tread

so as to provide maximum stiffness and prevent resin shipping of unreinforced surfaces.

F. Length and width shall equal required dimensions within 1/4-inch. Diagonal dimensions of any

square shall be equal within 1/4-inch.

G. The tops of all bars and members shall be in the same plane.

H. All grating walking surfaces shall have anti-skid surfaces. Angular silica particles shall be

integrally embedded in laminate in all walking surfaces.

I. Grating shall be easily installed and cleaned, non-sparking and self-draining. Grating shall be

capable of field fabrication with a masonry saw.

J. Manufacturer shall provide openings and holes where required on the Drawings. Grating

openings which fit around protrusions (pipes, equipment, etc.) shall be discontinuous at

approximately the centerline of the opening so each section of grating is readily removable.



K. Grating shall meet the dimensional requirements and tolerances as shown or specified. The

Contractor shall provide and/or verify measurements in field for work fabricated to fit existing

conditions.

L. Grating panels for sump pits and narrow trenches shall be simply supported by FRP angles on

all sides of the opening. The gratings shall be of the type that can be made in panels of the

widths and lengths appropriate to the openings shown on the Drawings. Panels shall be

furnished in sizes that are easily handled.

M. The top surface of all grating shall be flush and all gratings shall lie flat with no tendency to

rock when installed. Cross bars and edge bars of adjacent panels shall align for neatness. All

bearing bars shall be parallel. Cross bars shall be cut off flush with outside face of side bars.

N. All mechanical hold-down grating clips shall be manufactured of Type 316 stainless steel and

shall be spaced a maximum of three feet apart with a minimum of four per piece of grating,

unless a closer spacing is recommended by the manufacturer.

2.04 OPEN PULTRUDED FRP GRATING

A. The open pultruded FRP grating shall be manufactured by the pultrusion process.

B. Fiberglass reinforcement for pultruded FRP grating components shall be reinforced with

continuous glass strand roving and continuous glass strand mat in sufficient quantities as need

by the application and /or physical properties required and constructed to provide complete

wetting of the glass by the resin. A premium grade vinyl ester resin shall be used.

C. All pultruded FRP grating shall have 1-inch deep minimum bearing bars spaced 1-1/2 –inches

maximum with cross rods spaced 6-inches maximum, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

D. Bearing bars shall be interlocked and epoxied in place with a two piece cross rod system to

provide a mechanical and chemical lock. Cross rods should be below the walking surface of the

grating.

E. After molding, no dry glass fibers shall be visible on any surface of bearing or cross bars. All

bars shall be smooth and uniform with no evidence of fiber orientation irregularities, inter-

laminar voids, porosity, resin rich or resin starved areas.

F. The top layer of reinforcement shall be no more than 1/8-inch below the top surface of the tread

so as to provide maximum stiffness and prevent resin shipping of unreinforced surfaces.

G. Length and width shall equal required dimensions within 1/4-inch. Diagonal dimensions of any

square shall be equal within 1/4-inch.

H. All grating walking surfaces shall have anti-skid surfaces. Angular silica particles shall be

integrally embedded in laminate in all walking surfaces.

I. Grating shall be easily installed and cleaned, non-sparking and self-draining. Grating shall be

capable of field fabrication with a masonry saw.

J. Manufacturer shall provide openings and holes where required on the Drawings. Grating

openings which fit around protrusions (pipes, equipment, etc.) shall be discontinuous at

approximately the centerline of the opening so each section of grating is readily removable.

K. Grating shall meet the dimensional requirements and tolerances as shown or specified. The



Contractor shall provide and/or verify measurements in field for work fabricated to fit existing

conditions.

L. Grating panels for sump pits and narrow trenches shall be simply supported by FRP angles on

all sides of the opening. The gratings shall be of the type that can be made in panels of the

widths and lengths appropriate to the openings shown on the Drawings. Panels shall be

furnished in sizes that are easily handled.

M. The top surface of all grating shall be flush and all gratings shall lie flat with no tendency to

rock when installed. Cross bars and edge bars of adjacent panels shall align for neatness. All

bearing bars shall be parallel. Cross bars shall be cut off flush with outside face of side bars.

N. All mechanical hold-down grating clips shall be manufactured of Type 316 stainless steel and

shall be spaced a maximum of four feet apart with a minimum of four per piece of grating,

unless a closer spacing is recommended by the manufacturer.

2.05 FRP SHELF ANGLES

A. Main bearing bars of grating shall be supported by FRP shelf angles of the size and thickness

required to obtain flush surfaces for gratings, angle frames and surfaces in which the angle

frame is embedded. There shall not be more than 1/4-inch clearance between the ends of the

grating panels and the inside vertical face of the shelf angle.

B. Unless otherwise shown, openings to be covered with grating shall be bound on all four sides

with a continuous shelf angle frame having FRP welded corners and sufficient strap anchors for

anchorage into the concrete.

C. Where changes in channel direction, openings for gates, ends of grating runs, etc., prohibit

adequate support for grating, additional FRP cross angles shall be provided by the

CONTRACTOR for additional seating surface.

2.06 FRP LEDGERS, PLATFORM FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. All components shall be manufactured of FRP structural shapes. Hand lay-up field fabricated

structural members are not permitted.

B. Stringers shall be FRP channels or rectangular tube shapes. Stringers shall be of sufficient

depth such that tread widths are maintained within the stringer depth proper without edge

protrusion.

C. Ledgers for treads shall be minimum 2-inches x 2-inches x 1/4-inch thick equal leg angles.

Ledgers shall be bolted to the stringer using 3/8-inch diameter, 316 stainless steel hex nuts and

hex bolts. FRP threaded rods and square nuts may be used. If FRP threaded rods and nuts are

used, each rod end shall be sawed flush with the nut after nuts have been torqued. After sawing

the rod flush, the square nuts shall be re-torqued. End of rods, edges of FRP square nuts and

ledger edges shall be enclosed with resin. Torque applied shall be as recommended by the

manufacturer.

D. Where platforms are shown on the Drawings to be FRP, all members shall be structural shapes

fabricated from either wide flange or channel shapes. Platform members shall be bolted

together using 1/2-inch minimum diameter 316 stainless steel hex nuts, bolts, flat washers and

lock washers. Standard FRP structural angles and components shall be used to join the



structural members.

E. Platform support posts for FRP framing shown on the Drawings to be FRP shall be wide flange

shapes or square tube. All support posts shall be provided with baseplates and pre-drilled holes

to accept recommended anchor rod sizes, quantity and spacing designed by the FRP engineer.

F. Ends of all structural shapes shall be enclosed with resin.

G. Where FRP grating requires a support structure, grating support framing shall be FRP. All

members shall be structural shapes fabricated from either wide flange or channel shapes.

Framing members shall be bolted together using 1/2-inch minimum diameter Type 316 stainless

steel hex nuts, bolts, flat washers and lock washers. Standard FRP structural angles and

components shall be used to join the structural members.

2.07 FRP HANDRAILS, GUARDRAILS AND TOE PLATES

A. Handrails, guardrails and vertical members shall be 2-inch square FRP shapes with radiused

edges. Shapes shall have a minimum thickness of 0.156-inch. Top rails and center rails shall

be contained within the width of the vertical members. Side attachment of center rails and top

rails to vertical members is not permitted.

B. Handrail and guardrail members shall be joined using FRP plugs, dowels and pins. FRP/epoxy

plugs shall be insert type, completely filling the internal area of the handrail/guardrail openings.

The plugs shall be bonded to the interior of the handrail/guardrail by use of resin/epoxy

adhesives. Dowels shall be used to attach handrail/guardrail joints via holes drilled into the

handrail plugs. Dowels shall have helical grooves to assure adhesive distribution and

component bonding.

C. All handrail and guardrail turns shall be of mitered construction and shall be smooth to the

touch. No exposed glass fibers or burrs are permitted.

D. Vertical handrail and guardrail members shall have FRP baseplates where handrails/guardrails

are top surface mounted to stringers, platform or concrete members. Side mounted

handrail/guardrail vertical members shall be plugged and pre-drilled to accept 1/2-inch diameter

anchors or bolting.

E. Toeplates shall be 4-inches high x 1/2-inch corrugated configurations having a minimum

weight of 0.65 pounds per linear foot. Toeplates shall be mounted to vertical handrail members

using 316 stainless steel drive rivets. Toeplates shall be horizontal and mounted a maximum

spacing of 1/4-inch to the walking surfaces. Toeplates shall be provided with all handrails.

F. All FRP handrail and guardrail systems shall be 42-inches in height above the walking surfaces

and shall have a top rail and three intermediate rails. Top rails and intermediate rails shall be

equally spaced. Handrail and guardrail system shall comply with OSHA loading requirements.

2.08 FRP LADDERS

A. All ladder side rails, rungs, ladder mounting brackets and cage straps are to be FRP structural

shapes manufactured by the pultrusion process. Cage hoops and brackets, where specified on

the Drawings, shall be produced by the open molded hand lay-up method. All structural shapes

shall be composed of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in quantities, qualities, properties,

arrangements and dimensions as necessary to meet the design requirements and dimensions as



specified in the Contract Documents.

B. Fiberglass reinforcement shall be a combination of continuous roving, continuous strand mat,

bi-directional roving mat and surfacing veil in sufficient quantities as needed by the application

and/or physical properties required.

C. Ladder rails shall be 2-inch square FRP tube shapes with radiused edges. Shapes shall have a

minimum thickness of 0.25-inch.

D. Ladders shall be anchored to the structure at the top and bottom.

E. Fall Prevention: Where the floor-to-floor vertical distance exceeds eight feet, provide a fall

prevention system as follows: Fall prevention cage from “Dynarail Safety Ladder System” as

manufactured by Fibergrate Composite Structures, Inc. of Dallas, Texas, (800) 527-4043.

F. Materials and Construction

1. Fall Prevention: The ladder cage vertical bars shall be 1.5” wide by 5/8” pultruded I-beam

shapes to offer protection to workers from exposed hardware. Cage hoops and cage

brackets shall be manufactured by the open mold hand lay-up process. All cage hoops shall

be 2” wide by ¼” thick minimum.

2. Ladder Rungs: Rungs shall be designed to provide a non-slip power grip surface with a flat

minimum 1-1/4-inch wide serrated top surface and a semi-circular bottom. The straight

sides and semicircular bottom shall have striations at approximately 5/16-inch centers for

gripping surface. All rungs shall penetrate the wall of the tube side rails and shall be

connected to the rails with both epoxy and stainless steel rivets to provide both a chemical

and mechanical lock, respectively.

3. Fasteners: Ladder system shall be assembled using components that make rigid joints.

Joints shall be assembled using Type 316 stainless steel fasteners. Rivets will be Type 316

stainless steel. No pop riveted, glued systems or welded ladders will be allowed.

G. All ladder and cage components are to be integrally pigmented yellow.

2.09 FRP COMPONENT SUPPORTS

Where shown on the Drawings, CONTRACTOR shall provide tube-shaped, wide flange or angle

shaped FRP shapes for component supports. Applicable loads for all component supports shall be

as specified in Article 1.02. The CONTRACTOR shall include the design of the component

support anchorage to the concrete. Component supports shall be designed, fabricated and erected

by the CONTRACTOR. FRP component supports shall be UV resistant.

2.10 FABRICATION

Where FRP stringers and components are mounted to buildings, concrete or other constructed

surfaces, extra lengths of point-to-point joining members shall be provided for field cutting and fit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION



A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish FRP products as herein specified, installed by persons

familiar with, and experienced in the installation of FRP gratings, stairs, treads, supports and

handrails.

B. FRP products shall be assembled and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and instructions.

C. FRP products shall have no tendency to shift, rock or rattle and shall not exceed deflection

limits under specified loading.

D. CONTRACTOR shall install gratings in accordance with manufacturer’s assembly drawings.

Fasten grating panels securely in place with hold-down fasteners as specified herein. Field cut

and drill fiberglass reinforced plastic products with carbide and diamond tipped bits and blades.

Seal cut or drilled surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Follow

manufacturer’s instructions when cutting or drilling fiberglass products or using resin products;

provide adequate ventilation.


THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 07 21 00

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Con-

ditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Spray polyurethane foam insulation.

2. Glass-fiber board insulation.

3. Vapor retarders.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product test reports.

C. Research/evaluation reports.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each product.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of ap-

plicable testing agency.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's

written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION

A. Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum flame-

spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84 for exteri-


or use.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offer-

ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

a. BASF Corporation.

b. BaySystems NorthAmerica, LLC.

c. Dow Chemical Company (The).

d. Gaco Western Inc.

e. NCFI; Division of Barnhardt Mfg. Co.

f. SWD Urethane Company.

g. Volatile Free, Inc.

2. Minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 6.2 deg F x h x sq.

ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (43 K x m/W at 24 deg C).

2.02 GLASS-FIBER BOARD INSULATION

A. Glass-fiber Board Insulation:.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offer-

ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

a. BASF Corporation.

b. BaySystems NorthAmerica, LLC.

c. Dow Chemical Company (The).

d. Gaco Western Inc.

e. NCFI; Division of Barnhardt Mfg. Co.

f. SWD Urethane Company.

g. Volatile Free, Inc.

2. ASTM C 612, Type 1A; foil faced, with maximum flamespread and smoke-developed

indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combus-

tion characteristics.

a. Nominal density of 3 lb/cu. Ft. (48 kg/cu. M), thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x

sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (29.8 K x m/W at 24 deg C).

2.03 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the follow-

ing:

1. CertainTeed Corporation.

2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.

3. Johns Manville.

4. Knauf Insulation.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=4670&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456799726&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd





















5. Owens Corning.

B. Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class B

(faced surface with a flame-propagation resistance of 0.12 W/sq. cm); Category 1 (membrane

is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.

C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to

fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic

spaces and vented eaves.

2.04 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick, with maximum

permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).

B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manu-

facturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation

attachment.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and appli-

cations indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to

ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstruc-

tions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thick-

nesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indi-

cated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES

A. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation

anchors as follows:

1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive accord-

ing to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation

manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicat-

ed.

2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between con-

crete substrate and insulation.



3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over

spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not

to compress insulation below indicated thickness.

4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers

to tips of spindles.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's

written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive

or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units

3.05 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders

to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place

with adhesives or other anchorage systems as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover mis-

cellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor re-

tarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and va-

por retarders.

C. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.

Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse,

and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to

abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after

installation.


INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS 07 41 13.23-1 DECEMBER 2013

SECTION 07 41 13.23

INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulated metal roof panels.

1.02 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge

conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings,

closures, and accessories; and special details.

C. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.


A. Product test reports.

B. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and

approved by manufacturer.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-

applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Other warranty requirements can be found in Section 01 78 36.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


A. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based

on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.

B. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels that are listed on the EPA/DOE's ENERGY STAR

"Roof Product List" for low-slope roof products.

C. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels according to one of the following when tested

according to CRRC-1:

1. Three-year, aged solar reflectance of not less than 0.55 and emissivity of not less than

0.75.

2. Three-year, aged Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 64 when calculated according

to ASTM E 1980.

D. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of

the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 72:

1. Wind Loads: Design for wind load of 90 MPH or as required by local codes if greater

than 90 MPH.

2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.

E. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when tested

according to ASTM E 1680 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to

ASTM E 1646 at the following test-pressure difference:


G. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for

wind-uplift-resistance class required by code.

H. FM Global Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with

requirements in FM Global 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FM

Global's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable.

Identify materials with FM Global markings.

I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of

joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on

surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.

2.02 FOAMED-INSULATION-CORE METAL ROOF PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed and -assembled metal roof panels fabricated from two sheets

of metal with insulation core foamed in place during fabrication with joints between panels

designed to form weathertight seals. Include accessories required for weathertight

installation.

1. Panel Performance:

a. Flatwise Tensile Strength: 30 psi (200 kPa) when tested according to

ASTM C 297/C 297M.


b. Humid Aging: Volume increase not greater than 6.0 percent and no delamination or

metal corrosion when tested for seven days at 140 deg F (60 deg C) and 100 percent

relative humidity according to ASTM D 2126.

c. Heat Aging: Volume increase not greater than 2.0 percent and no delamination,

surface blistering, or permanent bowing when tested for seven days at 200 deg F (93

deg C) according to ASTM D 2126.

d. Cold Aging: Volume decrease not more than 1.0 percent and no delamination,

surface blistering, or permanent bowing when tested for seven days at minus 20

deg F (29 deg C) according to ASTM D 2126.

e. Fatigue: No evidence of delamination, core cracking, or permanent bowing when

tested to a 20-lbf/sq. ft. (958-kPa) positive and negative wind load and with

deflection of L/180 for 2 million cycles.

f. Autoclave: No delamination when exposed to 2-psi (13.8-kPa) pressure at a

temperature of 212 deg F (100 deg C) for 2-1/2 hours.

g. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Class A according to ASTM E 108.

2. Insulation Core: Modified isocyanurate or polyurethane foam using a non-CFC blowing

agent, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450,

respectively.

a. Closed-Cell Content: 90 percent when tested according to ASTM D 6226.

b. Density: 2.0 to 2.6 lb/cu. ft. (32 to 42 kg/cu. m) when tested according to

ASTM D 1622.

c. Compressive Strength: Minimum 20 psi (140 kPa) when tested according to

ASTM D 1621.

d. Shear Strength: 26 psi (179 kPa) when tested according to ASTM C 273.

B. Standing-Seam-Profile, Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical

tongue-and-groove ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced

between ribs; designed for sequential installation by interlocking tongue-and-groove panel

edges and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located between

panels and engaging edges of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Butler Manufacturing; a BlueScope Steel company.

b. IPS - Insulated Panel Systems; an NCI company.

c. Metl-Span.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Facings of aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet

complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating

designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with

ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm).

b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

i. Color: As selected by City’s Representative from manufacturer's full range.

c. Interior Finish: Siliconized polyester.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456836839&mf=&src=wd




3. Joint Type: As standard with manufacturer.

4. Panel Coverage: 36 inches (914 mm).

5. Panel Thickness: 2.5 inches (64 mm).

6. Thermal-Resistance Value (R-Value): R = 17 according to ASTM C 1363.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Provide wood structural panel sheathing (1/2” thick) bonded with exterior glue, with edges

supported by blocking, tongue-and-groove joints or other approved type of edge support, or

equivalent material beneath all Insulated Metal Roof panels.

B. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated

aluminum sheet ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation

unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support

and alignment of metal panel system.

C. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system

including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants,

gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels

unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer.

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure

strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where

indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

D. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as exterior facings

of metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.

Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings,

ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal

panels.

E. Gutters and Downspouts: Formed from same material, finish, and color as exterior facings of

panels according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Finish to match metal

roof panels.

F. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material, finish, and color as exterior facings of roof

panels, 0.048-inch (1.2-mm) nominal thickness; with bottom of skirt profiled to match roof

panel profiles and with welded top box and integral full-length cricket. Fabricate curb

subframing of 0.060-inch- (1.52-mm-) nominal thickness, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped steel sheet.

Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads of size and height indicated.

Finish roof curbs to match metal roof panels.

G. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed

fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-

applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

H. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with

panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound


sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,

nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade,

class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain

weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's

standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements

demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and

structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full

length of panel.

C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that

provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from

movements.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's

recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"

that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Exterior Facings and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70

percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to

exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written

instructions.

B. Interior Facings:

1. Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat;

with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) for primer and 0.8 mil (0.02

mm) for topcoat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support

members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written

recommendations.

3.03 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Lap-Seam, Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Roof Panels: Fasten insulated metal roof panels to

supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by

manufacturer.


1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full-rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items

for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or applications not true to line.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side

of insulated metal roof panels.

3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use

proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of

washer.

4. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of insulated metal roof panels and between panels

and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

5. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to panel side laps and elsewhere as needed to

weatherproof panels.

6. Apply snap-on battens to seams of insulated metal roof panels to conceal fasteners.

B. Standing-Seam, Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Roof Panels: Fasten insulated metal roof

panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and

with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.

2. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer tool

so cleat, insulated metal roof panel, and factory-applied side-lap sealant are completely

engaged.

C. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and

weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with

flashings and other components.

D. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written

installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide

concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level. Install work with laps,

joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are

installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On

completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal

panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.


INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS 07 42 13.19-1 DECEMBER 2013

SECTION 07 42 13.19

INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Mineral Wool-insulation-core metal wall panels.

1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.












1.07 WARRANTY




1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS



A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of


1. Wind Loads: Design for wind load of 90 MPH or as required by local codes if greater

than 90 MPH.


B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when tested



C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to

ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:


D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature





material surfaces.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide metal wall panels and system components with

the following fire-test-response characteristics, as determined by testing identical panels and

system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate

markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction tested for fire

resistance per ASTM E 119.

2. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition when tested according to NFPA 268.

3. Potential Heat: Acceptable level when tested according to NFPA 259.

4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide wall panels with a flame-spread index of 25 or

less and a smoke-developed index of 450 or less, per ASTM E 84.

2.02 MINERAL WOOL-INSULATION-CORE METAL WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed and -assembled metal wall panels fabricated from two metal

facing sheets and insulation core mineral wool in place during fabrication, and with joints

between panels designed to form weathertight seals. Include accessories required for

weathertight installation.

1. Panel Performance:

a. Flatwise Tensile Strength: 30 psi (207 kPa) when tested according to

ASTM C 297/C 297M.

b. Humid Aging: Volume increase not greater than 6.0 percent and no delamination or

metal corrosion when tested for seven days at 140 deg F (60 deg C) and 100 percent

relative humidity according to ASTM D 2126.

c. Heat Aging: Volume increase not greater than 2.0 percent and no delamination,


surface blistering, or permanent bowing when tested for seven days at 200 deg F (93

deg C) according to ASTM D 2126.

d. Cold Aging: Volume decrease not more than 1.0 percent and no delamination,

surface blistering, or permanent bowing when tested for seven days at minus 20

deg F (29 deg C) according to ASTM D 2126.

e. Fatigue: No evidence of delamination, core cracking, or permanent bowing when

tested to a 20-lbf/sq. ft. (958-kPa) positive and negative wind load and with

deflection of L/180 for 2 million cycles.

f. Autoclave: No delamination when exposed to 2-psi (13.8-kPa) pressure at a

temperature of 212 deg F (100 deg C) for 2-1/2 hours.

2. Insulation Core: Mineral wool, and shall meet the requirements of a one (1)-hour fire

resistance rating for a non-bearing wall in accordance with UL263 per (UL design U050,

ASTM E 119..

a. Compressive Strength: Minimum 20 psi (140 kPa) when tested according to

ASTM D 1621.

b. Shear Strength: 26 psi (179 kPa) when tested according to ASTM C 273/C 273M.

B. Concealed-Fastener, Mineral wool-Insulation-Core Metal Wall Panels: Formed with tongue-

and-groove panel edges; designed for sequential installation by interlocking panel edges and

mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips or fasteners.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Wall Panel.

b. IPS - Insulated Panel Systems, an NCI company; Wall Panel.

c. Kingspan; Wall Panel.

d. MBCI, a division of NCI Building Systems, L.P.; Wall Panel.

e. Metl-Span LLC; Insulated Metal Wall Panel.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Facings of zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying

with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-

coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150)

coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply

with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm).

b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.


c. Interior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.


3. Snap-on Batten: Same material, finish, and color as exterior facings of wall panels.

4. Panel Coverage: 36 inches (914 mm) nominal.

5. Panel Thickness: 2.5 inches (64 mm).

6. Thermal-Resistance Value (R-Value): R = 14 according to ASTM C 1363.


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456837095&mf=04&src=wd






steel aluminum, ASTM A 792/A 792M,Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) aluminum-zinc-alloy

coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as

required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system

including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants,

gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels

unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer.





C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as

required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but

are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes,

fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish

system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed


applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with

panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.


sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm)

thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.


2.04 FABRICATION



demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and

structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full

length of panel.

C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that

provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from

movements.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's

recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"

that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.


2.05 FINISHES

A. Panels and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70

percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to

exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written

instructions.

2. Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat;

with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) for primer and 0.8 mil (0.02

mm) for topcoat.

3. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored

acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum

total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION



recommendations.

3.02 INSULATED METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Apply continuous ribbon of sealant to panel joint on concealed side of insulated

metal wall panels as vapor seal; apply sealant to panel joint on exposed side of panels for

weather seal.

1. Fasten foamed-insulation-core metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped

joint at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.

2. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid

"panel creep" or application not true to line.

3. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners on weather side of

insulated metal wall panels.



washer.

5. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of insulated metal wall panels and between panels

and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

6. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to panel side laps and elsewhere as needed to

make panels weathertight.

7. Apply snap-on battens to exposed-fastener, insulated-core metal wall panel seams to

conceal fasteners.

B. Mineral wool-Insulation-Core Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with

concealed clips at each joint at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by

manufacturer. Fully engage tongue and groove of adjacent panels.

1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.







concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level. Install work with laps,

joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

3.03 CLEANING


installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On




METAL SOFFIT PANELS 07 42 13.53-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 07 42 13.53

METAL SOFFIT PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes metal soffit panels.












1.05 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section 01 78 36.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of


1. Wind Loads: 90 mph or as required by Building Codes.


B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when tested



C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature






material surfaces.

2.02 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with

manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance

required.

1. Thickness: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm).

2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

3. Color: Match wall panels.


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated

steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation or

ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) aluminum-zinc-alloy coating

designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required

for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system

including trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.





C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as

required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and trim

with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed


applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible

with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.


sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.


2.04 FABRICATION




demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional

and structural requirements.

B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels

may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of

same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate

according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.

C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full

length of panel.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Panels and Accessories: Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester

backer finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION



recommendations.

1. Soffit Framing: Wire tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with

requirements for assemblies indicated.

3.02 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Metal Soffit Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at

location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side

of metal panels.



washer.

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress

washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in

predrilled holes.

B. Watertight Installation:

1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using

sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels and

elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.


2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with sealant

and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.






concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install

work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

3.03 CLEANING


installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On




ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 07 71 00

ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Copings.

2. Roof-edge specialties.

3. Roof-edge drainage systems.

4. Reglets and counterflashings.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. Samples: For each type of roof specialty and for each color and texture specified.


A. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Sample warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer offering products meeting

requirements that are FM Approvals listed for specified class.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Roofing-System Warranty: Roof specialties are included in warranty provisions in Section 07

41 13.16 "Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels ".

B. Refer to Section 01 78 36 for additional requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. FM Approvals' Listing: Manufacture and install roof-edge specialties that are listed in FM

Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify

materials with FM Approvals' markings.

B. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install roof-edge specialties tested according

to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures:


1. Design Pressure: as required by Building Codes.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components,

failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips

that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations

on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


material surfaces.

2.02 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALTIES

A. Roof-Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snap-on metal

fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m) and a continuous metal receiver

with integral drip-edge cleat to engage fascia cover. Provide matching corner units.



the following:

a. Hickman Company, W. P.

b. Metal-Era, Inc.

c. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.

d. Perimeter Systems; a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Company, Inc.

2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Fascia Covers: Aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch (1.60 mm) thick.

a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

b. Finish: Clear anodic.

3. Receiver: Aluminum sheet, 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick.

4. Fascia Accessories: Fascia extenders with continuous hold-down cleats Soffit trim.

2.03 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

1. Architectural Products Company.

2. ATAS International, Inc.

3. Berger Building Products, Inc.

4. Castle Metal Products.

5. Cheney Flashing Company.

6. CopperCraft by FABRAL; a Euramax company.

7. Hickman Company, W. P.

8. Merchant & Evans, Inc.

9. Metal-Era, Inc.

10. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
















11. Perimeter Systems; a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Company, Inc.

B. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m), with

matching corner units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1

inch (25 mm) above front edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion

joints, and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.

1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick.

2. Gutter Profile: Quarter round according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual."

3. Corners: Factory mitered and soldered.

4. Gutter Supports: Gutter brackets with finish matching the gutters.

5. Gutter Accessories: Continuous hinged leaf guard of solid metal designed to shed leaves.

C. Downspouts: Plain round complete with smooth-curve elbows, manufactured from the

following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and

anchors.

1. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick.

D. Conductor Heads: Manufactured conductor heads, each with flanged back and stiffened top

edge, and of dimensions and shape indicated, complete with outlet tube that nests into upper

end of downspout, exterior flange trim, and built-in overflow.

1. Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.

E. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic.

2.04 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for

finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.


A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to

meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color

of sheet metal.

2. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or passivated Series 300 stainless

steel.

3. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

4. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

5. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip

zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade, class,

and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.

C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type joints with limited movement.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof

specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use

fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other

miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.

1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning

and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant.

3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.

4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.

5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from

contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with

bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof specialties with bituminous coating

where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of

roof specialties for waterproof performance.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.

1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet (3.6 m) with no joints within 18 inches

(450 mm) of corners or intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21

deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting

proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by

fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal concealed joints with butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

F. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed

in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).

3.02 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALITIES INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with

concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to

meet performance requirements.

3.03 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with


installation of roof-edge drainage system.

B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly

anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inches (610 mm) apart. Attach ends with

rivets and solder to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.

1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet

(15.2 m) apart. Install expansion-joint caps.

2. Install continuous leaf guards on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, hinged to swing

open for cleaning gutters.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers

with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch (25 mm) away from

walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c.

1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts at grade to direct water away from building.

D. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor top edge 1 inch (25

mm) below gutter discharge.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and

weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed.


SEALANTS 07 90 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 07 90 00

SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

The work covered by this Section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment and material required

to apply all sealants and related work as described herein and/or shown on the Drawings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

Complete engineering and product data shall be submitted to the CITY in accordance with the

requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications. Color samples shall be submitted for

approval by the CITY.

1.03 STORAGE AND DELIVERY

A. Materials shall be stored in strict conformance with the manufacturer's instructions and in

accordance with the requirements of Section 01 60 00 of these Specifications.

B. Materials shall be delivered to the job site in sealed containers, with the manufacturer's original

labels attached and accompanied by written certification indicating compliance with the

requirements of these Specifications.


The manufacturer shall provide the Engineer with written certification that all products furnished

comply with all applicable requirements of these Specifications.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide a warranty against defective materials and workmanship in accordance with the

requirements of Sections 01 78 36 and 03 01 30.71 of these Specifications.

B. The following types of failures will be considered defective work requiring replacement:

leakage, hardening, cracking, crumbling, melting, shrinking or running of caulking compound

or staining of adjacent work by caulking compound.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Specified Manufacturer: Pecora Corporation.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Sika Corporation, Tremco Incorporated, Dow Chemical

Corporation and General Electric Company.

C. Minimize the number of sealant manufacturers providing sealant for this Project.


2.02 MATERIALS

A. Floors: Sealant shall be "Dynatred", a two-part, non-sag traffic grade polyurethane sealant with

25% sealant movement capability conforming to ASTM C-920, ASTM D-1850, and ASTM C-

1247.

B. Interior joints to be painted: Sealant shall be “Dynatred”.

C. Interior joints not to be painted: Sealant shall be “Dynatrol ll”, a two-part, non-sag

polyurethane sealant with 50% sealant movement capability conforming to ASTM C-920.

D. Submerged Joints: Sealant shall be “Synthacalk GC2+”, a two-part, non-sag polysulfide sealant

with 25% sealant movement capability conforming to ASTM C-920 and NSF 61, Section 6.

Provide primer “P53” to both sides of joint prior to installing sealant.

E. Exterior Joints: Unless noted otherwise, sealant shall be "864", a one-part, neutral curing, low

modulus, silicone sealant with 50% sealant movement capability conforming to ASTM C-920.

F. Fire Rated Joints: At all penetrations, openings, windows, doors, and fire dampers in fire rated

surfaces, sealant shall be “Dynatrol II” with “Ultra Block” backer rod. Maximum joint width is

¾-inch. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

G. Primers: Primers shall be provided as recommended by the Sealant Manufacturer.

H. Backer Rods: Backer rods shall be a closed-cell polyethylene and/or Denver foam

polyurethane as recommended by the Sealant Manufacturer and shall conform to ASTM C-920.

Application shall be in accordance with sizes listed below:

Joint Size, inches Rod Diameter, inches

3/16 1/4

¼ 3/8

3/8 1/2

1/2 5/8

5/8 3/4

3/4 1

I. Color of sealant shall be as selected by the CITY from the manufacturer's standard and special

colors.

J. Sealant shall have a minimum life expectancy of 20 years and shall be resistant to the effects of

sunlight, abrasion, oils, mild chemicals, cleaning agents and immersion in water.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. All joints or channels shall be cleaned and free of dirt, oil, grease, moisture, old paint, loose


mortar and other foreign matter.

B. Metal surfaces shall be wiped with material equal to Zylol or Mek and then dried.

C. Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with a wire brush and then blown clean. Any waterproofing

treatments contaminating the joint must be completely removed.

D. Surface of concrete, masonry, or any other surface shall be primed in accordance with the

manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Seal all joints in similar materials and all joints between dissimilar materials. Seal both sides of

all items in wall openings such as, but not limited to door frames, window frames, louvers, fans,

grilles, and conduit and pipe penetrations. Seal all exterior joints to make the structure

weathertight. Thresholds shall be set in a full bed of sealant.

B. Floor Joints: Unless noted otherwise, seal all joints in concrete floors which have a joint filler

or premolded expansion joint material (PEJ). Joint filler or PEJ shall be raked down so that the

top of the sealant is aligned even with the floor surface while maintaining the manufacturer's

recommended sealant width to depth ratio.

C. Apply sealant with hand or air gun under sufficient pressure and through nozzle openings of

such a diameter so that a full bead of sealant is run into the joint and fills the opening

completely.

D. Apply joint backer with a blunt rounded tool in accordance with manufacturer's instructions so

it will not stain the sealant.

E. All beads should be tooled immediately after application to insure firm and full contact with the

interface of the joint.

F. Work shall be of highest quality and in accordance with the manufacturer's current printed

instructions.

G. Sealant shall be applied and allowed to cure "only" during times when dust is not present. If

dust is embedded in the face of the sealant, the existing sealant shall be completely removed

and the joint shall be resealed.

H. Ensure that sealant has cured a minimum of 5 days prior to painting.

I. Sealant joint depth shall be ½ the joint width with a maximum depth of ½-inch.

J. Apply a small neat bead of silicone sealant on the joint between the door frame and the inside

face of the applied door stop on aluminum door frames. Color of sealant shall match color of

door frame.

3.03 CLEANING

Remove all excess material and smears adjacent to joint as work progresses.


ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS 08 11 16-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 08 11 16

ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Aluminum flush doors with aluminum frames.


A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

B. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tube.

C. ASTM D 1621 - Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

D. ASTM D 1623 - Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

E. ASTM D 2126 - Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging.

F. ASTM E 283 - Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,

and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

G. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by

Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.


A. General: Provide door assemblies that have been designed and fabricated to comply with

specified performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding

standard systems.

B. Air Infiltration: For a single door, test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283

at pressure differential of 6.27 psf. Door shall not exceed 0.18 cfm per square foot.

C. Uniform Structural Load: For a single door, test specimen shall be tested in accordance with

ASTM E 330: Plus or minus 240 pounds per square foot.

D. Compressive Modulus, Foam Core, Nominal Value, ASTM D 1621: 370 psi.

E. Tensile Adhesion, Foam Core, Nominal Value, ASTM D 1623: 45.3 psi.

F. Thermal and Humid Aging, Nominal Value, 158 Degrees F and 100 Percent Humidity for 14

Days, ASTM D 2126: Minus 5.14 percent volume change.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including description of materials,

components, fabrication, finishes, and installation.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and details,

indicating dimensions, tolerances, materials, fabrication, doors, panels, framing, hardware

schedule, finish, options, and accessories.

C. Samples: Door: Submit manufacturer's sample of door showing face sheets, core, framing, finish,

and accessories.

D. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating

doors comply with specified performance requirements.

E. Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer's maintenance and cleaning instructions for doors,

including maintenance and operating instructions for hardware.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:

1. Continuously engaged in manufacturing of doors of similar type to that specified, with a

minimum of 20 years successful experience.

2. Door and frame components from same manufacturer or verified compatibility between

products.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging,

with labels clearly identifying opening door mark and manufacturer.

B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Warrant doors, frames, and factory hardware against failure in materials and workmanship,

including excessive deflection, faulty operation, defects in hardware installation, and deterioration

of finish or construction in excess of normal weathering.

B. Warranty Period: Ten years starting on date of shipment. In addition, a limited lifetime (while the

door is in its specified application in its original installation) warranty covering: failure of corner

joinery, core deterioration, delamination or bubbling of door skin.

C. Refer to Section 01 78 36 for additional requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Arcadia, Inc.

2. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.

3. CMI Architectural.

4. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc.

5. EFCO Corporation.

6. Kawneer North America.

7. Leed Himmel Industries, Inc.

8. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.

9. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.

10. Special-Lite, Inc., Decatur, MI 49045

11. TRACO.

12. Tubelite.

13. United States Aluminum.

14. YKK AP America Inc.

2.02 ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS

A. Model: SL-16 aluminum flush doors with aluminum frames.

B. Door Opening Size: As indicated on the Drawings.

C. Construction:

1. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

2. Stiles and Rails: Aluminum extrusions made from prime-equivalent billet that is produced

from 100% reprocessed 6063-T6 alloy recovered from industrial processes, minimum of 2-

5/16-inch depth.

3. Corners: Mitered.

4. Provide joinery of 3/8-inch diameter full-width tie rods through extruded splines top and

bottom integral to standard tubular shaped stiles and rails reinforced to accept hardware as

specified.

5. Securing Internal Door Extrusions: 3/16-inch angle blocks and locking hex nuts for joinery.

Welds, glue, or other methods are not acceptable.

6. Furnish extruded stiles and rails with integral reglets to accept face sheets. Lock face sheets

into place to permit flush appearance.















7. Rail caps or other face sheet capture methods are not acceptable.

8. Extrude top and bottom rail legs for interlocking continuous weather bar.

9. Meeting Stiles: Pile brush weatherseals. Extrude meeting stile to include integral pocket to

accept pile brush weatherseals.

10. Bottom of Door: Install bottom weather bar with nylon brush weatherstripping into extruded

interlocking edge of bottom rail.

11. Glue: Use of glue to bond sheet to core or extrusions is not acceptable

D. Face Sheet:

1. Material: 0.062-inch thick aluminum.

2. Texture: Smooth.

E. Core:

1. Material: Poured-in-place polyurethane foam.

2. Density: Minimum of 5 pounds per cubic foot.

3. R-Value: Minimum of 9.

F. Cutouts:

1. Manufacture doors with cutouts for required vision lites, louvers, and panels.

2. Factory install vision lites, louvers, and panels.

G. Hardware:

1. Premachine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers and

hardware schedule.

2. Factory install hardware.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Members:

1. Aluminum extrusions made from prime-equivalent billet that is produced from 100%

reprocessed 6063-T6 alloy recovered from industrial processes: ASTM B 221.

2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.

3. Alloy and Temper: As required by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance,

application of required finish, and control of color.

B. Components: Door and frame components from same manufacturer.

C. Fasteners:

1. Material: Aluminum, 18-8 stainless steel, or other non-corrosive metal.


2. Compatibility: Compatible with items to be fastened.

3. Exposed Fasteners: Screws with finish matching items to be fastened.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units, and profile requirements shall be as

indicated on the Drawings.

B. Coordination of Fabrication: Field measure before fabrication and show recorded measurements

on shop drawings.

C. Assembly:

1. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal before assembly.

2. Remove burrs from cut edges.

D. Welding: Welding of doors or frames is not acceptable.

E. Fit:

1. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles.

2. Secure attachments and support at mechanical joints with hairline fit at contacting members.

2.05 ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Tubular Framing:

1. Size and Type: As indicated on the Drawings.

2. Materials: Aluminum extrusions made from prime-equivalent billet that is produced from

100% reprocessed 6063-T6 alloy recovered from industrial processes, 1/8-inch minimum wall

thickness.

3. Applied Door Stops: 0.625-inch high, with screws and weatherstripping. Doorstop shall

incorporate pressure gasketing for weathering seal. Counterpunch fastener holes in door stop

to preserve full metal thickness under fastener head.

4. Frame Members: Box type with 4 enclosed sides. Open-back framing is not acceptable.

5. Caulking: Caulk joints before assembling frame members.

6. Joints:

a. Secure joints with fasteners.

b. Provide hairline butt joint appearance.

7. Field Fabrication: Field fabrication of framing using stick material is not acceptable.

8. Applied Stops: For side, transom, and borrowed lites and panels. Applied stops shall

incorporate pressure gasketing for weathering seal. Reinforce with solid bar stock fill for

frame hardware attachments.

9. Hardware:


a. Premachine and reinforce frame members for hardware in accordance with manufacturer's

standards and hardware schedule.

b. Factory install hardware.

10. Anchors:

a. Anchors appropriate for wall conditions to anchor framing to wall materials.

b. Doorjamb and header mounting holes shall be spaced no more than 24 inches apart.

c. Secure head and sill members of transom, side lites, and similar conditions.

11. Side Lites:

a. Factory preassemble side lites to greatest extent possible.

b. Mark frame assemblies according to location.

2.06 HARDWARE

A. Premachine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers and

hardware schedule.

B. Factory install hardware.

C. Finish: Clear.

2.07 VISION LITES

A. Factory Glazing: 1-inch glass insulating units.

B. Lites in Exterior Doors: Allow for thermal expansion.

C. Rectangular Lites:

1. Size: As indicated on the Drawings.

2. Factory glazed with screw-applied aluminum stops anodized to match perimeter door rails.

2.08 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Anodized Finish: Class I finish, 0.7 mils thick.

1. Clear 215 R1, AA-M10C12C22A41, Class I, 0.7 mils thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect

installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are

corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance.


3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install doors plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack.

C. Anchor frames securely in place.

D. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means approved

by Architect.

E. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and backseal.

F. Install exterior doors to be weathertight in closed position.

G. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by

Architect.

H. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by

Architect.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors, hinges, and locksets for smooth operation without binding.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed doors to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors will be without damage

or deterioration at time of substantial completion.



PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND

ALUMINUM FRAMES 08 12 16-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 08 12 16

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND ALUMINUM FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following:

1. Aluminum frames for doors.

2. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors.


A. Division 8 – Finish Hardware

B. Division 8 – Glazing.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. For aluminum frames. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to

other work.

2. For fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) doors. Include door elevations

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches (300

mm) long in size.

D. Schedule: For aluminum frames. Coordinate with door hardware schedule and glazing.

E. Manufacturer’s product literature, fabrication descriptions and installation instructions.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A company specialized in manufacture of fiberglass reinforced

plastic (FRP) doors with stainless steel frames as specified herein with a minimum of 20

years documented experience and with a record of successful in-service performance for the

applications as required for this project.

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed fiberglass door and

frame installations similar in material design, and extent to those indicated and whose work

has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance

C. Source Limitations:

1. Obtain fiberglass reinforced plastic doors and stainless steel frames through one source

fabricated from a single manufacturer or confirm compatibility between products.

2. Hardware and accessories for all FRP doors as specified in Section 08 71 00 should be

provided and installed by the fiberglass door manufacturer.




3. Glass for windows in doors shall be furnished and installed by door manufacturer in

accordance with related section, Division 8, Glazing.

D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at location selected by the Owner.


A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Package door opening assemblies in

manufacturer’s standard containers.

B. Store door assemblies in manufacturer’s standard containers, on end, to prevent damage to

face, corners and edges.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s 10-year warranty against failure due to corrosion

from specified environment.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS



following:

1. Special-Life, Inc.; Decatur, Michigan. Telephone: (800) 821-7610. Website:

www.special-lite.com.

2. Commercial Door Systems: Telephone: (215) 244-9080. Website:

www.commercialdoorsystems.com.

3. Extrude Art: Telephone: (718) 291-5600/ Website: www.dddoors.com.

4. Kawneer Company, Inc.: Telephone: (770) 449-5555. Website: www.kawneer.com.

5. Manko Window systems, Inc.: telephone: (800) 642-1488. Website:

www.mankowindows.com.

6. Chase Doors. Telephone: (800) 543-4455. Website: www.chasedoors.com.

7. Aurora Custom Fiberglass Exterior Doors, Jeld-Wen Windows & Doors. Telephone:

(541)880-7229. Website: www.jeld-wen.com.

8. Tiger Door FRP by Overly Door Company. Telephone: (800) 979-7300. Website:

http://tiger.overly.com.

9. Weiland, Inc., Madison, Nebraska. Telephone: (402) 454-2106. Website:

www.weilanddoors.com.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Standard door panel to consist of a wood frame and 1-1/4” of foamed in place, 2 pcf

polyurethane insulation between two sheets of 1/8” thick plywood. The unit is then overlaid

with 0.125” thick polyester resin impregnated with 30-40% fiberglass. A finish coat of high

gloss gel coat of specified color is chemically bonded to finish the process. Finished doors

shall be 1-3/4” thick and of flush construction and have no seams or cracks.

http://www.special-lite.com/

http://www.commercialdoorsystems.com/

http://www.dddoors.com/

http://www.kawneer.com/

http://www.chasedoors.com/

http://tiger.overly.com/

http://www.weilanddoors.com/




B. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper

required to suit structural and finish requirements, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

C. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers.

1. Jamb Depth: 5” standard. Widths over/under 5” available upon request, refer to frame

schedule for sizes.

2. Face Dimension: 2” standard. Headers 2” standard.

3. Corner Miter: Head and Jamb members shall be standard 45 degree miter, providing a

neatly mitered corner connection.

D. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, with removable snap-in

casing trim, glazing stops, and door stops without exposed fasteners.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners

compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other

items being fastened.

B. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals.

C. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodate

glazing thickness indicated.

D. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 "Glazing."

E. Hardware: Comply with requirements in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware".

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline

joints at butted or mitered connections.

B. Factory prepare interior aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include

cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware

Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."

C. Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without

dismantling frame.

1. Locate removable stops on the inside of spaces accessed by keyed doors.

D. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely

fastened in place; comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Set frames accurately in position and plumbed, aligned, and securely anchored to substrates.




C. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 72 inches (1830

mm) long must be one piece.

D. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods

recommended by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610.

E. Touch up marred frame surfaces so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches (1220

mm). Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

3.02 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors in accordance with door manufacturer’s maintenance instructions to swing open

and shut without binding and to remain in place at any angle without being moved by

gravitational influence.

B. Adjust door hardware to operate correctly in accordance with hardware manufacturer’s

maintenance instructions.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces of door opening assemblies and exposed door hardware in accordance with

respective manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.

3.04 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Protect door opening assemblies and door hardware from damage by subsequent construction

activities until final inspection.


FLOOR DOORS 08 31 13-1 OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 08 31 13

FLOOR DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials required

to furnish and install aluminum floor doors as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.


A. Interior floor doors shall be designed for a live load of not less than 150 pounds per square foot

at an extreme fiber stress in bending of not more than 33 percent of the minimum yield strength

of the material.

B. Exterior floor doors shall be designed for a live load of not less than 300 pounds per square foot

at an extreme fiber stress in bending of not more than 33 percent of the minimum yield strength

of the material.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Complete shop drawings and engineering data shall be submitted in accordance with the

requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications.


Floor doors shall be stored and protected in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 60 00

of these Specifications.

1.05 WARRANTY

Refer to Section 01 78 36.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 INTERIOR FLOOR DOORS

A. Interior floor doors shall be constructed of aluminum with a diamond pattern tread or other

acceptable raised non-slip surface.

B. Frames shall be 1/4-inch extruded aluminum with built-in neoprene cushion and with strap

anchors bolted to exterior or with extruded anchor flange.

C. Door leaf shall be minimum 1/4-inch aluminum diamond plate reinforced with aluminum

stiffeners as required. Stainless steel hinges shall be bolted to underside and pivot on stainless

steel torsion bars that counterbalance the door for easy operation. The door shall open to 90

degrees and lock automatically in that position. A vinyl grip handle shall be provided on the

door interior to release and close cover with one hand. Doors shall be equipped with an outside


flush lifting handle and hold back safety chains. All hardware shall be stainless steel.

D. Factory finish for aluminum floor doors shall be lacquer with bituminous coating applied to all

surfaces in contact with concrete.

E. Interior floor doors shall be single-leaf or double-leaf as shown on the Drawings and shall be

Bilco Type K or KD or approved equal.

2.02 EXTERIOR FLOOR DOORS

A. Exterior floor doors shall be constructed of aluminum with a diamond pattern tread or other

acceptable raised non-slip surface. Doors shall be watertight and of the sizes shown on the

Drawings.

B. Frames shall be 1/4-inch extruded aluminum formed to a channel gutter approximately 3-inches

wide, with an anchor flange around the perimeter. Containing frames shall be neatly made.

Sufficient anchors shall be attached to the frames for proper anchoring into the concrete. Clear

opening must not be reduced. A 1-1/2-inch drainage coupling for plumber's connection shall be

provided in the low corner of the channel frame located as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Doors shall be provided with a minimum of two heavy forged bronze hinges with stainless steel

pins. Doors shall be equipped with an outside flush lifting handle, hold back safety chains,

spring operators for easy operation and an automatic hold-open arm with vinyl grip release

handle.

D. Factory finish for exterior floor doors shall be mill finish with bituminous coating applied to all

surfaces in contact with concrete.

E. Floor doors shall be furnished with all stainless steel hardware.

F. Exterior floor doors shall be single-leaf or double-leaf as shown on the Drawings and shall be

Bilco Type J or JD or approved equal.

2.03 FLOODTIGHT FLOOR DOORS

A. Door: aluminum, 1/4" diamond plate, mill finish with a live load of 625 psf with a maximum

deflection of L/160

B. Frame: aluminum, 1/4" extrusion, mill finish

C. Hinges, pressure lock latches, hold-open arm and hardware: type 316 stainless steel

D. Hold open arm with red vinyl grip handle

E. Water tight gasket: epdm, around entire hatch

F. Horizontal stainless steel springs for easy opening.

G. Bituminous coating on frame surface in contact with concrete.

F. Certifications: tested to be water tight under applied pressure of a 10 foot column of water.

G. Flood tight floor doors shall be by Nystrom, USF Fabrication, or approved equal.


2.04 RETROFIT FLOOR DOORS

A. The retrofit floor door for the influent pumping station shall be as specified in Section 43 21 40

of these specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All floor doors shall be completely assembled in the containing frames prior to their delivery to

the Project. The exterior of the frames and anchors, or those portions coming in contact with

the concrete shall be painted with a heavy coating of asphalt or other bituminous material prior

to their installation.

B. All sidewalk door frames shall be installed so they will project slightly above the elevation of

the surrounding concrete. No door shall be at an elevation lower than the adjacent concrete

construction. They shall present a uniform, level surface with no indentations or projections.

All hinged sidewalk doors shall operate freely and without binding.

C. Gutters shall be connected to plant drain piping as shown on the Drawings.


OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 08 33 23

OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Insulated service doors.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed

in manufacturer's product data.

1. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads

imposed on structure.

2. Temperature-Rise Limit: provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature

end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of

standard fire-test exposure.

C. Maintenance Information.

1.03 WARRANTY


replace components of overhead coiling door systems that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Minimum of three years from date of Substantial Completion or a

minimum of 20,000 cycles.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads.

1. Design Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa),

acting inward and outward.

2. Testing: According to ASTM E 330.

B. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Provide overhead coiling doors that pass missile-

impact and cyclic-pressure tests according to ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 1.


C. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake

motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

2.02 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Insulated Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal

slats.


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited

to, the following:

a. ACME Rolling Doors.

b. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc.

c. Alumatec Pacific Products.

d. Amarr Garage Doors.

e. ASTA Door Corporation.

f. C.H.I. Overhead Doors.

g. City-Gates.

h. Clopay Building Products.

i. Cookson Company.

j. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.

k. Janus International Corporation.

l. Lawrence Roll-Up Doors, Inc.

m. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc.

n. Metro Door.

o. Overhead Door Corporation.

p. QMI Security Solutions.

q. Raynor.

r. Southwestern Rolling Steel Door Co.

s. Wayne-Dalton Corp.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than

100,000 cycles.

C. Curtain R-Value: 5.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.881 K x sq. m/W).

D. Door Curtain Material: Aluminum.

E. Door Curtain Slats: Flat 1-7/8-inch (48-mm) center-to-center height.

1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Aluminum.

F. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch (38 by 38 by 3 mm)

thick; fabricated from aluminum extrusions and finished to match door.

G. Curtain Jamb Guides: Aluminum with exposed finish matching curtain slats.

H. Hood: Aluminum.

1. Mounting: Face of wall.

2. Insure that top of hood will not be more that 25” above 12’-0” height of door opening.





















I. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly and chain lock keeper.

1. Locking Device Assembly: Cremone type, both jamb sides locking bars, operable

from inside and outside with cylinders.

J. Manual Door Operator: Chain-hoist operator.

K. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with weatherseals, push/pull handles, pull-down strap.

L. Door Finish:

1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized.

2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face.

2.03 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by

padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

B. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating

handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.

1. Lock Cylinders: Cylinders standard with manufacturer and keyed to building keying

system.

2. Keys: Three for each cylinder.

C. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.

2.04 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES

A. Weatherseals for Exterior Doors: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets

fitted to entire exterior perimeter of door for a weather-resistant installation unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting

handles on each side of door, finished to match door.

C. Pull-Down Strap: Provide pull-down straps for doors more than 84 inches (2130 mm) high.

2.05 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an

adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a

spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-

lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel

plate.

2.06 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer.

B. Push-up Door Operation: Lift handles and pull rope for raising and lowering doors, with

counterbalance mechanism designed so that required lift or pull for door operation does not

exceed 25 lbf (111 N).

C. Chain-Hoist Operator: Consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain-pocket wheel and guard,

and gear-reduction unit with a maximum 25-lbf (111-N) force for door operation. Provide


alloy-steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,

anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written

instructions and as specified.

B. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of

warp, twist, or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by

manufacturer Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter.


WATERTIGHT DOORS 08 39 19-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 08 39 19

WATERTIGHT DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Hinged Flood Barrier with frame and hardware.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

B. ASTM B 211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and

Wire.

C. Aluminum Association - Specification for Aluminum Structures, 7th Edition.

D. ASME Structural Welding Code Section IX.

E. FEMA Technical Bulletin 3-93 - Non-Residential Flood Proofing.

F. SEI/ASCE 7-02 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

G. AWS D1.2 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.

H. Aluminum Structures - A Guide to Their Specifications and Design.

1.04 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design watertight doors to perform under hydrostatic loads (and hydrodynamic or other loads

as specified) to control short-term load pressures indicated. All water pressure loads and

operating loads are transferred to the building structure.

B. Standard loading: Standard Flood Shields are designed for hydrostatic loading, and have no

additional allowances included for hydrodynamic loads, wave loads or debris impact loads.

C. Design Safety Factor for all watertight door Flood Shield Models of a minimum 2:1. Based

on material ultimate yield strengths.

D. Design Safety Factor for Anchors, minimum of 4:1 for cast-in-place concrete, or minimum of

6:1 for concrete masonry unit construction.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data : Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components,

including anchorage, hardware, and finishes. Include dimensional plans, applicable material

specifications, elevations and sections detailing mounting and connections, and load

http://www.arcat.com/arcatcos/cos43/arc43416.cfm


diagrams.

C. Calculations: Submit calculations approved by a qualified engineer, to verify the flood

shield's ability to withstand the design loading.

D. Closeout Submittals: Provide Operation and Maintenance data to include methods for

maintaining installed products, precautions against cleaning materials and methods

detrimental to finishes and performance.

E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer must demonstrate a minimum of five years

successful experience in design and manufacture of similar flood related closures. Upon

request, provide supporting evidence including list of installations, descriptions, name and

method of contact.

B. Welder Qualifications: Welders Certified in accordance with American Welding Society

Procedures: AWS-1-GMAW-S, WPS No. B2.004.90 for applicable material used in

production of specified product.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging container with identification labels

intact until ready for installation.

B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture.

C. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weathertight location. If outdoor storage is

required, block materials to store at an incline, to prevent pooling of any moisture and

promote runoff. Tarp materials in a tent-like arrangement, elevated above the product with

open sides to allow airflow. Store all other hardware in a dry controlled environment.

D. Use caution when unloading and handling product to avoid bending, denting, crushing, or

other damage to the product.

E. When using forklifts, use forks of proper length to fully support product being moved.

Consult shop drawings or consult with factory for proper lift points.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under

environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of adjacent materials to avoid

damage.

1.10 WARRANTY

Refer to Section 01 78 36.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1. PS DOORS, which is located at: 1150 S. 48th Street, Grand Forks, ND 58201; Toll Free

Tel: 800-284-0623; Tel: 701-746-4519; Fax: 701-746-8340; Email:

[email protected]; Web: www.flooddoors.com.

2. PRESRAY CORPORATION Critical Containment Solutions; PO Box 200, Wassaic, NY

12592; Phone: (845) 373-9300; www.presray.com.

3. Walz & Krenzer, Inc.; 91 Willenbrock Rd., Unit B4; Oxford, CT 06478; Phone: (203)

267-5712; [email protected]

4. Standard Equipment Company, Inc.; 75 Beauregard Street, Mobile, AL 36602; Phone:

(800) 239-3442; www.standardequipmentclosures.com

5. JUNIPER INDUSTRIES, INC.; 72-15 Metropolitan Avenue; PO Box 148; Middle

Village, NY 11379; Phone: (718) 326-2546; www.juniperind.com

B. Hinged Pedestrian Flood Door

C. Obtain all watertight doors and flood shields assemblies from single manufacturer.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Watertight Doors: Provide the following doors:

1. Hinged Swing Flood Shield, Single Swing.

B. Products Details:

1. Sealing Requirements: Flood Shield and gasket design shall provide an effective barrier

against short-term high water situations, to above opening height.

2. Operation: Provide with latching operable from both sides.

3. Mounting/Load Transfer: Anchor to existing structure. Flood Shield designed for

specified hydrostatic pressure (and other loads as specified) and will transfer loads to

adjacent structure.

4. Frames to be anchored utilizing mechanical, chemical or other anchor types.

Manufacturer to include all anchors, water-stop, and sealants.

5. Loading Direction Selection: Positive Pressure Loading: (Direction of loading against

flood shield so as to further compress gaskets against flood shield frame-"seating").

6. Provide rectangular door opening with square corners to facilitate easy passage.

7. Provide compression gasket which requires no inflation.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Flood Shield:

1. Steel: Structural or formed steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36; tubing conforming

to ASTM A 500 Grade B, ASTM A 513; bars conforming to ASTM A 36, M1020; of

appropriate size and strength with welded construction.

2. Aluminum: 6063 alloy conforming to ASTM B 211.


http://www.flooddoors.com/


http://www.standardequipmentclosures.com/

http://www.juniperind.com/


B. Panel Sheeting: Flood Shield to be sheeted with steel sheeting or plate, Commercial Quality-

Low Carbon ASTM-A-569, ASTM-A-366, ASTM-A-36 welded in place. Optional materials

include Stainless Steel (304 or 316) or Aluminum (6061).

1. Aluminum: 6063 alloy conforming to ASTM B 209

C. Gaskets to be factory mounted to flood shield assembly. Gaskets to be compressible rubber

type, typically EPDM unless otherwise noted, and to be field replaceable.

D. Frame to include jamb, head, and sill members for field locating and installation on structure.

Jamb members to be designed and fabricated with appropriate material as required for the

loading.


2. Aluminum: 6061 alloy ASTM B 209.

E. Threshold:


2. Aluminum: 6061 alloy ASTM B 209.

F. Frame Mounting Hardware: Provide anchors, sealant, and water stop, as required.

G. Operating Hardware: Provide hardware sized for the size and weight of the flood shield and

loads. Hardware to be factory located on jambs and shield panels, as practical. All loads are

transferred to building structure. Latching hardware to be as indicated on Drawings. Flood

shield panel to be factory prepared for applicable latching devices.

H. Labeling: Each watertight door and frame will be individually identified for matched

installation.

I. Instruction Placard: Provide pictorial and written operation instruction placards on flood

shield.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

C. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted

otherwise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best


result for the substrate under the Project conditions.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installations instructions, approved shop drawings,

shipping, handling, and storage instructions, and product carton instructions for installation.

B. Frames shall be installed level, square, plumb, and rigid.

C. Sealants, water-stop, and grouting to be applied per product application directions and in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Field Grouting to be completed by appropriate personnel, and in accordance with product

application directions and manufacturer's instructions.

E. Tolerances: All dimensional requirements must be in accordance with manufacturer's

installation instructions and shop drawings.

F. Field Testing:

1. Perform visual dry test for gasket alignment, continuity contact and pre-compression.

2. Construct temporary water barrier and test installed flood barrier.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturers representative to verify that installation of assembly and that the perimeter

conditions are in conformance to the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Products to be operated and field verified including the sealing surfaces to assure that they

maintain contact at the correct sealing points.

C. Verify that hinging and latching assemblies operate freely and correctly.

D. Verify all anchorage is in accordance with manufacture's installation instructions and

applicable data sheets.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Repair or replace damaged installed products or components.

B. Clean all sealing surfaces.

C. Touch up damaged finish.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of Project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.


ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 08 51 13

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations.



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens,

operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant

installation.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inches (50 by 100

mm) in size.

D. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



B. Sample warranties.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period:

a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Glazing Units: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

c. Aluminum Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS



following:

1. All Seasons Window & Door Mfg., Inc.; All Seasons Commercial Division, Inc.

2. Boyd Aluminum Manufacturing.

3. Custom Window Company.

4. DeSCo Architectural Inc.






5. EFCO Corporation; a Pella company.

6. EXTECH Exterior Technologies, Inc.

7. Fleetwood Windows & Doors.

8. Gerkin Windows and Doors.

9. Graham Architectural Products Corp.

10. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.

11. Mannix Exterior Wall Systems, Inc.

12. Peerless Products Inc.

13. Quaker Windows Products Co.

14. Thermal Windows, Inc.

15. TRACO.

16. Wausau Window and Wall Systems.

17. Winco.

18. YKK AP America Inc.

2.02 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Standard: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

1. Minimum Performance Class: AW.

2. Minimum Performance Grade: 50.

B. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.42 Btu/sq. ft. x h

x deg F (3.43 W/sq. m x K).

C. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.30.

D. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal

performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of minimum 60 frame and 69 glass.

2.03 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

A. Frames: Thermally broken aluminum extrusions complying with

AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

B. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190.

1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.

a. Tint: Gray.

b. Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings.

2. Lites: Two.

3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon.

4. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.

C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight

seal.

1. AAiirr IInnffiillttrraattiioonn:: mmeeeett AAAAMMAA 110011 ssttaannddaarrdd ooff mmaaxxiimmuumm ..11 ccffmm//ssqquuaarree ffoooott wwhheenn tteesstteedd
















ppeerr AASSTTMM EE 228833--0044 aatt aa ssttaattiicc aaiirr pprreessssuurree ddiiffffeerreennccee ooff 66..2244 ppssff..

2. WWaatteerr PPeenneettrraattiioonn:: nnoo uunnccoonnttrroolllleedd wwaatteerr lleeaakkaaggee wwhheenn tteesstteedd ppeerr AASSTTMM EE 333311--0000 aatt aa

ssttaattiicc aaiirr pprreessssuurree ddiiffffeerreennccee ooff 1122 ppssff..

3. UUnniiffoorrmm DDeefflleeccttiioonn:: nnoo mmoorree tthhaann LL//117755 wwhheenn tteesstteedd ppeerr AASSTTMM EE 333300--0022 aatt aa ssttaattiicc aaiirr

pprreessssuurree ddiiffffeerreennccee ooff 110000 ppssff..

4. UUnniiffoorrmm SSttrruuccttuurraall LLooaadd:: nnoo ggllaassss bbrreeaakkaaggee oorr ppeerrmmaanneenntt ddaammaaggee ttoo ffaasstteenneerrss,, aanndd

mmaaxxiimmuumm ..22%% ppeerrmmaanneenntt ddeeffoorrmmaattiioonn ooff tthhee ssppaann ooff aannyy ffrraammee mmeemmbbeerr wwhheenn tteesstteedd ppeerr

AASSTTMM EE 333300--0022 aatt aa ssttaattiicc aaiirr pprreessssuurree ddiiffffeerreennccee ooff 115500 ppssff..

D. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless

otherwise indicated.

E. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and

other components.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For

application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Subsills: Thermally broken, extruded-aluminum subsills in configurations indicated on

Drawings.

B. Column Covers: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on

Drawings.

C. Interior Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

D. Panning Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on

Drawings.

E. Receptor System: Two-piece, snap-together, thermally broken, extruded-aluminum receptor

system that anchors windows in place.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling

components and anchoring windows.

B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.

C. Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.

D. Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for

support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and

provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as

indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of

window units.

E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the

factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment

and installation.


A. Anodic Finish: Class I complying with AAMA 611.


1. Color: Clear.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware,

accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not

addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in

ASTM E 2112.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal

movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall

flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.

C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture

migrating within windows to the exterior.

D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic

action at points of contact with other materials.

E. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for

smooth operation and weathertight closure.

F. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective

coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

G. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged

during construction period.


DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.

3. Electrified door hardware.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the products listed below.

Coordinating and scheduling the purchase and delivery of these products remain requirements

of this Section.

1. Pivots, thresholds, weather stripping, lock cylinders to be installed under other Sections.



B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing

fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and

diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work

to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in

the Contract Documents.

b. Content: Include the following information:

i. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door

and frame.

ii. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans

and to door and frame schedule.

iii. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function,

size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.

iv. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces

with other building control systems.

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's

final keying instructions for locks.

1.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


1. Door Hardware.

2. Electrical Parts.


A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and

approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is

available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner

about door hardware and keying.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing

consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design,

and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows:

1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is also an

Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC).

C. Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical

door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical

modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction are acceptable.

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at

the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.

D. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch.

Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

F. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with

the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA

Accessibility Guidelines.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the

wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).

2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door.

b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more

than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door

will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured

to the leading edge of the door.

G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to CITY.

1.06 WARRANTY



replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise

indicated.

a. Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

c. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule"

Article to comply with requirements in this Section.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products

equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products.

2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of

operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive

qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule"

Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for

each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.

Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.

2.02 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-

metal or aluminum doors and hollow-metal or aluminum frames.



the following:

a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.

b. Bommer Industries, Inc.

c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc.

d. Hager Companies.

e. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

f. Lawrence Hardware Inc.

g. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

h. PBB, Inc.

i. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.

2.03 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with











requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip

extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

1. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum

framing.

B. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass

parts; Series 1000.



the following]:

a. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co.

b. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

c. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

d. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.

e. Cal-Royal Products, Inc.

f. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

g. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

h. Marks USA.

i. PDQ Manufacturing.

j. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

k. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

l. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.04 SELF-CONTAINED ELECTRONIC LOCKS

A. Self-Contained Electronic Locks: BHMA A156.25, mortise; with internal, battery-powered,

self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven lock

mechanism, and actuating device; enclosed in zinc-dichromate-plated, wrought-steel case,

and strike that suits frame. Provide key override, low-battery detection and warning, LED

status indicators, and ability to program at the lock.



the following:

a. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.

b. Kaba Ilco Corp.; a Kaba Group company.

c. Marks USA.

d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

e. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

f. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.05 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS

A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.



the following:




















a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

b. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc.

d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

e. Detex Corporation.

f. Door Controls International, Inc.

g. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America.

h. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

i. K2 Commercial Hardware; a Black & Decker Corp. company.

j. Monarch Exit Devices & Panic Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

k. Precision Hardware, Inc.; Division of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.

l. Rutherford Controls Int'l. Corp.

m. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

n. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

o. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.06 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel

silver.

1. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices.



the following:

a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

b. ASSA, Inc.; An ASSA ABLOY Group Company.

c. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.

d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

e. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

f. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

g. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

h. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

i. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

B. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of

construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.

2.07 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28,

Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.

1. Master Key System: Change keys and a master key operate cylinders.

B. Keys: Brass.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include

the following notation:


























a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner.

2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:

a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three.

b. Master Keys: Five.

2.08 OPERATING TRIM

A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; aluminum, unless otherwise indicated.



the following:

a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.

b. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc.

c. Forms + Surfaces.

d. Hager Companies.

e. Hiawatha, Inc.

f. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

g. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.

h. Trimco.

2.09 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and

latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with

manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door,

exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers,

adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.



the following:

a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

c. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America.

d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

e. K2 Commercial Hardware; a Black & Decker Corp. company.

f. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

g. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

h. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

i. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

j. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.10 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; aluminum base metal.






















the following:

a. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc.

b. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.

c. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.

d. Cal-Royal Products, Inc.

e. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc.

f. Door Controls International, Inc .

g. Hager Companies.

h. Hiawatha, Inc.

i. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

j. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.

k. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.

l. Trimco.

2.11 DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu.

m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to

ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily

available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.



the following:

a. Hager Companies.

b. M-D Building Products, Inc.

c. National Guard Products.

d. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

e. Reese Enterprises, Inc.

f. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated.

g. Zero International.

2.12 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.



the following:

a. Hager Companies.

b. M-D Building Products, Inc.

c. National Guard Products.

d. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

e. Reese Enterprises, Inc.

f. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

g. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated.

h. Zero International.





























2.13 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared

for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially

recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not

permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door

hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.

2. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners.

2.14 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Aluminum Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and

frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated on Drawings unless

otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel/Aluminum Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Custom Steel/Aluminum Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.

C. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where

cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to

be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of

surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until

finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment

substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space

fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

D. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than

the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every

30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent

means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction

period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner.

F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant

complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

G. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door


hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

H. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

I. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

J. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

K. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure

proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as

intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and

ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

3.02 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Aluminum Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and

frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

04-SCREENINGS BUILDING:

HARDWARE SET #02-01:

DOOR NUMBER:

101A

ROLL-UP DOOR – ALL HARDWARE FROM DOOR MANUFACTURER


DOOR NUMBER:

102A

1EA PADLOCK

4EA HINGE A5112 – Stainless Steel 4-1/2x4-1/2


DOOR NUMBER:

103A

WATERPROOF DOOR – ALL HARDWARE FROM DOOR MANUFACTURER


DOOR NUMBER:

301A, 301B

1SET SEAL 5050C HEAD & JAMB CHA NGP

1EA THRESHOLD 896S 628 NGP

1EA KICK PLATE 8400 12x1-1/2 LDW X B4E 630 IVE

1EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041-EDA 689 LCN

1EA ENTRANCE LOCK L9453 629 SCH

1EA EXIT DEVICE 9875 629 VON

1EA KEYPAD DL2700WP 26D TRI

3EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

4EA HINGE A5112 – Stainless Steel 4-1/2x4-1/2 629 IVE


08-OPERATIONS BUILDING:


DOOR NUMBER:

101A

1SET SEAL 5050C HEAD & JAMB CHA NGP

1EA THRESHOLD 896S 628 NGP


1EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041-EDA 689 LCN

1EA ENTRANCE LOCK L9453 629 SCH

1EA EXIT DEVICE 9875 629 VON

1EA KEYPAD DL2700WP 26D TRI




DOOR NUMBER:

102


1EA BATH PRIVACY LOCK L9040 (ANSI F22) 629 SCH




DOOR NUMBER:

103A

1EA STOREROOM LATCH L9465 629 SCH




GLAZING 08 80 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 08 80 00

GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those

specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this

Section:

1. Windows.

2. Doors.


A. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to

resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.

B. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading

within individual glass lites.

1.03 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape

sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and

compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current

sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12

inches (300 mm) square.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use

same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements

and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional

engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in

referenced standards.


1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's

"Glazing Manual."

2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark

glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name,

type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least

one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in

which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within

specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from

normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated

glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and

other indications of deterioration in coating.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which

laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within

specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed

from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning

laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge

separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes

exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which

insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within

specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic

seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning

insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the

obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


D. Refer to Section 01 78 36 for additional requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in

thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated

float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass[ as needed to comply with "Performance

Requirements" Article]. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-

treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance


Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated

float glass.

C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic-protection

testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 forWind Zone 1 when tested according to

ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated

for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on

the Project.

1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade.

2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above grade.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties

specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated

below:

1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).

2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.02 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I, complying with other

requirements specified and with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent.



a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear.

b. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite.

c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite.

d. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire.

C. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless

otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

D. Pyrolytic-Coated, Self-Cleaning, Low-Maintenance Glass: Clear float glass with a coating on

first surface having both photocatalytic and hydrophilic properties that act to loosen dirt and

to cause water to sheet evenly over the glass instead of beading.



a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Spotless Ti.

b. Cardinal Glass Industries; LoE2 Plus.

c. Pilkington North America; Activ.

d. PPG Industries, Inc.; SunClean.

2.03 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=816&mf=04&src=wd





http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=819&mf=04&src=wd






by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other

requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal.

2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

2.04 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to

maintain watertight seal, made from[ one of] the following:

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.

2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.

3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

2.05 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with

other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,

and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as

demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at

time of installation.

3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more

than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

4. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and

product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice

for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale

Environmental Chambers."

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing

agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for

applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

2.06 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric

tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without

spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application

indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure.

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.


B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with

adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with

a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5.

C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking).

E. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency

that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and

fire-protection rating indicated.

2.08 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type GL-#1 Clear float glass.

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.

2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

B. Glass Type GL-#2: Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.


2.09 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type GL-#3: Low-e-coated, tinted insulating glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 5.0 mm.

3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted heat-strengthened float glass.

4. Interspace Content: Argon.

5. Indoor Lite: Clear float glass.

6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface.

7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: U = 0.6 maximum.

8. Summer Daytime U-Factor: u = 0.6 maximum.

9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.82 maximum.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and

other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to

provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant

thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass

from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge

damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair

performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by

preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of

compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways

in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to

requirements in referenced glazing publications.

3.02 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush

with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes

to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs.

Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.

Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting

dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable

stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.03 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place


with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and

press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed

and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at

corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight

seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant

recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and

press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-

glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to

produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints

with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.04 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between

glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from

extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or

spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to

edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or

bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed

streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove

nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with

glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at

frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt,

scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged

from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.


GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 09 29 00

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Interior gypsum board.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. American Gypsum Company

2. CertainTeed Corporation

3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.

4. Lafarge North America Inc.

5. National Gypsum Company

6. PABCO Gypsum.

7. Temple-Inland, Inc.

8. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Foil-Backed Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Core: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type.


D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture-

and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=249

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456931045










3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.02 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced

galvanized steel sheet.

B. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.

2.03 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape: Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is

compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

2.04 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering

gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).

1. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than <Insert number> percent.

D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation."

E. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these

locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints

between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners

used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.


1. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations

approved by Owner’s Representative for visual effect.

E. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as

not intended to receive tape.

F. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C 840:

1. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior

Painting."

G. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove

from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise

damaged during drywall application.

H. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 09 51 23

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical tiles and concealed suspension systems for ceilings.



1. Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic

Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Samples: For each exposed product.



B. Evaluation reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.02 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,

"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

2.03 ACOUSTICAL TILES




following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. CertainTeed Corp.

3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Classification: Drop Panels, Fiberglass, Textured, Commercial

C. Color: White.

D. LR: 0.75 (White).

E. NRC: 0.55, Type E-400 mounting according to ASTM E 795.

F. CAC: 35.

G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

H. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).

I. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm).

2.04 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM



following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. CertainTeed Corp.

3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

C. Access: Upward.

D. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard moldings for

edges and penetrations complying with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal

of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system

runners.

2.05 WARRANTY




1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Other warranty requirements can be found in Section 01 78 36.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design

requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's








"Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply

with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

C. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as indicated on reflected ceiling plans.


RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09 65 16-1 SEPTEMBER 2013

SECTION 09 65 16

RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes vinyl sheet flooring.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of flooring. Include flooring layouts, locations of seams,

edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified in manufacturer's

standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-mm) sections.

1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches

(230 mm) long, of each color required.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient sheet flooring, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

B. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient sheet flooring shall comply with requirements of

FloorScore certification.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product

requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the

Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using


2.02 UNBACKED VINYL SHEET FLOORING

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into

the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc

2. Forbo Industries, Inc

3. Gerflor

4. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company







5. Mannington Mills, Inc>.

6. Polyflor, Ltd., Distributed by Gerbert Limited

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1913.

C. Thickness: 0.080 inch (2.0 mm)

D. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

E. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.

F. Seamless-Installation Method: Chemically bonded.

G. Colors and Patterns: As selected by CITY from full range of industry colors.

2.03 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring

manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit

resilient sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50g/L or less.

2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of

Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental

Chambers."

C. Seamless-Installation Accessories:

1. Chemical-Bonding Compound: Manufacturer's product for chemically bonding seams.

a. Bonding compound shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less.

b. Bonding compound shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and

Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using


D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:

1. Cove Strip: 1-inch (25-mm) radius provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring

manufacturer.

2. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by resilient

sheet flooring manufacturer.

E. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient sheet

flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to

ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.




1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by

resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring

manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range

on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9

pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to

resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent

than the following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb

of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.

Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative

humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient sheet flooring until it is the same temperature as the space where it is

to be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient

sheet flooring.

3.02 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.

B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

C. Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows:

1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6

inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.

3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.

4. Avoid cross seams.

D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent

fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting

by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other

nonpermanent marking device.

G. Install resilient sheet flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in

installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring

installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that


abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to

substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and

puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

I. Seamless Installation:

1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with

welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and

finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.

2. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical-bonding compound to

permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare seams and apply compound

to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on

flooring surfaces.

J. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove resilient sheet flooring 6 inches (152 mm) up vertical

surfaces. Support flooring at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip.

1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet

flooring.

B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from flooring surfaces before applying

liquid floor polish.

1. Apply one coat.

C. Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion.


PROTECTIVE COATINGS 09 91 00-1 OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 09 91 00

PROTECTIVE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope

1. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for coating and lining

work as shown and specified.

2. The extent of coating and lining work is shown in the Schedules and as specified herein.

3. The work includes the surface preparation, coating and lining application and finishing of

all interior and exterior items and surfaces throughout this Contract and existing items

and surfaces as described herein, except as otherwise shown or specified. Surface

preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop priming and

surface treatment specified under this and other sections of the work.

4. The term "paint" as used herein means all coating and lining systems materials, which

include the following:

a. Pretreatments.

b. Primers.

c. Intermediate Coats.

d. Finish Coats.

e. Sealers and fillers.

f. Other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.

5. Paint all exposed surfaces whether or not designated in any schedule except where the

natural finish of the material is specifically intended as a surface not to be painted.

6. The term "exposed" as used herein means all items not covered with concrete, plaster,

fireproofing or similar material.

7. Ducts, conduits and other materials with corrosion resistant surfaces which are in

chases, above finished ceilings, or other inaccessible areas do not require field

painting.

8. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as

adjacent similar materials or areas.

9. If color or finish is not designated, the CITY will select from standard colors available

for the materials systems specified.

10. Provide only a primer coat for structural and miscellaneous metals covered with

concrete, plaster, fireproofing or similar material.

11. The term "Submerged" refers to materials that may be under water under normal

operating conditions and extends to a convenient point at least twelve (12) inches

above the maximum water level.


12. Provide pipe markers as shown and specified herein.

13. Paint concrete and masonry surfaces in interior locations where specified.

B. Coordination

1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of

items that must be field painted in this Section.

2. Coordinate the painting of areas that are inaccessible once equipment has been

installed.

3. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the primer paints used.

4. Primers specified under other Sections must be compatible with the finish painting and

meet the requirements of this Section.

5. Review other Sections of these Specifications to ensure compatibility of the total

coatings system for the various substrates.

6. CONTRACTOR is responsible for the compatibility of all shop primed and field

painted items in this Contract.

7. Furnish information on the characteristics of the finish materials proposed for use, to

ensure that compatible prime coats are used.

8. Remove and reprime as required to avoid incompatible primer and finish coats.

9. Notify the CITY in writing of anticipated problems using the coating systems as

specified with substrates primed by others.

10. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for coordinating the shop painting of major

equipment items, and notifying the CITY to schedule shop inspections of the surface

preparation and coating application if desired. The CITY shall be notified at least

three (3) weeks in advance of the scheduled shop painting. The CONTRACTOR shall

secure a list from the CITY of major equipment items for which shop inspection is

desired.

11. Equipment on which the factory paint has been damaged shall require complete

repainting or spot painting as directed by the CITY.

12. Air quality permits and requirements and all other permits and standards are the

responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. Copies of permits shall be attached to the Field

Superintendent's copy of the specifications and shall be on the job site at all times.

C. Coating of Elements Exposed to Hydrogen Sulfide Splash or Vapors: The coating systems

to be used for steel, concrete and CMU elements that will be potentially exposed to

hydrogen sulfide vapors or splash are categorized into two systems:

1. HB-1 and HP-2: High-Build Coating systems as specified in Paragraphs 2.06 and 2.07

of this specification. Elements to be coated with this system are those which may

potentially be exposed to hydrogen sulfide vapors but not in close proximity to

hydrogen sulfide splash. Elements to be coated with this material include the

following:


a. All structural steel elements per Paragraph 2.06. The exterior surfaces shall be

painted, as a minimum, according to the requirements elsewhere in this

specification. Exposed structural steel lintels in CMU walls, per 1.01, C.1.b, shall

also be coated with the High-build system.

b. The entire vertical surfaces of the concrete walls and the concrete floor in the

dumpster pit shall be coated as specified in Paragraph 2.07.

2. VHB: Very-High-Build Coating system as specified in Paragraph 2.08 of this

specification. Elements to be coated with this system are those which may be exposed

not only to hydrogen sulfide vapors but also in close proximity to splashing material.

Elements to be coated with this material include the following:

a. All channels (influent and effluent) in and around the Screening and Grit Facility.

3. HPWR: Silane Penetrating Water Repellent as specified in Paragraph 2.09 of this

specification. Elements to be coated with this system are those horizontal and vertical

surfaces which are not exposed directly to hydrogen sulfide vapors and are within

interior spaces. Elements to be coated with this material include the following:

a. Interior floor slabs in the Screenings & Grit Facility (not including the floor slabs

in Dumpster Room #101.

b. Interior exposed concrete and CMU walls in the Screening & Grit Facility.

c. Exterior exposed concrete walls in the Screening & Grit Facility.

4. EP-2: Epoxy Deck Coating (Slip-Resistant) as specified in Paragraph 2.10 of this

specification. Elements to be coated with this system are those horizontal surfaces that

are located outside the building and exposed to weather. Elements to be coated with

this material include the following:

a. Exterior floor slabs accessible to foot traffic.

5. PT: Paint Coating as specified in SCHEDULE 09 9100_2 PAINTING SYSTEMS

LIST. Primer: P-8; Finish: F-10. Use the same manufacturer for primer and finish

systems. :

a. Interior walls as noted on drawings & finish schedules.

D. Painting Not Included: The following categories of Work are not included as part of the

field-applied finish Work:

1. Shop Priming: Shop priming of structural metal, miscellaneous metal fabrications,

other metal items and such fabricated components as shop-fabricated or factory-built

equipment.

2. Prefinished Items:

a. Painting of items furnished with factory finish such as baked-on enamel, porcelain,

polyvinyl fluoride or other similar finish is not required, unless otherwise shown or

specified. Typical items are as follows:

1) Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.

b. Touch up factory finished items with paint supplied by the item manufacturer.

c. Field paint damaged prefinished items as reviewed by the CITY.

3. Concrete unless otherwise noted.


4. Fiberglass items unless otherwise shown or specified.

5. Metal surfaces of aluminum, stainless steel, chromium, copper, bronze, brass,

monelmetal, lead and similar materials unless shown or specified.

6. Operating Parts and Labels:

a. Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and

damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts do not require

finish painting unless otherwise specified.

b. Do not paint over labels, code stamps, equipment identification, performance

rating, name or nomenclature plates.

c. Remove all paint, coating or splatter inadvertently placed on these surfaces.

7. Interior electrical conduit, unless noted.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Abrasive: Material used for blast-cleaning, such as steel, grit, garnet, aluminum oxide,

staturolite or slag.

B. Anchor Pattern: Profile or texture of surface, as a result of abrasive blasting. Also referred

to as anchor profile or blast profile.

C. ASTM: American Society for Testing Material.

D. AWWA: American Water Works Association.

E. Barrier Coating: Protective film isolating substrate or previous coat from environment.

F. Binder: Resin; polymer; film forming portion of paint.

G. Blast Cleaning: Cleaning by abrasive propelled at high speed.

H. Brush Off Blast: Blast cleaning to remove loose material, equal to NACE No. 4 or SSPC

SP-7.

I. Coating Manufacturer: The manufacturer and source of the coatings and linings products

furnished for this Contract.

J. Coatings and Linings: The term "coatings and/or linings" as used herein means all

protective coating systems and materials, which include surface preparations and all

pretreatments, primers, inorganic zinc, organic zinc, epoxies, polyurethanes, epoxy

phenolic, acrylics, phenolics, elastomeric polyurethane and other applied materials whether

used as prime, base, seal, mist, intermediate, or finish coats. As a general rule, linings are

for interior wet immersion, splash zone and wet duty exposures and coatings are for

atmospheric and other exposures.

K. Coating Superintendent: That employee of the coating and lining CONTRACTOR who is

designated by the coating and lining CONTRACTOR as the supervisor of all coating and

lining work and as the official representative of the coating and lining CONTRACTOR at

any project meetings or discussions.

L. Coating Supplier: The coating and/or lining manufacturer’s agent or technical


representatives who are supplying the materials directly to the CONTRACTOR.

M. Coating System: The combination of surface preparation, base (prime) coat, intermediate

coat(s) and finish coat(s) for a specific substrate under specific exposure conditions.

N. Commercial Blast: Blast cleaning of steel equal to NACE No. 3 or SSPC SP-6.

O. Curing: The process of polymerization or hardening of a coating or lining as it goes from a

liquid to a solid. Determination of completion of curing shall be in accordance with

manufacturers guidelines.

P. Delamination: Separation and peeling of one or more coats from an undercoat.

Q. Dewpoint: Temperature of a given air/water vapor mixture at which moisture

condensation starts usually on the substrate.

R. Drips (also called spotting): Paint that falls in drops causing either an uneven surface of

visible drop.

S. Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Depth of cured film, usually expressed in mils (0.001 inch).

T. Drying Time: Time interval between application and curing of material.

U. Dry Spray: Sandy or textured finish due to spray particle being partially dried before

reaching the surface. Dry spray is considered to be a coating defect.

V. Dry to Recoat: Time interval between application of material and ability to receive next

coat, may not be fully cured.

W. Dry to Touch: Time interval between application of material and ability to touch lightly

without damage, is not fully cured.

X. Fading: Reduction in brightness of color, particularly from long term sun exposure.

Y. Festoons: A string or garland appearance in the coating, suspended in a loop or curve

between two points.

Z. Finish Coat: Final coating or lining applied after intermediate coat(s).

AA. Fish Eye: Pigment separation, or pulling apart of paint film to form holes.

AB. Floating: Separation of paint pigment to surface of wet paint.

AC. Full Wet Coat: A heavy, glossy coat that is applied in a thickness almost heavy enough to

run or sag. Provides maximum possible thickness.

AD. Galvanized Steel: Zinc-coated steel, usually from dipping in bath of molten zinc.

AE. Gloss: Luster; sheen; brightness.

AF. Grit: Abrasive from slag and other sources used in blast cleaning.

AG. Hardener: Catalyst; curing agent.

AH. Holiday: Coating or lining defect such as a Pinhole, void, skip, or other discontinuity in

the coating film.


AI. Immersion Interior: Areas of a tank in contact or potentially in contact with the liquid

contained. Also reference interior wet area.

AJ. Incompatibility: Inability of a coating to perform well over another or substrate coating

because of bleeding, poor bonding, or lifting of old coating; or inability of a coating to

perform well on a substrate.

AK. Induction Time: Time interval between mixing of components and chemical crosslinking

for satisfactory application of multi-component coatings and linings. Also referred to as

"sweat in" time.

AL. Inorganic Coating: Coating with inorganic binder (e.g., silicate or phosphate) rather than

organic (e.g., of petroleum, animal, or plant origin). Commonly inorganic zinc (IOZ).

AM. Interior Wet Area: Refers to all interior surfaces of the water holding vessel and wet riser

surfaces when such risers are greater than 24 inches in diameter. The entire tank area

whether actually immersed or in the attic space is included. The terms interior wet and

immersion are used interchangeably.

AN. Intermediate Coat(s): Coat(s) applied after prime or base coat and prior to finish coat(s).

AO. Laitance: White or gray weakened material floated to the surface of new concrete. This

layer is not dense sound concrete and requires removal prior to application of high

performance coatings and especially linings.

AP. Lifting: Softening and raising of an undercoat by solvent in applied topcoat.

AQ. Livered: The progressive, irreversible increase in consistency of a pigment-vehicle

combination. Livering in the majority of cases arises from a chemical reaction to the

vehicle with the solid dispersed materials, but it may also result from polymerization of the

vehicle. The irreversible character of the changes in the livered material distinguishes it

from thixotropic "build-up", which is reversible.

AR. Mil: 0.001 inch.

AS. Mill Scale: The heavy oxide layer formed during hot fabrication or heat treatment of

metals. Cathodic to its steel substrate.

AT. Mist Coat: A partially complete coat applied with a more rapid gun motion than a full wet

coat. The mist coat should displace the air in porous coatings such as inorganic zinc

primer.

AU. NACE International: National Association of Corrosion Engineers.

AV. Near White Blast: A good grade of abrasive blast cleaning of steel, equal to NACE No. 2

or SSPC-SP10.

AW. NSF: National Sanitation Foundation.

AX. NWS: National Welding Society.

AY. Orange Peel: Hills and valleys in paint resembling the skin of an orange.

AZ. Overspray: Dry spray, particularly such paint that failed to strike the intended surface and

adheres to adjacent or other surfaces.


BA. Peeling: Paint curling or stripping from substrate.

BB. Pigment: Solid, opaque, frequently colored component of paint.

BC. Pinhole: Film defect characterized by small pore-like flaws in a coating which extends

entirely through the applied film and have the general appearance of pin pricks when

viewed by reflecting light. The term is rather generally applied to holes caused by solvent

bubbling, moisture, other volatile products, or the presence of extraneous particles in the

applied film.

BD. Pot Life: Time interval after mixing of components during which the coating can be

satisfactorily applied.

BE. Primer or Prime Coat: First coat applied to a substrate usually containing inhibitive

pigments when formulated for metals.

BF. Profile: Surface texture, particularly of abrasive blast cleaned steel.

BG. Quality Assurance Representative (QAR): An individual qualified to inspect the work,

release hold points and perform the required quality assurance of the project.

BH. Ropiness: Forming sticky glutinous strings or threads resembling ropes.

BI. Run: Sag; curtain; associated with too heavy of a wet application of a paint film.

BJ. Sag: Run; curtain.

BK. Seal Coat: Coat applied to a prime coat for the purpose of sealing to prevent adverse

affects of gasification.

BL. Shelf Life: Maximum storage time for which a material may be stored without losing its

usefulness.

BM. Shop Coat: Coat of paint applied in fabricating shop.

BN. Skip Weld: A non-continuous weld bead pattern which repeats for the length of the metal

connection. Sometimes referred to as a stitch weld.

BO. Spreading Rate: Area covered by a unit volume of paint at a specific thickness.

BP. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings, formerly Steel Structures Painting Council.

BQ. Tack Coat: A light thinned coat applied to the surface by roller or spray and then allowed

to flash off until it is just tacky usually taking a matter of minutes. The full wet coat is

then applied which provides for thicker film build.

BR. Thinner: Reducer; solvent added to reduce paint viscosity for easier application.

BS. Thorough Drying: Curing of paint film through entire thickness as opposed to drying only

on the surface.

BT. Tiecoat: An adhesive coat applied to a coating to enhance the bonding of a topcoat.

BU. TCLP: Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure. A standard test used to determine if a

solid waste is considered a hazardous waste by virtue of its toxicity. It is intended to

simulate the leaching of toxic constituents that would take place in a landfill.


BV. TPC: Technical Practices Committee of NACE.

BW. TSR: Technical Service Representative.

BX. UL: Underwriters Laboratory.

BY. Vehicle: Liquid portion of coating materials; resin and solvent components of the coating.

BZ. Weld Spatter: Beads of metal scattered near seam during welding.

CA. White Metal Abrasive Blast: Highest level of abrasive blast cleaning of steel, NACE No. 1

or SSPC-SP5.


A. Applicator Qualifications

1. Submit the name and experience record of the painting applicator.

2. Include list of utility or industrial installations painted, responsible officials, architects,

or engineers concerned with the Project and the approximate Contract price.

B. Manufacturer. All paint products shall be supplied by the same manufacturer unless

otherwise approved.

C. Reference Standards

1. OSHA 1910.144, Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards.

2. SSPC Volume 2, Systems and Specifications, Surface Preparation Guide and Paint

Application Specifications.

D. Compatibility

1. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ensure that the shop applied coatings are

compatible with the field applied coatings. In cases where shop-applied primers and

coatings on materials and equipment furnished by suppliers are products different from

those described in the Specifications, the CONTRACTOR shall verify compatibility

with the specified field applied coating system. If requested by the CITY, "pull-off

strength" tests conforming to ASTM D3359, Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test or

ASTM D4541, Pull off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Tester, shall be

performed to establish compatibility.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples

1. Submit paint samples for review of color and texture only.

2. Provide a listing of the material and application for each coat of each finish sample.

3. Submit sample of each type of marker and sign specified.

B. Shop Drawings


1. Submit copies of manufacturer's technical information, including paint label analysis

and application instructions for each material proposed for use.

a. Include anchor pattern required for each base coat or prime coat product.

b. Include complete jobsite mixing and preparation procedures, including straining

instructions.

c. Include manufacturer's standard product data sheets for each coating.

d. Include solids percentage (by volume) content for each coating.

e. Include volatile organic content (VOC) in pounds/gallon for each coating.

f. Include manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness ranges for each coating.

g. Include manufacturer's maximum and minimum recommended times between coats

or topcoating with another product for each coating.

h. Include MSDS for all coatings, linings and thinners.

2. List each material and cross-reference to the specific paint and finish system and

application. Identify by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

3. Submit copies of manufacturer's complete color charts for each coating system.

4. Provide certifications from manufacturers verifying that the factory applied prime

coats are compatible with specified finish coatings.

5. Pipe Markers:

a. Copies of manufacturer's technical brochure.

b. "Standard" and "Custom" color charts.

c. List of standard signs and available color combinations.

d. Color and/or text selection criteria for non-standard or "custom made" pipe

markers required to comply with the standard piping color and legend guide for the

CITY’s wastewater treatment plants. (See Schedule 09940-3).

6. Provide completed copies of the CITY’s Paint and Protective Coating Inspection Log

for each major equipment piece (sample included at end of this Section).

7. In cases where paint products of a manufacturer other than those listed in Painting

Systems List are proposed for this project, furnish to the CITY a certificate from

proposed manufacturer stating that his products are equal to those specified. In

addition, sufficient information shall be submitted to enable CITY to determine that

the proposed coatings are equivalent to those named. Requests for review of

equivalency will be accepted only from the CONTRACTOR, and will be considered

only after the contract has been awarded.

C. Painting Lists and Schedules

1. Provide detailed and complete list of every surface to be painted under this Contract in

accordance with Subparagraph 2-3.C. of this Section.

a. Arrange list in a logical order by building, then area or room, the specific surface

within each area or room.

b. Piping color code list shall be included, but does not need to follow the above

room-by-room format.


c. List shall include the condition of each surface prior to field painting (e.g., new,

primed; new, unprimed; new, galvanized; existing, painted); the proposed painting

system including surface preparation; and the intended color the surface is to be

painted.

2. Provide detailed and complete list of all proposed applications techniques for all

product and substrate conditions. Include specific materials and methods for each

location.

3. Submit detailed pipe legend schedule and information regarding piping markers or tags

for each type of service. Include text, lettering size, pipe diameter (with insulation if

applicable), lettering and background colors, banding information, and method of

fastening to the pipe.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data

1. Submit a detailed maintenance manual including the following information:

a. Product name and number.

b. Name, address and telephone number of manufacturer and local distributor.

c. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning.

d. Detailed procedures for light repairs such as scratches and staining.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.

A. Delivery of Materials

1. Deliver all materials to the job site in original, unopened packages and containers

bearing manufacturer's name and label, including the following information:

a. Name or title of material.

b. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.

c. Manufacturer's name.

d. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.

e. Thinning instructions where recommended.

f. Application instructions.

g. Color name and number.

B. Storage of Materials

1. Store only acceptable project materials on site in a suitable location. Keep area clean

and accessible. Restrict storage to paint materials and related equipment.

2. Temperature of storage area shall be kept between 65oF and 90

oF at all times.

3. Comply with health and fire regulations including the Occupational Safety and Health

Act of 1970.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions


1. Thoroughly clean and remove excessive dust before painting is started in any area.

2. Thoroughly clean and remove oil, grease, dust, dirt, and other foreign matter from all

walls and piping prior to painting.

3. Clean areas where painting operations have started using only commercial vacuum

equipment.

B. Environmental Requirements

1. Apply water-base paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the

surrounding air temperatures are between 55oF and 90

oF unless otherwise permitted by

the paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

2. Apply other paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the

surrounding air temperatures are between 65oF and 95

oF, unless otherwise permitted

by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

3. Apply no paint to surfaces damp or wet from snow, rain, fog or mist, or when the

relative humidity exceeds 85 percent.

4. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only when areas and surfaces to

be painted are enclosed and heated during application and drying periods to within the

paint manufacturer's recommended temperature limits.

5. Provide adequate illumination and ventilation in all areas where painting operations

are in progress.

C. Protection

1. Cover or otherwise protect finished Work of other trades and surfaces not being

painted concurrently or not to be painted.

2. Take precautions necessary to prevent dust and dirt from coming in contact with

surfaces cleaned for painting and with surfaces freshly painted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIAL QUALITY

A. Provide best grade coatings suitable for use in wastewater treatment plants. Materials not

displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be

acceptable.

B. Provide primers produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only paint

manufacturer's recommended thinners to recommended limits.

C. Provide durable and washable paints, pipe marker and safety signs. Use materials which

will withstand normal washing as required to remove grease, oil, chemicals, etc., without

showing discoloration, loss of gloss, staining, or other damage.

2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS


A. Substitutions that decrease the film thickness, the number of coats, or the quality of the

surface preparation or the generic type of coating specified will not be considered.

B. Approved manufacturers must furnish the same color selection including accent colors in

all coating systems as the manufacturers specified.

2.03 COLORS AND FINISHES

A. Refer to Schedule 09 91 00-2 for surface preparation and paint systems.

B. Color Selection: Colors not specified in the Contract Documents will be selected at the

time of shop drawing submittal. Piping colors shall conform to the standard piping color

and legend guide for the CITY’s wastewater treatment plants. (See Schedule 09 91 00-3).

C. Prior to commencing any work under this Section, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for

approval a detailed list of each and every surface to be painted. Associated with each

surface shall be noted the paint system proposed for use and the color (from the

manufacturer's color chart) intended. Where colors are indicated in this section the

CONTRACTOR shall fill in the proposed color. Where colors are not indicated, the

CONTRACTOR shall leave blanks and the CITY will fill in these colors. Complete color

charts shall be a part of this submittal.

D. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Final acceptance of colors

will be from samples submitted and approved.

E. Color Pigments: Pure, nonfading, applicable types to suit the substrates and service

indicated. Lead content shall not exceed amount permitted by federal, state and local

government laws and regulations.

F. Piping, Equipment and Marker Color Code: (See Schedule 09 91 00-3).

1. Piping and marker color codes are listed in the standard piping color and legend guide

for the CITY’s wastewater treatment plants, and include piping color, banding color(s),

and marker background and letter color for the most common piping services and

equipment at the wastewater plant.

a. If a color or finish is not designated, the CITY will select from the paint

manufacturer's standard or custom colors, or select a non-standard color

formulation.

b. Pipe bands shall be 1 inch wide, and double or triple bands shall be 1 inch apart.

c. Pipe bands shall be located next to each piping marker; next to all pipe fitting(s)

where a change in direction or elevation in the pipeline occurs; and at 25-foot

intervals along long straight runs of piping.

2. Pipe hangers and supports shall, in general, be painted the same color as the pipe.

a. Large pipe supports such as steel beams, posts, columns, etc., may be painted a

different color if so selected by the CITY.

b. Large posts, columns, supports, etc. which are unavoidable in the finished

construction and which obstruct walkways, limit safe headroom, or are otherwise

deemed potentially hazardous by the CITY shall be painted a high-visibility color

or striped colors, as directed by the CITY.

c. Pipe hangers or supports which are common to piping of more than one service


shall be painted gray.

3. As used for this Contract, the terms "Piping, Equipment and Marker Color Code",

"Piping Color Code" and "Color Code" shall be interpreted as applying to and

including all valves, and similar items contained within the limits of the piping system

and which are components of the piping system's service function.

4. All existing exposed and in-plant piping shall be SSPC-SP3 power tool cleaned and

color code painted same as required for new piping.

G. In general, and unless otherwise indicated, the finish color coat of paint shall be gloss or

semigloss on metal work and matte finish or flat on masonry work.

2.04 PAINTING SYSTEMS

A. Refer to Schedule 09 91 00-2 at the end of this Section for the Painting Systems List and

also as outlined in Paragraphs 2.06, 2.07 and 2.08 of this Section.

2.05 PIPING MARKERS

A. Manufacturer. Provide products produced by one of the following:

1. W.H. Brady Company.

2. Seton Name Plate Corporation.

3. Or approved equal.

B. General

1. Piping markers shall be formed from laminated plastic. All printing shall be sealed

with a formed butyrate plastic film. Letter and background color shall conform to

standard piping color and legend guide for the CITY’s wastewater treatment plants or

ordered by the CITY.

a. Markers for piping up to 6-inch inside diameter shall be preformed to completely

wrap around the pipe requiring no adhesive, straps or springs.

b. Markers for pipes over 6-inch inside diameter shall be preformed to the contour of

the pipe and attached with Type 316 stainless steel spring fasteners.

1) A minimum of two (2) spring fasteners shall be provided for each marker.

2) Large markers, or markers for larger diameter pipes, shall require additional

spring fasteners in order to assure that the markers lay flat and smooth on the

pipe surface and that they are held securely in place.

3) Springs shall be correctly sized for each pipe and marker combination and

shall provide a tight fit of the marker around the pipe while the spring is

stretched approximately one-half of its total range. Overstretched or loose

springs will be rejected.

4) All miscellaneous hardware, including screws, grommets, etc., for these

markers and fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

c. All pipe markers shall be securely held to the pipe surface, so that accidental

contact or jostling, or normal equipment vibrations or impact, does not dislodge or

misalign the marker.


2. For pipes under 3/4-inch outside diameter: Provide Type 316 stainless steel tags, 1-1/2

inch diameter, with depressed 1/4-inch high black filled letters above 1/2-inch high

black filled numbers. Attach tags to pipes with circlets of stranded Type 316 stainless

steel wire rope or clear nylon straps.

3. Each marker shall consist, in general, of two lines of legend, and a directional flow

arrow.

a. Legend shall be descriptive of the pipe contents and function, and shall indicate

the approximate operating temperature and pressure of the contents, if different

from ambient.

b. Legends given in piping color and legend guide are given as a guide only as to

what may be directed by the CITY for primary service names.

4. The size of lettering and marker shall conform to ANSI A13.1.

5. Location of Markers:

a. Adjacent to each valve and "TEE" or "WYE" connection.

b. At each branch and riser take-off.

c. On both sides of a pipe as it passes through a wall, floor or ceiling.

d. On all horizontal and vertical pipe runs at 15-foot intervals.

6. All piping installed, or relocated, under this Contract shall be marked as, or tagged as,

described above.

7. All pipe markers shall be located so as to be readable from a normal viewing position

from the floor below the pipe.

8. Prior to the marking of any pipelines, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the CITY, a

detailed pipe legend schedule which shall include the following information for each

type of service:

a. Brief narrative description.

b. Primary Name (line one).

c. Secondary Name (Line two).

d. Lettering size and pipeline outside diameter.

e. Lettering and background colors and pipe banding information.

f. Contents of pipe which are above ambient temperature or pressure shall be

identified as such in the legend.

2.06 HB-1: STRUCTURAL STEEL – (HIGH BUILD COATING)

A. All Structural Steel elements shall be coated by one of the three following coating systems.

The exposed portions of steel lintels in the interior of CMU walls shall also be coated. For

each system the coating thickness shown (mils) shall mean Dry Film Thickness (DFT).

1. System No. 1, by Tnemec to consist of the following. Total system thickness of 12.5 to

23.5 mils.

a. Prime Coat – Omnithane Series 1; 2.5 to 3.5 mils thick. Contact manufacturer’s

representative to discuss anchor pattern of blast and recoat window of prime.

b. Intermediate Coat – Perma-Shield Series 446; 5.0 to 10.0 mils thick.


c. Finish Coat – Perma-Shield Series 446; 5.0 to 10.0 mils thick.

2. System No. 2, by Carboline to consist of the following. Total system thickness of 18.0

to 24.0 mils.

a. Prime Coat – Carboguard 60; 3.0 to 4.0 mils thick for shop coated steel. Primer not

required for field applications. Contact manufacturer’s representative to discuss

anchor pattern of blast and recoat window of prime.

b. Finish Coat – Plasite 4500 S; 15.0 to 20.0 mils thick.

3. System No. 3, by Sherwin-Williams to consist of the following. Total system thickness

of 16.0 to 20.0 mils.

a. Prime Coat – Sher-Glass FF; 8.0 to 10.0 mils thick. Contact manufacturer’s

representative to discuss anchor pattern of blast and recoat window of prime.

b. Finish Coat – Sher- Glass FF: 8.0 to 10.0 mils thick.

2.07 HB-2: SELECTED CONCRETE AND CMU WALLS, EXPOSED TO HYDROGEN SULFIDE

VAPORS – (HIGH BUILD COATING)

A. The interior surfaces of the concrete walls of the dumpster pit, shall be coated by one of the

three following systems. For each system the coating thickness shown (mils) shall mean Dry

Film Thickness (DFT).

a. System No. 1, by Tnemec to consist of the following. Total system thickness of 12.0

to 21.0 mils.

i. Prime Coat – Omnithane Series 1; 2.0 to 3.0 mils thick.

ii. Intermediate Coat – Perma-Shield Series 446; 6.0 to 9.0 mils thick.

iii. Finish Coat – Perma-Shield Series 446; 6.0 to 9.0 mils thick.

b. System No. 2, by Carboline to consist of the following. Total system thickness of

20.0 to 40.0 mils.

i. Prime Coat – Sanitile 600; 5.0 to 20.0 mils dry film thickness depending on

porosity of the CMU until obtaining a pinhole free surface.

ii. Finish Coat – Plasite 4500 S; 15.0 to 20.0 mils thick.

c. System No. 3, by Sherwin-Williams to consist of the following. Total system

thickness of 16.0 to 20.0 mils.

i. Prime Coat – Kem Cati-Coat; 8.0 to 10.0 mils thick.

ii. Finish Coat – Sher- Glass FF: 8.0 to 10.0 mils thick.

2.08 VHB: CONCRETE WALLS AND CHANNELS EXPOSED TO HYDROGEN SULFIDE

VAPORS AND SPLASH – (VERY HIGH BUILD COATING)

A. The concrete surfaces outlined in 1.01.C.2 shall be coated by one of the three following

coating systems. For each system the coating thickness shown (mils) shall mean Dry Film

Thickness (DFT).

1. System No.1, by Tnemec to consist of the following. Total system thickness of 54.0 to

86.0 mils, in addition to first coat as needed.

a. First Coat – Mortar-Clad Series 218 or 215 surfacing epoxy to fill and create a


pinhole free substrate.

b. Second Coat – Epoxoprime Series 201 applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils (100% solids

modified polyamine epoxy).

c. Third Coat – Perma-Shield Series 436 applied at 50.0 to 80.0 mils (100% solids

fiber-reinforced modified polyamine epoxy).

2. System No. 2, by Sherwin-Williams to consist of the following. Total system thickness

of 44.0 to 131.0 mils in addition to first coat as needed.

a. First Coat – General Polymers TPM #723 Vertical Repair Mortar to fill all voids and

imperfections. b. Second Coat – Dura-Plate 235 applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils

(100% solids epoxy).

b. Third Coat – Cor-Cote SC Plus applied at 40.0 to 125.0 mils (100% solids epoxy).

3. System No.3, by Carboline to consist of the following. Total system thickness of 40.0 to

66.0 mils dry film thickness.

a. First Coat – Carboguard 510 applied up to 2” to flush out smooth the surface of the

substrate; Fill shrinkage cracks with Surfacing Epoxy Carboguard 501 (Carboguard

501 is a cementitious repair mortar.)

b. Second Coat – Apply Phenoline 311 at 4.0-6.0 mils dry film thickness (only required

if the concrete is moist).

c. Third Coat – Apply Plasite 4500S at 40.0 – 60.0 mils dry film thickness.

2.09 HPWR: CONCRETE WALLS AND FLOORS NOT EXPOSED DIRECTLY TO HYDROGEN

SULFIDE SPLASH

A. The concrete surfaces not exposed directly to hydrogen sulfide splash (identified in Section

09 91 00b Schedule_3 as HPWR) shall be sprayed with Hydrozo Silane in accordance with

specifications and directions in Section 07 19 00 Water Repellents..

2.10 EXTERIOR CONCRETE SLABS

A. For exterior concrete slabs provide an epoxy coating with the following physical

characteristics:

1. Viscosity: 55-60 k.u.

2. Wet Film Thickness: Maximum 6 mils wet per coat.

3. Dry Film Thickness: Minimum 4 mils dry in two or more coats.

4. Weight Solids: 34-38%.

5. Volume Solids: 29-31%

6. VOC: 550 grams per liter, maximum

7. Provide approved grit medium as required by manufacturer to provide a slip resistant

surface in the finished top coat, but not less than four (4) pounds of grit per 100 square

feet of coating.

8. Surface Preparation: Surface to be treated must be free of all dirt, grease, and foreign

material and properly prepared per manufacturer’s instructions. Etch with an Etching


Cleaner acceptable to manufacturer. Provide self-priming on concrete in two or more

coats.


3.01 EXAMINATION AND VERIFICATION OF CONDITION

A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be

performed and notify the CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and

timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until conditions are

suitable.

B. Do not coat over chalk, dust, dirt, rust, scale, moisture, oil, surface contaminants, coatings

that have exceeded the manufacturer's re-coat guidelines, or conditions otherwise

detrimental to the formation of a durable, high quality coating system.

C. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for proper surface preparation. If improper adhesions

or surface occur, the surface shall be corrected at no additional cost to the CITY.

3.02 SAFETY AND REGULATORY COMPLIANCE

A. The CITY's rules, policies and safety requirements shall be followed including:

1. Hard hats are required to be worn in the work place.

2. Safety shoes and safety goggles/glasses are required to be worn in the work place.

3. Smoking within the buildings is strictly prohibited.

4. Site parking shall be designated by the CITY.

5. Confined space entry.

B. Comply with the bid documents and the Metropolitan Sewer District (MSD) of Greater

Cincinnati Safety Program and Guidelines. Safety coordination shall be through the MSD

Safety Officer.

C. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all workers and others coming in contact with abrasive

blasted and coated surfaces shall always wear clean gloves, clothing and shoe covering.

These measures are to prevent contamination of the abrasive blasted and coated surfaces.

Compliance with all other measures to prevent contamination that may lead to premature

coating and lining failure is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility.

D. Coatings for surfaces in contact with wastewater being treated shall not impart any organic

or inorganic content in excess of the maximum contaminant level established by applicable

laws or regulations. Revise painting system specified herein to provide manufacturer's

regulatory agency approved coating system where required.

E. Provide fire extinguishers and post caution signs warning against smoking and open flame

when working with flammable materials.

F. Display prominent warning signs indicating "WARNING - PAINTING AND ABRASIVE

BLASTING WORK UNDERWAY" throughout the job site wherever surface preparation


or coating and lining operations are underway. Signs shall be at clearly visible locations

near all points of access by person or vehicle to the job site and immediate work area.

1. Six (6) signs shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR, located where directed by the

QAR.

2. These signs shall be no less than 3' x 3' in size, and shall be placed at clearly visible

locations near all points of access by person or vehicle to the work area(s). Signs shall

be bright orange background with stenciled or neatly painted white letters.

3.03 GENERAL PREPARATION

A. Delivery of Materials

1. Deliver all coating and lining materials, thinners and solvents to the job site in original,

new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label,

and the following information.

a. Name or title of material.

b. Manufacturer's stock number, batch number, and date of manufacture.

c. Manufacturer's name.

d. Contents by volume, for major pigment, binder (or resin) and vehicle constituents.

e. Thinning instructions where recommended.

f. Application instructions.

g. Color name and number.

h. Shelf life expiration date.

i. Pot life, at various ambient temperatures.

j. Material safety data sheet.

k. Volume and weight of container.

2. Deliver all cleaners in unopened containers which are labeled to indicate manufacturer,

product and MSDS data.

3. Deliver all brushes and rollers in unopened packages which are labeled to indicate

manufacturer and product.

4. Delivery of abrasive in bulk transfer trucks or abrasive manufacturer’s bags or bulk

nylon sacks, bearing the manufacturer's name, label and the following information:

a. Name of material.

b. Manufacturer's name.

c. Contents and net weight of the contents.

d. Mesh size of material.

e. Impurities or contaminants.

B. Storage of Materials

1. Store only materials which have been previously approved for this Project on the job

site.

2. Store all materials in a clean, dry, lighted and environmentally controlled area, such as


a storage trailer, which shall be furnished and maintained by the CONTRACTOR.

3. Maintain coating and lining material storage area between 60oF and 90

oF at all times.

4. In the event the storage area temperature drops to 40oF or below, all paint and coating

materials shall be inspected by the coating manufacturer’s representative to determine

suitability of its use and compliance with project bid documents. Any unacceptable

material shall be immediately removed from the job site and replaced by the

CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the CITY.

5. Do not store coatings or lining materials in CITY's buildings or structures unless the

CITY’s permission is granted in writing.

C. Handling of Materials

1. Handle materials carefully to prevent inclusion of foreign materials, including abrasive

dust and abrasives.

2. Do not open containers or mix components until necessary preparatory Work has been

completed, the appropriate inspection performed and the inspection hold point

released. Application shall immediately follow proper mixing and induction if

required.

D. Protection

1. Protect private and public facilities from overspray, overblast and dust. Protection

shall include, but not be limited to, residences, businesses, churches and vehicles

including private and government vehicles frequenting the jobsite.

2. Cover or protect all surfaces and equipment not scheduled to be coated or painted.

Remove protective coverings at the conclusion of the Project.

3. Take precautions necessary to prevent dust, dirt and moisture from coming in contact

with surfaces cleaned for coating and lining and with surfaces freshly painted.

4. The CONTRACTOR shall provide 6 mil containment ground barriers covered with

tarps under all equipment and coating mixing areas, which is located on the CITY’s

property. All organic compounds, solvents, oil or contaminants spilled on the CITY’s

property shall be immediately cleaned up, removed and disposed of in a responsible

manner to the satisfaction of the CITY by the CONTRACTOR.

5. Remove all hardware, hardware accessories, hatches, nameplates, lighting fixtures,

electrical cover plates, and similar items in order to facilitate the complete coating of

the items and/or the adjacent surfaces. Tape and masking protection will be acceptable

only where it is not possible to remove the hardware or fixture mentioned.

a. Following completion of coating of each area, clean and properly reinstall the

removed items.

b. Replace all lost and missing items removed for coating work.

c. Replace all ferrous metal fasteners and washers with similar size stainless steel

fasteners.

3.04 PRECLEANING AND SURFACE PREPARATION - METAL SURFACES


A. General

1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, material and equipment to thoroughly

preclean the interior and exterior substrates as scheduled. The precleaning is to

include all substrates and equipment to be coated.

2. Perform all precleaning and surface preparation procedures in strict accordance with

the coating manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate and environmental

condition.

B. Precleaning

1. Preclean all interior and exterior surfaces, of all oil, grease, dirt, chalk, wastewater

treatment residues, contaminants and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-

SP1, Solvent Cleaning and SSPC-SP12 Water Jetting as follows:

a. Using 190oF to 210

oF hot water from a pressure washer with chemical injector,

apply a cleaning solution at a rate of 10 to 12 ounces concentrated solution per

gallon of water applied. This heated solution shall be applied to the surface at the

minimum pressure of the pressure washer. Allow a minimum contact time of 2 to

3 minutes.

b. The cleaning shall continue by power washing with Turbo nozzles at pressures of

4,000 psi minimum.

c. Cleaned areas shall be triple rinsed with 190oF to 210

oF water at 4,000 psi

minimum with approved nozzles.

d. Cleaned surfaces shall be equal to WJ-4.

e. Surface cleanliness shall be equal to SC-1.

2. The cleaned surface will be inspected by the Quality Assurance Representative for

removal of iron residue, magnesium residue, calcium, chalk, dirt and contaminants.

Contaminants listed under SSPC-SP12, SC-1 including water-soluble chlorides, iron-

soluble salts and sulfates shall be removed. The surface shall have neutrality in the

range of 7.0 to 7.5 pH. The surface shall be free of any chlorides, chalk, dirt, debris,

oil, contaminants and any other foreign matter.

NOTE: Cleaning solution may be applied with an airless pump at the specified

concentration.

C. Surface Preparation

1. General:

a. The following surface preparation industry standards shall be used for this Project:

NACE Number SSPC Number Cleaning Description

SP 1 Solvent

SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

No. 1 SP 5 White Metal Abrasive Blast

No. 2 SP 10 Near-White Metal Abrasive Blast

No. 3 SP 6 Commercial Abrasive Blast

No. 4 SP 7 Brush-Off Blast

SP 11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal


No. 5 SP 12 Water Jetting

2. Power Tool Surface Preparation:

a. All precleaned surfaces which have passed inspection shall be power tool cleaned

as the intermediate surface preparation. Power tool cleaning shall be as follows:

1) Power tool cleaning shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP3 or SSPC-SP11.

2) The power tools shall be operated to remove weld spatter and to radius or

dress rough welds and to radius edges to 1/8 inch.

3) Areas to be abrasive blasted to bare metal shall be power tool cleaned to

remove weld spatter, laminations, slivers to contour rough welds and to radius

edges to 1/8-inch by grinding.

4) All areas that are cleaned with power tools not scheduled for abrasive blasting

shall be blown down with oil free/moisture free air, vacuum cleaned or

brushed off to remove all dust and contamination that occurs during power tool

cleaning.

5) Substrates scheduled to be power tool cleaned and dusted off shall be spot

primed and not permitted to be left uncoated. Interior power tool cleaning

shall be used to remove and feather out peeling or chipped paint, rust, runs or

other imperfections.

3. Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation:

a. Blast cleaning shall comply with the NACE, SSPC and ASTM standards and

guidelines.

b. Dry abrasive blast cleaning techniques shall be utilized.

c. The abrasives shall be maintained free from oil, dust, moisture, chemicals, salts

and other impurities.

d. The type and size of abrasive for a particular substrate shall be selected to give a

properly prepared surface consistent with the anchor profile and cleanliness of the

scheduled coating system.

1) Prior to prime coat application, the Quality Assurance Representative will

verify anchor pattern depth by measurement with Testex replica tape. These

measurements will be taken following blow down and/or vacuum cleaning.

e. The compressed air supply used for blasting shall be free of oil, water, or other

contaminants. Adequate separator traps and filters shall be provided, and shall be

purged of oil and water throughout the blasting operation.

f. All compressed air shall be diverted through a fan cooled after-cooler prior to

abrasive blasting pots, conventional air spray equipment, pneumatic tools or other

pneumatic devices.

g. Compressed air shall be filtered to remove all oil.

h. Abrasive grit shall be discharged at a pressure of 100 psi, measured at the nozzle.

In no case shall the discharge pressure at the nozzle fall below 90 psi. Nozzle

pressures from 100 psi to 130 psi are acceptable.

i. Abrasive blasting nozzles shall be the long venturi type. Nozzles shall be regularly

inspected and shall be replaced when wear reaches one additional nozzle size.

j. Abrasive blasting shall not be conducted when the surface temperatures are less

than 5oF above the dew point, or when the relative humidity of the surrounding air


is greater than 85%. Abrasive blasting may continue in controlled environments

that comply with the specified conditions.

k. Abrasive blasted surfaces shall be coated as soon after the blasting work is

completed as possible. In no case shall blast cleaned surfaces be allowed to stand

overnight without being coated unless the affected area is dehumidified.

l. Abrasive blasting shall not be permitted on any surfaces in close proximity to other

surfaces which have recently been coated.

m. For job site abrasive blasting, protect all adjacent areas, surfaces and equipment

not to be blast cleaned from blast overspray, overblast, grit and dust resulting from

the blasting operations.

1) Protect adjacent areas and all work areas using containment netting around the

surface undergoing blast cleaning.

2) Protect electrical enclosures, electrical conduit, wiring, antennas, cables and

apparatus from dust, debris and paint.

3) Clean up all dust, grit, blasting residue and debris at the end of each workday.

n. Abrasive blasted surfaces shall be blown down with dry, oil-free, filtered air,

followed by vacuum cleaning and be inspected by the Quality Assurance

Representative and checked with cellophane tape and replica tape test procedures.

The surface shall be free of all residue, dust or other contamination that

jeopardizes maximum adhesion of the coating.

4. Surfaces shall be primed and/or treated, as specified, as soon after completion of

surface preparation as practicable, but in any event before any visible or detrimental

corrosion or contamination occurs. A prepared surface, which becomes corroded or

contaminated, shall be prepared again before treating and/or priming at no additional

cost to the CITY.

5. Before application of first field coat, abraded areas of the shop coat on metal surfaces

shall be touched up with paint of the same type as the shop coat, even to the extent of

applying the entire coat if necessary. Such touch-up coats shall be in addition to, and

not considered as the first field coat. Deteriorated surfaces shall be cleaned to bare

metal per SP-6 or SP-10 as applicable before applying the touch-up coat.

3.05 CONTAINMENT AND WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Waste material generated by abrasive blasting operations is a solid waste and shall be

handled in the following order:

1. Contained.

2. Collected.

3. Stored.

4. Evaluated.

5. Properly disposed.

B. Laws, Regulations and Ordinances: It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to

comply with applicable laws governing the containment, collection, storage and disposal of


waste material generated during this project.

C. Existing paint being removed contains lead. The CONTRACTOR shall bear all

responsibility to assure that workers take proper safety precautions when working in a lead

abatement environment.

D. All equipment shall be parked on ground covers free of cuts, tears or holes to prevent

contamination of pavement or soil and to protect area under and around equipment.

E. Containment Enclosure

1. The CONTRACTOR shall erect an enclosure to completely surround (around and

under) the blasting, priming and coating operations. The ground cannot be used as the

bottom of the enclosure unless completely covered with suitable containment material

that retains 100% of the residue.

2. The enclosure shall be constructed of flexible materials such as containment screens

(specifically designed for this purpose). The floor may be containment screening or of

rigid materials such as overlapping plywood fastened in place.

3. All materials shall be maintained free of tears, cuts or holes.

4. All seams shall be overlapped a minimum of 6" and fastened together at 12" centers, or

fastened and overlapped in a manner that insures a seal which does not allow openings

between the screens in the containment.

5. The sides of the enclosure shall extend past the top of and enclose the structure.

6. Design and operation of the containment enclosure shall be equal to the TEPE system.

7. A top bonnet is required to contain dust, debris and coating materials being removed.

F. Debris Collection

1. All debris collected by this operation, removed from equipment or filters, or that has

fallen to the ground shall be collected and stored at the site for testing, evaluation and

ultimately disposal.

2. If not practical, an alternate storage location shall be mutually agreed upon by the

CITY and CONTRACTOR.

3. A centralized cleaning station for recyclable steel grit (if used) shall be set up at a

location mutually agreed upon by the CITY and CONTRACTOR.

4. Storage shall be in covered steel containers. Containers shall be parked, secured and

stored on wooden 6" x 6" timbers so containers are not in contact with the ground.

G. Chain of Custody

1. Follow all local, state and federal regulations.

2. A Chain of Custody Form must also accompany all composite samples.

a. Included in this document shall be the name of the person taking the sample, the

Company for which he works, the date and time which the sample was taken, the

tank from which it was taken, the Township and Municipality where the tank is


located and signatures of all persons involved in the Chain of Custody, including

dates possessed and relinquished.

H. Hazardous Waste

1. If the tests reveal that the maximum concentration of TCLP lead exceeds 5.0

milligrams per liter, the waste shall be treated as a hazardous waste per RCRA and the

steel containers shall be labeled as a hazardous waste.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall abide by all local, state and federal regulations as they

pertain to hazardous waste.

3. All containers of waste material which have been classified as hazardous shall be

stored in a secured location until proper disposal.

4. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for hauling, disposal, and payment of all hazardous

waste.

5. All hazardous waste shall be disposed of after the CITY has obtained a generator

number from the state regulatory authority.

6. All hazardous waste shall be disposed of within 60 days after it is generated.

a. Any fines or liens accessed by any governmental agency which has jurisdiction

over the disposal of this material shall be the responsibility of the

CONTRACTOR.

b. The hauling and disposal shall be by a firm licensed by U.S. EPA and who shall

also be responsible for providing the Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest.

7. The CONTRACTOR shall decontaminate or dispose of all collection/containment

equipment in accordance with EPA guidelines.

8. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and provide the CITY with a receipt documenting

disposal of waste material at the approved landfill.


the quantity of material disposed.

I. Non-Hazardous Solid Waste.

1. If the waste is determined to be non-hazardous as verified by test results which have

been reviewed by the CITY, it shall be hauled and disposed of at a facility which is

licensed to accept “special” non-hazardous solid waste.

2. Prior to disposal of any material, the CONTRACTOR shall submit the test results and

the name and address of the proposed disposal facility to the CITY for approval.


disposal of waste material at the approved landfill.


the quantity of material disposed.

3.06 WELD AND METAL SURFACE REPAIR


A. General

1. The CONTRACTOR shall repair all surfaces, especially pits, welds, and edges so that

the surfaces are smoothly contoured and will not compromise the integrity or adhesion

of the coating systems.

2. Remove all new or existing weld splatter, slivers, flux deposits, unevenness, sharp

projections, etc., by a systematic and uniform method by grinding or power sanding in

accordance with SSPC-SP3 to smooth welds to enhance adhesion of the coating.

Welds shall comply with NACE RPO 178 butt and fillet weld designation "C".

Designation of other weld types shall be approved by the CITY.

3. Fill all weld holes, voids and sharp indentations with additional weld material, and

grind the surface smooth.

4. Welds which are specified to be continuous shall be truly continuous, and skip, tack or

stitch welding techniques will not be permitted.

5. All weld area imperfections shall be corrected prior to abrasive blasting.

6. Steel plate areas without welds shall be equal to NACE No. 1, flush and smooth.

7. If imperfections are discovered after abrasive blasting, they shall be corrected and re-

blasted prior to coating application.

B. Pit and Seam Repairs

1. Repair of pitting and weld seam repairs shall be in accordance with AWS Guidelines.

a. The CITY shall designate areas to be repaired upon completion of pre-cleaning and

abrasive blasting, but prior to application of primer.

b. Pits with a depth greater than 25 mils and less than 125 mils require the specified

surface preparation and application of epoxy filler followed by application of a

stripe coat and finishing.

c. Pits deeper than 125 mils shall be repaired by welding in accordance with AWWA,

API and AWS.

d. Pits in clusters greater than 6 inches in diameter shall be plated over with 0.250

inch steel plate and seal welded to surface prior to surface preparation and coating

application. Removal of splatter and radiused welds and edges shall be included.

2. Seam welding, pit welding or plating as required shall be included in the unit pricing

stated on the bid form.

3.07 FILLERS AND SEALANTS

A. Apply sealants, seam fillers and epoxy fillers in accordance with the coating

manufacturer’s written instructions when in immersion, wet atmosphere, high

condensation, or atmospheric exposures.

B. Provide sealant in the following types of joints:

1. Interior and exterior metal to metal joints or connections that are not continuous or seal

welded (skip welds).


2. Exterior metal to concrete joints including the wet riser and base plates to the concrete

footers.

3. Dissimilar metal joints or connections.

4. Dissimilar material joints or connections.

C. Inspect the surfaces to be sealed or filled and notify the CITY of any detrimental

conditions.

D. Surface Preparation:

1. Clean surfaces immediately before sealant installation.

2. Remove dirt, moisture and contamination which would interfere with adhesive bonds.

3. Prepare metal and concrete joints by abrasive blasting.

4. Clean joints by pressurized air blow down with oil- free, moisture-free compressed air.

E. Apply primer to all joint surfaces required by the sealant manufacturer.

1. Allow primer to dry prior to application of sealant.

2. Protect adjoining surfaces from spillage or migration of primer.

3. Apply masking tape to create clean, sharp edges prior to primer.

F. Install in accordance with sealant and filler manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Thoroughly power-mix the sealant and filler components in accordance with the

manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Add entire contents of activator and base. No mixing of partial units is permitted.

3. Continue mixing components at 300 rpm or less for a minimum of 5 minutes and until

thoroughly mixed as determined by the QAR.

G. Install backer rod or bond breaker tape as required by the sealant manufacturer’s joint

design.

H. Install sealants and fillers as recommended and to depths recommended by the

manufacturer.

1. Employ techniques which will ensure that sealants and fillers will be deposited in

uniform, continuous ribbons or beads without gaps or air pockets. Ensure complete

“wetting” of joint bond surfaces.

2. Fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface.

3. Joints between horizontal and vertical surfaces shall be filled to form a slight cove so

that joint does not trap moisture and dirt.

4. Remove excess and spillage of compounds promptly as the work progresses.

5. Cure sealants and fillers in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and


surface durability.

6. Leave all finish work in a neat and clean condition.

3.08 PREPARATION AND MIXING OF COATING MATERIALS

A. Mix coating material only in containers which have been placed in suitably sized non-

ferrous (plastic) or new metal containers. Protect concrete and the ground from splashes or

spills during mixing of coating materials. Mix and store open containers and thinner on

absorbent drop cloths or tarps over reinforced 6 mil polyethylene.

B. Mix coating and lining materials only from properly stored containers bearing accurate

product name and batch numbers of material being mixed or applied.

C. Coating material which has livered, gelled, or otherwise deteriorated during storage shall

not be used; however, thixotropic materials which must be stirred to obtain normal

consistency are acceptable.

D. Coating products with more than one component or part shall have each separate part

thoroughly mixed prior to combining, mixing, and allowing for induction of the combined

coating. Where several units of the finish materials are prepared for application at the

same time, "boxing" of the several units is required.

E. All stirring, mixing, boxing and induction shall be witnessed by the Quality Assurance

Representative and documented. Coating mixes not inspected and documented will not be

approved for application.

F. All coating materials shall be thoroughly mixed using a power mixer for sufficient time to

thoroughly blend all components.

1. Mixers shall be kept clean and free of dried or hardened coating and/or lining

materials. Build-up of dried coating shall be removed prior to use.

G. Only thinners specified by the coating manufacturer shall be used. Thinning directions

furnished by the coating manufacturer shall be strictly followed.

1. Adjust coating or lining material to the proper viscosity at ambient temperature and

humidity in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Thinning must be done at the initiation of roller, brush or spray application.

3. Thinning of materials well into the pot life is strictly prohibited.

4. Thinning in excess of VOC limits NSF or UL guidelines for interior lining material is

strictly prohibited.

H. Coating materials requiring the addition of a catalyst shall have the pot life clearly stated

on the label. The pot life must be shown for the humidity and temperature ranges

allowable under these specifications and shall not be exceeded. When the pot life limit is

reached, the coating application container must be emptied, the material discarded, the

equipment cleaned and new material mixed and/or inducted. Mixing of partial units of two

component materials is strictly prohibited.

I. Following induction, remix all materials before application to produce a mixture of


uniform density. Mix as required during the application of the materials to maintain a

uniform density.

J. Do not stir any residue into newly mixed coating material.

K. Coatings containing heavy or metallic pigments such as zinc primers that have a tendency

to settle must be kept in suspension by a continuous agitating device.

L. Powdered zinc components shall be screened (sieved) through a 60 mesh hardware cloth.

Material not passing the screen shall be discarded.

M. Mixed and inducted coating materials shall be strained prior to application. The coating

manufacturer's recommended strainer size shall be used. Strainers shall be submitted for

approval by the CITY. The coating manufacturer's detailed mixing and application

instructions shall be followed.

N. Store materials in use in covered containers. Maintain all containers used in the storage,

mixing, and application of coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials, dust and

residue.

O. Mixed coatings shall be covered during induction and during use to the greatest extent

possible.

P. Empty containers shall be stored until inventoried and approved for removal and disposal

by the CITY.

3.09 APPLICATION OF COATING AND LINING MATERIALS TO IMMERSED AND SPLASH

ZONE SUBSTRATES

A. General

1. Unless otherwise noted in painting schedule, all materials and work which are

customarily painted shall be painted with one prime coat and two finished coats of the

appropriate paint on unpainted surfaces. In case of shop coated surfaces, before

application of first field coat, abraded areas of the shop coat on metal surfaces shall be

touched up with the paint of the same type as the shop coat, even to the extent of


not considered as the first field coat. The touched up surface shall then be painted with

two finish coats of the appropriate paint unless otherwise noted in the painting

schedule.

2. Any surface to be coated shall be dust-free prior to the application of coating material.

This shall be accomplished using oil-free, moisture-free, blowdown air followed by

commercial vacuum cleaning.

3. Neatly draw all color and break lines when required.

4. Stripe coat all edges, corners, crevices, welds, rivets and bolts by brush application.

Ferrous metal shall be striped with the primer material prior to application of the

complete prime coat. There is no acceptable alternate or substitute for brush applied

striping. All striping shall extend approximately 1" from the edge, corner, weld, bolt

or crevice. Striping material may be thinned to a maximum of 25%.


5. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Drying and

curing of each coat and the entire coating system shall strictly follow the requirements

of the coating manufacturer.

6. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the

final coat of paint, until the film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Insure that

all surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds and exposed fasteners receive

film thickness equivalent to that required on flat surfaces.

7. Mechanical Applicators: Use of mechanical methods (such as airless rollers or pump

rollers) for paint application shall be used only when specifically approved by the

CITY.


1. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for all ventilation, heating, electrical and plumbing

requirements and connections.

a. All electrical connections between the power source and equipment shall be

furnished by CONTRACTOR.

b. Before placement or operation of any ventilation equipment, a site plan shall be

submitted to and approved by the CITY showing the location and the description

of all ventilation equipment and power sources including propane tanks if used.

2. The total ventilation system should include auxiliary blowers, heaters and/or dust

collectors as the CONTRACTOR or the CITY deems necessary to provide adequate

ventilation and nuisance dust control. The ventilation system must also provide

adequate air movement and displacement to maintain solvent vapor levels below ten

percent (10%) of LEL.

3. When dehumidification is specified the ventilation and heating system shall control

humidity to a relative humidity of 40 percent or less and add a minimum of 1,000,000

BTU/Hr of auxiliary heat when required.

3.10 APPLICATION OF EXTERIOR AND ATMOSPHERICALLY EXPOSED COATING

A. General

1. Unless otherwise noted in the painting schedule, all materials and work which are

customarily painted shall be painted with one prime coat and two finished coats of the

appropriate paint on unpainted surfaces. In case of shop coated surfaces, before

application of first field coat, abraded areas of the shop coat on metal surfaces shall be

touched up with the paint of the same type as the shop coat, even to the extent of


not considered as the first field coat. The touched up surface shall then be painted with

two finished coats of the appropriate paint unless otherwise noted in the painting

schedule.

2. Any surface to be coated shall be rendered dust-free prior to the application of coating

material. This shall be accomplished using oil-free, moisture-free, blowdown air.

3. Apply coating materials by brush, roller or spray in strict accordance with the

manufacturer's detailed instructions and recommendations of Paint Application


Specifications No. 1 in SSPC Vol. 2, where applicable. Use brushes rollers or spray

application systems best suited for the type of material being applied. Application

shall be verified for the most desirable finish.

4. Exterior precleaned and power tool cleaned or blast-cleaned surfaces shall be coated

with the products specified within 4 hours of completion of surface preparation (or

shorter time limits as may be required by the environmental conditions). However,

initial or prime coating of such surfaces shall always be accomplished prior to the end

of the workday and 4 hours prior to the substrate going into dew point conditions.

Materials subject to weathering shall be prime coated as quickly as possible. Surfaces

of exposed members that will be inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and

painted before erection.

5. The total paint film thickness required is the same regardless of the application

method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has dried, and has been

inspected and approved.

6. Apply each material at not less than the coating manufacturer's recommended

spreading rate and provide the total dry film thickness specified in Schedule 09940-2.

Apply additional coats, if required, to obtain the specified dry film thickness of each

coat and total dry film thickness.

7. Application shall be by qualified applicators. Applicators shall frequently check wet

film thickness (WFT) with approved gauges. The gauges shall be Nordson, SGP or an

approved machined gage.

8. Brush-out and work all brush coats into the surfaces to provide an even film.

Undercoats shall be thoroughly and uniformly sanded with No. 00 sandpaper or equal

to remove defects. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, dry

spray, dry overspray or other surface imperfection will not be acceptable.

9. Neatly draw all color and break lines.

10. Stripe Coat all edges, corners, crevices, welds, rivets, and bolts by brush application.

Ferrous metal shall be striped with the primer or intermediate coat material prior to

application of the complete prime or intermediate coat. There is no acceptable

alternate or substitute for brush applied striping. All striping shall extend a minimum

of one inch from the edge, corner, weld, bolt or crevice. Striping material may be

thinned to a maximum of 25% or less when so indicated by the Coating Manufacturer's

product data or detailed instructions.

11. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Drying and

curing of each coat and the entire coating system shall strictly follow the requirements

of the coating manufacturer.

12. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through the

final coat of paint, until the film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Insure that

all surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds and exposed fasteners receive

film thickness equivalent to that required on flat surfaces.

13. Mechanical Applicators: Use of mechanical methods (such as airless rollers or pump

rollers) for paint application shall be used only when specifically approved by the

specifier.



1. Apply water-base paints only when temperatures of the surface to be coated and the

surrounding air temperature are in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations

but in no case less than 60oF.

2. Apply coatings and linings other than water-based materials only when the temperature

of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations but in no case less than 60oF for conventional

products and 40oF for temperature tolerant products.

3. Do not apply paint, coatings or linings to surfaces which have temperatures that are

less than 5oF above the dew point.

3.11 TECHNICAL SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE (TSR)

A. Responsibility

1. On a weekly basis during surface preparation, coating and lining work, the Coating

Manufacturer's Technical service representative shall visit the site on a scheduled basis

to advise on suitability of surface preparation, materials, installation and finishing

techniques. The weekly visit shall include a memorandum to the CITY, which

summarizes the Representative's findings and recommendations.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a TSR specializing in the application of plural

component; heated linings during mobilization, set up and application of plural

component elastomeric polyurethane.

3.12 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE - QUALITY ASSURANCE REPRESENTATIVE

A. The CITY intends for a Quality Assurance Representative (QAR) to monitor the

CONTRACTOR's work. An outline of the entire inspection and quality control process is

given below. Some items are the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and some are the

responsibility of the QAR, as listed below. Costs for full compliance and cooperation with

all inspection steps shall be included in the Contract Price.

B. Accessibility to work shall be arranged by the CONTRACTOR. The necessary rigging and

hoisting shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR to make all areas of work available to

the QAR for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall make every reasonable attempt to

accommodate the QAR in the performance of the tests involved. The CONTRACTOR

shall also have the applicator or superintendent available to interface with and assist with

the inspection process.

C. The QAR shall not allow coating or lining work over oil, dirt, rust, rust scale, mill scale,

grease, moisture, or other contaminants detrimental to the formation and adhesion of a

durable coating film or lining.

D. The QAR shall not allow coating over previous coats that have not sufficiently dried or

that have exceeded the re-coat window as defined by the coating manufacturer's product

data.

E. Quality Assurance/Quality Control shall conform to the NACE International Coating

Inspectors Program.


F. Coating Inspection Logs shall be completed as part of the coating work.

G. Quality Assurance/Quality Control inspection shall include the following Hold Points for

the CONTRACTOR. Coating and lining work may not proceed until conditions are

checked and approved by the QAR at each Hold Point, including environmental and

ambient conditions.

1. Hold Point 1: Following Precleaning

2. Hold Point 2: Prior to Abrasive Blast Cleaning

3. Hold Point 3: Following Abrasive Blast Cleaning

4. Hold Point 4: Prior to Prime Coat

5. Hold Point 5: Prior to Intermediate Coat (or prior to each coat)

6. Hold Point 6: Prior to Sealant Application

7. Hold Point 7: Prior to Final Coat

H. Inspection includes but is not limited to the following:

1. Pre-Surface Preparation:

a. Emulsified high pressure cleaning, removal of the residual emulsion followed by

pressure rinsing three or more times for protective coating and lining work.

Emulsion cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP1.

b. Emulsified cleaning, power scrubbing, and rinsing for interior work as specified.

c. Surface neutrality.

d. Chlorides.

e. Ferrous salts.

2. Ambient Conditions:

a. Psychrometer.

b. Humidity.

c. Dew point.

d. Surface temperature.

e. Ambient temperature.

f. Wind speed.

g. Wind direction.

h. Maximum/minimum substrate temperature.

i. Maximum/minimum material storage area temperature.

3. Surface Preparation - Abrasive Blasting:

a. Blotter test.

b. Nozzle bore/nozzle aperture.

c. Nozzle pressure.

d. Correct Abrasive Submitted:

1) Shop drawing submittal, abrasive sample verified with materials delivered.


2) Mesh size.

3) Abrasive Vial Test.

e. NACE surface preparation visual comparison standards.

f. Visual comparison to the sample work piece.

g. Anchor pattern by testex tape.

h. Cellophane tape cleanliness verification of all cleaned surfaces.

i. Protective gloves, clothing and shoe covering worn by all individuals entering the

prepared and coated storage tanks.

4. Weld Grinding: NACE visual comparison standards RPO 178.

5. Coating Applications:

a. Ambient conditions as specified above.

b. Coating verification is compared with specifications and submittals.

c. Coating container numbers.

d. Coating batch numbers.

e. Coating mixing.

f. Coating induction time.

g. Coating temperature.

h. Moisture in porous substrates.

i. Coating application equipment.

j. Approval of substrate for coating.

k. Duration between power washing, rinsing and coating application.

l. Coating application.

m. Wet Film Thickness (WFT) (sample work piece, calibration work provided by

CONTRACTOR).

n. Wet Film thickness of actual application.

o. Coating dryness.

p. Coating cure.

q. Dry Film Thickness (DFT) of the work piece in accordance with SSPC PA-2.

r. Suitability for additional coat/coats.

s. Progressive total DFT.

6. Completed Work:

a. Final Cure: A satisfactory degree of cure is determined by solvent sensitivity

testing and other recommendations of the coating/lining manufacturer. Thick film

cure is determined by impression hardness.

b. Coating and lining cure verified.

c. Low voltage holiday detection.

d. High voltage holiday detection.

e. Adhesion testing if required by CITY. Repairs of damage by adhesion or other

testing is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and shall be completed at no

additional cost to the CITY.


f. Total DFT in accordance with specifications.

g. Correct imperfections including but not limited to the following:

1) Pinholes/holidays/voids.

2) Overspray.

3) DFT too thin or thick.

4) Defects cited.

h. Thorough clean up completed.

i. Punch list including touch up or final repairs completed.

j. Documentation completed.

7. Final:

a. Confirm completion of all punch list items.

b. Confirm corrections, repairs, and clean up is completed.

c. Verify compliance with the specifications.

I. Defects. All defects found during inspections shall be corrected by the CONTRACTOR at

no additional cost to the CITY.

3.13 CLEANUP

A. During the progress of Work, remove from the work site and work areas all discarded

materials, abrasive bags, rubbish and rags at the end of each work day. This material may

be stored in a covered container (dumpster) for removal weekly or at the frequency

required to keep the site clean, neat and orderly.

B. Proper containment, removal and disposal of coatings, linings paints and thinners are the

CONTRACTOR's responsibility. Paint spots, oil or stains upon adjacent surfaces shall be

removed. Any damage to work of other trades or equipment caused from painting shall be

made good at no expense to the CITY.


of 6

COATING INSPECTION LOG LOG NO. FACILITY . CONTRACT NO. EQUIPMENT . COATING SPEC NO. LOCATION . DATES THROUGH . SUBSTRATE MATL . CONTRACTOR INSPECTOR/S . JOB SHOP NAME . ADDRESS . PHONE FAX . RESPONSIBLE SUPERVISOR . PRE-SURFACE PREPARATION INDOORS OUTDOORS . DATE TIME . MATERIALS USED . REMOVAL OF OIL , GREASE , DIRT , DUST , CORROSION . WELD SPATTER REMOVED & ACCEPTABLE: YES NO . METHOD SSPC-SP . WELD PREPARATION COMPLIES WITH NACE RD0178-89: YES NO . PREPARATION ACCEPTABLE: YES NO INSPECTOR . COMMENTS . SURFACE PREPARATION INDOORS OUTDOORS . DATE TIME . SURFACE PREPARATION SPEC . ABRASIVES USED . DRY BULB TEMP OF WET BULB TEMP OF RELATIVE HUMIDITY % DEW POINT . ABRASIVE BLASTING NOZZLE TYPE MFG . NOZZLE MEASUREMENT PRESSURE AT NOZZLE . BLOTTER TEST APPROVED: YES NO . ABRASIVE MFG . ABRASIVE AS SPECIFIED:YES NO . ABRASIVE SIZE . VIAL TEST APPROVED YES NO .

of 6

Anchor Pattern

Acceptable

Specified Anchor

Pattern to .

Abrasive Blasting

Min

Max

Yes

No

Comments

SSPC-SP

VIS

NACE

VIS

WELD SPATTER REMOVED AND ACCEPTABLE YES NO . METHOD SSPC-SP . WELD PREPARATION COMPLIES WITH NACE RP0178-89 YES NO . SURFACE PREPARATION ACCEPTABLE YES NO . INSPECTOR . COMMENTS:

of 6

FIRST (BASE) OR PRIME COAT

INDOORS OUTDOORS . COATING MFG NAME AND PRODUCT DESCRIPTION . COATING MFG DATE SHIPPING DATE STORAGE DATE . BATCH NO. COLOR . INDUCTION REQUIRED . APPLICATION METHOD . APPLICATION EQUIPMENT INSPECTED AND APPROVED YES NO . DATE TIME HOURS SINCE SURF. PREP. . DRY BULB TEMP OF WET BULB TEMP OF RELATIVE HUMIDITY % SUBSTRATE TEMP OF DEW POINT . SURFACE DRY YES NO . CLEAN YES NO . REMOVAL OF OIL , GREASE , DIRT , DUST , CORROSION . APPROVAL OF SUBSTRATE FOR COATING YES NO . INSPECTOR . 1ST COAT MATERIALS . OBSERVED MIXING YES NO . THINNER ADDED YES NO . TYPE OF THINNER AMOUNT ADDED . OZ/GAL % TEMP OF COATING OF INDUCTION TIME MIN POT LIFE HRS-MIN MIXING APPROVED YES NO . WFT TO MILS INSPECTOR . COMMENTS . DATE TIME DFT TO . ACCEPTABLE YES NO . RUNS, SAGS, BLISTERS, BUBBLES, CURTAINS, CRATERING, MUD CRACKING, ALLIGATORING, FISH EYES; VARIATIONS IN COLOR, GLOSS AND TEXTURE; EXCESSIVE FILM BUILD; FOREIGN CONTAMINANTS; AND DRY OVERSPRAY; OR OTHER DEFECTS YES NO . DEFECTS CORRECTED YES NO . INSPECTOR . COMMENTS .

of 6

SECOND (INTERMEDIATE) COAT INDOORS OUTDOORS . COATING MFG NAME AND PRODUCT DESCRIPTION . COATING MFG DATE SHIPPING DATE STORAGE DATE . BATCH NO. COLOR . INDUCTION REQUIRED . APPLICATION METHOD . APPLICATION EQUIPMENT INSPECTED AND APPROVED YES NO . DATE TIME HOURS SINCE SURF. PREP. . DRY BULB TEMP OF WET BULB TEMP OF RELATIVE HUMIDITY % SUBSTRATE TEMP OF DEW POINT . SURFACE DRY YES NO . CLEAN YES NO . REMOVAL OF OIL , GREASE , DIRT , DUST , CORROSION . APPROVAL OF SUBSTRATE FOR COATING YES NO . INSPECTOR . 2ND COAT MATERIALS . OBSERVED MIXING YES NO . THINNER ADDED YES NO . TYPE OF THINNER AMOUNT ADDED . OZ/GAL % TEMP OF COATING OF INDUCTION TIME MIN POT LIFE HRS-MIN MIXING APPROVED YES NO . WFT TO MILS INSPECTOR . COMMENTS . DATE TIME DFT TO . ACCEPTABLE YES NO . RUNS, SAGS, BLISTERS, BUBBLES, CURTAINS, CRATERING, MUD CRACKING, ALLIGATORING, FISH EYES; VARIATIONS IN COLOR, GLOSS AND TEXTURE; EXCESSIVE FILM BUILD; FOREIGN CONTAMINANTS; AND DRY OVERSPRAY; OR OTHER DEFECTS YES NO . DEFECTS CORRECTED YES NO . INSPECTOR . COMMENTS .

of 6

THIRD (FINISH) COAT INDOORS OUTDOORS . COATING MFG NAME AND PRODUCT DESCRIPTION . COATING MFG DATE SHIPPING DATE STORAGE DATE . BATCH NO. COLOR . INDUCTION REQUIRED . APPLICATION METHOD . APPLICATION EQUIPMENT INSPECTED AND APPROVED YES NO . DATE TIME HOURS SINCE SURF. PREP. . DRY BULB TEMP OF WET BULB TEMP OF RELATIVE HUMIDITY % SUBSTRATE TEMP OF DEW POINT . SURFACE DRY YES NO . CLEAN YES NO . REMOVAL OF OIL , GREASE , DIRT , DUST , CORROSION . APPROVAL OF SUBSTRATE FOR COATING YES NO . INSPECTOR . 3RD COAT MATERIALS . OBSERVED MIXING YES NO . THINNER ADDED YES NO . TYPE OF THINNER AMOUNT ADDED . OZ/GAL %

TEMP OF COATING O

F INDUCTION TIME MIN

POT LIFE HRS-MIN . MIXING APPROVED YES NO . WFT TO MILS INSPECTOR . COMMENTS . DATE TIME DFT TO . ACCEPTABLE YES NO . RUNS, SAGS, BLISTERS, BUBBLES, CURTAINS, CRATERING, MUD CRACKING, ALLIGATORING, FISH EYES; VARIATIONS IN COLOR, GLOSS AND TEXTURE; EXCESSIVE FILM BUILD; FOREIGN CONTAMINANTS; AND DRY OVERSPRAY; OR OTHER DEFECTS YES NO . DEFECTS CORRECTED YES NO . INSPECTOR . COMMENTS .

of 6

FINAL INSPECTION DFT SPECIFIED . DFT RANGE TO MIL HOLIDAYS YES NO . OTHER DEFECTS & COMMENTS . RUNS, SAGS, BLISTERS, BUBBLES, CURTAINS, CRATERING, MUD CRACKING, ALLIGATORING, FISH EYES; VARIATIONS IN COLOR, GLOSS AND TEXTURE; EXCESSIVE FILM BUILD; FOREIGN CONTAMINANTS; AND DRY OVERSPRAY; OR OTHER DEFECTS YES NO . DEFECTS CORRECTED YES NO . REPAIR AND TOUCH UP COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NACE STANDARD RF-01-84 ITEM NO. 5305 YES NO . OTHER DEFECTS & COMMENTS . COATING INSPECTOR PROJECT INSPECTOR Signature Date Signature Date

SCHEDULE 09 91 00_1

PAINTING SCHEDULE

Except as otherwise called for in these Specifications, the following surfaces shall be painted in

accordance with the appropriate exposure condition, as called for in the Painting Systems List:

1. NEW SURFACES.

A. Iron and Steel. All exposed, encased, submerged or splash zone iron and

steel surfaces, and buried steel surface.

1. Stainless steel shall be painted only where shown or ordered.

B. Galvanized Steel. All exposed, encased, submerged or splash zone

galvanized surfaces except:

1. Grating and floor plates.

2. For Conduit see H.

C. Copper Pipe. All exposed copper piping except soft temper.

D. Aluminum:

1. Aluminum shall be painted only where shown or ordered.

2. For conduit see H.

E. Concrete and Masonry:

1. Interior: All exposed concrete, precast concrete, concrete brick and

block, including ceilings, beams, columns and walls. Concrete floor

surfaces, equipment bases, and stair treads and risers shall not be

painted, unless noted otherwise.

2. Exterior: All concrete and precast concrete shall not be painted

except as specified and scheduled.

F. Wood. All exposed exterior and interior surfaces.

G. Plastics. All exposed plastic and fiberglass pipe, fittings, valves, tanks and

equipment, except as noted. Do not paint submerged plastic surfaces.

H. Electrical Conduit:

1. Interior: No painting required.

2. Exterior:

a. Galvanized - Paint with appropriate system.

b. Aluminum - Paint only where shown or ordered.

I. Stainless Steel Insulation Jacket. Do not paint except bands and legend.

J. Pipe Insulation. All exposed nonmetallic surfaces.

K. Gypsum Walls and Ceilings. All exposed.

L. All interior walls and ceilings shall be painted white, unless otherwise

directed. (Sherwin-Williams "Pure White", or approved equal.)

M. All pumps and equipment shall be painted to match system color code, unless

otherwise directed.

2. EXISTING SURFACES. Existing surfaces shall be prepared and painted the same as

new surfaces, unless otherwise noted. The Technical Service Representative shall

approve the surface preparation prior to proceeding with the coating work.

3. SCHEDULE. The following are surfaces which shall be painted in accordance with

these specifications (09 91 00 Protective Coatings) and the room finish schedule

indicated on the drawings.

02 Screenings Building

Surface Description Substrate

Material

Surface

Preparation

Surface Finish

Screenings Building Walls (Exterior Wall) CONC CL HPWR

Screenings Building Walls (Exterior Wall) IMP Factory

#101 Dumpster Room (Interior Wall & Floor) CONC CL HB-1

#102 Storage (Interior Wall & Floor) CONC CL HPWR

#201 Classifier Room (Walls) CONC/IMP CL/-- HPWR/Factory

#201 Classifier Room (Floor) CONC -- EP-2

#301 Screenings Building (Walls) IMP -- Factory

#301 Screenings Building (Floor) CONC/FRP CL EP-2/Factory

Hand Rails/Guard Rails Aluminum -- --

Pump and Motor Casing Iron SP 5 F-3

Valves Iron SP 5 F-3

Influent Line DI SP 5 F-3

Effluent Drains DI SP 5 F-3

08 Operations Building

Surface Description Substrate

Material

Surface

Preparation

Surface Finish

Operations Bldg (Exterior Wall) IMP Factpru

#101 Control Room Drywall PT

#102 Unisex Toilet Room Blueboard PT

#103 Water Heater Closet Drywall PT

Operations Bldg (Floor) #101, #102, #103 Conc/Vinyl Factory/Wax

Refer to Schedule 09 91 00_2, Painting Systems List, for process piping, equipment, and other

surfaces not specifically listed herein for surface preparation and finishes.

SCHEDULE LEGEND

BO BY OTHERS

BR BRICK

CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

CONC CONCRETE

SCFT STRUCTURAL CLAY FACING TILE

CS CONCRETE SEALER

EP-1 EPOXY (SEE SCHED 2 – P-2 & F-1)

EP-2 EPOXY DECK COATING (SLIP RESISTANT)

EXP EXPOSED

F FACTORY FINISH

FC FINISH COMPOUND

IMP INSULATED METAL PANEL

PCM SURFACE PREP PER COATING MANUFACTURER

PT PAINT (SEE SCHED 2 – P-8 & F-10)

RES RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

RB RESILIENT WALL BASE

RD METAL ROOF DECK

VHB VERY HIGH BUILD COATING

HB-1 HIGH BUILD COATING – STEEL

HB-2 HIGH BUILD COATING – CONCRETE

HPWR HIGH PERFORMANCE WATER REPELLENT

CL WASH-DOWN CLEAN & REPAIR EXISTING MATERIALS

4. SURFACES NOT PAINTED.

A. The following surfaces shall NOT be painted:

1. Equipment nameplates.

2. Stainless steel.

3. Factory finish equipment except as otherwise noted and scheduled.

4. Interior conduit.

B. Should any of the above surfaces be painted, the Contractor shall remove the

coating and restore the surface to original condition.

END OF SCHEDULE 09 91 00_1

SCHEDULE 09 91 00_2

PAINTING SYSTEMS LIST

Exposure Description System Surface Prep.

Pre-treatment or Primer/ Dry Mils

Finish Coats/ Dry Mils

Total Dry Mil

Thickness No. 1 No. 2 No.3

IRON & MILD STEEL

A. SUBMERGED

1. Potable S1 SP-5 P-3 / 6 F-1 / 6 F-2 / 8 12

2. Nonpotable(a) S2 SP-5 F-2 / 8 F-2 / 8 19

3. Galvanized SP-1 & SP-7

P-1 / 4-6 P-1 / 4-6 F-3 / 4-6 12-18

B. NOT SUBMERGED

1. New (interior and exterior)

SP-10 P-1 / 3 F-5 / 5 F-3 (gloss) /

2

10

2. Existing (interior and exterior)

SP-11 or SP-10(i)

P-2(b) / 2 F-5(c) / 5 F-3 (gloss) /

2

9

3. Humid or Chemical Exposure (existing or new, interior or exterior only where called for)

SP-10(d) P-5 / 3 F-5 / 5

Mist & Body Coats

F-3 (gloss) /

2

10

4. High Temp – A (150oF -250oF)

SP-10 P-1 / 3 F-5 / 5 F-5 / 5 13

5. High Temp – B (250oF -750oF)

SP-10 - F-7 / 3 F-4 / 1 4


Pre-treatment or Primer/ Dry Mils


Total Dry Mil

Thickness No. 1 No. 2

6. High Temp – C (750oF -1200oF)

SP-10 - F-4 / 1 F-4 / 1 2

7. Encased(e) (in masonry, concrete or insulation)

SP-6 P-1 / 3 F-5 / 4 - 7

8. Galvanized SP-1 & SP-7

P-1 / 4-6 F-5 / 4-6 F-3 (gloss) /

3-5

11-17

9. Exist. Fence SP-12 F-8 / 1-2 F-10 / 2-3

F-10 / 2-3

5-8

STAINLESS STEEL S10 SP-10 P-1(f) / 3-5 F-3(flat) / 2-3

F-3 (gloss) /

2-3

7-11

COPPER (All Exposure)

C1 SP-1 P-1(f) / 3-5 F-3(flat) / 2-3

F-3 (gloss) /

2-3

7-11

ALUMINUM (In contact with dissimilar metals)

A1 Clean F-5 / 4-6 F-5 / 4-6 F-5 / 4-6 12-18

CONCRETE & MASONRY

A. NOT SUBMERGED(g) (New and existing repaint work)

1. Interior, porous

M1 Sec. 3-5 P-4 / 10-12 F-5 / 4-6 F-3 (gloss) /

2-3

16-21

2. Interior, non-porous

Sec. 3-5 F-5 / 3-5 F-3(flat) / 2-3

F-3 (gloss) /

2-3

7-11

3. Exterior, non-porous

Sec. 3-5 F-5 / 3-5 F-3(flat) / 2-3

F-3 (satin) /

2-3

7-11


Pre-treatment


Total Dry Mil

or Primer/ Dry Mils

No. 1 No. 2 Thickness

4. Floors Sec. 3-5 F-11, nonslip(h) 30

WOOD

1. Interior (color) Clean P-7 / 1 F-9 / 3 F-9 / 3 7

2. Exterior (color) Clean P-8 / 2 F-10 / 3 F-10 / 3 7

3. Interior (clear) Clean - V-1 V-2

PLASTICS (including fiberglass)

P1 Clean per mfg. recomm.

- F-5 / 3-5 F-3 (gloss) /

2-3

5-8

INSULATED PIPE

1. Canvas Cover Cement coating under

the pipe item

F-10 / 2-3 F-10 / 2-3

F-10 / 2-3

6-9

2. PVC Jacket Clean per mfg. recomm.

F-10 / 2-3 F-10 / 2-3

F-10 / 2-3

6-9

GYPSUM WALLS D1 Clean as directed

P-1 / 3-5 F-10 / 2-3

F-10 / 2-3

7-11

(a) Includes surfaces buried in ground or exposed to digester gas.

(b) Spot prime bare metal surfaces not covered with existing paint.

(c) Finish coat no. 1 must be fully cured prior to applying finish coat no. 2, otherwise use primer P-1.

(d) Remove all existing coatings to SP-10.

(e) To 250oF.

(f) Surface shall be sandblasted or abraded to create anchor pattern sufficient to insure bonding of primer.

(g) Pinholes shall be filled.

(h) Broadcast silica sand to saturation when coating is wet, minimum 2 applications.

(i) The default surface prep for new and existing iron and steel surfaces shall be to bare metal by either power tool or blasting. Blasting will only be permitted if the work area can be properly isolated to contain the blasting debris without interfering in the facility operation. If the existing surface is in sound condition and cleaning to bare metal is not warranted, Contractor shall submit RFI requesting deviation from specs and proposed surface prep. Such request shall also include a proposed credit to the Owner when less work is involved.

PAINTING SYSTEMS LIST LEGEND

1. SURFACE PREPARATIONS:

Mark Description

SP-1 Solvent Cleaning

SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning

SP-3 Power Tool Cleaning

SP-5 White Metal Blast Cleaning

SP-6 Commercial Blast Cleaning

SP-7 Brush-off Blast Cleaning

SP-8 Pickling

SP-10 Near White Blast Cleaning

SP-11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal

The above surface preparations shall be performed in accordance with the recommendations of the Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC), 40, 24th Street, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222 and in accordance with Sec. 22.4.

2. PRIMERS:

Mark Generic Type Manufacturers

P-1 Polyamide epoxy Carboline: Carboguard 60

Sherwin Williams: Macropoxy 646

Tnemec: Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II

P-2

(Do not use if finish coat is to be F-2, prime

with F-2.)

Epoxy Carboline: Rustbond

Sherwin Williams: Duraplate 235

Tnemec: Series 27 Typoxy

P-3 Polyamide epoxy (potable water)

Carboline: Carboguard 61

Sherwin Williams: Tank Clad HS

Tnemec: Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus

P-4 Block filler Carboline: Sanitile 100

Sherwin Williams: CEMENT PLEX Heavy Duty Block Filler

Tnemec: Series 130 Envirofill

P-5 Inorganic zinc-rich primer

Carboline: Carbo Zinc 11

Sherwin Williams: Zinc Clad II HS

Tnemec: Tnemec-Zinc 90-96

P-7 Enamel Carboline: Sanitile 120

Sherwin Williams: A-100 Exterior Primer

Tnemec: Series 36-603 Undercoater

P-8 Acrylic Carboline : Carbocrylic 3359

Sherwin Williams: DTM Acrylic B66 Series

Tnemec: Series 30 Acrylic

3. FINISH PAINTS:


F-1 Polyamide epoxy (potable water)

Carboline: Carboguard 61

Sherwin Williams: Tank Clad HS

Tnemec: Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus

F-2 Coal tar epoxy Carboline: Bitumastic 300M

Sherwin Williams: Hi Mil Sher Tar Epoxy

Tnemec: Series 46H-413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar

F-3 Aliphatic urethane* with leveling additive**

Carboline: Carbothane 134HG (gloss) / Carbothane 133LH (semigloss)

Sherwin Williams: High Solids Polyurethane

Tnemec: Series 1074 and 1075 Endura-Shield

F-4 Silicone aluminum Carboline: Thermaline 4700

Sherwin Williams: KEM Hi-Temp No. 1500 series

Tnemec: Series 39 Silicone Aluminum

F-5 Polyamide epoxy Carboline: Carboguard 60

Sherwin Williams: Macropoxy 646

Tnemec: Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II

F-6 Silicone Tnemec: Silicone Water Repellent

F-7 Ethyl silicate inorganic zinc

Carboline: Carbo Zinc 11

Sherwin Williams: Zinc Clad II HS

Tnemec: 90 96 Tneme Zinc


F-8 Rust-inhibitive primer

Carboline: Rustbond

F-9 Alkyd enamel Carboline: Carboguard 8215

Sherwin Williams: Industrial Enamel B54 Series

Tnemec: 2H Hi Build Tneme Gloss

F-10 Acrylic

i) Flat Carboline: Carbocrylic 3350

Sherwin Williams: Weather Perfect Acrylic Latex Series B-36

Tnemec: Series 6 Tneme-Cryl

ii) Satin Gloss Carboline : Carbocrylic 3359

Sherwin Williams: DTM Acrylic Coating B66-100

Tnemec: Series 7 Tenem-Cryl SG

F-11 Self-Leveling Epoxy (heavy-duty floor coating)

Sherwin Williams: Armorseal 650SL System (nonslip) including Armorseal Crack Filler, Armorseal 33 Epoxy Primer/Sealer, Armorseal 650 SL). Color: Haze Gray

Carboline: Sanitile 944HB System (non-slip) including Carboguard 510 Crack Filler; Sanitile 900 Primer/Sealer; Sanitile 944HB (colors: Light Gray (Q700), Medium Gray (Q701), Dark Gray,(Q702), Khaki (Q200), Brick Red (Q500), Blue (Q100), Green (Q300), and Beige (Q201))


Alkyd varnish (clear gloss)

Devoe: Glidden Woodmaster Polyurethane Clear Finish High Gloss No. 81

Sherwin Williams: Polyurethane Varnish A67V1

Alkyd varnish (clear satin)

Devoe: Glidden Woodmaster Polyurethane Clear Finish Satin Sheen No. 82

Sherwin Williams: Polyurethane Varnish A67F1

* Aliphatic urethane shall be an aliphatic, polyester/acrylic resin, polyurethane. No epoxy resin based polyurethanes will be acceptable.

** A leveling additive shall be incorporated with this finish coat and the application shall be made in such a manner as to achieve a very smooth, uniform, "automotive" or "wet-look" surface finish. Dull, orange-peel areas will not be acceptable. A sample panel, minimum 2'-0" x 3'-0" flat plate of 3'-0" long by 6" diameter shall be submitted for finish approval prior to finish painting of any surfaces for this contract.


SCHEDULE 09 91 00_3

PIPING COLORS

Painting Color Selection Guide for Piping

System No.

Piping Name Selected Color Legend Equal to Sherwin-Williams Number

1 Ash Slurry Light Blue Ash

2 Centrate Light Gray Centrate SW4026

3 Centrifuge Sludge Feed Dark Brown Cent No X Sl Fd SW4001

4 Chemicals Yellow w/Green Bands (Chemical Name) SW4084/SW4085

5 Chlorine Yellow Chlorine SW4084

6 City Non-Potable Water Orange w/Black Bands City NPW SW4083

7 Compressed Air Green Comp Air SW4085

8 Condensate To match walls, ceilings, etc. w/Black Bands

Condensate -

9 Dewatered Solids Feed Dark Brown DSF

10 Effluent Sample Orange w/White Bands Eff Sample SW4083

11 Exhaust Gas Ref 11920 Sec 2-14-03 EG

12 Fluidizing Air Ref 11920 Sec 2-14-03 FA

13 Fuel Oil Fill Red w/Black Bands Fuel Oil SW4081

14 Fuel Oil Supply Red w/Green Bands FOS SW4081/SW4085


System No.


15 Fuel Oil Return Red w/Brown Bands FOR SW4081/SW4001

16 Influent Sample Dark Gray w/White Bands Inf Sample SW4018

17 Hot Water Return Safety Green Hot Wat Return SW4085

18 Hot Water Supply Safety Yellow Hot Wat Supply SW4084

19 Instrument Air Safety Green with Black Information and Bands

Instr Air SW4085

20

Mixed Thickened Excess Activated Sludge and Thickened Primary Sludge

Dark Brown Mix TPS/TEAS SW4001

21 Natural Gas Red w/White Bands Nat Gas SW4081

22 Non-Potable Water Orange NPW SW4083

23 Odor Control Duct Odor Control

24 Pilot Gas Red w/Brown Bands Pilot Gas SW4081/SW4084

25 Polymer Safety Yellow with Safety Green Information and Bands

Polymer SW4084/4085

26 Potable Water Blue Potable Water SW4079

27 Preheat Air Green PHA


System No.


28 Purge Air Green Green

29 Raw Sewage Dark Gray Raw Sewage SW4018

30 Roof Drains Light Gray Roof Drain SW4026

31 Sanitary Drains Light Gray San Drain SW4026

32 Scum Dark Brown Scum SW4001

33 Scrubber Drain Light Blue SCR Drain

34 Seal Water Orange w/White Bands Seal Water SW4083

35 Settled Sewage Dark Gray Sett Sewage SW4018

36 Sludge Sample Dark Gray with White Bands

Sludge Sample SW4018

37 Sump Pump Discharge Light Gray Sump SW4026

38 Supernatant Dark Gray Supe SW4018

39 Thickened Excess Activated + Thickened Primary Sludge

Dark Brown TEAS/TPS SW4001

40 Vents Aluminum Vent B59S11


System No.


41 Waste Activated Sludge Dark Brown WAS SW4001

42 Waste Mixed Liquor Dark Gray Waste Mix Liquor SW4018


PROJECT MANUAL INDIAN CREEK WWTP RELIABILITY AND ...

Documents

Transcript of PROJECT MANUAL INDIAN CREEK WWTP RELIABILITY AND ...